TWI664454B - Multi-band color vision filters and method by lp-optimization - Google Patents

Multi-band color vision filters and method by lp-optimization Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TWI664454B
TWI664454B TW106123541A TW106123541A TWI664454B TW I664454 B TWI664454 B TW I664454B TW 106123541 A TW106123541 A TW 106123541A TW 106123541 A TW106123541 A TW 106123541A TW I664454 B TWI664454 B TW I664454B
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
filter
color
nanometers
passband
transmittance
Prior art date
Application number
TW106123541A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Other versions
TW201734512A (en
Inventor
W 史密德安德魯
M 穆佛森唐納德
Original Assignee
美商英克羅馬公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 美商英克羅馬公司 filed Critical 美商英克羅馬公司
Publication of TW201734512A publication Critical patent/TW201734512A/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TWI664454B publication Critical patent/TWI664454B/en

Links

Landscapes

  • Eyeglasses (AREA)
  • Optical Filters (AREA)
  • Color Television Image Signal Generators (AREA)

Abstract

本發明大體上係關於:光學濾光器,其對人類視覺提供光之色彩外觀之色度態樣及發光態樣之調節及/或增強;此等光學濾光器之治療應用;此等光學濾光器在被併入於例如防輻射眼鏡中之工業及安全應用;設計此等光學濾光器之方法;製造此等光學濾光器之方法;及將此等光學濾光器併入至包含例如眼鏡及照明體之裝置中之設計及方法。The present invention relates generally to: optical filters that adjust and / or enhance the chromaticity and luminous aspects of the color appearance of light provided by human vision; the therapeutic applications of these optical filters; such optical Filters are used in industrial and safety applications that are incorporated into, for example, radiation protection glasses; methods of designing such optical filters; methods of manufacturing such optical filters; and incorporating such optical filters into Designs and methods in devices including, for example, eyeglasses and luminaires.

Description

多頻帶色覺濾光器及使用線性規劃最佳化之方法Multi-band color vision filter and optimization method using linear programming

本發明大體上係關於:光學濾光器,其對人類視覺提供光之色彩外觀之色度態樣及發光態樣之調節及/或增強;此等光學濾光器之應用;此等光學濾光器在眼用透鏡中之應用;此等光學濾光器之治療應用;此等光學濾光器在併入於例如防輻射眼鏡中之工業及安全應用;設計此等光學濾光器之方法;製造此等光學濾光器之方法;及將此等光學濾光器併入至包含例如眼鏡及照明體之裝置中之設計及方法。The present invention relates generally to: optical filters that adjust and / or enhance the chromaticity and luminous aspects of the color appearance of light provided by human vision; applications of such optical filters; Use of optical filters in ophthalmic lenses; therapeutic applications of these optical filters; industrial and safety applications of these optical filters in, for example, radiation protection glasses; methods of designing such optical filters A method of manufacturing such optical filters; and a design and method of incorporating such optical filters into a device including, for example, eyeglasses and a lighting body.

作用於光源或光接收器之具有波長選擇傳輸之光學濾光器可變換色彩外觀之態樣。改良色覺之光學濾光器可對具有色覺缺陷之人提供治療效果。光學濾光器可使眼睛免受紫外線光譜、可見光譜及/或紅外線光譜之高能輻射。併入光學濾光器之裝置包含眼鏡、視窗及照明體。An optical filter with wavelength selective transmission acting on a light source or light receiver can change the appearance of colors. Optical filters with improved color vision can provide a therapeutic effect to people with color vision defects. Optical filters protect the eyes from high-energy radiation in the ultraviolet, visible, and / or infrared spectrum. A device incorporating an optical filter includes glasses, a window, and a lighting body.

本文揭示一種用於設計光學濾光器之濾光器生產方法,該光學濾光器例如對相對於人類色彩感知之色彩外觀提供增強及/或調節。由該方法生產之光學濾光器設計可用作為用於藉由例如將多層之介電材料物理氣相沈積至一光學基板上而製造該等光學濾光器作為例如干涉濾波器之製造規格基礎。干涉濾光器可進一步包括具吸收性之金屬材料層。例如,可藉由物理氣相沈積而製造此等金屬衰減塗層。該光學基板可為透明的或可併入吸收性、光致變色或偏振過濾材料,其中藉由使該基板摻雜有此等材料、將此等材料層壓於多個基板之間或將此等材料塗覆於該基板之一或兩側上而達成該併入。可例如藉由併入適當抗反射濾光器而使總成內及總成外兩者之邊界表面折射率匹配以減少傳輸損耗且大體上改良經組裝濾光器之光學品質。該等濾光器可例如併入至眼鏡(例如目鏡、太陽鏡、眼罩、單片眼鏡、安全眼鏡、隱形眼鏡或任何其他適合眼用透鏡)中,或可併入至照明體(例如燈總成)中。一眼用透鏡為供眼睛使用之一透鏡。一眼用透鏡可對眼睛提供光學(聚焦)校正,或其可具有零屈光度且不提供此校正。目鏡(例如太陽鏡)及隱形眼鏡為眼用透鏡之實例。 在一態樣中,一種用於設計以一所要方式影響色覺之一光學濾光器之電腦實施方法包括使用一電腦來解算由如下表達式給出之一線性程式: 最小化cT x, 遭受Ax≤b之約束,及 遭受1≥x≥0之約束; 其中,在此方法中,解算向量x之線性程式且以波長為函數之濾光器之透射率由如下表達式計算: 假定,及 假定p,則,及; 其中,在此方法中,f為設計光學濾光器,為以波長λ為函數之f之透射率,E為基本濾光器之一矩陣使得矩陣ei 之行為以每基本濾光器之波長為函數之光之透射率,及基本濾光器之數目為N。定義之表達式為基本濾光器之一加權求和,其中加權係數為對應元素xi。加權和等於基本濾光器矩陣E與線性程式解向量x之間之矩陣向量乘積表達式q=Ex。此外,藉由以波長為函數之第一濾光器q與第二濾光器p之乘法而表示兩個光學濾光器之組合系列,其中為以波長λ為函數之p之透射率,且p在本發明中一般亦被稱為一「預濾光器」,但一般可依任何順序組成分量濾光器。線性程式約束1≥x≥0等效於約束1≥xi ≥0,其中i介於1至N之間。此外,上述表達式中之c為引導線性程式解算器朝向一解決方案之一成本向量,該解決方案提供以所要方式影響色覺之一濾光器f。由cT x計算與該解決方案相關聯之總成本,cT x表示c之轉置與x之間之向量內積。提供一較低總成本之解決方案x一般相對於濾光器之所要功能(例如色彩辨別增強)而更佳,但品質之其他量測亦可用於判定一特定解決方案之適當性。上述表達式中之A為一矩陣且上述表達式中之b為一向量。Ax為矩陣A與向量x之間之矩陣積。矩陣A之元素之至少若干者及向量b之元素之至少若干者係相關於:濾光器f在光之一或多個波長處之最小或最大透射位準;對濾光器白點之一約束;或對一或多個參考光(如透過濾光器所觀看或照亮)之色彩外觀之約束;及/或濾光器f在一或多個入射角處之此等透射約束。 可藉由依一波長標度(例如使用1奈米之一步長)或實質上等效之另一標度(例如頻率或log波數)均勻取樣而用表格表示上述表達式中以波長λ為函數之濾光器(ei ,p,f)之透射率之規格。亦可依樣本點之間具有不均勻間隔之一任意標度定義取樣。 由方法設計之濾光器f(其本質上可被描述為一多頻帶濾光器)具有一光譜透射率,其中一多頻帶濾光器為與阻帶交錯之複數個通帶。特定言之,用於影響色覺之濾光器具有由兩個或兩個以上阻帶分離之三個或三個以上通帶,各阻帶及各通帶具有一中心及一寬度,其中該中心位於可見光譜中之約400奈米至約700奈米之間,及該寬度可在約10奈米至約110奈米之間之範圍內。一頻帶之下邊界被定義為該中心減去該寬度之一半,及一頻帶之上邊界被定義為該中心加上該寬度之一半。一頻帶之平均透射率為光在該等頻帶邊界內之平均光譜透射率。交錯阻帶共用上邊界及下邊界以及相鄰通帶之互補邊界。一多頻帶濾光器之特徵為相對於阻帶及其相鄰通帶之平均透射率之一最小對比率。例如,一多頻帶濾光器可符合對比率之一下限,使得各交錯阻帶具有小於或等於例如一相鄰通帶之平均透射率之一半之一平均透射率。一多頻帶濾光器之進一步特徵為符合對比率之一上限以可期望多頻帶濾光器之一些實施例與色覺一起使用。 併入至諸如眼用透鏡之裝置中之濾光器之進一步特徵為一光透射率,其被定義為由CIE 1924感光發光度函數加權之透過濾光器之光之平均光譜透射率。用在眼用透鏡(諸如太陽鏡)中之濾光器通常具有至少8%之一光透射率。另外,濾光器白點被定義為平均日光(即,照明體D65)在一適合色彩空間中之色度座標,其中一(u',v')色度座標意指CIELUV色彩空間中之一位置及一(x,y)色度座標意指CIE xyY色彩空間中之一位置。一濾光器之白點與該濾光器施加於視場上之表觀色調主觀對應,其中被描述為呈中性之一白點施加少量之此色調。 在一些變動中,濾光器通帶本質上呈矩形,即,以波長為函數之透射率在頻帶邊界內之變化係瞬時的或幾乎為瞬時的。一矩形通帶之寬度之特徵為短波長邊界與長波長邊界之間之距離。可依一頻率標度等效地量測矩形頻寬。 在一些變動中,濾光器通帶本質上為高斯的(Gaussian),即,以波長為函數之透射率在頻帶邊界內之變化係漸進的或本質上平滑。一高斯通帶之寬度之特徵為短波長邊界上之半峰透射率至長波長邊界上之半峰透射率之間之距離(亦稱為半高全寬(FWHM))。可依一頻率標度等效地量測半峰頻寬。 在一些變動中,通帶之一或多者可具有一不規則形狀(即,非矩形且非高斯)。例如,通帶可具有一雙峰式分佈,或可在通帶之一或多個側上具有一凸肩,或可被描述為一偏態分佈,其中在以波長為函數之透射率中,通帶之兩側之間之斜率比介於約4:1至約1:4之間。 在關於非高斯通帶之變動中,可利用例如寬度恰好足以本質上消除不規則及/或急轉過渡之一高斯核心來使此等通帶平滑,在此情況中,通帶可被描述為本質上具有對應平滑通帶之一頻帶中心及半峰寬度。 基本濾光器可例如為具有約1奈米之一通帶寬度之單通帶濾光器,且各基本濾光器具有一不同通帶中心波長。此等濾光器亦可被稱為單色濾光器,且被定義為具有如下光譜透射率:; 其中為迪拉克Δ(Dirac-delta)函數及為由濾光器透射之波長,對於整組之基本濾光器,該波長通常在約400奈米至約700奈米之間變動,及該組中之此等基本濾光器之數目為約300。替代地,基本濾光器可為各具有大於約1奈米之寬度之單通帶濾光器,且各基本濾光器具有一不同通帶中心波長。在一些此等變動中,通帶可呈矩形(亦稱為一方脈衝函數)且一基本濾光器之光譜透射率被定義如下:; 其中為中心波長,為矩形頻寬,及H為Heaviside階梯函數。在此等變動中,通帶可具有例如約10奈米之一寬度且頻帶位置例如依約5奈米之一步長在約400奈米至約700奈米之間變動,使得此等基本濾光器之數目為例如約60。在一些變動中,通帶可具有高斯或本質上為高斯之一光譜透射率,例如具有如下定義之光譜透射率:; 其中為中心波長,且半峰頻寬為:, 其中為指數函數,為平方根函數,及為自然對數。在其他變動中,基本濾光器可為具有兩個或兩個以上通帶之多頻帶濾光器,且各基本濾光器具有兩個或兩個以上通帶之中心位置及/或頻寬之一不同組合。任何適合組之基本濾光器可用在濾光器設計方法中。 例如,成本向量c可經選擇以引導線性程式解算器朝向改良色彩辨別之一濾光器。在一些變動中,成本向量經選擇以藉由提高紅色及綠色之表觀色純度而增強紅色與綠色之間之辨別。此等紅綠色增強濾光器亦可提高藍色之表觀純度且因此一般可被描述為增強色彩辨別。替代地,成本向量可經選擇以藉由提高藍色及黃色之表觀色純度而增強藍色與黃色之間之辨別。此等藍黃色增強濾光器亦可趨於降低紅色及綠色之表觀純度。另外或替代地,成本向量可經選擇以減少約380奈米至約450奈米之間之短波長藍光之透射。另外或替代地,成本向量可經選擇以增加約450奈米至約500奈米之間之短波長青光之透射。任何適合成本向量可用在濾光器設計方法中。 在一些變動中,成本向量c及/或A及b之元素可經選擇使得由濾光器提供之色彩之辨別係正常的(即,色彩外觀實質上相同於由一中性密度濾光器提供之色彩外觀)。 在一些變動中,濾光器設計方法包括:解算線性程式以產生一試驗濾光器f及接著依據效能準則、製造準則或效能及製造準則評估該試驗濾光器。一些此等變動亦可包括調整矩陣A、向量b、成本向量c、基本濾光器矩陣E、預濾光器p或以上各者之任何組合及接著再次解算線性程式表達式以提供另一試驗濾光器。成本向量c可經調整以例如進一步改良色彩辨別(即,相較於當前試驗濾光器之下一試驗濾光器之色彩辨別)。 評估濾光器之效能可包含藉由以下操作而評定濾光器對色彩辨別之效應:藉由計算由一色彩空間中之一色度平面中之一第一輪廓圍封之面積而判定一第一色域面積,其中該第一輪廓對應於一觀察者透過試驗濾光器觀看或照亮之一組參考色彩之外觀;藉由計算由一色彩空間中之一色度平面中之一第二輪廓圍封之面積而判定一第二色域面積,其中該第二輪廓對應於該觀察者透過一參考濾光器觀看或照亮之該組參考色彩之外觀;及比較該第一色域面積與該第二色域面積。 替代地或另外,評估濾光器之效能可包含藉由以下操作而評定濾光器對色彩辨別之效應:判定投影至一色彩空間中之一色度平面中之一軸上之一第一分佈之一第一標準偏差,其中該第一分佈對應於一觀察者透過試驗濾光器觀看或照亮之一組參考色彩之外觀;判定投影至該色彩空間中之該色度平面中之一軸上之一第二分佈之一第二標準偏差,其中該第二分佈對應於一觀察者透過一參考濾光器觀看或照亮之該組參考色彩之外觀;及比較該第一標準偏差與該第二標準偏差。對分析有用之軸包含由紅色盲混淆線、綠色盲混淆線及第三型色盲混淆線定義之軸。 在一些變動中,評估濾光器之效能可包括採用濾光器之效能在偏離於法向入射之一入射角範圍內之一平均值或一加權平均值。該角範圍可例如介於約0度至至少約20度之間或例如介於約0度與至少約30度之間。 在一些變動中,由來自Munsell色彩大全之色彩樣品之光譜反射率指定待由濾光器調節及/或增強之色彩。 在一些變動中,作為來自Munsell色彩大全之樣品之替代或除來自Munsell色彩大全之樣品之外,由來自Farnsworth D-15之色罩之光譜反射率指定待由濾光器調節及/或增強之色彩。 在一些變動中,作為來自Munsell色彩大全之樣品之替代或除來自Munsell色彩大全之樣品之外,由包含例如葉子及花之自然物體之光譜反射率指定待由濾光器調節及/或增強之色彩。 在一些變動中,上述線性程式表達式中之矩陣A及向量b之元素之至少若干者係相關於:對藍色、紅色、綠色或黃色交通信號之外觀之約束,如透過濾光器所觀看。此等約束可基於例如業界或規章標準,且例如需要:當透過濾光器觀看交通燈色彩時,交通燈色彩落在特定色度及發光邊界內。方法可提供滿足此等約束且改良色彩辨別或否則增強色彩外觀之一濾光器。 在一些變動中,上述線性程式表達式中之矩陣A及向量b之元素之至少若干者係相關於:對相對於濾光器上之光之入射角之變化而提供色彩外觀之穩定性之約束,如透過濾光器所觀看或照亮。該穩定性由該等約束之組態提供,使得經設計濾光器之白點在兩個或兩個以上入射角處不變或實質上不變。此外,在此等變動中,濾光器f可包括一吸收預濾光器p與一干涉濾光器q之一總組成(composition),其中p之以入射角為函數之透射率之變化係根據Beer-Lambert定律且Ex之以入射角為函數之透射率之變化係根據Snell定律,使得f在偏離於表面法向向量之θ弧度之一入射角處之透射率可表示為且由如下表達式近似表示:; 其中ei 之有效反射率為具有約1.85之一值之n,及對於約0度至約45度之間之θ,該近似值係足夠的。 在一些變動中,上述線性程式表達式中之矩陣A及向量b之元素之至少若干者係相關於:濾光器對約380奈米至約450奈米之間之藍光之透射之約束,例如最小化此透射。 在一些變動中,上述表達式中之矩陣A及向量b之元素之至少若干者係相關於:對由濾光器指定約450奈米至約650奈米之間之一最小透射率之約束。 在一些變動中,上述表達式中之矩陣A及向量b之元素之至少若干者係相關於:對由濾光器指定約580奈米至約620奈米之間之一最小透射率之約束。 在一些變動中,上述表達式中之矩陣A及向量b之元素之至少若干者係相關於:對由一電子視覺顯示器(例如具有一發光二極體(LED)背光之一液晶顯示器(LCD))發射之原色光之光透射之約束。 在一些變動中,上述表達式中之矩陣A及向量b之元素之至少若干者係相關於:對結合例如約0度至約30度之間之濾光器上之入射角範圍內之正常色彩辨別及穩定色彩外觀而使眼睛免受一可見雷射(例如一倍頻Nd:YAG雷射(其具有532奈米及1064奈米處之雷射輸出功率))之輻射之約束。 在一些變動中,上述表達式中之矩陣A及向量b之元素之至少若干者係相關於:對結合例如約0度至約30度之間之濾光器上之入射角範圍內之穩定色彩外觀而使眼睛免受一鈉照明炬(具有約589奈米處所聚集之功率)之輻射之約束。 在一些變動中,上述表達式中之矩陣A及向量b之元素之至少若干者係相關於:對提供一經選擇照明體之約束,在透過濾光器之透射之後所觀看之該照明體之色彩外觀與在由濾光器反射之後所觀看之該照明體之色彩外觀匹配,及其中由濾光器透射之經過濾照明體提供經選擇參考色彩之一增強辨別,及其中未由濾光器透射之光之部分由濾光器反射。 在另一態樣中,用一等效數值最佳化程序替換上文所總結方法中之線性程式。在此等變動中,該等效程序可包括:用表格表示一可能值範圍內之頻帶位置及頻寬之全部組合;接著依據約束準則及效能準則評估各多頻帶濾光器;及接著選擇通過該約束準則之濾光器子集;及接著選擇該子集中之最佳執行濾光器作為試驗濾光器。此等變動可進一步包含依據效能準則、製造準則或效能及製造準則評估試驗濾光器。一些此等變動亦可包括:調整約束準則、效能準則或以上各者之任何組合;及接著再次執行數值最佳化程序以提供另一試驗濾光器。該約束準則或效能準則可經調整以例如進一步改良色彩辨別(即,相較於當前試驗濾光器之下一試驗濾光器之色彩辨別)。 在另一態樣中,一種用於評估對一試驗濾光器之色覺之效應之電腦實施方法包括:使用一電腦;藉由計算由一色彩空間中之一色度平面中之一第一輪廓圍封之面積而判定一第一色域面積,其中該第一輪廓對應於一觀察者透過該試驗濾光器觀看或照亮之一組參考色彩之外觀;藉由計算由一色彩空間中之一色度平面中之一第二輪廓圍封之面積而判定一第二色域面積,其中該第二輪廓對應於該觀察者透過一參考濾光器觀看或照亮之該組參考色彩之外觀;及比較該第一色域面積與該第二色域面積。 在一些變動中,評估濾光器之效能可包括:採用在偏離於法向入射之一入射角範圍內由濾光器提供之色域面積之一平均值或一加權平均值。該角範圍可例如為自0度至至少約20度。在一些此等變動中,藉由估算以下可能性而推導出重要性加權函數:根據人眼之一幾何模型以一特定角度觀看濾光器,且濾光器位於一典型眼鏡框中之表面上。 在一些變動中,比較第一色域面積與第二色域面積包括:採用第一色域面積與第二色域面積之比率。 在一些變動中,參考色彩之至少若干者選自Munsell色彩。替代地或另外,參考色彩之至少若干者選自Farnsworth D-15。替代地或另外,參考色彩之至少若干者選自存在於其中試驗濾光器將用於影響色覺之環境中之色彩。在後一情況中,在一些變動中,參考色彩之至少若干者選自自然存在於一室外環境中之色彩。 在一些變動中,參考色彩經選擇以形成圍繞色度平面中之白點之中等飽和之一輪廓。另外或替代地,參考色彩經選擇以形成圍繞色度平面中之白點之高度飽和之一輪廓。 例如,參考濾光器可經選擇以具有一寬頻帶透射率。在一些變動中,參考濾光器經選擇以具有相對於一經選擇照明體(例如相對於日光)之與試驗濾光器相同之白點。在一些變動中,最佳適配於試驗濾光器之一Munsell色彩用於定義參考濾光器,其中Munsell色彩樣品之經量測光譜反射率被定義為參考濾光器之光譜透射率。 在另一態樣中,一種用於評估對一試驗濾光器之色覺之效應之電腦實施方法包括:使用一電腦;判定投影至一色彩空間中之一色度平面中之一軸上之一第一分佈之一第一標準偏差,其中該第一分佈對應於一觀察者透過該試驗濾光器觀看或照亮之一組參考色彩之外觀;判定沿該色彩空間中之該色度平面中之一軸投影之一第二分佈之一第二標準偏差,其中該第二分佈對應於一觀察者透過一參考濾光器觀看或照亮之該組參考色彩之外觀;比較該第一標準偏差與該第二標準偏差。 在一些變動中,軸被定義為紅色盲混淆線。 在一些變動中,軸被定義為綠色盲混淆線。 在一些變動中,軸被定義為第三型色盲混淆線。 在一些變動中,評估濾光器之效能可包括:採用在偏離於法向入射之一入射角範圍內由濾光器提供之分佈之標準偏差之一平均值或一加權平均值。該角範圍可例如為自約0度至至少約20度。在一些此等變動中,藉由估算以下可能性而推導出重要性加權函數:根據人眼之一幾何模型以一特定角度觀看濾光器,且濾光器位於一典型眼鏡框中之表面上。 在一些變動中,比較第一標準偏差與第二標準偏差包括:採用第一標準偏差與第二標準偏差之比率。 在一些變動中,參考色彩之至少若干者選自Munsell色彩。替代地或另外,參考色彩之至少若干者選自Farnsworth D-15。替代地或另外,參考色彩之至少若干者選自存在於其中試驗濾光器將用於影響色覺之環境中之色彩。在後一情況中,在一些變動中,參考色彩之至少若干者選自自然出現於一室外環境中之色彩。 在一些變動中,參考色彩經選擇以形成圍繞色度平面中之白點之中等飽和之一輪廓。另外或替代地,參考色彩經選擇以形成圍繞色度平面中之白點之高度飽和之一輪廓。 例如,參考濾光器可經選擇以具有一寬頻帶透射率。在一些變動中,參考濾光器經選擇以具有相對於一經選擇照明體(例如日光)之與試驗濾光器相同之白點。在一些變動中,最佳適配於試驗濾光器之一Munsell色彩用於定義參考濾光器,其中該Munsell色彩樣品之經量測光譜反射率被定義為參考濾光器之光譜透射率。 在另一態樣中,一種用於影響色覺之多頻帶濾光器包括由兩個阻帶分離之第一通帶、第二通帶及第三通帶。該等通帶及該等阻帶經組態以使一正常觀察者增強色彩辨別(例如,該濾光器之功能效能評估可考量該濾光器對相對於CIE 1931 2度標準觀察者之色覺之效應)。該第一通帶具有位於約435奈米至約465奈米之間之一中心,該第二通帶具有位於約525奈米至約555奈米之間之一中心,及該第三通帶具有位於約610奈米至約660奈米之間之一中心。該等通帶之寬度各介於約20奈米至約80奈米之間,及該等阻帶之寬度各為至少約40奈米。 在一些變動中,通帶經組態(例如,經適當定位及/或塑形)使得濾光器給偏離於表面法向向量之約0度至至少約30度之間之入射角提供穩定色彩外觀,使得對於全部或幾乎全部之該等入射角,平均日光之白點含於CIELUV(u',v')色彩空間上且依CIE 1931 2度標準觀察者之具有約0.02個單位之一半徑之一區域中。在一些此等變動中,該區域具有約0.01個單位之一半徑。在進一步變動中,除CIE 1931 2度標準觀察者之外或作為CIE 1931 2度標準觀察者之替代,可使用CIE 1964 10度標準觀察者來計算色度座標。 在一些變動中,通帶經組態使得濾光器給偏離於表面法向向量之約0度至至少約30度之間之入射角提供穩定色彩外觀,使得對於全部或幾乎全部之該等入射角,平均日光之白點含於依CIELUV(u',v')1964 2度標準觀察者色度標度之具有約0.02個單位之一半徑之一區域中。在一些此等變動中,該區域具有約0.01個單位之一半徑。 在一些變動中,多頻帶濾光器經組態以增強藍黃色辨別。在此等變動中,第一通帶具有位於約450奈米至約475奈米之間之一中心,第二通帶具有位於約545奈米至約580奈米之間之一中心,及第三通帶具有位於約650奈米至約690奈米之一中心。在此等變動中,通帶寬度各介於約20奈米至約60奈米之間。 在一些此等變動中,濾光器經組態以給由工業標準ANSI Z80.3-2010定義之已被去飽和或幾乎已被去飽和(如由該標準所容許)之一綠色交通信號提供一色度座標。 在一些變動中,多頻帶濾光器具有約8%至約40%之一光透射率,且頻帶經組態使得濾光器根據工業標準ANSI Z80.3-2010而被視為「非呈強勁色彩」。 在一些變動中,多頻帶濾光器經組態使得濾光器之白點呈中性或幾乎呈中性,使得濾光器提供與根據工業標準ANSI Z80.3-2010第4.6.3.1.章節而定義之平均日光色彩限制區域之邊界上之任何點相距至少約0.05個單位之一(x,y)色度座標。在進一步變動中,濾光器經組態使得白點位於或幾乎位於平均日光色彩限制區域上。 在一些變動中,阻帶具有一最小透射率,其為光透射率之約五分之一。該最小透射率為阻帶之邊界內之光譜透射率之最低值。 在一些變動中,濾光器經組態以增強色彩辨別且抑制低於至少約440奈米之短波長光。在此等變動中,第一通帶具有位於約450奈米至約470奈米之間之一中心且具有約10奈米至約40奈米之一寬度,第二通帶具有位於約545奈米至約575奈米之間之一中心及約30奈米至約60奈米之間之一寬度,第三通帶具有約630奈米至約670奈米之間之一中心位置及約40奈米至約90奈米之間之一寬度。在一些此等變動中,濾光器具有約20%至約35%之間之一光透射率。在一些此等變動中,對於0度至至少約25度之間之角度,相對於Farnsworth D-15色彩之色域面積增加之百分比大於零。在其中白點呈中性之一些此等變動中,相對於Farnsworth D-15色彩之色域面積增加之重要性加權百分比可為至少20%。在一些變動中,多頻帶濾光器具有約8%至約40%之間之一光透射率,且頻帶經組態使得濾光器之白點位於或幾乎位於定義根據工業標準ANSI Z80.3-2010而被視為非呈強勁色彩之一濾光器之限制之邊界上。 在一些變動中,藉由併入一中性密度吸收濾光器及一干涉濾光器而製造濾光器。在一些變動中,該干涉濾光器之光譜透射率明顯變平滑,且該干涉濾光器包括少於約50層之介電材料及/或具有小於約3微米之一總厚度。在進一步變動中,藉由併入一含釹基板及該干涉濾光器而製造濾光器。濾光器可進一步包括一中性密度濾光器。在一些變動中,該中性密度吸收濾光器包括可併入於該干涉濾光器之層內之一金屬衰減塗層。因為中性密度濾光器具有一大體上平坦之光譜透射率,所以經組態以與一中性密度濾光器一起使用之濾光器可由諸多本質上等效之選項組成。例如,可將一圓形偏振濾光器換成一金屬衰減塗層以達成具有相同或幾乎相同之光譜透射率之一濾光器。 若適合,則可將上述變動之任何者之濾光器併入至眼鏡中。此眼鏡可包含例如目鏡(例如太陽鏡)、護目鏡、隱形眼鏡或任何其他適合眼用透鏡。 在另一態樣中,一種用於影響色覺之多頻帶濾光器包括由兩個阻帶分離之第一通帶、第二通帶及第三通帶。該等通帶及該等組態經組態以提供正常色彩辨別且抑制低於約450奈米之短波長。 在一些變動中,濾光器具有三個通帶,第一通帶具有約465奈米之一中心波長及約20奈米之一半峰寬度,第一阻帶具有約14%之一最小透射率,第二通帶具有約550奈米之一中心波長及約40奈米之一半峰寬度,第二阻帶具有約580奈米至約610奈米之間之約50%之一最小透射率,及第三通帶具有約660奈米之一中心波長及約80奈米之一半峰寬度。 在一些變動中,濾光器具有四個通帶,第一通帶具有約465奈米之一中心波長及約20奈米之一半峰寬度,第一阻帶具有約17%之一最小透射率,第二通帶具有約550奈米之一中心波長及約35奈米之一半峰寬度,第二阻帶位於約560奈米處且具有約40%之一最小透射率,第三通帶位於約595奈米處且具有約35奈米之一半峰寬度,及第四通帶位於約660奈米處且具有約80奈米之一半峰寬度。 在一些變動中,通帶經定位及/或經塑形使得濾光器給偏離於表面法向向量之約0度至約40度之間之入射角提供穩定色彩外觀,使得對於全部或幾乎全部之該等入射角,平均日光之(u',v')色度座標含於依CIELUV色彩空間1931 2度標準觀察者色度(u',v')標度之具有約0.01個單位之一半徑之一區域中。 在一些變動中,對於0度至至少約25度之間之角度,相對於Farnsworth D-15色彩之色域面積增加之百分比大於零。在一些變動中國,白點呈中性且相對於Farnsworth D-15之色域面積增加之重要性加權百分比介於約0%至約10%之間。 在一些變動中,多頻帶濾光器具有約8%至約40%之間之一光透射率,且頻帶經組態使得濾光器之白點位於或幾乎位於定義根據工業標準ANSI Z80.3-2010而被視為非呈強勁色彩之一濾光器之限制之邊界上。 在一些變動中,藉由併入一中性密度吸收濾光器及一干涉濾光器而製造濾光器。在一些此等變動中,該中性密度吸收濾光器為一線性偏振器。在進一步變動中,製造不含一吸收元件之濾光器。在一些變動中,藉由將一干涉濾光器沈積至一光致變色基板上而製造濾光器。 若適合,則可將上述變動之任何者之濾光器併入至眼鏡中。此眼鏡可包含例如目鏡(例如太陽鏡)、護目鏡、隱形眼鏡或任何其他適合眼用透鏡。 在另一態樣中,一種用於影響色覺之多頻帶濾光器包括由兩個阻帶分離之第一通帶、第二通帶及第三通帶。該等通帶及該等阻帶經組態以針對具有紅綠色覺缺陷之一觀察者增強紅綠色辨別。據此,此一濾光器之效能度量之評估可考量此一觀察者之生理特性。該第一通帶具有約440奈米至約455奈米之間之一中心波長,該第二通帶具有約530奈米至約545奈米之間之一中心波長,及該第三通帶具有約610奈米至約640奈米之間之一中心波長。該等通帶之寬度各介於約10奈米至約60奈米之間,及該等阻帶之寬度各為至少約40奈米,其中可根據該濾光器之所要光透射率及白點色調而選擇該等頻帶之寬度。 在一些變動中,通帶經定位及/或經塑形使得濾光器給偏離於表面法向向量之約0度至約30度之間之入射角提供穩定色彩外觀,使得對於全部或幾乎全部之該等入射角,日光之白點含於依CIELUV 1931 2度標準觀察者色度(u',v')標度之具有約0.02個單位之一半徑之一區域中。 在一些變動中,通帶經定位及/或經塑形使得濾光器給偏離於表面法向向量之約0度至約35度之間之入射角提供穩定色彩外觀,使得對於全部或幾乎全部之該等入射角,日光之白點含於依CIELUV 1931 2度標準觀察者色度(u',v')標度之具有約0.04個單位之一半徑之一區域中。 在一些變動中,通帶經定位及/或經塑形使得濾光器提供穩定色彩外觀,使得白點自其0度入射角位置所位移之入射角相依距離在約20度入射角至約40度入射角之間之一角度處具有一局部最小值,其中該局部最小值處之白點位移小於依CIELUV 1931 2度標準觀察者色度(u',v')標度之0.02個單位。 在一些變動中,通帶經定位及/或經塑形使得濾光器提供穩定色彩外觀,使得白點自其0度入射角位置所位移之入射角相依距離在約20度至約40度之間之一角度處具有一局部最小值,其中該局部最小值處之白點位移小於依CIELUV 1931 2度標準觀察者色度(u',v')標度之0.01個單位。 在一些變動中,多頻帶濾光器具有約8%至約40%之間之一光透射率,且頻帶經組態使得濾光器根據工業標準ANSI Z80.3-2010而被視為非呈強勁色彩。 在一些變動中,多頻帶濾光器具有約8%至約40%之間之一光透射率,且頻帶經組態使得濾光器之白點呈中性或幾乎呈中性,使得白點之(x,y)色度座標落在相對於照明體D65且依CIE xyY 1931 2度標準觀察者色彩空間之(0.31, 0.33)之約0.05個單位內。 在一些變動中,阻帶具有一最小透射率,其為約450奈米至約650奈米之間之光透射率之約五分之一。 在一些變動中,阻帶具有一最小透射率,其為約580奈米至約650奈米之間之光透射率之約五分之一。 在一些變動中,通帶之一或多者具有一偏態分佈,其中在以波長為函數之透射率中,通帶之兩側之間之斜率比介於4:1至1:4之間。 在一些變動中,通帶之一或多者具有一不規則分佈,其中通帶可被描述為在通帶之一側或兩側上本質上具有一凸肩。 在一些變動中,通帶之一或多者具有一雙峰式分佈,其中兩個模式之中心波長在+/- 10%內且圍繞該等模式之分佈部分重疊。此一組態亦可被描述為將通帶分成相鄰之部分重疊子頻帶。 在一些變動中,第一通帶具有一雙峰式分佈,其中第一模式處於約435奈米且第二模式為約455奈米。在此等變動中,第一模式之峰值透射率可等於或大於第二模式之峰值透射率。 在一些變動中,相對於其中第二通帶中心波長介於約525奈米至約535奈米之間之一入射角,濾光器經組態以給由工業標準ANSI Z80.3-2010定義之呈微紅或幾乎呈微紅(如該標準所容許)之一黃色交通信號提供一色度座標。 在一些變動中,濾光器經組態以針對具有綠色弱之一觀察者增強紅綠色辨別。在較佳變動中,第三通帶具有約620奈米至約640奈米之間之中心波長。在一些此等變動中,第一通帶具有位於約445奈米處之一中心,第二通帶具有約535奈米之一中心波長,及第三通帶具有約635奈米之一中心波長。 在一些變動中,濾光器經組態以針對具有輕度綠色弱之一觀察者增強紅綠色辨別。在一些此等變動中,白點呈中性且相對於Farnsworth D-15色彩之色域面積增加之重要性加權百分比為至少約30%。在進一步此等變動中,對於0度至至少約25度之間之角度,相對於Farnsworth D-15色彩之色域面積增加之百分比大於零。 在一些變動中,濾光器經組態以針對具有中度綠色弱之一觀察者增強紅綠色辨別。在一些此等變動中,白點呈中性且相對於Farnsworth D-15色彩之色域面積增加之重要性加權百分比為至少約35%。在進一步此等變動中,對於0度至至少約25度之間之角度,相對於Farnsworth D-15色彩之色域面積增加之百分比大於零。 在一些變動中,濾光器經組態以針對具有重度綠色弱之一觀察者增強紅綠色辨別。在此等變動中,阻帶可具有一最小透射率,其為約580奈米至約650奈米之間之光透射率之五分之一且小於約475奈米至約580奈米之間之光透射率之約五分之一(例如約十分之一)。在一些此等變動中,白點呈中性且相對於Farnsworth D-15色彩之色域面積增加之重要性加權百分比為至少約40%。在進一步此等變動中,對於0度至至少約25度之間之角度,相對於Farnsworth D-15色彩之色域面積增加之百分比大於零。 在一些變動中,濾光器經組態以針對具有紅色弱之一觀察者增強紅綠色辨別。在一些此等變動中,第三通帶具有約605奈米至約620奈米之間之中心波長。在一些此等變動中,第一通帶具有約440奈米之一中心波長,第二通帶具有約530奈米之一中心波長,及第三通帶具有約615奈米之一中心波長。在一些此等變動中,白點呈中性且相對於由法向入射處之濾光器提供之Farnsworth D-15色彩之色域面積增加之百分比為至少約40%。在進一步此等變動中,對於0度至至少約25度之間之角度,相對於Farnsworth D-15色彩之色域面積增加之百分比大於零。 在一些變動中,藉由併入一中性密度吸收濾光器及一干涉濾光器而製造濾光器。在進一步變動中,藉由併入一含釹基板以及該中性密度吸收濾光器及一干涉濾光器而製造濾光器。 若適合,則可將上述變動之任何者之濾光器併入至眼鏡中。此眼鏡可包含例如目鏡(例如太陽鏡)、護目鏡、隱形眼鏡或任何其他適合眼用透鏡。 在另一態樣中,一種多頻帶濾光器包括由兩個或兩個以上阻帶分離之三個或三個以上通帶。該等通帶及該等阻帶經組態以透射一電子視覺顯示器之藍原色光、紅原色光及綠原色光,使得該等光似乎具有大致相同發光度且其中該等原色光之光透射率比日光之光透射率大至少約15%。在一些此等變動中,白點呈中性,且對於0度至至少約25度之間之角度,相對於Farnsworth D-15色彩之色域面積增加之百分比大於零。在一些此等變動中,相對於Farnsworth D-15色彩之色域面積增加之重要性加權百分比為至少約20%。 在一些變動中,多頻帶濾光器具有約8%至約40%之間之一光透射率,且頻帶經組態使得濾光器之白點呈中性或幾乎呈中性,使得白點之(x,y)色度座標落在CIE xyY 1931 2度標準觀察者色彩空間上之相對於照明體D65之(0.31, 0.33)之約0.05個單位內。 在一些變動中,濾光器具有三個通帶,且第一通帶具有約450奈米之一中心波長及約20奈米之一寬度,第二通帶具有約535奈米之一中心波長及約25奈米之一寬度,及第三通帶具有約615奈米之一中心波長及約30奈米之一寬度。 在一些變動中,濾光器具有四個通帶,第一通帶具有約455奈米之一中心波長及約20奈米之一寬度,第二通帶具有約540奈米之一中心波長及約25奈米之一寬度,第三通帶具有約615奈米之一中心波長及約25奈米之一半峰寬度,及第四通帶具有約680奈米之一中心波長及約25奈米之一半峰寬度。 在一些變動中,通帶經定位及/或經塑形使得濾光器給偏離於表面法向向量之約0度至約40度之間之入射角提供穩定色彩外觀,使得對於全部或幾乎全部之該等入射角,平均日光之白點含於依CIELUV 1931 2度標準觀察者色度(u',v')標度之具有約0.01個單位之一半徑之一區域中。 在一些變動中,其上組態有濾光器之電腦顯示器為具有一發光二極體(LED)背光之一液晶顯示器(LCD)。 在一些變動中,白點呈中性且相對於由濾光器提供之Farnsworth D-15色彩之色域面積增加之重要性加權百分比為至少約20%。 在一些變動中,藉由併入一中性密度吸收濾光器及一干涉濾光器而製造濾光器。 若適合,則可將上述變動之任何者之濾光器併入至眼鏡中。此眼鏡可包含例如目鏡(例如太陽鏡)、護目鏡、隱形眼鏡或任何其他適合眼用透鏡。 在另一態樣中,一種提供增強眼睛安全之多頻帶濾光器經組態以:提供正常色彩外觀及亦提供一阻隔頻帶,其中該阻隔頻帶使眼睛免受約450奈米至約650奈米之間之一或多個波長處之可見光輻射;及在偏離於濾光器之表面法向向量之約0度至約30度之間之一入射角範圍內提供阻隔。 在一些變動中,多頻帶濾光器具有約8%至約40%之間之一光透射率,且頻帶經組態使得濾光器之白點呈中性或幾乎呈中性,使得白點之(x,y)色度座標落在CIE xyY 1931 2度標準觀察者色彩空間上之相對於照明體D65之(0.31, 0.33)之約0.05個單位內。 在一些變動中,保護阻隔頻帶在約530奈米處具有一短波長邊界且在約560奈米處具有一長波長邊界以免受約532奈米處之可見光輻射。在此等變動中,濾光器可包括由三個阻帶分離之四個通帶,其中中間阻帶為保護頻帶。第一通帶具有約440奈米之一中心波長及約20奈米之一寬度,第二通帶具有約515奈米之一中心波長及約25奈米之一寬度,第三通帶具有約570奈米之一中心波長及約25奈米之一寬度,及第四通帶具有約635奈米之一中心波長及約25奈米之一寬度。 在此等變動中,相對於Farnsworth D-15色彩之色域面積增加之重要性加權百分比約為零。在一些變動中,對於0度至至少約25度之間之角度,相對於Farnsworth D-15色彩之色域面積增加之百分比約為零。 在一些變動中,阻隔頻帶在約585奈米處具有一短波長邊界及在約620奈米處具有一長波長邊界,且因此免受約589奈米處之可見光輻射。在此等變動中,濾光器可包括由兩個阻帶分離之四個通帶,其中長波長阻帶提供保護。在一些變動中,第一通帶具有約455奈米之一中心波長及約20奈米之一寬度,第二通帶具有約540奈米之一中心波長及約20奈米之一寬度,第三通帶具有約570奈米之一中心波長及約20奈米之一寬度,第四通帶具有約635奈米之一中心波長及約30奈米之一寬度。 在一些此等變動中,白點呈中性且及相對於Farnsworth D-15色彩之色域面積增加之重要性加權百分比介於約0%至約15%之間。在一些此等變動中,對於0度至至少約25度之間之角度,相對於Farnsworth D-15色彩之色域面積增加之百分比大於零。 在一些變動中,通帶經定位及/或經塑形使得濾光器給偏離於表面法向向量之約0度至約35度之間之入射角提供穩定色彩外觀,使得對於全部或幾乎全部之該等入射角,平均日光之白點含於依CIELUV 1931 2度標準觀察者色度(u',v')標度之具有約0.01個單位之一半徑之一區域中。 在一些變動中,藉由併入一中性密度吸收濾光器及一干涉濾光器而製造濾光器。 若適合,則可將上述變動之任何者之濾光器併入至眼鏡中。此眼鏡可包含例如目鏡(例如太陽鏡)、護目鏡、隱形眼鏡或任何其他適合眼用透鏡。 在另一態樣中,一種用於影響色覺之多頻帶濾光器包括由兩個或兩個以上阻帶分離之三個或三個以上通帶。該等通帶及該等阻帶經組態以最大化由視網膜神經節細胞接收藍光且最大化正常色彩辨別。 在一些變動中,多頻帶濾光器具有由兩個阻帶分離之三個通帶,其中第一通帶具有位於約485奈米處之一中心及約90奈米之一半峰寬度,第二通帶具有約580奈米之一中心波長及約25奈米之一半峰寬度,及第三通帶具有約630奈米之一中心波長及約25奈米之一半峰寬度。 在一些變動中,多頻帶濾光器具有由三個阻帶分離之四個通帶,其中第一通帶具有約430奈米之一中心波長及約30奈米之一半峰寬度,第二通帶具有約495奈米之一中心波長及約50奈米之一半峰寬度,第三通帶具有約565奈米之一中心波長及約20奈米之一半峰寬度,及第四通帶具有約630奈米之一中心波長及約20奈米之一半峰寬度。 在一些變動中,通帶經定位及/或經塑形使得濾光器給偏離於表面法向向量之約0度至約30度之間之入射角提供穩定色彩外觀,使得用於全部或幾乎全部之該等入射角,平均日光之白點含於依CIELUV 1931 2度標準觀察者色度(u',v')標度之具有約0.01個單位之一半徑之一區域中。 在一些變動中,白點呈中性且相對於Farnsworth D-15色彩之色域面積增加之重要性加權百分比介於約0%至約-10%之間。 在一些變動中,多頻帶濾光器具有約8%至約40%之間之一光透射率,且頻帶經組態使得濾光器之白點位於或幾乎位於定義根據工業標準ANSI Z80.3-2010而被視為非呈強勁色彩之一濾光器之限制之邊界上。 在一些變動中,藉由併入一中性密度吸收濾光器及一干涉濾光器而製造濾光器。在進一步變動中,藉由併入一含釹基板以及該中性密度吸收濾光器及一干涉濾光器而製造濾光器。在一些變動中,濾光器規格明顯變平滑,使得可用少於約50個材料層來製造該干涉濾光器。 若適合,則可將上述變動之任何者之濾光器併入至眼鏡中。此眼鏡可包含例如目鏡(例如太陽鏡)、護目鏡、隱形眼鏡或任何其他適合眼用透鏡。 在另一態樣中,一種多頻帶濾光器包括三個或三個以上通帶及兩個或兩個以上阻帶,且該等頻帶經組態以由人類視覺調節及/或增強光之色彩外觀。以波長λ為函數之濾光器f之光譜透射率可實質上由如下表達式近似表示:; 其中,在上述表達式中,為通帶且為調整通帶之加權係數,及為濾光器之最小透射率。 可藉由依一波長標度(例如使用1奈米之一步長)或實質上等效之另一標度(例如頻率或log波數)均勻取樣而用表格表示上述表達式中以波長λ為函數之濾光器透射率(f, u)之規格。亦可依樣本點之間具有不均勻間隔之一任意標度定義取樣。 在一些變動中,濾光器包括三個通帶及兩個阻帶(即,在上述表達式中,N=3)。 在一些變動中,濾光器包括四個通帶及三個阻帶(即,在上述表達式中,N=4)。 在一些變動中,濾光器通帶本質上呈矩形,即,頻帶邊界處之以波長為函數之透射率之變化係瞬時的或幾乎為瞬時的。一矩形通帶之寬度之特徵為短波長邊界與長波長邊界之距離。可依一頻率標度等效地量測該矩形頻寬。可由如下表達式定義一矩形通帶之光譜透射率:; 其中為中心波長,為矩形頻寬及H為Heaviside階梯函數。 在一些變動中,濾光器通帶本質上為高斯的,即,頻帶邊界處之以波長為函數之透射率之變化係漸進的或本質上為平滑的。一高斯通帶之寬度之特徵為短波長側上之半峰透射率至長波長邊界上之半峰透射率之間之距離(亦稱為半高全寬(FWHM))。可依一頻率標度等效地量測半峰頻寬。可由如下表達式定義一高斯通帶之光譜透射率:; 其中為中心波長,及半峰頻寬為:。 在一些變動中,通帶之一或多者可具有一不規則形狀(即,非矩形且非高斯)。例如,通帶可具有一雙峰式分佈,或可在通帶之一或多側上具有一凸肩,或可被描述為一偏態分佈,其中在以波長為函數之透射率中,通帶之兩側之間之斜率比介於約4:1至約1:4之間。 在關於非高斯通帶之變動中,可用足夠寬以本質上消除不規則及/或急轉過渡之一高斯核心來使此等通帶變平滑,在此情況中,通帶可被描述為具有對應平滑通帶之一頻帶中心及半峰寬度。 在一些變動中,通帶經定位及/或經塑形使得濾光器給偏離於表面法向向量之約0度至約35度之間之入射角提供穩定色彩外觀,使得用於全部或幾乎全部之該等入射角,日光之白點含於在CIELUV 1931 2度標準觀察者色度圖上具有約0.01個單位之一半徑之一區域中。 在一些變動中,通帶經定位及/或經塑形使得濾光器給偏離於表面法向向量之約0度至約40度之間之入射角提供穩定色彩外觀,使得用於全部或幾乎全部之該等入射角,日光之白點含於在CIELUV 1931 2度標準觀察者色度圖上具有約0.01個單位之一半徑之一區域中。 在一些變動中,通帶經定位及/或經塑形使得濾光器給偏離於表面法向向量之約0度至約45度之間之入射角提供穩定色彩外觀,使得用於全部或幾乎全部之該等入射角,日光之白點含於在CIELUV 1931 2度標準觀察者色度圖上具有約0.01個單位之一半徑之一區域中。 在一些變動中,通帶經定位及/或經塑形使得濾光器提供穩定色彩外觀,使得白點自其0度入射角位置所位移之入射角相依距離在約20度入射角至約45度入射角之間之一角度處具有一局部最小值,其中該局部最小值處之白點位移小於依CIELUV 1931 2度標準觀察者色度(u',v')標度之0.02個單位。 在一些變動中,通帶經定位及/或經塑形使得濾光器提供穩定色彩外觀,使得白點自其0度入射角位置所位移之入射角相依距離在約20度入射角至約45度入射角之間之一角度處具有一局部最小值,其中該局部最小值處之白點位移小於依CIELUV 1931 2度標準觀察者色度(u',v')標度之0.01個單位。 在一些變動中,多頻帶濾光器被製造為一干涉濾光器。 在一些變動中,多頻帶濾光器經製造以包括一干涉濾光器及一或多個中性密度吸收濾光器,且該干涉濾光器提供通帶及阻帶。 在一些變動中,多頻帶濾光器經製造以包括一干涉濾光器及一或多個寬頻帶吸收濾光器,且該干涉濾光器提供通帶及阻帶。 在一些變動中,多頻帶濾光器經製造以包括一干涉濾光器及一或多個窄頻帶吸收濾光器,其中該干涉濾光器及吸收濾光器經共同組態以提供通帶及阻帶。 在上述變動之任何者中,多頻帶濾光器f可包括一吸收濾光器p及一干涉濾光器q,其中p之以入射角為函數之透射率之變化係根據Beer-Lambert定律,及q之以入射角為函數之透射率之變化係根據Snell定律,使得f在偏離於表面法向向量之θ弧度之一入射角處之透射率可表示為且由如下表達式近似表示:; 其中干涉濾光器q之有效折射率為具有約1.85之一值之n,法向入射處之p之光譜透射率為,法向入射處之f之光譜透射率為,法向入射處之q之光譜透射率為,及約0度至約30度之間之θ之近似值係足夠的。 在一些此等變動中,可使q之光譜透射率朝向較長波長位移,如由如下表達式所計算:,及; 其中為判定位移量之一係數,且經選擇以最大化濾光器在一入射角範圍內之一效能準則。 在一些變動中,濾光器包括一干涉濾光器,其中該干涉濾光器之光譜透射率明顯變平滑,其中平滑核心之寬度經選擇以不過度損及濾光器之效能,同時亦使濾光器能夠被製造為一低階堆疊之介電材料。 若適合,則可將上述變動之任何者之濾光器併入至眼鏡中。此眼鏡可包含例如目鏡(例如太陽鏡)、護目鏡、隱形眼鏡或任何其他適合眼用透鏡。 在另一態樣中,一種用於判定一濾光器在一表面上之實體厚度之分佈之電腦實施方法包括:使用一電腦;定義該濾光器之光譜透射率;定義該濾光器在一入射角範圍內之光譜透射率;定義該表面之一幾何模型;定義一人眼之一幾何模型;組態該等幾何模型以接近一眼鏡框之幾何形狀,其中該表面為安裝於該框架中且位於眼睛前面之一透鏡;針對該表面上之各位置而計算穿過該位置以成像於眼睛之視網膜上之光之入射角;及指定各位置之一實體厚度,其中該實體厚度經組態使得光譜透射率在相對於經計算入射角之該表面上之全部位置或幾乎全部位置處不變或實質上不變。 在另一態樣中,一種用於判定一濾光器在一表面上之實體厚度之分佈之電腦實施方法包括:使用一電腦;定義一濾光器之一光譜透射率;定義該濾光器在一入射角範圍內之光譜透射率;定義該表面之一幾何模型;定義沈積至該表面上之該濾光器之相對實體厚度之一幾何模型(例如,作為由一特定製程達成之實體厚度分佈之預測及量測之結果);定義一人眼之一幾何模型;組態該等幾何模型以接近一眼鏡框之幾何形狀,其中該表面為安裝於該框架中且位於眼睛前面之一透鏡;計算對應於視場中心之表面上之位置;計算穿過中心位置之光之入射角;定義相對於中心位置之各位置之一重要性分佈;指定中心位置處之一實體厚度,其中該實體厚度經選擇使得穿過中心位置且成像至視網膜上之光根據經定義之光譜透射率而過濾;計算對透鏡之表面上之色覺之重要性加權平均效應,其與指定中心實體厚度之+/- 10%內之一實體厚度變化範圍相關聯;及接著選擇該範圍內之一偏置中心實體厚度,使得對色覺之重要性加權平均效應被最大化。 在另一態樣中,一種併入一多頻帶濾光器之眼鏡之透鏡包括一光學基板、一或多個反射干涉濾光器及定位於該等反射濾光器之一側或兩側上之一或多個吸收濾光器,其中該等吸收濾光器經組態以減小該透鏡之一側或兩側上之反射光之發光度。 在一些變動中,干涉濾光器包括具有約12個至約50個介電材料層之一低階堆疊,或介於約1微米至約3微米厚,或包括具有約12個至約50個介電材料層之一低階堆疊且介於1微米至3微米厚。 在一些變動中,干涉濾光器包括具有約50個至至少約200個介電材料層之一高階堆疊,或介於約6微米至至少約12微米厚,或包括具有約50個至至少約200個介電材料層之一高階堆疊且介於6微米至至少約12微米厚。 干涉濾光器所包括之介電材料層可包含例如二氧化鈦及二氧化矽之薄膜。可在例如一磁控濺鍍機中例如藉由物理氣相沈積而製造材料層。替代地或另外,可例如藉由旋塗沈積而製造介電材料層。 在一些變動中,由一金屬衰減塗層提供一中性密度吸收濾光器。可例如藉由物理氣相沈積而製造金屬材料層。在此等變動中,金屬層可與干涉濾光器之介電層交錯或部分交錯。 在一些變動中,藉由將光致變色材料併入至一玻璃或聚合物基板中而提供一光活化中性密度吸收濾光器。在此等變動中,干涉濾光器可沈積於透鏡之凸面上。 在一些變動中,藉由將一偏振濾光器併入至一層壓復合透鏡中或藉由塗覆至透鏡之表面上而提供一線性偏振中性密度吸收濾光器。在此等變動中,偏振器可位於干涉濾光器與面向眼睛之透鏡之側之間。 在一些變動中,由一聚合物基板中之有機染料提供一吸收濾光器。可藉由任何適合方法(舉例而言,諸如藉由併入至光學基板介質中、在兩個光學基板之間層壓一膜或旋塗或浸染一光學基板之表面)而將聚合物材料併入至透鏡中。 在一些變動中,藉由將無機材料併入至一玻璃或聚合物基板中而提供一吸收濾光器。在此等變動之若干者中,該等無機材料可包含鐠、鈥、釹或以上各者之任何混合物之稀土離子。 在一些變動中,一或多個吸收濾光器經組態以影響由透鏡之外表面(最遠離眼睛之表面)反射之日光之色彩外觀,其中為了悅目而組態色彩外觀。 在一些變動中,吸收濾光器包括:一第一圓形偏振器,其定位於干涉濾光器之一側上且經組態以吸收由干涉濾光器反射之光;及一第二圓形偏振器,其定位於與該第一圓形偏振器相對之干涉濾光器之側上且經組態以吸收由干涉濾光器反射之光,且該第一圓形偏振器及該第二圓形偏振器經組態以透射穿過干涉濾光器之光。 在一些變動中,由固定至干涉濾光器之一側且經組態以吸收由干涉濾光器反射之光之一第一圓形偏振器提供最接近於眼睛之透鏡之一側上之一吸收濾光器。 在併入一或多個圓形偏振器之變動中,一圓形偏振器包括一線性偏振器及一四分之一波長延遲器,該線性偏振器元件可經組態以提供例如約60%至約90%之間之部分偏振效率。 在含有一線性偏振器之變動中,該線性偏振器可經組態以使水平偏振光衰減以便根據Brewster角現象而減少來自由水平表面反射之太陽光之眩光。 在一些變動中,濾光器之全部功能層定位於光學基板之一側上,且基板之相對側具有使光學基板內之反射光之散射及共振減少之一抗反射塗層,且該抗反射塗層之發光度加權反射率小於約0.5%。 在一些變動中,濾光器之全部功能層夾於兩個光學基板之間,該等光學基板之外表面經抗反射塗覆以減少該等光學基板內之反射光之散射及共振。 在一些變動中,可用一折射率匹配之吸收聚合物塗層密封透鏡之邊緣,該邊緣塗層減少光學基板內之雜散光之透射及散射且亦保護濾光器之層免受污染(例如,避免水或溶劑滲透至介電或金屬材料層中)。 在一些變動中,濾光器之全部功能層為與藉由物理氣相沈積之製造相容之金屬或金屬氧化物塗層。 在一些變動中,光學基板為化學鋼化玻璃。在此等變動中,該玻璃可吸收例如約280奈米至約400奈米之間之紫外光。 在一些變動中,干涉濾光器沈積於一表面上,使得介電材料層之實體厚度經組態使得光學厚度在該表面上之兩個或兩個以上位置處不變或實質上不變,其中至濾光器之光在該兩個或兩個以上位置處之有效入射角相差至少20度,及其中光之有效入射角對應於穿過透鏡且成像至眼睛之視網膜上之一束光。 在一些變動中,光學基板係彎曲的,其中曲率半徑介於約50毫米至約200毫米之間。在此等變動中,干涉濾光器及/或衰減塗層可定位於表面之凹側上。 若適合,則可將上述變動之任何者之透鏡併入至包含例如目鏡(例如太陽鏡)、護目鏡或隱形眼鏡之眼鏡中。 在另一態樣中,一種光源包括一照明體、一第一光束成形元件、一多頻帶干涉濾光器及一第二光束成形元件。實質上由該第一光束成形元件準直自該照明體輻射之光。經準直之光束入射至該多頻帶濾光器,其中該光束被分成一透射部分及一反射部分。該光之該透射部分及該反射部分具有相對於經選擇照明體之相同或實質上相同之白點。該光之該透射部分提供使紅色及綠色之表觀純度增強之照明,且該光之該反射部分提供使藍色及黃色之表觀純度增強之照明。該第二光束成形元件將該光之該透射部分及該反射部分組合成一輸出光束,其中透射光及反射光在該輸出光束中至少部分地空間分離。 在一些變動中,輸出光束具有主要包括由多頻帶濾光器透射之光之一中心部分及主要包括由多頻帶濾光器反射之光之一外部部分。 在一些變動中,第一光束成形元件及第二光束成形元件之功能組合於一單一光束成形元件中。 在一些變動中,來自照明體之入射於多頻帶濾光器上之光之光束準直角為約20度。在此等變動中,用於經準直光束內之全部或幾乎全部之位置,濾光器相對於照明體之白點可例如含於依CIELUV 1931 2度標準觀察者色度標度之具有約0.01個單位之一半徑之一區域中。 在一些變動中,多頻帶濾光器包括由兩個阻帶分離之三個通帶,其中第一通帶具有約450奈米之一中心波長及約15奈米之一頻寬,第二通帶具有約535奈米之一中心波長及約20奈米之一頻寬,及第三通帶具有約625奈米之一中心波長及約30奈米之一頻寬。 在一些變動中,阻帶具有約10%之一最小透射率。在進一步變動中,阻帶具有約1%之一最小透射率。 在一些變動中,照明體包括一或多個基於磷光體之白色發光二極體及一或多個紅色發光二極體。由照明體發射之來自白色發光二極體及紅色發光二極體之光之一寬頻帶組合具有約5000 K至約7000 K之間之一等效色溫及約80至約90之間之一CRI。 在一些變動中,照明體包括一基於磷光體之白色發光二極體、一青色發光二極體及一紅色發光二極體。由組合二極體發射之光具有一寬頻帶光譜輻射通量,其具有約5000 K至約7000 K之間之一相關色溫及約90至約100之間之一CRI。在一些此等變動中,照明體之該光譜輻射通量組態為平均日光(D65)之一最佳近似。 在一些變動中,提供具有一多頻帶光譜透射率之眼用透鏡,該眼用透鏡包括一光學基板及一干涉濾光器,其中該干涉濾光器具有約30%至約80%之間之一光反射率及約8%至約70%之間之一光透射率。 用於設計、評估或否則評定光學濾光器、眼鏡、眼用透鏡、照明體及其他光學組件或器件之本文所揭示之全部方法及其變動可包含製造此一物件之步驟、製造此一物件之另一步驟或提供該物件之一製造規格至另一物件之步驟,無論此一步驟是否明確被陳述於特定方法、物件或其變動之描述中。 熟習技術者將在參考本發明之[實施方式]及首先簡要描述之附圖時進一步明白本發明之此等及其他態樣、實施例、變動、特徵及優點。This document discloses a method of producing a filter for designing an optical filter that provides, for example, enhancement and / or adjustment of a color appearance relative to human color perception. The optical filter designs produced by this method can be used as a basis for manufacturing specifications, such as interference filters, by manufacturing such optical filters by physically vapor-depositing multiple layers of dielectric materials onto an optical substrate. The interference filter may further include an absorptive metal material layer. Such metal attenuating coatings can be made, for example, by physical vapor deposition. The optical substrate may be transparent or may incorporate an absorptive, photochromic or polarizing filter material, wherein by doping the substrate with such materials, laminating such materials between multiple substrates, or This incorporation is achieved by coating materials on one or both sides of the substrate. The boundary surface refractive index of both the inside and outside of the assembly can be matched, for example, by incorporating an appropriate anti-reflection filter to reduce transmission loss and substantially improve the optical quality of the assembled filter. These filters may be incorporated, for example, into eyeglasses (e.g. eyepieces, sunglasses, goggles, monocles, safety glasses, contact lenses or any other suitable ophthalmic lens), or may be incorporated into a lighting body (e.g. a lamp assembly )in. The ophthalmic lens is a lens for the eye. An ophthalmic lens may provide optical (focusing) correction to the eye, or it may have zero diopter and not provide such correction. Eyepieces (such as sunglasses) and contact lenses are examples of ophthalmic lenses. In one aspect, a computer-implemented method for designing an optical filter that affects color vision in a desired manner includes using a computer to solve a linear program given by: Minimizing c T x, subject to the constraint of Ax ≤ b, and subject to the constraint of 1 ≥ x ≥ 0; where, in this method, the linear formula of the vector x is solved and the transmittance of the filter as a function of wavelength Calculated by the following expression: , And assuming p, then ,and ; Where, in this method, f is the design of an optical filter, Is the transmittance of f as a function of wavelength λ, and E is a matrix of basic filters such that matrix e i The behavior is based on the transmittance of light as a function of the wavelength of each basic filter, and the number of basic filters is N. definition The expression is a weighted sum of one of the basic filters, where the weighting coefficient is the corresponding element xi. The weighted sum is equal to the matrix vector product expression q = Ex between the basic filter matrix E and the linear program solution vector x. In addition, The combination series of two optical filters is represented by the multiplication of the first filter q and the second filter p as a function of wavelength, where Is the transmittance of p as a function of wavelength λ, and p is also generally referred to as a "pre-filter" in the present invention, but generally can be composed of component filters in any order. Linear program constraint 1≥x≥0 is equivalent to constraint 1≥x i ≥0, where i is between 1 and N. In addition, c in the above expression is a cost vector that guides the linear program solver toward a solution that provides a filter f that affects color perception in a desired manner. By c T x calculates the total cost associated with the solution, c T x represents the inner product of the transpose of c and x. A solution x that provides a lower overall cost is generally better than the desired function of the filter (such as color discrimination enhancement), but other measures of quality can also be used to determine the adequacy of a particular solution. A in the above expression is a matrix and b in the above expression is a vector. Ax is the matrix product between matrix A and vector x. At least some of the elements of matrix A and at least some of the elements of vector b are related to: the minimum or maximum transmission level of filter f at one or more wavelengths of light; one of the white points of the filter Constraints; or constraints on the color appearance of one or more reference lights (such as viewed or illuminated by a transmissive filter); and / or these transmission constraints of filter f at one or more angles of incidence. The wavelength λ as a function of the above expression can be expressed in a table by uniformly sampling according to a wavelength scale (e.g. using a step size of 1 nm) or another scale that is substantially equivalent (e.g. frequency or log wave number) Filter (e i , p, f) Specifications of transmittance. Sampling can also be defined on an arbitrary scale with uneven intervals between sample points. The filter f (which can be described as a multi-band filter in nature) designed by the method has a spectral transmittance. One of the multi-band filters is a plurality of passbands interleaved with the stop band. In particular, the filter for influencing color perception has three or more passbands separated by two or more stopbands, and each stopband and each passband has a center and a width, where the The center is between about 400 nanometers and about 700 nanometers in the visible spectrum, and the width can be in a range between about 10 nanometers and about 110 nanometers. The lower boundary of a frequency band is defined as the center minus half of the width, and the upper boundary of a frequency band is defined as the center plus half of the width. The average transmittance of a band is the average spectral transmittance of light within the boundaries of those bands. The staggered stopbands share upper and lower boundaries and complementary boundaries of adjacent passbands. A multi-band filter is characterized by one of the smallest contrast ratios to the average transmittance of the stopband and its adjacent passband. For example, a multi-band filter may meet a lower limit of the contrast ratio such that each staggered stopband has an average transmittance that is less than or equal to one-half of the average transmittance of an adjacent passband, for example. A multi-band filter is further characterized by meeting an upper limit of the contrast ratio so that some embodiments of the multi-band filter can be expected to be used with color vision. A filter further incorporated into a device such as an ophthalmic lens is further characterized by a light transmittance, which is defined as the average spectral transmittance of light through the filter weighted by the CIE 1924 photoluminescence function. Filters used in ophthalmic lenses, such as sunglasses, typically have a light transmittance of at least 8%. In addition, the filter white point is defined as the average daylight (i.e., illuminant D65) chromaticity coordinates in a suitable color space, where one (u ', v') chromaticity coordinate means one of the CIELUV color spaces The position and one (x, y) chromaticity coordinate means a position in the CIE xyY color space. The white point of a filter corresponds subjectively to the apparent hue applied by the filter to the field of view, which is described as a neutral white point with a small amount of this hue applied. In some variations, the filter passband is essentially rectangular, that is, the change in transmittance as a function of wavelength within a band boundary is instantaneous or almost instantaneous. The width of a rectangular passband is characterized by the distance between the short-wavelength boundary and the long-wavelength boundary. The rectangular bandwidth can be measured equivalently according to a frequency scale. In some variations, the filter passband is Gaussian in nature, that is, the change in transmittance as a function of wavelength within band boundaries is gradual or essentially smooth. The width of a Gaussian band is characterized by the distance between the half-peak transmittance on the short-wavelength boundary and the half-peak transmittance on the long-wavelength boundary (also known as full-width at half maximum (FWHM)). The half-peak bandwidth can be equivalently measured according to a frequency scale. In some variations, one or more of the passbands may have an irregular shape (ie, non-rectangular and non-Gaussian). For example, the passband may have a bimodal distribution, or it may have a shoulder on one or more sides of the passband, or it may be described as a skewed distribution, where in the transmittance as a function of wavelength, The slope ratio between the two sides of the passband is between about 4: 1 and about 1: 4. In non-Gaussian passband changes, such passbands can be smoothed using, for example, a Gaussian core that is just wide enough to essentially eliminate irregular and / or sharp transitions. In this case, the passband can be described as It essentially has a center of a frequency band and a half-peak width corresponding to a smooth passband. The basic filter may be, for example, a single-passband filter having a passband width of about 1 nanometer, and each basic filter has a different center wavelength of the passband. These filters can also be referred to as monochrome filters and are defined as having the following spectral transmittance: ; among them Is the Dirac-delta function and Is the wavelength transmitted by the filter. For a basic set of filters, the wavelength typically varies between about 400 nm and about 700 nm, and the number of these basic filters in the group is about 300. Alternatively, the basic filters may be single-passband filters each having a width greater than about 1 nm, and each basic filter has a different center wavelength of the passband. In some of these changes, the passband may be rectangular (also known as a square pulse function) and the spectral transmittance of a basic filter is defined as follows: ; among them Is the center wavelength, Is the rectangular bandwidth, and H is the Heaviside step function. In these variations, the passband may have, for example, a width of about 10 nanometers and the frequency band position may vary between about 400 nanometers and about 700 nanometers, for example, in steps of about 5 nanometers, so that these basic filters The number of devices is, for example, about 60. In some variations, the passband may have Gaussian or essentially Gaussian spectral transmittance, such as having a spectral transmittance as defined below: ; among them Is the center wavelength, and the half-peak bandwidth is: , among them Is an exponential function, Is the square root function, and Is the natural logarithm. In other variations, the basic filter may be a multi-band filter having two or more passbands, and each basic filter has a center position and / or a bandwidth of two or more passbands One different combination. Any suitable basic filter can be used in the filter design method. For example, the cost vector c may be selected to direct the linear program solver toward one of the filters that improves color discrimination. In some variations, the cost vector is selected to enhance the discrimination between red and green by increasing the apparent color purity of red and green. These red-green enhancement filters can also improve the apparent purity of blue and therefore can generally be described as enhancing color discrimination. Alternatively, the cost vector may be selected to enhance the discrimination between blue and yellow by increasing the apparent color purity of blue and yellow. These blue-yellow enhancement filters also tend to reduce the apparent purity of red and green. Additionally or alternatively, the cost vector may be selected to reduce transmission of short-wavelength blue light between about 380 nanometers and about 450 nanometers. Additionally or alternatively, the cost vector may be selected to increase transmission of short-wavelength cyan light between about 450 nanometers and about 500 nanometers. Any suitable cost vector can be used in the filter design method. In some variations, the elements of the cost vector c and / or A and b may be selected such that the discrimination of the colors provided by the filters is normal (i.e. the color appearance is substantially the same as that provided by a neutral density filter Color appearance). In some variations, the filter design method includes solving a linear program to generate a test filter f and then evaluating the test filter based on performance criteria, manufacturing criteria, or performance and manufacturing criteria. Some of these changes may also include adjusting matrix A, vector b, cost vector c, basic filter matrix E, pre-filter p or any combination of the above and then solving the linear program expression again to provide another Test filter. The cost vector c may be adjusted, for example, to further improve color discrimination (ie, compared to the color discrimination of a trial filter below the current trial filter). Evaluating the performance of the filter may include evaluating the effect of the filter on color discrimination by: determining a first by calculating the area enclosed by a first contour in a chromaticity plane in a color space Color gamut area, where the first contour corresponds to the appearance of a set of reference colors viewed or illuminated by an observer through a test filter; by calculating a second contour around a chromaticity plane in a color space A second color gamut area, wherein the second outline corresponds to the appearance of the set of reference colors viewed or illuminated by the observer through a reference filter; and comparing the first color gamut area with the The second color gamut area. Alternatively or in addition, evaluating the effectiveness of the filter may include evaluating the effect of the filter on color discrimination by determining one of a first distribution projected onto an axis in a chromaticity plane in a color space A first standard deviation, wherein the first distribution corresponds to the appearance of a group of reference colors viewed or illuminated by an observer through a test filter; determining one of an axis of the chromaticity plane projected onto the color space A second standard deviation of a second distribution, wherein the second distribution corresponds to the appearance of the set of reference colors viewed or illuminated by an observer through a reference filter; and comparing the first standard deviation with the second standard deviation. The axes useful for analysis include the axes defined by the red blind confusion line, the green blind confusion line, and the third type of color blind confusion line. In some variations, evaluating the performance of a filter may include using an average or a weighted average of the performance of the filter at an angle of incidence that deviates from normal incidence. The angular range may be, for example, between about 0 degrees and at least about 20 degrees or, for example, between about 0 degrees and at least about 30 degrees. In some variations, the spectral reflectance of a color sample from the Munsell Color Book specifies the color to be adjusted and / or enhanced by a filter. In some changes, instead of or in addition to samples from the Munsell Color Book, the spectral reflectance of the color mask from Farnsworth D-15 is specified to be adjusted and / or enhanced by filters color. In some variations, as an alternative to or in addition to samples from the Munsell Color Book, spectroscopic reflectance of natural objects including leaves and flowers, for example, are specified by filters to be adjusted and / or enhanced color. In some variations, at least some of the elements of matrix A and vector b in the above-mentioned linear formula expression are related to: constraints on the appearance of blue, red, green, or yellow traffic signals, as viewed through a transparent filter . Such constraints may be based on, for example, industry or regulatory standards, and, for example, require that when viewing traffic light colors through a filter, the color of the traffic light falls within a particular chromaticity and luminous boundary. The method can provide a filter that meets these constraints and improves color discrimination or otherwise enhances color appearance. In some variations, at least some of the elements of matrix A and vector b in the above-mentioned linear formula expression are related to: constraints on the stability of the appearance of the color with respect to the change in the angle of incidence with respect to the light on the filter , As viewed through a filter or illuminated. This stability is provided by the constrained configuration such that the white point of the designed filter is constant or substantially constant at two or more angles of incidence. In addition, in these variations, the filter f may include a total composition of an absorption pre-filter p and an interference filter q, where the change in transmittance of p as a function of the angle of incidence is According to Beer-Lambert's law and the change in the transmittance of Ex as a function of the angle of incidence, according to Snell's law, the transmittance of f at an angle of incidence deviating from the θ radian of the surface normal vector can be expressed as And is approximately expressed by the following expression: ; Where e i The effective reflectivity is n with one of the values of about 1.85, and the approximation is sufficient for θ between about 0 and about 45 degrees. In some variations, at least some of the elements of the matrix A and the vector b in the above-mentioned linear formula expression are related to: the constraint of the filter on the transmission of blue light between about 380 nm and about 450 nm, such as Minimize this transmission. In some variations, at least some of the elements of the matrix A and the vector b in the above expressions are related to the constraint that a minimum transmittance between about 450 nm and about 650 nm is specified by the filter. In some variations, at least some of the elements of the matrix A and the vector b in the above expressions are related to the constraint that a minimum transmittance between about 580 nm and about 620 nm is specified by the filter. In some variations, at least some of the elements of matrix A and vector b in the above expression are related to: for an electronic visual display (such as a liquid crystal display (LCD) with a light emitting diode (LED) backlight) ) Constraints on light transmission of the emitted primary colors. In some variations, at least some of the elements of the matrix A and the vector b in the above expression are related to: normal colors within a range of incident angles on a filter that is, for example, between about 0 and about 30 degrees Recognize and stabilize the appearance of the color to protect the eye from the radiation of a visible laser (such as a octave Nd: YAG laser (which has laser output power at 532 nm and 1064 nm)). In some variations, at least some of the elements of the matrix A and the vector b in the above expression are related to: a stable color in a range of incident angles on a filter, for example, between about 0 and about 30 degrees The appearance protects the eyes from the radiation of a sodium lighting torch, which has the power concentrated at about 589 nanometers. In some variations, at least some of the elements of matrix A and vector b in the above expression are related to: the constraint to provide a selected illuminant, the color of the illuminant viewed after transmission through the filter The appearance matches the color appearance of the illuminant viewed after being reflected by the filter, and the filtered illuminator transmitted by the filter provides enhanced discrimination of one of the selected reference colors, and none of which is transmitted by the filter Part of the light is reflected by the filter. In another aspect, an equivalent numerical optimization procedure is used to replace the linear program in the method summarized above. In these changes, the equivalent procedure may include: using a table to represent all combinations of band positions and bandwidths within a range of possible values; then evaluating each multi-band filter based on constraint criteria and performance criteria; and then choosing to pass A subset of the filters of the constraint criterion; and then the best performing filter in the subset is selected as the experimental filter. These changes may further include evaluating test filters based on performance criteria, manufacturing criteria, or performance and manufacturing criteria. Some of these changes may also include: adjusting constraint criteria, performance criteria, or any combination of the above; and then performing a numerical optimization procedure again to provide another experimental filter. The constraint criterion or performance criterion may be adjusted, for example, to further improve color discrimination (ie, compared to the color discrimination of an experimental filter below the current experimental filter). In another aspect, a computer-implemented method for evaluating the effect of color perception on an experimental filter includes: using a computer; calculating a first contour from a chromaticity plane in a color space by The enclosed area determines a first color gamut area, where the first contour corresponds to the appearance of a group of reference colors viewed or illuminated by an observer through the test filter; An area enclosed by a second contour in a chromaticity plane to determine a second color gamut area, wherein the second contour corresponds to the appearance of the set of reference colors viewed or illuminated by the observer through a reference filter; And comparing the area of the first color gamut with the area of the second color gamut. In some variations, evaluating the effectiveness of a filter may include using an average or a weighted average of the color gamut area provided by the filter at an angle of incidence that deviates from normal incidence. The angular range may be, for example, from 0 degrees to at least about 20 degrees. In some of these changes, the importance weighting function is derived by estimating the probability that the filter is viewed at a specific angle according to a geometric model of the human eye, and the filter is located on the surface of a typical spectacle frame . In some variations, comparing the area of the first color gamut with the area of the second color gamut includes using a ratio of the area of the first color gamut to the area of the second color gamut. In some variations, at least some of the reference colors are selected from Munsell colors. Alternatively or in addition, at least some of the reference colors are selected from Farnsworth D-15. Alternatively or in addition, at least some of the reference colors are selected from colors present in an environment in which the experimental filter will be used to affect color perception. In the latter case, in some variations, at least some of the reference colors are selected from colors that exist naturally in an outdoor environment. In some variations, the reference color is selected to form a contour that surrounds equal saturation among white points in the chromaticity plane. Additionally or alternatively, the reference color is selected to form a highly saturated contour around white points in the chromaticity plane. For example, the reference filter may be selected to have a wide-band transmittance. In some variations, the reference filter is selected to have the same white point as the test filter relative to the selected illuminant (eg, relative to daylight). In some variations, the Munsell color, which is one of the best test filters, is used to define the reference filter, where the measured spectral reflectance of the Munsell color sample is defined as the spectral transmittance of the reference filter. In another aspect, a computer-implemented method for evaluating the effect of color perception on an experimental filter includes: using a computer; determining a first projection on an axis of a chromaticity plane in a color space; A first standard deviation of a distribution, wherein the first distribution corresponds to the appearance of a group of reference colors viewed or illuminated by an observer through the test filter; the determination is made along the chromaticity plane in the color space. One axis projection one second distribution one second standard deviation, wherein the second distribution corresponds to the appearance of the set of reference colors viewed or illuminated by an observer through a reference filter; comparing the first standard deviation with the Second standard deviation. In some variations, the axis was defined as a red blind confusion line. In some changes, the axis is defined as a green blind confusion line. In some variations, the axis is defined as a third type of color-blind confusion line. In some variations, evaluating the effectiveness of a filter may include using an average or a weighted average of the standard deviation of the distribution provided by the filter within a range of incident angles away from normal incidence. The angle range may be, for example, from about 0 degrees to at least about 20 degrees. In some of these changes, the importance weighting function is derived by estimating the probability that the filter is viewed at a specific angle according to a geometric model of the human eye, and the filter is located on the surface of a typical eyeglass frame . In some variations, comparing the first standard deviation to the second standard deviation includes using a ratio of the first standard deviation to the second standard deviation. In some variations, at least some of the reference colors are selected from Munsell colors. Alternatively or in addition, at least some of the reference colors are selected from Farnsworth D-15. Alternatively or in addition, at least some of the reference colors are selected from colors present in an environment in which the experimental filter will be used to affect color perception. In the latter case, in some variations, at least some of the reference colors are selected from colors that occur naturally in an outdoor environment. In some variations, the reference color is selected to form a contour that surrounds equal saturation among white points in the chromaticity plane. Additionally or alternatively, the reference color is selected to form a highly saturated contour around white points in the chromaticity plane. For example, the reference filter may be selected to have a wide-band transmittance. In some variations, the reference filter is selected to have the same white point as the experimental filter relative to a selected illuminant (such as daylight). In some variations, a Munsell color that is best suited for a test filter is used to define a reference filter, wherein the measured spectral reflectance of the Munsell color sample is defined as the spectral transmittance of the reference filter. In another aspect, a multi-band filter for influencing color perception includes a first pass band, a second pass band, and a third pass band separated by two stop bands. The passbands and stopbands are configured to enhance color discrimination for a normal observer (e.g., the functional performance evaluation of the filter may take into account the color of the filter to a 2 degree standard observer of CIE 1931 Effect). The first passband has a center between about 435 nanometers and about 465 nm, the second passband has a center between about 525 nanometers and about 555 nanometers, and the third passband It has a center between about 610 nm and about 660 nm. The widths of the pass bands are each between about 20 nm and about 80 nm, and the widths of the stop bands are each at least about 40 nm. In some variations, the passband is configured (e.g., appropriately positioned and / or shaped) such that the filter provides stable color to an angle of incidence between about 0 degrees and at least about 30 degrees from the surface normal vector Appearance, so that for all or almost all of these angles of incidence, the average white point of daylight is contained in the CIELUV (u ', v') color space and has a radius of about 0.02 units according to the CIE 1931 2-degree standard observer In one of the areas. In some of these variations, the area has a radius of about 0.01 units. In further changes, in addition to or as an alternative to the CIE 1931 2 degree standard observer, the CIE 1964 10 degree standard observer may be used to calculate the chromaticity coordinates. In some variations, the passband is configured such that the filter provides a stable color appearance to an angle of incidence between about 0 degrees and at least about 30 degrees that deviates from the surface normal vector, so that for all or almost all such incidents Angle, the white point of the average daylight is contained in an area having a radius of about 0.02 units according to the CIELUV (u ', v') 1964 2 degree standard observer chromaticity scale. In some of these variations, the area has a radius of about 0.01 units. In some variations, multi-band filters are configured to enhance blue-yellow discrimination. In these changes, the first passband has a center between about 450 nm and about 475 nm, the second passband has a center between about 545 nm and about 580 nm, and the first The three-way band has a center in one of about 650 nm to about 690 nm. In these variations, the passband widths are each between about 20 nanometers and about 60 nanometers. In some of these changes, the filters are configured to provide one of the green traffic signals that has been desaturated or nearly desaturated (as permitted by the standard) as defined by the industry standard ANSI Z80.3-2010. A chromaticity coordinate. In some variations, the multi-band filter has a light transmission of about 8% to about 40%, and the frequency band is configured so that the filter is considered "non-strong" according to the industry standard ANSI Z80.3-2010 color". In some variations, the multi-band filter is configured such that the white point of the filter is neutral or almost neutral, making the filter available in accordance with the industry standard ANSI Z80.3-2010 section 4.6.3.1. And any point on the boundary of the defined average daylight color restricted area is at least about 0.05 units apart (x, y) chromaticity coordinates. In a further variation, the filter is configured so that the white point is located or almost above the average daylight color restricted area. In some variations, the stopband has a minimum transmittance, which is about one fifth of the light transmittance. The minimum transmittance is the lowest value of the spectral transmittance within the boundaries of the stop band. In some variations, the filters are configured to enhance color discrimination and suppress short wavelength light below at least about 440 nanometers. In these variations, the first passband has a center between about 450 nanometers and about 470 nanometers and a width between about 10 nanometers and about 40 nanometers. Meters to a center between about 575 nanometers and a width between about 30 nanometers to about 60 nanometers, the third passband has a central location between about 630 nanometers to about 670 nanometers and about 40 One width between nanometers and about 90 nanometers. In some of these variations, the filter has a light transmission between about 20% and about 35%. In some of these changes, for angles between 0 degrees and at least about 25 degrees, the percentage increase in color gamut area relative to the Farnsworth D-15 color is greater than zero. In some of these changes where the white point is neutral, the weighted percentage of importance relative to the increase in the color gamut area of the Farnsworth D-15 color may be at least 20%. In some variations, the multi-band filter has a light transmittance between about 8% and about 40%, and the frequency band is configured so that the white point of the filter is located or nearly defined as defined by the industry standard ANSI Z80.3 -2010 which is considered to be a non-violent color filter on the boundary. In some variations, filters are manufactured by incorporating a neutral density absorption filter and an interference filter. In some variations, the spectral transmittance of the interference filter is significantly smoothed, and the interference filter includes less than about 50 layers of dielectric material and / or has a total thickness of less than about 3 microns. In a further variation, a filter is manufactured by incorporating a neodymium-containing substrate and the interference filter. The filter may further include a neutral density filter. In some variations, the neutral density absorption filter includes a metal attenuating coating that can be incorporated into the layers of the interference filter. Because a neutral density filter has a generally flat spectral transmittance, a filter configured to be used with a neutral density filter may consist of many essentially equivalent options. For example, a circular polarizing filter can be replaced with a metal attenuation coating to achieve a filter with the same or nearly the same spectral transmittance. If appropriate, filters for any of the above changes may be incorporated into the glasses. Such glasses may include, for example, eyepieces (such as sunglasses), goggles, contact lenses, or any other suitable ophthalmic lens. In another aspect, a multi-band filter for influencing color perception includes a first pass band, a second pass band, and a third pass band separated by two stop bands. The passbands and configurations are configured to provide normal color discrimination and reject short wavelengths below about 450 nanometers. In some variations, the filter has three passbands. The first passband has a center wavelength of about 465 nanometers and a half-peak width of about 20 nanometers. The first stopband has a minimum transmittance of about 14%. The second passband has a center wavelength of about 550 nm and a half-peak width of about 40 nm, the second stopband has a minimum transmittance of about 50% between about 580 nm and about 610 nm, and The third passband has a center wavelength of about 660 nanometers and a half-peak width of about 80 nanometers. In some variations, the filter has four passbands. The first passband has a center wavelength of about 465 nanometers and a half-peak width of about 20 nanometers. The first stopband has a minimum transmittance of about 17%. The second pass band has a center wavelength of about 550 nm and a half-peak width of about 35 nm. The second stop band is located at about 560 nm and has a minimum transmittance of about 40%. The third pass band is located at It is at about 595 nanometers and has a half-peak width of about 35 nanometers, and the fourth passband is at about 660 nanometers and has a half-peak width of about 80 nanometers. In some variations, the passband is positioned and / or shaped such that the filter provides a stable color appearance to an angle of incidence between about 0 degrees and about 40 degrees that deviates from the surface normal vector, so that for all or almost all For these angles of incidence, the (u ', v') chromaticity coordinate of the average daylight is included in one of about 0.01 units of the observer's chromaticity (u ', v') scale according to the CIELUV color space 1931 2-degree standard In one of the radii. In some variations, for angles between 0 degrees and at least about 25 degrees, the percentage increase in color gamut area relative to the Farnsworth D-15 color is greater than zero. In some changes in China, the weighting percentage of white points that are neutral and increase in color gamut area relative to Farnsworth D-15 is between about 0% to about 10%. In some variations, the multi-band filter has a light transmittance between about 8% and about 40%, and the frequency band is configured so that the white point of the filter is located or nearly defined as defined by the industry standard ANSI Z80.3 -2010 which is considered to be a non-violent color filter on the boundary. In some variations, filters are manufactured by incorporating a neutral density absorption filter and an interference filter. In some of these variations, the neutral density absorption filter is a linear polarizer. In a further variation, an optical filter without an absorbing element is manufactured. In some variations, filters are manufactured by depositing an interference filter onto a photochromic substrate. If appropriate, filters for any of the above changes may be incorporated into the glasses. Such glasses may include, for example, eyepieces (such as sunglasses), goggles, contact lenses, or any other suitable ophthalmic lens. In another aspect, a multi-band filter for influencing color perception includes a first pass band, a second pass band, and a third pass band separated by two stop bands. The passbands and stopbands are configured to enhance red-green discrimination for an observer with a red-green perception defect. According to this, the evaluation of the performance measure of the filter can consider the physiological characteristics of the observer. The first passband has a center wavelength between about 440 nanometers and about 455 nm, the second passband has a center wavelength between about 530 nanometers and about 545 nanometers, and the third passband It has a center wavelength between about 610 nm and about 640 nm. The widths of the passbands are each between about 10 nm and about 60 nm, and the widths of the stopbands are each at least about 40 nm. The light transmittance of the filter and the white Dot tone and select the width of these frequency bands. In some variations, the passband is positioned and / or shaped such that the filter provides a stable color appearance to an angle of incidence between about 0 degrees and about 30 degrees that deviates from the surface normal vector, so that for all or almost all For these angles of incidence, the white point of daylight is contained in an area having a radius of about 0.02 units, according to the CIELUV 1931 2-degree standard observer chromaticity (u ', v') scale. In some variations, the passband is positioned and / or shaped such that the filter provides a stable color appearance to an angle of incidence between about 0 degrees and about 35 degrees that deviates from the surface normal vector, so that for all or almost all For these angles of incidence, the white point of daylight is contained in an area having a radius of about 0.04 units according to the CIELUV 1931 2-degree standard observer chromaticity (u ', v') scale. In some variations, the passband is positioned and / or shaped so that the filter provides a stable color appearance, so that the incident angle-dependent distance at which the white point is shifted from its 0-degree incident angle position is between about 20-degree incident angle to about 40 There is a local minimum at one of the angles between the angles of incidence, where the white point displacement at the local minimum is less than 0.02 units of the observer's chromaticity (u ', v') scale according to the CIELUV 1931 2-degree standard observer. In some variations, the passband is positioned and / or shaped so that the filter provides a stable color appearance so that the incident angle-dependent distance that the white point shifts from its 0-degree incident angle position is between about 20 degrees and about 40 degrees There is a local minimum at one of the angles, wherein the white point displacement at the local minimum is less than 0.01 units of the observer's chromaticity (u ', v') scale according to the CIELUV 1931 2-degree standard observer. In some variations, the multi-band filter has a light transmittance between about 8% and about 40%, and the frequency band is configured such that the filter is considered non-rendering according to the industry standard ANSI Z80.3-2010 Strong colors. In some variations, the multi-band filter has a light transmission between about 8% and about 40%, and the frequency band is configured such that the white point of the filter is neutral or almost neutral, making the white point The (x, y) chromaticity coordinates are within about 0.05 units of (0.31, 0.33) of the observer's color space relative to the illuminant D65 and according to the CIE xyY 1931 2-degree standard observer color space. In some variations, the stopband has a minimum transmittance that is about one fifth of the light transmittance between about 450 nanometers and about 650 nanometers. In some variations, the stopband has a minimum transmittance that is about one fifth of the light transmittance between about 580 nm to about 650 nm. In some variations, one or more of the passbands have a skewed distribution, where the transmittance as a function of wavelength has a slope ratio between the two sides of the passband between 4: 1 and 1: 4 . In some variations, one or more of the passbands have an irregular distribution, where the passbands can be described as having essentially a shoulder on one or both sides of the passbands. In some variations, one or more of the passbands have a bimodal distribution, where the center wavelengths of the two modes are within +/- 10% and the distributions around these modes partially overlap. This configuration can also be described as dividing the passband into adjacent partially overlapping subbands. In some variations, the first passband has a bimodal distribution, with the first mode at about 435 nm and the second mode at about 455 nm. In these variations, the peak transmittance of the first mode may be equal to or greater than the peak transmittance of the second mode. In some variations, the filter is configured to define the industry standard ANSI Z80.3-2010 relative to an incident angle where the center wavelength of the second passband is between about 525 nm and about 535 nm. A yellow traffic signal that is reddish or almost reddish (as allowed by the standard) provides a chromaticity coordinate. In some variations, the filter is configured to enhance red-green discrimination for an observer with a weak green. In a preferred variation, the third passband has a center wavelength between about 620 nm and about 640 nm. In some of these variations, the first pass band has a center at about 445 nm, the second pass band has a center wavelength at about 535 nm, and the third pass band has a center wavelength at about 635 nm . In some variations, the filter is configured to enhance red-green discrimination for an observer with a mild green weakness. In some of these changes, the weighting percentage of the white point that is neutral and the color gamut area increase relative to the Farnsworth D-15 color is at least about 30%. In further such changes, for angles between 0 degrees and at least about 25 degrees, the percentage increase in the color gamut area relative to the Farnsworth D-15 color is greater than zero. In some variations, the filter is configured to enhance red-green discrimination for one observer with a moderate green weakness. In some of these changes, the weighting percentage of the white point that is neutral and the color gamut area increase relative to the Farnsworth D-15 color is at least about 35%. In further such changes, for angles between 0 degrees and at least about 25 degrees, the percentage increase in the color gamut area relative to the Farnsworth D-15 color is greater than zero. In some variations, the filter is configured to enhance red-green discrimination for an observer with a severe green weakness. In these variations, the stop band may have a minimum transmittance that is one fifth of the light transmittance between about 580 nm to about 650 nm and less than about 475 nm to about 580 nm. The light transmittance is about one-fifth (for example, about one-tenth). In some of these changes, the weighting percentage of the white point that is neutral and the color gamut area increase relative to the Farnsworth D-15 color is at least about 40%. In further such changes, for angles between 0 degrees and at least about 25 degrees, the percentage increase in the color gamut area relative to the Farnsworth D-15 color is greater than zero. In some variations, the filters are configured to enhance red-green discrimination for one observer with weak red. In some of these variations, the third passband has a center wavelength between about 605 nm and about 620 nm. In some of these variations, the first passband has a center wavelength of about 440 nanometers, the second passband has a center wavelength of about 530 nanometers, and the third passband has a center wavelength of about 615 nanometers. In some of these changes, the white point is neutral and the percentage increase in color gamut area relative to the Farnsworth D-15 color provided by the filter at normal incidence is at least about 40%. In further such changes, for angles between 0 degrees and at least about 25 degrees, the percentage increase in the color gamut area relative to the Farnsworth D-15 color is greater than zero. In some variations, filters are manufactured by incorporating a neutral density absorption filter and an interference filter. In a further variation, a filter is manufactured by incorporating a neodymium-containing substrate, the neutral density absorption filter, and an interference filter. If appropriate, filters for any of the above changes may be incorporated into the glasses. Such glasses may include, for example, eyepieces (such as sunglasses), goggles, contact lenses, or any other suitable ophthalmic lens. In another aspect, a multi-band filter includes three or more pass bands separated by two or more stop bands. The passbands and stopbands are configured to transmit the blue primary light, red primary light, and green primary light of an electronic visual display, so that the light appears to have approximately the same luminosity and the light transmittance of the primary light Light transmission is at least about 15% greater than sunlight. In some of these changes, the white point is neutral, and for angles between 0 and at least about 25 degrees, the percentage increase in color gamut area relative to the Farnsworth D-15 color is greater than zero. In some of these changes, the weighted percentage of importance relative to the increase in color gamut area of the Farnsworth D-15 color is at least about 20%. In some variations, the multi-band filter has a light transmission between about 8% and about 40%, and the frequency band is configured such that the white point of the filter is neutral or almost neutral, making the white point The (x, y) chromaticity coordinates fall within about 0.05 units of the CIE xyY 1931 2-degree standard observer color space relative to (0.31, 0.33) of the illuminant D65. In some variations, the filter has three passbands, and the first passband has a center wavelength of about 450 nm and a width of about 20 nm, and the second pass band has a center wavelength of about 535 nm and A width of about 25 nanometers, and a third passband having a center wavelength of about 615 nanometers and a width of about 30 nanometers. In some variations, the filter has four passbands, the first passband has a center wavelength of about 455 nm and a width of about 20 nm, and the second pass band has a center wavelength of about 540 nm and The third pass band has a center wavelength of about 615 nm and a half-peak width of about 25 nm, and the fourth pass band has a center wavelength of about 680 nm and about 25 nm. One half-peak width. In some variations, the passband is positioned and / or shaped such that the filter provides a stable color appearance to an angle of incidence between about 0 degrees and about 40 degrees that deviates from the surface normal vector, so that for all or almost all For these angles of incidence, the average white point of daylight is contained in an area with a radius of about 0.01 units, according to the CIELUV 1931 2-degree standard observer chromaticity (u ', v') scale. In some variations, a computer display with a filter configured thereon is a liquid crystal display (LCD) with a light emitting diode (LED) backlight. In some variations, the weighting percentage of the white point that is neutral and an increase in the color gamut area of the Farnsworth D-15 color provided by the filter is at least about 20%. In some variations, filters are manufactured by incorporating a neutral density absorption filter and an interference filter. If appropriate, filters for any of the above changes may be incorporated into the glasses. Such glasses may include, for example, eyepieces (such as sunglasses), goggles, contact lenses, or any other suitable ophthalmic lens. In another aspect, a multi-band filter that provides enhanced eye safety is configured to: provide a normal color appearance and also provide a blocking band, wherein the blocking band protects the eye from about 450 nanometers to about 650 nanometers Visible light radiation at one or more wavelengths between meters; and to provide blocking at an angle of incidence ranging from about 0 to about 30 degrees from the surface normal vector of the filter. In some variations, the multi-band filter has a light transmission between about 8% and about 40%, and the frequency band is configured such that the white point of the filter is neutral or almost neutral, making the white point The (x, y) chromaticity coordinates fall within about 0.05 units of the CIE xyY 1931 2-degree standard observer color space relative to (0.31, 0.33) of the illuminant D65. In some variations, the protective blocking band has a short wavelength boundary at about 530 nanometers and a long wavelength boundary at about 560 nanometers to prevent visible light radiation at about 532 nanometers. In these variations, the filter may include four passbands separated by three stopbands, where the middle stopband is the guard band. The first passband has a center wavelength of about 440 nm and a width of about 20 nm. The second passband has a center wavelength of about 515 nm and a width of about 25 nm. The third pass band has a width of about A center wavelength of 570 nm and a width of about 25 nm, and a fourth passband has a center wavelength of about 635 nm and a width of about 25 nm. In these changes, the weighted percentage of importance relative to the increase in the color gamut area of the Farnsworth D-15 color is approximately zero. In some variations, for angles between 0 degrees and at least about 25 degrees, the percentage increase in color gamut area relative to the Farnsworth D-15 color is about zero. In some variations, the blocking band has a short wavelength boundary at about 585 nm and a long wavelength boundary at about 620 nm, and is therefore protected from visible light radiation at about 589 nm. In these variations, the filter may include four passbands separated by two stopbands, with a long-wavelength stopband providing protection. In some variations, the first passband has a center wavelength of about 455 nm and a width of about 20 nm, and the second pass band has a center wavelength of about 540 nm and a width of about 20 nm. The three-pass band has a center wavelength of about 570 nm and a width of about 20 nm, and the fourth pass band has a center wavelength of about 635 nm and a width of about 30 nm. In some of these changes, the white point is neutral and the importance weighted percentage of the increase in color gamut area relative to the Farnsworth D-15 color is between about 0% to about 15%. In some of these changes, for angles between 0 degrees and at least about 25 degrees, the percentage increase in color gamut area relative to the Farnsworth D-15 color is greater than zero. In some variations, the passband is positioned and / or shaped such that the filter provides a stable color appearance to an angle of incidence between about 0 degrees and about 35 degrees that deviates from the surface normal vector, so that for all or almost all For these angles of incidence, the average white point of daylight is contained in an area with a radius of about 0.01 units, according to the CIELUV 1931 2-degree standard observer chromaticity (u ', v') scale. In some variations, filters are manufactured by incorporating a neutral density absorption filter and an interference filter. If appropriate, filters for any of the above changes may be incorporated into the glasses. Such glasses may include, for example, eyepieces (such as sunglasses), goggles, contact lenses, or any other suitable ophthalmic lens. In another aspect, a multi-band filter for influencing color perception includes three or more pass bands separated by two or more stop bands. The passbands and stopbands are configured to maximize blue light reception by retinal ganglion cells and maximize normal color discrimination. In some variations, the multi-band filter has three passbands separated by two stopbands, where the first passband has a center at about 485 nm and a half-peak width of about 90 nm, and the second The passband has a center wavelength of about 580 nm and a half-peak width of about 25 nm, and the third passband has a center wavelength of about 630 nm and a half-peak width of about 25 nm. In some variations, the multi-band filter has four pass bands separated by three stop bands, where the first pass band has a center wavelength of about 430 nm and a half-peak width of about 30 nm, and the second pass The band has a center wavelength of about 495 nm and a half-peak width of about 50 nm, the third pass band has a center wavelength of about 565 nm and a half-peak width of about 20 nm, and the fourth pass band has about One center wavelength of 630 nm and one half-peak width of about 20 nm. In some variations, the passband is positioned and / or shaped such that the filter provides a stable color appearance to an angle of incidence between about 0 degrees and about 30 degrees from the surface normal vector, making it useful for all or almost For all these angles of incidence, the average white point of daylight is contained in a region with a radius of about 0.01 units according to the CIELUV 1931 2-degree standard observer chromaticity (u ', v') scale. In some changes, the weighting percentage of white points that are neutral and increase in color gamut area relative to the Farnsworth D-15 color is between about 0% and about -10%. In some variations, the multi-band filter has a light transmittance between about 8% and about 40%, and the frequency band is configured so that the white point of the filter is located or nearly defined as defined by the industry standard ANSI Z80.3 -2010 which is considered to be a non-violent color filter on the boundary. In some variations, filters are manufactured by incorporating a neutral density absorption filter and an interference filter. In a further variation, a filter is manufactured by incorporating a neodymium-containing substrate, the neutral density absorption filter, and an interference filter. In some variations, the filter specifications are significantly smoothed, so that the interference filter can be manufactured with less than about 50 layers of material. If appropriate, filters for any of the above changes may be incorporated into the glasses. Such glasses may include, for example, eyepieces (such as sunglasses), goggles, contact lenses, or any other suitable ophthalmic lens. In another aspect, a multiband filter includes three or more passbands and two or more stopbands, and the frequency bands are configured to be adjusted and / or enhanced by human vision Color appearance. Spectral transmittance of filter f as a function of wavelength λ It can be approximately expressed by the following expression: ; Where in the above expression, Is passband and To adjust the weighting factor of the passband, and Is the minimum transmittance of the filter. The wavelength λ as a function of the above expression can be expressed in a table by uniformly sampling according to a wavelength scale (e.g. using a step size of 1 nm) or another scale that is substantially equivalent (e.g. frequency or log wave number) Filter transmittance (f, u) specifications. Sampling can also be defined on an arbitrary scale with uneven intervals between sample points. In some variations, the filter includes three passbands and two stopbands (ie, in the above expression, N = 3). In some variations, the filter includes four passbands and three stopbands (ie, in the above expression, N = 4). In some variations, the filter passband is essentially rectangular, that is, the change in transmittance as a function of wavelength at the band boundaries is instantaneous or almost instantaneous. The width of a rectangular passband is characterized by the distance between the short-wavelength boundary and the long-wavelength boundary. The rectangular bandwidth can be equivalently measured according to a frequency scale. The spectral transmittance of a rectangular passband can be defined by the following expression: ; among them Is the center wavelength, Is the rectangular bandwidth and H is the Heaviside step function. In some variations, the filter passband is Gaussian in nature, that is, the change in transmittance as a function of wavelength at the band boundary is gradual or essentially smooth. The width of a Gaussian band is characterized by the distance between the half-peak transmittance on the short-wavelength side and the half-peak transmittance on the long-wavelength boundary (also known as full-width at half maximum (FWHM)). The half-peak bandwidth can be equivalently measured according to a frequency scale. The spectral transmittance of a Gaussian band can be defined by the following expression: ; among them Is the center wavelength, and the half-peak bandwidth is: . In some variations, one or more of the passbands may have an irregular shape (ie, non-rectangular and non-Gaussian). For example, the passband may have a bimodal distribution, or may have a shoulder on one or more sides of the passband, or may be described as a skewed distribution, where in the transmittance as a function of wavelength, the pass The slope ratio between the two sides of the belt is between about 4: 1 and about 1: 4. In non-Gaussian band changes, these bands can be smoothed with a Gaussian core that is wide enough to essentially eliminate irregular and / or sharp transitions, in which case the band can be described as having Corresponds to the center of a frequency band and the half-peak width of a smooth passband. In some variations, the passband is positioned and / or shaped such that the filter provides a stable color appearance to an angle of incidence between about 0 degrees and about 35 degrees from the surface normal vector, making it useful for all or almost For all such angles of incidence, the white point of daylight is contained in an area with a radius of about 0.01 units on the CIELUV 1931 2-degree standard observer chromaticity diagram. In some variations, the passband is positioned and / or shaped such that the filter provides a stable color appearance to an angle of incidence between about 0 degrees and about 40 degrees from the surface normal vector, making it useful for all or almost For all such angles of incidence, the white point of daylight is contained in an area with a radius of about 0.01 units on the CIELUV 1931 2-degree standard observer chromaticity diagram. In some variations, the passband is positioned and / or shaped such that the filter provides a stable color appearance to incident angles between about 0 degrees and about 45 degrees from the surface normal vector, making it useful for all or almost For all such angles of incidence, the white point of daylight is contained in an area with a radius of about 0.01 units on the CIELUV 1931 2-degree standard observer chromaticity diagram. In some variations, the passband is positioned and / or shaped so that the filter provides a stable color appearance, so that the incident angle-dependent distance that the white point shifts from its 0-degree incident angle position is between about 20-degree incident angle to about 45 There is a local minimum at one of the angles between the angles of incidence, where the white point displacement at the local minimum is less than 0.02 units of the observer's chromaticity (u ', v') scale according to the CIELUV 1931 2-degree standard observer. In some variations, the passband is positioned and / or shaped so that the filter provides a stable color appearance, so that the incident angle-dependent distance that the white point shifts from its 0-degree incident angle position is between about 20-degree incident angle to about 45 There is a local minimum at one of the angles between the angles of incidence, where the white point displacement at the local minimum is less than 0.01 units of the observer's chromaticity (u ', v') scale according to the CIELUV 1931 2-degree standard observer. In some variations, the multi-band filter is manufactured as an interference filter. In some variations, a multi-band filter is manufactured to include an interference filter and one or more neutral density absorption filters, and the interference filter provides a passband and a stopband. In some variations, a multi-band filter is manufactured to include an interference filter and one or more broadband absorption filters, and the interference filter provides a passband and a stopband. In some variations, a multi-band filter is manufactured to include an interference filter and one or more narrow-band absorption filters, wherein the interference filter and the absorption filter are co-configured to provide a passband And stop band. In any of the above changes, the multi-band filter f may include an absorption filter p and an interference filter q, where the change in transmittance of p as a function of the angle of incidence is based on Beer-Lambert's law, And the change in transmittance of q as a function of the angle of incidence is based on Snell's law, so that the transmittance of f at an angle of incidence deviating from the surface normal vector by θ radians can be expressed as And is approximately expressed by the following expression: , Where the effective refractive index of the interference filter q is n having a value of about 1.85, and the spectral transmittance of p at the normal incidence is , The spectral transmittance of f at the normal incidence , The spectral transmittance of q at the normal incidence And approximate values of θ between about 0 and about 30 degrees are sufficient. In some of these changes, the spectral transmittance of q can be shifted toward longer wavelengths, as calculated by the following expression: ,and ; among them Is a coefficient that determines the amount of displacement, and One of the performance criteria selected to maximize the filter over a range of incident angles. In some variations, the filter includes an interference filter, in which the spectral transmittance of the interference filter is significantly smoothed, and the width of the smoothing core is selected so as not to excessively impair the filter's performance, while also making The filter can be manufactured as a low-order stacked dielectric material. If appropriate, filters for any of the above changes may be incorporated into the glasses. Such glasses may include, for example, eyepieces (such as sunglasses), goggles, contact lenses, or any other suitable ophthalmic lens. In another aspect, a computer-implemented method for determining the physical thickness distribution of a filter on a surface includes: using a computer; defining the spectral transmittance of the filter; defining the filter at Spectral transmittance within an incident angle range; define a geometric model of the surface; define a geometric model of a human eye; configure the geometric models to approximate the geometry of a spectacle frame, where the surface is installed in the frame and A lens located in front of the eye; for each position on the surface, calculating the incident angle of light that passes through the position to be imaged on the retina of the eye; and specifies a solid thickness at each position, where the solid thickness is configured such that The spectral transmittance is constant or substantially constant at all or almost all positions on the surface relative to the calculated angle of incidence. In another aspect, a computer-implemented method for determining a physical thickness distribution of a filter on a surface includes: using a computer; defining a spectral transmittance of a filter; defining the filter Spectral transmittance in an incident angle range; a geometric model defining the surface; a geometric model defining the relative solid thickness of the filter deposited on the surface (e.g., as a solid thickness achieved by a specific process The results of the distribution prediction and measurement); define a geometric model of a human eye; configure these geometric models to approximate the geometry of a spectacle frame, where the surface is a lens installed in the frame and located in front of the eye; calculation Corresponds to the position on the surface of the center of the field of view; calculates the incident angle of light passing through the center position; defines an importance distribution of each position relative to the center position; specifies a solid thickness at the center position, where the solid thickness is Select so that light that passes through the center and is imaged onto the retina is filtered based on a defined spectral transmittance; calculates the weight of color perception on the surface of the lens Weighted average effect, which is associated with a range of solid thickness variation within +/- 10% of the specified central solid thickness; and then selecting an offset central solid thickness within that range, so that the importance of color vision is weighted average The effect is maximized. In another aspect, a lens of an eyeglass incorporating a multi-band filter includes an optical substrate, one or more reflective interference filters, and is positioned on one or both sides of the reflective filters One or more absorption filters, wherein the absorption filters are configured to reduce the luminosity of the reflected light on one or both sides of the lens. In some variations, the interference filter includes a low-order stack having one of about 12 to about 50 layers of dielectric material, or is between about 1 to about 3 microns thick, or includes having about 12 to about 50 One of the dielectric material layers is a low-order stack and is between 1 and 3 microns thick. In some variations, the interference filter includes a high-order stack having one of about 50 to at least about 200 layers of dielectric material, or is between about 6 microns to at least about 12 microns thick, or includes having about 50 to at least about One of the 200 dielectric material layers is a high-order stack and is between 6 microns and at least about 12 microns thick. The dielectric material layer included in the interference filter may include thin films such as titanium dioxide and silicon dioxide. The material layer can be produced, for example, in a magnetron sputtering machine, for example by physical vapor deposition. Alternatively or in addition, the dielectric material layer may be manufactured, for example, by spin-on deposition. In some variations, a neutral density absorption filter is provided by a metallic attenuation coating. The metallic material layer can be manufactured, for example, by physical vapor deposition. In these variations, the metal layer may be staggered or partially staggered with the dielectric layer of the interference filter. In some variations, a light-activated neutral density absorption filter is provided by incorporating a photochromic material into a glass or polymer substrate. In these variations, interference filters can be deposited on the convex surface of the lens. In some variations, a linear polarization neutral density absorption filter is provided by incorporating a polarizing filter into a laminated composite lens or by coating on the surface of the lens. In these variations, the polarizer may be located between the interference filter and the side of the lens facing the eye. In some variations, an absorption filter is provided by an organic dye in a polymer substrate. The polymer material can be bonded by any suitable method, such as, for example, by incorporating into an optical substrate medium, laminating a film between two optical substrates, or spin coating or dipping the surface of an optical substrate. Into the lens. In some variations, an absorption filter is provided by incorporating an inorganic material into a glass or polymer substrate. In some of these variations, the inorganic materials may include rare earth ions of praseodymium, neodymium, or any mixture of the above. In some variations, one or more absorption filters are configured to affect the color appearance of daylight reflected from the outer surface of the lens (the surface furthest from the eye), where the color appearance is configured for good looking. In some variations, the absorption filter includes: a first circular polarizer positioned on one side of the interference filter and configured to absorb light reflected by the interference filter; and a second circle A polarizer positioned on the side of the interference filter opposite the first circular polarizer and configured to absorb light reflected by the interference filter, and the first circular polarizer and the first Two circular polarizers are configured to transmit light that passes through the interference filter. In some variations, one of the first circular polarizers, which is fixed to one side of the interference filter and configured to absorb light reflected by the interference filter, provides one of the sides closest to the eye's lens Absorptive filter. In a variation incorporating one or more circular polarizers, a circular polarizer includes a linear polarizer and a quarter-wave retarder, and the linear polarizer element can be configured to provide, for example, about 60% Partial polarization efficiency between about 90%. In a variation that includes a linear polarizer, the linear polarizer can be configured to attenuate horizontally polarized light to reduce glare from sunlight reflected from a horizontal surface based on the Brewster angle phenomenon. In some variations, all functional layers of the filter are positioned on one side of the optical substrate, and the opposite side of the substrate has an anti-reflection coating that reduces the scattering and resonance of reflected light in the optical substrate, and the anti-reflection The luminosity-weighted reflectance of the coating is less than about 0.5%. In some variations, the entire functional layer of the filter is sandwiched between two optical substrates, and the outer surfaces of the optical substrates are coated with anti-reflection to reduce the scattering and resonance of the reflected light in the optical substrates. In some variations, the edges of the lens may be sealed with an index-matching absorbing polymer coating that reduces the transmission and scattering of stray light in the optical substrate and also protects the filter layer from contamination (e.g., Avoid penetration of water or solvents into the dielectric or metallic material layer). In some variations, the entire functional layer of the filter is a metal or metal oxide coating compatible with fabrication by physical vapor deposition. In some variations, the optical substrate is chemically toughened glass. In these variations, the glass can absorb, for example, ultraviolet light between about 280 nanometers and about 400 nanometers. In some variations, the interference filter is deposited on a surface such that the physical thickness of the dielectric material layer is configured such that the optical thickness is constant or substantially constant at two or more locations on the surface, The effective incident angles of the light to the filters at the two or more positions differ by at least 20 degrees, and the effective incident angles of the light therein correspond to a beam of light that passes through the lens and is imaged onto the retina of the eye. In some variations, the optical substrate is curved with a radius of curvature between about 50 mm and about 200 mm. In these variations, interference filters and / or attenuation coatings can be positioned on the concave side of the surface. If appropriate, lenses of any of the above changes may be incorporated into spectacles including, for example, eyepieces (such as sunglasses), goggles, or contact lenses. In another aspect, a light source includes an illuminant, a first beam shaping element, a multi-band interference filter, and a second beam shaping element. The light radiated from the illuminating body is substantially collimated by the first beam shaping element. The collimated light beam enters the multi-band filter, wherein the light beam is divided into a transmission part and a reflection part. The transmitting portion and the reflecting portion of the light have the same or substantially the same white point relative to the selected illuminant. The transmitting portion of the light provides illumination that enhances the apparent purity of red and green, and the reflective portion of the light provides illumination that enhances the apparent purity of blue and yellow. The second beam shaping element combines the transmitting portion and the reflecting portion of the light into an output beam, wherein the transmitted light and the reflected light are at least partially spatially separated in the output beam. In some variations, the output beam has a central portion mainly including light transmitted by the multi-band filter and an external portion mainly including light reflected by the multi-band filter. In some variations, the functions of the first beam shaping element and the second beam shaping element are combined in a single beam shaping element. In some variations, the collimation angle of the light from the illuminator incident on the multi-band filter is about 20 degrees. In such changes, the white point of the filter relative to the illuminant for all or almost all positions within the collimated beam may be contained, for example, in the color scale of the observer according to the CIELUV 1931 2-degree standard. 0.01 unit in a radius and an area. In some variations, the multi-band filter includes three passbands separated by two stopbands, where the first passband has a center wavelength of about 450 nm and a bandwidth of about 15 nm, and the second pass The band has a center wavelength of about 535 nm and a bandwidth of about 20 nm, and the third passband has a center wavelength of about 625 nm and a bandwidth of about 30 nm. In some variations, the stopband has a minimum transmittance of about 10%. In a further variation, the stopband has a minimum transmittance of about 1%. In some variations, the illuminator includes one or more phosphor-based white light-emitting diodes and one or more red light-emitting diodes. A wideband combination of light from white light emitting diodes and red light emitting diodes emitted by the illuminator has an equivalent color temperature between about 5000 K and about 7000 K and a CRI between about 80 and about 90 . In some variations, the illuminator includes a phosphor-based white light-emitting diode, a cyan light-emitting diode, and a red light-emitting diode. The light emitted by the combined diode has a broad-band spectral radiant flux with a correlated color temperature between about 5000 K and about 7000 K and a CRI between about 90 and about 100. In some of these changes, the spectral radiant flux of the illuminant is configured as one of the best approximations of average daylight (D65). In some variations, an ophthalmic lens having a multi-band spectral transmittance is provided. The ophthalmic lens includes an optical substrate and an interference filter, wherein the interference filter has a range between about 30% and about 80%. A light reflectance and a light transmittance between about 8% and about 70%. All methods and variations disclosed herein for designing, evaluating, or otherwise evaluating optical filters, spectacles, ophthalmic lenses, illuminants, and other optical components or devices, and their variations may include the steps of manufacturing the object, manufacturing the object Another step or a step of providing one article's manufacturing specifications to another article, whether or not this step is explicitly stated in a description of a particular method, article or variation thereof. Those skilled in the art will further understand these and other aspects, embodiments, variations, features, and advantages of the present invention when referring to the [embodiments] of the present invention and the drawings briefly described first.

相關申請案之交叉參考 本申請案係關於2011年3月3日申請且名稱為「MULTI-BAND OPTICAL FILTERS FOR GOOD COLOR APPEARANCE」之臨時美國專利申請案第61/449,049號,該案之全文以引用方式併入本文中。 應參考圖式而閱讀[實施方式],其中相同參考數字意指全部不同圖中之相同元件。未必按比例繪製之圖式描繪選擇實施例且不意欲限制本發明之範疇。[實施方式]以舉例方式(而非以限制方式)繪示本發明之原理。[實施方式]將使熟習技術者能夠清楚地製造及使用本發明,且描述本發明之若干實施例、調適、變動、替代及用法,其包含目前所認為之實施本發明之最佳模式。如本說明書及隨附申請專利範圍中所使用,若上下文無另外清楚指示,則單數形式「一」及「該」包含複數個涉及物。 可連同光學科學、人類色覺科學、比色法科學及相關主題之一般理解而有益地閱讀本發明之教示。對於此等主題之一般參考,例如參閱Günter Wyszecki及W.S. Stiles之「Color Science: Concepts and Methods, Quantitative Data and Formulae」(Wiley, 1982, ISBN #0471021067)。 為不失一般性,本發明可假定人類視覺系統之一習知組態:具體言之(若無另外說明),具有一2度視場之一正常人類觀察者之感光色覺之人類視覺系統。感光色覺出現在照明之位準足夠高使得桿狀感光細胞未激活時,例如出現在平均表面照明為約10勒克司(lux)或更大時。在本發明中,若無另外說明,則使用CIE 1976 L*u'v'(LUV)色彩空間(其使用具有一2度視場之CIE 1931標準觀察者)來計算色彩外觀模型。由CIE標準S014-5/E:2009給出此計算之細節。圖中使用CIE 1976等色差表色系(UCS)來展示色度圖,其中色度座標為(u',v')值,如由該標準所計算。對於一般技術者,此等教示藉由引入感光色素光譜吸收率之一變量及/或具有視場之角大小及用在分析中之色彩外觀之選擇之預受體眼組件(其包含眼介質及黃斑色素)而提供足以使教示適用於替代條件(其包含例如CIE 1964 10度標準觀察者之使用以及觀察者之眼睛及視網膜生理之變動)之規程(例如考量色覺缺陷、年齡及/或眼病理)。 在本發明中,照明體D65(D65)意指具有日光之典型光譜輻射通量及6500開耳芬(Kelvin)之一相關色溫之光,且由聯合ISO/CIE標準ISO 10526:1999/CIE S005/E-1998定義。在本發明中,「日光」、「太陽光」或「平均日光」之涉及物意指照明體D65。照明體E意指被定義為具有以波長為函數之相等功率之一理想燈。照明體A意指通常為白熾燈泡之一燈,其被定義為具有根據Planck定律之一理想黑體輻射體之光譜輻射通量及2848 K之一相關色溫。包括照明體FL1至FL12之燈系列(其表示典型類型之螢光燈之光譜輻射通量)由CIE 15號出版物:2004定義。Munsell色彩為由特定色素配製以建立在光譜域處所定義之一色彩標準之一組色彩樣品。Munsell色彩可以印刷形式用於Munsell色彩大全(Glossy Edition, ISBN #9994678620, 1980)。由Parkkinen J.P.S.、Hallikainen J.及Jaaskelainen T.之「Characteristic spectra of Munsell colors」(Journal of the Optical Society of America A,第6卷,第2期,1989年,第318頁至第322頁)出版Munsell色彩之光譜反射率之量測值。Farnsworth D-15為一標準化色彩辨別測試,其包括依Munsell標度形成具有2至4之間之色度之一輪廓之15個Munsell色彩樣本。由公開案「The Farnsworth dichotomous test for color blindness panel D15 manual」(News York:Psych公司;1947, Farnsworth D)描述Farnsworth D-15。 包含於本發明中之圖式可為程序流程圖,其視覺地描繪廣義物體及處理並產生該等物體之操作之流程。圖58描繪用於促進視覺語言理解之一程序流程圖之一實例。在此圖式中,圓角框(例如5801及5803)描繪可被理解為物理實體、虛擬實體(諸如數值資料)或含有組件物體之一異質集合體之複合物體之物體。由具有一雙線框之一圓角框(例如5808及5811處所展示)描繪含有物體之一異質集合體之一複合物體。用一虛線箭頭描繪自一複合物體擷取之一組件物體,例如連接實體5801及5803所展示。由一實線箭頭展示程序中之物體之流程,例如連接實體5801及5802所展示。一方形框(例如5802及5805)表示一操作。操作可產生物體、變換物體或分析物體。由自一操作之框指向遠處之箭頭展示該操作之輸出。一操作之輸出取決於可藉由跟隨引導至該操作之框中之全部箭頭而追蹤之該操作之輸入。操作可藉由囊封另一程序圖而形成為一複合操作,例如5806處所展示。此建構使程序流程圖能夠在多個頁面上擴展,藉此可在參考一圖式時調用定義於另一圖式中之一複合操作。操作可串聯或並聯地連接在一起,執行特定操作時所依之順序之細節未必由程序流程圖語法定義,而是必須由隨附描述推導出。一雙線箭頭(例如連接5808及5809所展示)表示複數個同質物體之流程之反覆。用一雙線方形框展示經反覆之操作,例如5809。一經反覆之操作相對於經反覆之各物體而變動其輸入,但可相對於未經反覆之物體而保持恆定輸入,例如沿連接5807及5809之流程箭頭所展示。提供用在本發明中之程序流程圖以在連同隨附詳細描述一起解譯時促進理解。 色感可一般被理解為產生於入射至視網膜之光之光譜輻射通量與視網膜光受體細胞之光譜吸收率之相互作用。圖1之程序流程圖中描繪感光色覺之程序及用於影響色感之一光學濾光器之應用。在本文中,一照明體101(諸如日光)輻射至一光學系統102中。由一照明體發射之光一般可被視為白光。在光學系統102內,自一參考色彩104之表面反射白光(103)。接著,反射光可被描述為一彩色光,假定該參考色彩不呈中性(即,非灰色調)。其後,波長選擇透射105可藉由穿過一光學濾光器106而變換該彩色光。由於必須遵守能量守恆定律,所以未被透射之光之部分必須在此接面處由該濾光器反射或吸收。光學系統102相對於其內部操作之重新排序而不變,即,可在照明該參考色彩之前或之後等效地應用該濾光器。 隨後,一觀察者可藉由視覺光轉導115之程序而感知過濾光。在感光條件下之視覺光轉導中,由包含短波長視錐細胞108、中波長視錐細胞110及長波長視錐細胞112之三種視網膜光受體細胞在107、109及111處吸收光。由各細胞吸收之總能量被轉換成經由視神經而透射至視皮質中以最終導致色感之神經激勵。為了色彩外觀模型化,充分假定:視錐細胞之輸入-輸出回應與所吸收之能量線性成比例。此線性回應可被稱為三色值,其可被視為具有非負分量之三維空間中之一向量。如所描述,三色值之空間有時被稱為SML色彩空間或視錐激勵空間。 三色空間中之點之間之距離未必與色刺激對之間之所感知差異完全對應,所以採用一色彩外觀模型118係有利的(如下文參考圖3所進一步討論),色彩外觀模型118將三維三色向量變換成發光度117(亦稱為亮度或強度)之一維分量及色度116之二維分量(其表示與發光度無關之刺激之表觀色彩)。色度可被視為二個維度中之一向量值,在該情況中,該向量值可被稱為一色度座標。色度可進一步被分成色相及飽和度(亦稱為純度,其本質上為色彩刺激與一白色刺激之間之所感知差異)。應注意,視網膜光受體細胞108、110及112(圖1)之光譜吸收率取決於觀察者且因人而異。此外,一色彩外觀模型118之形成亦可取決於觀察者113,然而,為不失一般性,可在隨後描述中使用標準模型。 圖2A中展示一正常人眼之視網膜視錐細胞(其包含短波長視錐細胞201、中波長視錐細胞202及長波長視錐細胞203)感光色素之光譜吸收率之曲線圖。然而,如先前所提及,視網膜光受體細胞之光譜吸收率可因人而異。此等差異為導致色覺缺陷之根本原因。例如,具有綠色弱之個體具有一中波長視錐細胞感光色素,其具有朝向更長波長位移之一光譜吸收率;及具有紅色弱之個體具有一長波長視錐細胞感光色素,其具有朝向更短波長位移之一光譜吸收率。具有綠色弱之個體在辨別紅色與綠色時比正常個體經歷更多困難。具有紅色弱之個體亦在辨別紅色與綠色時比正常個體經歷更多困難,且亦趨於將紅色視為更不明亮。可藉由依一log波數標度位移一感光色素模板(例如,藉由使用由Stockman, A.及Sharpe, L. T.之「Spectral sensitivities of the middle- and long-wavelength sensitive cones derived from measurements in observers of known genotype.」(Vision Research,第40期,2000年,第1711頁至第1737頁)公佈之模板)而近似表示異常視網膜感光色素之光譜吸收率。 圖2B中之表列舉人群中之已知基因型變體及最大感光色素吸收率之相關聯波長,其中表之最左行含有基因型204之一標示(關於細節,參閱Asenjo, A.B.、Rim, J.及Oprian, D.D.之「Molecular determinants of human red/green color discrimination」,Neuron,1994年,第12卷,第1131頁至第1138頁),下一行指示可為正常、綠色弱或紅色弱之分類205且其中異常類型根據可為輕度、中度或重度之嚴重程度而進一步分類,及剩餘行指示短波長視錐細胞感光色素之最大吸收率之波長(以奈米為單位)206、中波長視錐細胞感光色素之最大吸收率之波長(以奈米為單位)207及長波長視錐細胞感光色素208之最大吸收率之波長(以奈米為單位)。此表包含最常見類型之遺傳色覺缺陷:綠色弱具有約4%之一全球流行率(且約8%為男性及小於1%為女性);紅色弱具有約0.5%之一流行率(約1%為男性及小於0.1%為女性)。色覺缺陷在男性中之更高流行率歸因於遺傳異常基因之X隱性。短波長視錐細胞感光色素之異常被稱為第三型色弱。遺傳第三型色弱較罕見,然而,當視錐細胞(特定言之,短波長視錐細胞)例如因曝露於諸如汞之某些毒素而受破壞時,會出現後天第三型色弱色覺缺陷。具有第三型色弱之個體會在辨別藍色與黃色時比正常人經歷更多困難。 色覺之標準觀察者模型可經構想以最佳適配於正常人群,且未必提供任何特定個體或亞族群之色彩感知之一良好模型。然而,若可充分取得任何個體之生理特性,則可建構該任何個別之生理相關觀察者模型。 如圖3中所展示,可用圖形表示根據三色模型之一光之所感知色彩外觀,其中曲線圖之軸對應於短波長視錐細胞之神經激勵310、中波長視錐細胞之神經激勵306及長波長視錐細胞之神經激勵301,及三色值為對應於一特定光之色彩外觀之一點302(例如由一參考色彩所反射或由一照明體所發射)。三色值為三維點,其之維度對應於由各種視錐細胞吸收之光能之部分。光自身可被視為一本質上無限維之向量,且其光譜可使用一分光光度計來量測,然而,三色值僅為三維的。因此,諸多不同光可映射至三色空間中之相同點,且映射至三色空間中之相同點之一組光被稱為色變對。 自光之光譜域至色彩外觀之三色域之投影為一線性映射,因此,保留光之加法及純量乘法。此性質隱含三色值之幾何形狀。例如,若由一集合之光之非負添加混合物(即,一凸線性組合)形成一複合光,則該複合光之三色值必須含於凸多面體內,該凸面體之角為組成光之三色值。 再次參考圖3,軸之原點307對應於黑色之外觀(即,不存在光及零神經激勵)。光譜軌跡為一組三色值,其形成對應於該組單色光(即,僅具有一單一波長之能量之理想光)之色彩外觀之一輪廓309。由於任何光可被視為該組單色光之一凸線性組合,所以三色值總是含於廣義錐體內,該錐體之頂點為原點307及其邊界由光譜軌跡309定義。 為了光學濾光器之隨後分析,且如上文所簡要討論,三色表示可被有用地分成發光度之一維分量及色度之二維分量。此等變換亦為線性映射。發光度回應為與原點及照明體E之三色值一致之三色空間中之一線。可藉由將三色值投影至發光度回應線303上且接著量測投影305之向量範數而計算一光之所感知發光度。發光度線(其在此圖式中亦由光譜軌跡309勾畫)亦正交(垂直)於等效發光體三色值之一平面,且可藉由將三色值投影至此平面304上而計算一光之所感知色度。隨後,可藉由一仿射映射而進一步變換色度投影以產生一色度座標(其為一空間中之二維值),其中色度座標之間之距離與等效發光體光之間之所感知差異近似成比例,其被稱為例如如同CIE 1974等色差表色系(UCS)之一等色差表色系。 在一等色差表色系中,可觀察到:自白光(例如照明體E)至光譜軌跡之距離隨波長而變動。特定言之,黃色單色光(例如,具有一單一波長(標稱上為585奈米)處之一光譜輻射通量)及青色單色光(例如,具有約490奈米之特性波長之一單色光)似乎在主觀上比藍色單色光、綠色單色光或紅色單色光更類似於白光且對應地在UCS圖上更接近於白光。因此,實質上阻隔黃光及/或青光波長之濾光器可改良色彩之表觀純度,且此等濾光器之一般形式包括至少三個通帶及至少兩個阻帶。 以波長λ為函數之一多頻帶濾光器f之光譜透射率可實質上如下表達式近似表示:; 其中,在上述表達式中,為通帶及為調整通帶之加權係數,為濾光器之最小透射率,及n為等於或大於3之通帶之數目。 可藉由依一波長標度(例如使用1奈米之一步長)或實質上等效之另一標度(例如頻率或log波數)均勻取樣而用表格表示上述表達式中之以波長λ為函數之濾光器之透射率(f, d)之規格。亦可依樣本點之間具有不均勻間隔之一任意標度定義取樣。 在一些變動中,濾光器通帶(d)本質上呈矩形,即,頻帶邊界處之以波長為函數之透射率之變化係瞬時的或幾乎為瞬時的。一矩形通帶之寬度之特徵為短波長邊界與長波長邊界之間之距離。可依一頻率標度等效地量測矩形頻寬。一矩形通帶之光譜透射率可由如下表達式定義:; 其中為中心波長,為矩形頻寬,及H為Heaviside階梯函數。 在一些變動中,濾光器通帶本質上為高斯的,即,頻帶邊界處之以波長為函數之透射率之變化係漸進的或本質上為平滑的。一高斯通帶之寬度之特徵為短波長側上之半峰透射率至長波長邊界上之半峰透射率之間之距離(亦稱為半高全寬(FWHM))。可依一頻率標度等效地量測半峰頻寬。一高斯通帶之光譜透射率可由如下表達式定義:; 其中為中心波長,及半峰頻寬為:。 在一些變動中,通帶之一或多者可具有一不規則形狀(即,非矩形且非高斯)。例如,通帶可具有一雙峰式分佈,或可在通帶之一或多側上具有一凸肩,或可被描述為一偏態分佈,其中在以波長為函數透射率中,通帶之兩側之間之斜率比介於約4:1至約1:4之間。 在關於非高斯通帶之變動中,可用足夠寬以本質上消除不規則及/或急轉過渡之一高斯核心來使此等通帶變平滑,在此情況中,通帶可被描述為(本質上)具有對應平滑通帶之一頻帶中心及半峰寬度。 用於評估濾光器之效能之一般方法用於判定對於涉及色覺之一特定應用何者之可能濾光器組態係較佳的。可藉由量測兩個濾光器之間之相對於一組參考色彩之相對色域面積而進行此一分級方法。如本文所使用,一色域面積為由一色度圖中之一組參考色彩之座標定義之一輪廓內之面積。該色度圖中之該等參考色彩之位置係濾光器相依的,因此,該色域面積亦為濾光器相依的。圖4中呈現用於計算相對色域面積之一程序流程圖。 在圖4所描繪之方法中,相對於一試驗濾光器401、一參考濾光器405、一照明體402、一觀察者404及一組參考色彩403而定義相對色域面積。該試驗濾光器及該參考濾光器較佳地具有相同白點,即,對於兩個濾光器,經過濾照明體之三色值相同。此限制無需採用可使結果偏置之一色度調適模型(諸如von Kries模型)。方法可受益於該組參考色彩之一適合選擇,如本發明後文中參考圖6A及圖6B所描述。另外,該參考濾光器經較佳選擇以具有一寬頻帶光譜透射率,使得該參考濾光器提供最少或幾乎不提供色彩外觀之失真。對於任何給定試驗濾光器,可例如藉由依據Munsell色彩之光譜反射率組比較該試驗濾光器且接著採用最佳適配於該參考濾光器之Munsell色彩(例如,具有相對於經選擇照明體之最類似白點之色彩)而找到一適合參考濾光器,其中經選擇之Munsell色彩之反射率被定義為該參考濾光器之透射率。在操作406中計算該試驗濾光器之色域面積,且在操作407中計算該參考濾光器之色域面積。例如使用一比率410來比較所得色域面積408與409以獲得相對色域面積411。1.0之一相對色域面積隱含:該試驗濾光器不提供色彩外觀之失真,且該試驗濾光器據說可提供正常色彩辨別。大於1.0之一相對色域面積隱含:該試驗濾光器增大該等參考色彩之間之所感知差異。一般而言,此等差異增大在紅色與綠色之間更大,因此,該試驗濾光器據說可提供增強之紅綠色辨別。小於1.0之一相對色域面積隱含:該試驗濾光器減小該等參考色彩之間之所感知差異,一般而言,此作用與藍色與黃色之間之一差異增大相關聯,因此,該試驗濾光器據說可提供增強之藍黃色辨別。應瞭解,基於參考色彩之色度座標之分析之相對色域面積量測與該等參考色彩之所感知發光度無關,例如,色彩刺激之間之表觀差異之增大並不基於一色彩呈現為罕見暗色且另一色彩呈現為罕見亮色之事實。 替代地,此等增大或減小可用色域面積增加之百分比(PGAI)表示,其由如下表達式定義:,及,及; 其中為相對於試驗濾光器f、參考色彩S、照明體I及觀察者O之色域面積計算(如下文連同圖5所描述),及為相對於參考濾光器及類似條件之色域面積。為在本發明之下文中評估濾光器,使用用於計算色域面積增加之百分比之兩個方法之一者或另一者。在一方法中,照明體I被定義為照明體D65,觀察者O被定義為結合CIELUV (u',v')等色差表色系之CIE 1931 2度標準觀察者,及參考色彩S被指定為Farnsworth D-15面板之任一色彩,及色域面積增加之百分比由如下表達式給出:。 在另一方法中,參考色彩由經選擇之自然界樣本給出(如連同圖6B所描述),及色域面積增加之百分比由如下表達式給出:。 在上述兩個表達式中,相對於給定條件而計算色域面積。 可實施圖4之操作406及407中之色域面積之計算,例如圖5之程序流程圖中所詳述。就一特定照明體502、一濾光器503及一組參考色彩501而言,各參考色彩發生一光學相互作用505。如上文相對於圖1之操作102所解釋,該光學相互作用可例如為:該參考色彩反射來自該照明體之經過濾光;或該濾光器過濾已由該參考色彩反射之來自該照明體之光。該等光學相互作用導致由一觀察者507(即,觀察者模型)接收且藉由視覺光轉導506而轉換成一組三色值之一組彩色且經過濾之光,如上文例如相對於圖1之操作115所解釋。該組三色值藉由一色彩外觀模型508而進一步變換,且被還原成一組色度座標509。就此等座標(其為二維色度圖上之點)而言,可使用例如Delaunay三角量測演算法510來形成一網格。可藉由對該網格中之各三角形之面積求和而將所得網格轉換成一面積,且計算之最後結果為色域面積512。 色域面積之計算受益於參考色彩組之適合規格,該適合規格繼而至少部分地取決於濾光器之意欲用途。參考色彩應包含至少三個要素,其等之色度座標形成圍封白點之三角形(即,照明體之色度座標)。較佳地,參考色彩組包括足夠多之數目(例如至少5個)且包括足夠多樣性之光譜反射率,使得色域面積計算相對於濾光器之透射率之變化而穩定,其降低使一濾光器設計過於專門化之風險。在一些情況中,可較佳地使參考色彩之光譜透射率變平滑以達成所要穩定性。 例如,一組Munsell色彩可被選擇用於色域面積計算,使得其等之色度座標近似地形成圍繞白點之中等飽和之一圓。該等Munsell色彩之光譜反射率係寬頻帶的且以一受控方式相對於色相而變動。此在圖6A之曲線圖中顯而易見,其中展示包含601處之Munsell 5B 5/4、602處之Munsell 5G 5/4、603處之Munsell 5Y 5/4、604處之Munsell 5R 5/4及605處之Munsell 5P 5/4之Munsell色彩之一選集。在進一步變動中,可較佳地選擇具有高飽和度之一組Munsell色彩。 替代地或另外,參考色彩之部分或全部可取自Farnsworth D-15(其在本文中亦被稱為D-15)。D-15包括一組之15個Munsell參考色彩,其形成圍繞白點之中等飽和之一輪廓。提供相對於該等D-15色彩之色域面積增加之一濾光器亦將趨於在一觀察者執行測試且透過該濾光器觀看樣品時提供根據D-15上蓋配置測試之增加分數。 替代地或另外,參考色彩之部分或全部可直接取樣自其中將使用濾光器之環境。特定言之,隨後所展示之若干實施例可有用地併入於太陽鏡中,且因為太陽鏡一般在日光照射下之戶外佩戴,所以可藉由量測自然彩色物體(諸如葉子及花)之光譜反射率而較佳地找到參考色彩。圖6B之曲線圖展示此等自然物體之光譜反射率,其包含藍花之光譜反射率606、綠葉之光譜反射率607、黃花之光譜反射率608、紅花之光譜反射率609及紫花之光譜反射率610。此等自然色彩取自由Parkkinen, J.、Jaaskelainen, T.及Kuittinen, M.之「Spectral representation of color images」(IEEE 9th International Conference on Pattern Recognition,義大利羅馬,1988年11月14日至17日,第2卷,第933頁至第935頁)公佈之218個經量測樣品之一資料庫。 可易於自圖6A及圖6B之曲線圖觀察到,自然界之色彩具有比Munsell色彩更多樣之一分佈,且進一步含有某些顯著特徵:例如,自然界中之綠色607取決於由在約540奈米處具有一特性峰值之葉綠素之光譜反射率,而相對於Munsell色彩(其為人造色素),被描述為綠色之色彩通常在約525奈米處具有一峰值反射率。 如圖7A至圖7C及圖8A至圖8C之圖式中所展示,可便利地視覺化相對色域面積之計算(如上文所描述)及多頻帶濾光器對色彩外觀之色度態樣之效應。在圖7C中,711處展示一參考濾光器之光譜透射率,其亦為經選擇以與712處所展示之試驗濾光器之白點最匹配之一Munsell色彩。照明體被指定為照明體D65,且圖7B中用曲線圖表示其光譜輻射通量710。 在圖7A中,一色度圖用於繪製經選擇之Munsell色彩之色度座標,如給定照明體及不同濾光器條件下所觀看。在該色度圖中,圍封實線709為對應於單色光譜光之色度座標之光譜軌跡,且線段708被稱為紫光連接線。濾光器之白點實質上相同且展示於點706處。沿虛線輪廓701及705之空心圓處展示經選擇之Munsell色彩之色度座標(如透過參考濾光器711所觀看)。沿實線輪廓702及703之實心圓處展示經選擇之Munsell色彩之色度座標(如透過試驗濾光器712所觀看)。內輪廓與中等飽和之經選擇之Munsell色彩對應,及外輪廓與高度飽和之經選擇之Munsell色彩對應。藉由檢查該等輪廓,應瞭解,該等色彩之色度座標(如透過試驗濾光器所觀看)覆蓋該色度圖之一較大面積,且特定言之,該等色度座標展示沿紅色至綠色之軸之色度座標之分離之一明顯增加(綠色主要出現在軌跡之左上角之「前端」附近(大致在(0, 0.5)處)且紅色本質上出現在軌跡之右上角處(0.5, 0.5))。因此,試驗濾光器(相較於參考濾光器,其具有大於1.0之一相對色域面積)可被描述為增強紅綠色辨別。 在圖7A之實例中,起始於點704且順時針行進之內輪廓之參考色彩為:Munsell 10B 5/4、Munsell 10BG 5/4、Munsell 10G 5/4、Munsell 10GY 5/4、Munsell 10Y 5/4、Munsell 10YR 5/4、Munsell 10R 5/4、Munsell 10RP 5/4、Munsell 10P 5/4、Munsell 10P 5/4及Munsell 10PB 5/4。起始於點707且順時針行進之外輪廓之參考色彩為:Munsell 7.5B 5/10、Munsell 10BG 5/8、Munsell 2.5BG 6/10、Munsell 2.5G 6/10、Munsell 7.5GP 7/10、Munsell 7.5GY 7/10、Munsell 2.5GY 8/10、Munsell 5Y 8.5/12、Munsell 10YR 7/12、Munsell 5YR 6/12、Munsell 10R 6/12、Munsell 2.5R 4/10、Munsell 7.5RP 4/12、Munsell 2.5RP 4/10、Munsell 7.5P 4/10、Munsell 10PB 4/10及Munsell 5PB 4/10。 繼續色域面積之視覺化,圖8A至圖8C之圖式展示相同試驗濾光器及參考濾光器相對於自然界之色彩之效應。在圖8C中,810處呈現參考濾光器之光譜透射率,及811處呈現試驗濾光器之光譜透射率。圖8B中展示照明體之光譜輻射通量809。 在圖8A中,804處展示濾光器之白點。虛線輪廓807及808對應於經選擇之自然色彩之色度座標(如透過參考濾光器所觀看),及實線輪廓802及803對應於相同自然色彩之色度座標(如透過試驗濾光器所觀看)。內輪廓對應於五個自然色彩之外觀,該五個自然色彩之光譜反射率亦自點807起依逆時針順序分別呈現於圖6B之曲線圖中之606、607、608、609及610處。外輪廓對應於可用在先前所引用之資料庫中之自然色彩之最飽和實例之外觀。當自然色彩可為用於分析一濾光器在一室外背景中之效用(例如,用於併入於太陽鏡中)之一更佳選擇時,Munsell色彩提供一更容易解譯之視覺化,因此,本發明中之剩餘圖為此採用Munsell色彩。 迄今,例如圖7C及圖8C中之用於增強色彩外觀之多頻帶濾光器之實例具有含三個矩形通帶及兩個阻帶之結構。可藉由列舉給出6個自由度之各頻帶之起始波長及終止波長而唯一地指定此一濾光器。因而,一電腦可用於:完全列舉整組之可能濾光器;接著使用如上文所描述之相關色域面積度量來對每個此濾光器之效能進行分級;及接著針對一所要效應選擇最佳濾光器(諸如用於增強紅綠色辨別、或增強藍黃色辨別或維持正常色彩辨別)。以濾光器為特徵之自由度數目之增加可例如藉由容許透射率在頻帶內變動或增加可能頻帶之數目而將搜尋擴大至一更大組。 沿此等線,用於設計以一所要方式影響色覺之一光學濾光器之一電腦實施方法列舉如下。假定:所要濾光器包括光學總組成中之一預濾光器及一多頻帶干涉濾光器。首先,指定以下各者:該預濾光器在整個可見光譜內之透射率;該光學濾光器之一所要白點;該光學濾光器之一所要最小總光透射;一照明體;複數個參考色彩;及一初始試驗多頻帶干涉濾光器,其包括覆蓋可見光譜之複數個鄰接阻波長帶及通波長帶。接著,藉由變動該初始試驗多頻帶干涉濾光器之該等阻波長帶止及該等通波長帶之邊界、透射率或邊界及透射率而產生一或多個新試驗多頻帶干涉濾光器。接著,針對該預濾光器與該等新試驗多頻帶干涉濾光器之一者之各組合而判定該光學濾光器之白點及總光透射。接著,使用指定照明體及參考色彩來評估該預濾光器與該等新試驗多頻帶濾光器之一者之各組合之該光學濾光器對色覺之效應。接著,該等新試驗多頻帶干涉濾光器之一者(對於該新試驗多頻帶干涉濾光器,該光學濾光器滿足指定白點及指定最小總光透射且以所要方式影響色覺)經選擇以在該光學濾光器中作為該多頻帶干涉濾光器。 在此方法中,預濾光器可在整個可見光譜內具有約100%之一透射率。即,預濾光器係選用的。初始試驗干涉濾光器可共包括例如五個或五個以上阻帶及通帶。產生新試驗干涉濾光器可包括:例如,變動初始試驗干涉濾光器中之通帶數目、阻帶數目或通帶數目及阻帶數目。另外或替代地,產生新試驗干涉濾光器可包括:變動阻帶或通帶之一或多者之形狀。評估對色覺之效應可包括:本說明書中所揭示之評估方法之任何者。方法亦包括:指定約束一參考色彩之外觀之一色彩約束,如透過光學濾光器所觀看或照亮;評估預濾光器與新試驗多頻帶濾光器之一者之各組合對該參考色彩之色彩外觀之效應;及選擇新試驗多頻帶干涉濾光器之一者(對於該新試驗多頻帶干涉濾光器,光學濾光器滿足指定色彩約束)用於在光學濾光器中作為多頻帶干涉濾光器。本說明書中所揭示之色彩約束之任何者可與此方法一起使用。 作為上述方法之一可能缺點,用於達成所要效應之最佳濾光器可在一些情況中不成為所研究之濾光器組之一成員。此外,上述策略會因待評估之可能濾光器之數目倍增及各額外自由變量而變得難以駕馭。 另一相關方法為使用一準牛頓適應方法來在一子集之可能濾光器中搜尋且沿一經評估之最佳方向朝向所要濾光器遞增移動。然而,在一些情況中,由此類型之方法找到之解決方案可僅為局部最佳。 包含直接列舉及局部搜尋之此等方法之一進一步難點在於:難以或無法對濾光器施加約束,舉例而言,諸如相對於一經選擇照明體之濾光器白點之規格。相反,通常必須評估各試驗濾光器以判定其是否滿足此等約束。 為約束白點,可將一濾光器表示為白點之色變對之一線性組合,例如表示為三色色變對組內之一加權組合(即,本質上包括光之三個不同波長),然而,此需要具有數千個自由度之一表示,此係因為此等色變對之數目較大,且當搜尋空間具有如此多之維度時,準牛頓搜尋方法一般會過度緩慢。此外,此一方法無法容易地實現超出濾光器白點之額外約束之規格。 計算上有效率且實現多個約束準則之規格(下文中詳細描述)之濾光器設計之一方法為採用線性程式化之方法。此方法可存在諸多不同優點:一線性程式解算器使用一序列之遞增步驟來快速定位最佳解決方案,然而,一線性程式之解決方案係唯一的且全域最佳(相對於輸入)。此外,可約束解決方案以滿足與色彩外觀之色度態樣及發光態樣相關之有用準則。市售線性程式解算器可迅速判定一組給定約束是否無解決方案(即,不可行),且此等解算器亦可快速判定具有數千個自由變量及數百個約束之線性程式之最佳解決方案。可在可表達為一線性系統之一問題遭受線性約束及一線性成本函數時採用線性程式化。接著,詳細闡述與如何構想影響色覺之一濾光器之設計準則及如何將該設計準則轉化成一線性程式相關之細節。 下文所揭示之濾光器產生方法併入一線性程式解算器(縮寫為LP),其一般可被描述為用於判定相對於一線性成本函數且遭受線性約束之一資源分配問題之最佳解決方案之一方法。當應用至設計色覺之濾光器之問題時,待分配之資源可被理解為濾光器之以波長為函數之透射率,線性約束源自於濾光器之使用要求,且線性成本函數本質上為可將線性程式解算器引導向可行解決方案之範疇內之一較佳解決方案所依據之一機制。可藉由使用一電腦來解算由如下表達式給出之一線性程式而實踐藉由線性程式化之濾光器產生方法: 最小化cT x, 遭受Ax≤b之約束,及 遭受1≥x≥0之約束; 其中,在此方法中,解算向量x之線性程式,及以波長為函數之濾光器之透射率由如下表達式計算: 若,及 若p,則,及; 其中,在此方法中,f為經設計之光學濾光器,為以波長λ為函數之f之透射率。E為基本濾光器之一矩陣,使得矩陣ei 之行為以各基本濾光器之波長為函數之光之透射率,及基本濾光器之數目為N。定義之表達式為基本濾光器之一加權求和,其中加權係數為對應元素xi 。加權和等於基本濾光器矩陣E與線性程式解向量q之間之矩陣向量乘積q=Ex。此外,藉由以波長為函數之第一濾光器q與第二濾光器p之乘法而表示兩個光學濾光器之組合系列,其中為以波長λ為函數之p之透射率,及p在本發明中一般亦被稱為一「預濾光器」,但可依任何順序組成該等濾光器。線性程式約束1≥x≥0等效於約束1≥xi ≥0,其中i介於1至N之間。此外,上述表達式中之c為一成本向量,其引導線性程式解算器朝向提供以所要方式影響色覺之一濾光器f之一解決方案。由cT x計算與該解決方案相關聯之總成本,cT x表示c之轉置與x之間之向量內積。提供一較低總成本之解決方案x一般相對於所要功能而更佳,但品質之其他量測亦可用於判定一特定解決方案之適當性。上述表達式中之A為一矩陣,及上述表達式中之b為一向量。Ax為矩陣A與向量x之間之矩陣積。矩陣A之元素之至少若干者及向量b之元素之至少若干者係相關於:濾光器f在光之一或多個波長處之最小或最大透射位準;對濾光器白點之一約束;或對一或多個參考光之色彩外觀之約束,如透過濾光器所觀看或照亮;及/或濾光器f在一或多個入射角處之此等透射約束。 可藉由依一波長標度(例如使用1奈米之一步長)或實質上等效之另一標度(例如頻率或log波數)均勻取樣而用表格表示上述表達式中以波長λ為函數之濾光器之透射率(ei ,p,f)之規格。亦可依樣本點之間具有不均勻間隔之一任意標度定義取樣。 基本濾光器可例如為具有約1奈米之一通帶寬度之單通帶濾光器,且各濾光器具有一不同通帶中心波長。此等濾光器亦可被稱為單色濾光器,且被定義為具有如下光譜透射率:; 其中為迪拉克Δ函數,及為由濾光器透射之波長,對於整組之基本濾光器組,該波長通常在400奈米至700奈米之間變動。在此情況中,基本濾光器矩陣E本質上為301×301之一單位矩陣。替代地,基本濾光器可為各具有大於約1奈米之寬度之單通帶濾光器,且各基本濾光器具有一不同通帶中心波長。在一些此等變動中,通帶可呈矩形(亦稱為一方脈衝函數)且一基本濾光器之光譜透射率被定義如下:; 其中為中心波長,為矩形頻寬,及H為Heaviside階梯函數。矩形頻寬之一典型選擇為約10奈米,在該情況中,基本濾光器之數目亦可減少,使得相鄰濾光器之間存在一5奈米間隔。在一些變動中,通帶可具有高斯或本質上為高斯之一光譜透射率,例如由如下表達式定義:; 其中為中心波長,及半峰頻寬為:。 在其他變動中,基本濾光器可為具有兩個或兩個以上通帶之多頻帶濾光器,且各基本濾光器具有該兩個或兩個以上通帶之中心波長及/或頻寬之一不同組合,在該情況中,基本濾光器之數目可較大(例如數千個組合)。可例如藉由相對於照明體904及參考濾光器912(圖9)將頻寬及/或頻帶透射率位準調整為色變對而組態多通帶基本濾光器。任何適合組之基本濾光器可用在濾光器設計方法中,其中一適合基本濾光器必須至少具有一物理可實現之透射率光譜(例如,具有0至1之間之透射率值),且必須進一步實現與濾光器相關聯之一成本之計算,後文連同圖12A及圖12B之討論而對其加以描述。較佳地,基本濾光器具有緊湊支撐(即,在一有限間隔外,透射率為0),使得可應用稀疏線性代數之數值計算方法,其包含用於解算一線性程式之內點法。 應觀察到,如上述表達式中所定義之f包括基本濾光器之一加權求和,其中基本濾光器一般為單通帶或多通帶濾光器(例如,包括如先前所描述之一或多個矩形或高斯通帶),可推斷,經設計之濾光器f可被理解為多頻帶濾光器,然而,通帶之數目本質上非常大(例如,至少60個)且組成通帶可部分重疊。因此,可由方法設計之可能濾光器f之範圍包含具有三個或四個頻帶之多頻帶濾光器以及具有更複雜透射率曲線之多頻帶濾光器。然而,實際上,圖中將展示:最有用濾光器設計通常具有本質上可被描述為頻帶之三個或四個特徵,但該等頻帶之本質形狀在一些例項中可不規則,即,非矩形且非高斯。例如,一或多個通帶可被描述為具有一雙峰式分佈,或可在通帶之一或多側上具有一凸肩,或可被描述為一偏態分佈,其中在以波長為函數之透射率中,通帶之兩側之間之斜率比介於約4:1至約1:4之間。 在關於非高斯通帶之變動中,可用例如僅足夠寬以本質上消除不規則及/或急轉過渡之一高斯核心來使此等通帶變平滑,在此情況中,通帶可被描述為本質上具有對應平滑通帶之一頻帶中心及半峰寬度。 圖9含有描述濾光器產生之一程序(依據設計準則之一規格)之一程序流程圖。框903中呈現下文更詳細描述之電腦實施之濾光器產生器操作。輸入至濾光器產生器操作中之設計準則(下文亦更詳細描述)可包含例如成本向量901(上文所提供之線性程式表達式中之向量c)、光譜透射率約束902、色彩外觀約束915、濾光器白點約束908、照明體904、參考濾光器912、觀察者918、基本濾光器913(上文所提供之表達式中之矩陣E)、選用預濾光器(上文所提供之表達式中之p,其可被設定待有效略過之整體)919、選用平滑核心920及選用偏置係數923。 仍參考圖9,基本濾光器及各種其他設計準則被輸入至三色約束計算操作910(下文相對於圖11進一步詳細描述),三色約束計算操作910產生約束投影界限906(線性程式表達式中之向量b)及約束投影範數909(線性程式表達式中之矩陣A)。接著,由約束投影界限906、約束投影範數909及成本向量901用公式表示一線性程式907(如由上文所提供之線性程式表達式所描述)。接著,由一線性程式解算器905解算該線性程式,線性程式解算器905提供該線性程式之解決方案作為一一解向量911。解向量911為上文所提供之線性程式表達式中之最佳向量x。解向量911之元素為係數xi ,其等給對應基本濾光器ei (其等為表示基本濾光器組913之矩陣E之行)提供加權因數。接著,操作914執行由解向量911之對應元素加權之基本濾光器之一求和以提供一第一濾光器,第一濾光器接著在916處(視情況)經平滑、接著在922處(視情況)經偏置且與一第二濾光器(預濾光器)919組合以產生經設計之濾光器規格921。 可例如藉由組合一吸收預濾光器與一干涉濾光器而製造經複合設計之濾光器921,其中該干涉濾光器組件由操作914及/或操作916之輸出指定。該預濾光器可本質上為透明的(即,係均一的或幾乎均一的),或可具中性密度(即,係恆定的或幾乎恆定的),或可具有一寬頻帶透射率(即,依據波長而平滑且緩慢地變動),或可具有窄頻帶或多頻帶透射率。方法考量之規格中之p之此等性質,使得所得濾光器f滿足輸入設計準則。連同圖24A、圖24B、圖28A及圖28B而詳細描述較佳預濾光器之選擇。特定言之,具有窄頻帶吸收率之預濾光器之使用可較佳地用於一些應用且連同圖20A及圖20B而對其詳細地加以論證及描述。 用於設計及製造干涉濾光器之同期方法(例如使用非四分之一波長光學監測)可製造幾乎具有任何光譜透射率曲線之一濾光器。然而,實施一特定濾光器規格所需之介電材料層之數目係變動的。對介電材料層之總數目之任何所需限制例如需要:光譜透射率曲線具有一有限複雜性。例如,以波長為函數之透射率之斜率必須連續且有界限。 為改良可製造性,可對由加權求和操作914提供之濾光器規格執行一平滑操作916。例如,可藉由916中之頻域迴旋而將一平滑核心920應用至操作914處所提供之最佳濾光器。該平滑核心可例如為具有一半峰寬度(其為中心波長之2%)之一高斯核心。在進一步實例中,該平滑核心可為具有一半峰寬度(其為中心波長之約10%)之一高斯核心,使得可用一低階介電堆疊(例如小於約50個材料層)實現濾光器規格。替代地或另外,可使基本濾光器變平滑(例如藉由作為高斯濾光器而非矩形濾光器之規格)。接著,自平滑操作916輸出之經平滑濾光器類型可用作為用於製造一(例如干涉)濾光器之一規格。一般而言,平滑之數量可經調節以改良遭受以下要求之可製造性:濾光器之所要功能(例如其對色覺之效應)未因由平滑而明顯降級。例如,該平滑核心之寬度可被選擇為最寬核心,使得濾光器之通帶內之峰值透射未明顯減少。儘管平滑係選用的,但本文所描述之全部濾光器實施例(如由上述線性程式方法所設計)採用具有約10奈米至約25奈米之間之一半峰寬度之一平滑核心。 特定言之,為改良濾光器效能,在穿過濾光器之光之入射角在某一範圍內變動之條件下,一偏置係數923可用於使濾光器規格朝向更長波長偏置(922)。連同圖29A至圖29B及圖30A至圖30B而進一步詳細描述偏置係數之選擇。 現返回至濾光器產生器操作903(圖9)之各種輸入,必須指定成本向量901(上述線性程式化表達式中之c),使得一成本可與各基本濾光器相關聯。例如,若基本濾光器各為單通帶濾光器,則可由一函數指定以波長為函數之一成本且每個基本濾光器之成本由如下表達式計算:。 替代地,若基本濾光器為三通帶濾光器(其中各基本濾光器具有三個或三個以上通帶),則成本函數901可例如為基本濾光器之相對色域面積之一函數,(例如)與一基本濾光器相關聯之成本可被定義如下:; 其中為由基本濾光器提供之色域面積,及為由一最佳適配參考濾光器提供之色域面積。成本向量901可在濾光器設計程序開始時被指定且在濾光器之設計期間不被進一步改變。替代地,可在反覆設計程序中之設計程序(諸如(例如)下文相對於圖12而更詳細描述之程序)期間變動成本向量901。 一成本向量之規格提供使濾光器產生方法可引導線性程式解算器朝向一較佳濾光器設計之一方法,此係因為線性程式解算器將避免具有一相對較高成本之基本濾光器之併入(即,正加權)(若無必須滿足一或多個約束)。較佳濾光器設計可根據濾光器之目標應用而變動,因此,成本函數之規格亦應適當變動。例如,圖12A展示以波長為函數之成本之兩個函數(例如,用於與如先前所描述之一組單通帶基本濾光器一起使用),其中該等成本函數經選擇以最大化濾光器設計之相對色域面積,由此導致方法設計使紅綠色辨別增強之一濾光器。為設計使藍黃色辨別增強之一濾光器,可例如藉由乘以負1而使此等成本函數反轉。成本函數1201經組態以最大化相對於經選擇之Munsell色彩之相對色域面積,如圖6A中之601、602、603、604及605處所展示。成本函數1202經組態以最大化相對於經選擇之自然界色彩之相對色域面積,如圖6B中之606、607、608、609及610處所展示。就其他相同設計準則而言,Munsell色彩之成本函數導致濾光器1204(圖12B)且自然色彩之成本函數導致濾光器1203(亦參閱圖12B)。應注意,自然界濾光器1203之中通帶相較於Munsell色彩之濾光器1204而紅移達約10奈米,且亦在短波長通帶中找到更長波長之一類似偏好。此等細節並非無關緊要,例如,自然界濾光器1203導致更少之綠色色相失真,綠色之光譜反射率主要取決於植物中之葉綠素之含量,且葉綠色具有比人造綠色色素明顯更長之一反射率峰值波長,其與如先前連同圖6A及圖6B所討論之兩個不同組之參考色彩之分析一致。 再次參考圖9,觀察者918一般為具有正常視覺之一標準觀察者。若濾光器設計意欲校正十分極端之一缺陷,則可選擇一特定缺陷觀察者。照明體904根據濾光器之意欲用途及環境而選擇,且可例如為本文所揭示之任何適合照明體。參考濾光器912經選擇以設定經設計濾光器之意欲白點,其中白點為如透過參考濾光器所觀看之經選擇照明體之色度座標,且經設計之濾光器將以相同白點為特徵。參考濾光器亦已可用在一相對色域面積計算(如上文所描述)中以比較經設計之濾光器與參考濾光器,例如下文相對於圖13所描述。 圖9中所展示之剩餘設計準則輸入為光譜透射率約束902、濾光器白點約束908及色彩外觀約束915。各色彩外觀約束包括:一參考光(由其光譜輻射通量定義);一發光度約束,其使得所得濾光器必須規定如透過濾光器所觀看之該參考光之發光度在一界限間隔內;及一選用色度約束,其使得所得濾光器必須規定如透過濾光器所觀看之該參考光之色度座標含於界限色度座標之凸包內。亦相對於觀察者918及預濾光器919而指定前文所提及之觀看條件。 此外,光譜透射率約束902及濾光器白點約束908為如由虛線流程箭頭所指示之一色彩外觀約束915之特殊情況。一光譜透射率約束可被表達為一色彩外觀約束,其中參考光為具有一特定波長之一單色光,且該單色光之發光度被界限於某一發光度間隔內(應注意,一單色光之色度無法由任何濾光器改變)。一些光譜透射率約束係必需的,例如,透射率必須被界限於各可見波長處之0.0%至100.0%之間以產生一被動光學濾光器。該濾光器之白點約束包括一參考光(其為經選擇之照明體),且進一步提供一發光等式約束及一色度邊界。一般而言,該色度邊界可具有本質上無限小之大小,使得白點被精確設定。替代地,該色度邊界可具有一較寬邊界,其例如包含以參考濾光器之白點為中心之一近似圓形區域。對於色覺需要,濾光器白點經一般設定或否則被約束於對應於被視為非呈強勁色彩之色彩之色度圖之一中心區域內。對於待用在太陽鏡中之濾光器之設計,照明體較佳地代表日光(例如照明體D65),且基於照明體所界限之發光度介於約8%至約40%之間。 如上文所提及,一色彩外觀約束被指定為基於色度座標之一邊界及基於一參考光之色彩外觀之發光度之一界限間隔。此等資料在幾何學上可被理解為三色模型中之一約束多面體,如圖10A及圖10B之圖式中所展示。更具體言之,提供滿足該約束之一色彩外觀之一濾光器經組態使得如透過該濾光器所觀看之該參考光之三色值含於本質上呈錐形之一凸多面體(1001、1002)中,其中該色度邊界形成壁狀表面(例如1005)之一封閉輪廓,且該發光度界限間隔定義包含下發光度界限1007及上發光度界限1006之兩個蓋狀表面。該等蓋狀表面平行於等亮平面1004且各含於自原點分別移位達對應上發光度界限及下發光度界限之平面中。該等壁狀表面各含於與原點相交之平面中。該色度邊界由一組色度座標之凸包指定,該組色度座標在被轉換成三色值時定義錐體1005之壁。若且唯若三色值至全部壁之向內指向之表面法向向量(圖中未展示)上之投影之向量範數係非負的,則實例性三色值1003滿足該色度邊界。此外,若且唯若三色值至上蓋及下蓋之向內指向之表面法向向量(圖中未展示)上之投影之向量範數分別大於/小於下發光度界限及上發光度界限,則實例性三色值1003滿足發光度界限。該等表面法向向量為三色空間中之向量,根據定義,其等垂直於含有一表面之平面。若發光度之下限為零,則錐體到達原點處之一頂點。若發光度無上限,則錐體沿與發光度回應線之相同之方向無限延伸。此廣義錐體之幾何結構容許一色彩外觀約束轉換成一系統之線性約束,如下文所額外詳細描述。 再次參考圖9,色彩外觀約束915經由910處之計算而轉換成一組線性約束,910處之操作相對於各色彩外觀約束915及各基本濾光器913而反覆操作以導致線性約束投影界限906之向量及約束投影範數909之矩陣。 由圖11之程序流程圖進一步詳述一色彩外觀約束至一系統之線性約束之轉換,其中三色約束計算1102對應於圖9中之操作910。在本文中,一色彩外觀約束1101可被指定為一參考光1105、一色度邊界1106及一發光度界限間隔1104。可將此等界限轉換成觀察者1103之三色空間中之一廣義多面錐體(操作1109),如連同圖10A及圖10B之描述所闡釋。自所得幾何形狀,操作1109提供:一矩陣1112,其包括正交(垂直)於該多面體之表面且自該多面體之表面向內指向之向量;及自含有一表面1113之各平面之原點偏移之一向量,其對於壁狀表面而言為零且對於如先前所描述之蓋狀表面而言等於上發光度界限及下發光度界限。 接著,色彩約束之界限幾何形狀與各基本濾光器1107之間之相互作用被判定為如下。計算穿過基本濾光器1107之參考光1105之透射率1108,接著計算穿過預濾光器1210之透射率1111,接著計算由觀察者1114接收之經過濾光之視網膜感光色素吸收率1115(即,視覺光轉導),從而導致對應於如透過基本濾光器及預濾光器所觀看之參考光之三色值1117。接著,使用一矩陣-向量積1116來將三色值1117投影至約束多面體之表面法向向量(矩陣1112中)上,從而導致約束多面體之每個表面之三色值之一組向量長度(範數)1119及將確保相對於色彩外觀約束之抑制之對應界限1118。此等約束投影範數為基本濾光器相對於約束之線性屬性。例如,若投影至一表面法向向量上之三色值具有長度零,則該基本濾光器有效地正交於約束且任何數量之濾光器可在不違反該特定邊界之情況下併入於解決方案中。若約束投影範數為非零,則範數之量值給出導致經設計之濾光器朝向或遠離約束邊界移動之以基本濾光器之線性加權為函數之比率。 再次參考圖9,將此等結果累積於約束投影範數矩陣(上述線性程式表達式中之A)909及約束投影界限向量(上述線性程式表達式中之b)906中,其中該等結果現呈在併入於線性程式907中時相容之一適合格式。 在一些實施例中,一色彩外觀約束1101(圖11)亦可包含參考光1105相對於基本濾光器1107之一入射角,在該情況中,可應用一適當變換以正確地計算1108及1111中之光之所得透射,使得如透過基本濾光器及預濾光器所觀看之參考光之三色值亦考量參考光之該入射角。例如,若濾光器將被製造為一干涉濾光器,則該入射角可用於根據Snell定律而位移基本濾光器(基於波長之百分比)。(例如,參閱圖16A中之曲線1601)。此外,若預濾光器為一吸收類型,則計算可根據Beer-Lambert定律而考量路徑長度差異。接著,可由組件q=Ex與p之總組成表達複合濾光器f,使得f在偏離於表面法向向量之θ弧度之一入射角處之透射率可被表示為且由如下表達式近似表示:; 其中ei 之有效折射率為具有約1.85之一值之n,及對於約0度至約45度之間之θ,該近似值係足夠的。在非零入射角處併入色彩外觀約束尤其有用於提供在非理想觀看條件下具有改良色彩穩定性之濾光器設計。為評估本發明中之濾光器,一濾光器f相對於入射角θ之白點位移由如下表達式定義:, 其中,在上述表達式中,(u0 ,v0 )及(u0 ,v0 )為法向入射及θ度偏離入射處之如透過濾光器所觀看之照明體D65之CIELUV (u',v')色度座標(相對於CIE 1931 2度標準觀察者)。替代地,相對於CIE 1964 10度標準觀察者而計算白點位移。 現參考圖13之程序流程圖,在一些實施例中,一濾光器設計程序係反覆的。此一反覆程序可開始於輸入至設計程序1302之濾光器產生器1303中之濾光器設計準則1301之一初始規格。設計準則1301可例如包含圖9中所展示之設計輸入之部分或全部。與製程相關之額外資訊1309亦可輸入至亦在設計程序1302中之選用製造分析程序1308(下文中進一步描述)。此製造資訊可例如包含:對製造設備使用之時間限制;製造成本或預算;及對濾光器結構之實體限制,舉例而言,諸如,對厚度、厚度均勻性、組合物或用於製造一濾光器之材料層之組合物之均勻性之限制。 濾光器產生器1303可例如相同或實質上相同於上文參考圖9所描述之濾光器產生器903。濾光器產生器1303產生試驗濾光器1305,其可例如為:一最佳濾光器類型,其相關於以波長或頻率為函數之透射(例如由圖9中之操作914所輸出);一平滑最佳濾光器類型,其相關於以波長或頻率為函數之透射(例如由圖9中之操作916所輸出);或一複合濾光器設計,其併入一選用預濾光器(例如由圖9中之操作917所輸出)。 可在操作1307處視情況分析試驗濾光器1305(圖13)之光學效能。此效能分析可例如包含計算相對於一參考濾光器1304、一照明體1306及一組參考色彩1301(其等之全部為至設計程序1302之選用額外輸入)之相對色域面積1314。可例如使用上文參考圖4所描述之程序來計算相對色域面積。若相對色域面積不合意(即,過高或過低),則可在操作1315處調整成本函數且據此在透過設計程序1302之另一反覆之前更新濾光器設計準則1301。 在其中如剛所描述般調整成本函數之實施例中,設計程序1302之首次反覆可利用例如呈(例如兩個)高斯函數(其等各以一中心波長、一寬度及一振幅為特徵)之總和形式之以波長為函數之一初始成本函數。該成本函數可進一步包含藉由與任何單調函數相加或相乘而併入之一單調偏置。例如,單調函數可為線性的。當反覆設計程序且在各反覆中計算相對色域面積時,可使用調整該成本函數以增大(或替代地,減小)色域面積之任何適合習知最大化方法來調整該成本函數。調整該成本函數可例如包含:改動以高斯為特徵之參數;改動以所存在之任何單調偏置為特徵之參數;或改動以高斯為特徵之參數及改動以一偏置為特徵之參數。亦可使用該成本函數或該成本函數之參數化之任何其他適合形式,或可使用用於調整該成本函數之任何其他適合方法。 作為使用相對色域面積來評定一試驗濾光器相對於色彩辨別之效能之一替代,在一些實施例中,色度空間中之參考色彩之分佈之特徵為計算分佈之一或多個標準偏差。可在沿色度空間之紅綠色軸及藍黃色軸或沿方向或軸之任何其他適合選擇投影分佈時計算該等標準偏差。至綠色盲混淆線上之投影可較佳用於評估待由綠色弱觀察者使用之濾光器。至紅色盲混淆線上之投影可較佳用於評估待由紅色弱觀察者使用之濾光器。至第三型色盲混淆線上之投影可較佳用於評估待由第三型色弱觀察者使用之濾光器,或可用於評估濾光器以確保:沿紅綠色辨別之一垂直或幾乎垂直軸之標準偏差之互補增加不會負面影響藍黃色辨別。相較於參考濾光器而增加一或多個此等標準偏差之試驗濾光器可被視為增強沿色度空間中之一或多個對應方向之色彩辨別。相較於參考濾光器減少一或多個此等標準偏差之試驗濾光器可被視為減弱沿色度空間中之一或多個對應方向之色彩辨別。類似於上文相對於相對色域面積所描述,在一些實施例中,用在設計程序1302中之成本函數可經反覆調整以最大化或最小化如透過試驗濾光器所觀看之色度空間中之參考色彩分佈之一或多個標準偏差。 現返回至設計程序1302中之效能分析操作1307(圖13),操作1307亦可視情況評定符合業界或政府規章標準(舉例而言,諸如美國國家標準協會(ANSI) Z80.3-2010(2010年6月7日核准)或ANSI Z87.1-2010(2010年4月13日核准),該兩個標準之全文以引用方式併入本文中)之試驗濾光器。可執行此分析以例如確保:試驗濾光器在意欲應用中(例如在操作一機動車輛時)供一人類觀察者安全使用。基於此標準順應分析之結果1313,操作1316可構想濾光器設計準則1301之額外或經修改之色彩外觀約束以指引濾光器設計程序1302符合標準。 除效能分析1307之外或作為效能分析1307之一替代,可在操作1308處分析試驗功能1305之可製造性。此操作可產生例如一經估算之製造成本1312及提供容限及/或加工規程之一製造規格1311。經估算之製造成本1312可被表達為例如一總製造時間、一總財務成本或以上兩者。基於經估算之製造成本1312,操作1317可視情況調整色彩約束、平滑(例如圖9中之操作916)或色彩約束及平滑以指引濾光器設計程序1302朝向具有一較低經估算製造成本之一濾光器。例如,可增加平滑核心920(圖9)之寬度,或可適當放鬆或收緊對某些區域中之光譜透射率之約束。 若操作1316或1317處添加或修改之約束產生不可行之設計準則(即,無法解決線性程式化問題之設計準則),則線性程式解算器(例如圖9中之905)可偵測此情形。接著,可放鬆或修訂約束,直至恢復可行性。 可重複整個濾光器設計及分析程序1302,直至達成一滿意(例如最佳)濾光器設計,此時,製造規格1311可被採用且用於製造光學濾光器。 如本文所描述之濾光器可基於例如光之吸收、反射或吸收及反射而過濾光。濾光器可例如包含干涉濾光器、吸收濾光器及偏振濾光器(偏振濾光器通常包含圍封一波長選擇偏振旋轉器之一對線性偏振器)之任何適合組合。干涉濾光器及複合濾光器之干涉濾光器部分(如本文所揭示)可例如被製造為使用約12個至200個層且每100個層具有約6微米之一總厚度及具有約1.8至約1.9之間之一典型有效折射率之介電塗層。此等多層干涉塗層可例如被施加於具有0至約10屈光度之間之一基弧之玻璃或光學聚合物基板上,其中屈光度被定義為由一透鏡量測計校準至1.523之一折射率之球面曲率之量測值。 本文所揭示且意欲用於眼鏡之干涉濾光器設計亦可被指定用於與一圓形偏振器組合使用,其之細節於圖24A及圖24B及隨附描述中給出。 本文所揭示且意欲用於眼鏡之干涉濾光器之進一步設計亦可被指定用於與一中性密度吸收體或一寬頻帶吸收體或一窄頻帶吸收體組合使用,其等之細節於圖28A及圖28B及隨附描述中給出且其等之特定實例連同圖20A及圖20B之討論而被揭示。 一般而言,在下文中,假定:製程(至少)包含將介電材料物理氣相沈積於具有不同厚度及折射率之一序列之塗層中以形成一干涉濾光器。工業機器及程序可容易地取得且實現此等濾光器(其包含具有部分透射率之區域及/或通帶之不規則組態之濾光器)之高產量高精確度製造。可代以使用任何其他適合製程,或任何其他適合製程亦可與此一物理氣相沈積程序組合使用。 若無另外約束,則經設計以增強紅綠色辨別之濾光器可趨於降低黃光之透射,其可導致一黃色交通信號顯得更暗且更類似於紅色(例如橙色或微紅色)。類似地,使藍黃色辨別增強之濾光器可趨於導致綠光顯得更類似於藍色或白色(例如不飽和)。為避免此及類似潛在問題,併入於通用眼鏡(諸如太陽鏡)中之濾光器例如可經組態使得所得眼鏡提供某些色彩(特定言之,平均日光及交通信號光之色彩)之一調節外觀。對於某一眼鏡,此需要例如滿足工業或政府規章標準。可使用上文所描述之方法(例如藉由將適合約束施加至濾光器設計)來設計符合要求組態。一發光度約束可確保:此等光(例如日光、交通信號光)在透過過濾眼鏡而被觀看時顯得適度更亮。被指定為色度座標中之凸邊界之一色度約束可確保:此等光落在約束邊界內且因此將被觀察者視為具有正確標準色名之一色相,即,確保:日光本質上呈白色;及交通信號被正確辨別為例如交通信號綠色指示燈、交通信號黃色指示燈及交通信號紅色指示燈。 圖14A展示通用眼鏡之此「一般用途」約束之實例。實例性色度邊界1401規定:黃色交通燈不呈橙色或紅色。點1402展示如透過一不受約束之紅綠色辨別增強濾光器所觀看之黃色交通燈之色度,及點1401展示一順應紅綠色辨別增強濾光器下之黃色交通燈之色度。實例性色度邊界1406規定:綠色交通燈不呈黃色、藍色或過度不飽和。點1404展示綠色交通燈之色度,其在兩個濾光器下本質上相同。實例性色度邊界1405規定:日光不呈強勁色彩。點1403展示在兩個濾光器下本質上相同之日光之色度。 圖14B展示日光之光譜輻射通量之曲線圖1408、綠色交通信號之光譜輻射通量之曲線圖1407及黃色交通信號之光譜輻射通量之曲線圖1409。圖14C展示不受約束濾光器之透射率1411及受約束濾光器之透射率1410。在濾光器1410中,約束之效應顯然在於:長通帶本質上已被分成兩個通帶以形成四通帶濾光器。如此實例中所展示,限制約束係針對黃色色度邊界之最紅側。然而,如連同圖15A及圖15B之進一步描述中所展示,可更佳地迫使分裂通帶成為具有一不規則形狀(諸如,在短波長側上具有用於替代分裂子頻帶之一凸肩)之一單通帶,或用足夠寬以將子頻帶本質上合併成一單通帶之一核心來使分裂通帶變平滑。 與將多頻帶濾光器併入至眼鏡中相關之一進一步關注在於:阻帶可明顯抑制一些窄頻帶光(諸如來自發光二極體、雷射及鈉蒸氣燈)之發光度。在一些實施例中,可較佳地設定一濾光器之最小透射率之一下限以確保全部單色光之一最小亮度。例如,在圖15A中,曲線圖1501展示在約450奈米至約650奈米之間透射率為約7%之一光譜透射率下限。併入約束之一濾光器由圖15B中之其光譜透射率曲線圖1504展示。 濾光器1504為四通帶濾光器,其中已添加第四通帶以滿足一黃色交通燈約束(如連同圖14A至圖14C所描述)。在一些實施例中,可較佳地將此額外通帶轉換成長波長通帶之短波長側上之一頻帶凸肩。此變化可為較佳的,此係因為所得濾光器可提供相對於入射角變化之黃光(特定言之,窄頻帶黃光)之一更穩定外觀,假定多頻帶濾光器併入 以除法向入射之外之一入射角處之光譜透射率之一藍移為特徵之一干涉濾光器,如下文進一步所描述。可例如藉由增加所要區域中之最小光譜透射率約束(例如由圖15A中之曲線圖1502所展示)而完成用凸肩取代第四通帶。在曲線圖1502中,最小透射率已被設定為約580奈米至約635奈米之間之約18%。由曲線圖1503(圖15B)展示所得之經修改濾光器透射率,曲線圖1503展示長波長通帶之短波長側上之所描述凸肩。 具有如剛所描述之一凸肩之通帶亦可用在三通帶濾光器內之其他位置處。例如,在一些實施例中,可具有添加一最小透射率約束以導致中波長通帶之長波長側上之一凸肩之一效用以在入射角誘發之藍移下減少窄頻帶螢光燈(諸如FL10至FL12)之色彩失真。在進一步實例中,一些實施例在短波長通帶之短波長側或長波長側上具有一凸肩,連同圖16A及圖16B而對其加以更詳細描述。在進一步實例中,通帶可具有一不規則形狀(即,非矩形且非高斯),其具有本質上呈一雙峰式分佈之一組態,其中兩個模式至少部分重疊;或通帶可在通帶之一或多側上具有一凸肩;或通帶可被描述一偏態分佈,其中在以波長為函數之透射率中,通帶之兩側之間之斜率比介於約4:1至約1:4之間。 適用於此等濾光器之一進一步約束係針對白點,即,一典型照明體(諸如日光)之色度座標。若白點在中性點(即,對應於未經過濾之日光之色度座標)之一適度半徑內,則濾光器可被視為非呈強勁色彩。因而,色度調適之視覺機制將使觀察者能夠在佩帶眼鏡達數分鐘之後調整至新色彩平衡。在一些實施例中,可較佳地例如藉由將白點組態為呈中性(即,使得日光之色度座標處於或幾乎處於區域1405(圖14)之中心處)而最小化此調整等待時間。在其中可期望白點呈中性之此等情況中,可針對日光之外觀而給出一約束區域,例如,照明體D65之(x,y)色度座標為約(0.31, 0.33),且最佳濾光器可提供該點之約0.05個單位內之一白點。在一些情況中,特定言之,例如當成本函數經組態以最大化或最小化藍光之透射時,可較佳地容許白點在一更大區域(例如,區域1405(圖14)內之任何位置)內變動。在進一步情形中,可因包含悅目之其他原因而指定白點之特定色調。 如上文所提及,一多頻帶干涉濾光器之透射光譜對入射光之入射角偏離敏感。具體言之,當一干涉濾光器之有效光學厚度(即,使相消干涉發生在濾光器內之折射率邊界處之波長)隨偏離於法向入射之入射光之角度增大而減小時,光譜透射率遭受朝向更短波長之一位移(一藍移)。由垂直於其上沈積該干涉濾光器之表面之一向量定義法向入射。在本文中,法向入射可被稱為零度角入射,即,角度意指偏離於該法向向量之偏角。此外,併入一吸收濾光器之一多頻帶濾光器可根據Beer-Lambert定律而改變透射率,其中當偏離於法向入射之入射光之角度增大時,吸收趨於歸因於透過吸收介質之更大有效路徑長度而增加。在上述變動之任何者中,多頻帶濾光器f可包括一吸收濾光器p及一干涉濾光器q,其中p之以角度為函數之透射率之變化係根據Beer-Lambert定律,及q之以角度為函數之透射率之變化係根據Snell定律,使得f在偏離於表面法向向量之θ弧度之一入射角處之透射率可被表示為且由如下表達式近似表示:; 其中,在上述表達式中,q之有效折射率為具有約1.85之一典型值之n,p在法向入射處之光譜透射率為,f在法向入射處之光譜透射率為,q在法向入射處之光譜透射率為,及對於約0度至約45度之間之θ,該近似值係足夠的。一濾光器之入射角敏感度具有與該濾光器併入至諸如眼鏡之裝置中相關之蘊涵,其中光之有效入射角在透鏡之表面上具有以位置為函數之明顯變動(連同圖29A至圖29B及圖30A至圖30B而對其加以詳細描述),且亦具有與將此等濾光器併入至諸如燈總成之裝置中相關之蘊涵,其中無法達成一照明體之完美光束準直。 以入射角為函數之一濾光器之光譜透射率之變化為該濾光器之一物理性質。然而,主要關注的是此等變化之感知蘊涵,其可藉由量測以入射角為函數之如透過該濾光器所觀看之一參考光之色度及發光度變化量而量化。特定言之,考量相對於照明體之色度座標(即,濾光器白點)之此等變化係有用的,此係因為以入射角為函數之白點之變化一般與如該照明體下所觀看之整組參考色彩之此等變化相關。此外,可藉由在如先前所描述之濾光器產生方法中採用額外色彩外觀約束而約束兩個或兩個以上入射角處(例如0度處及偏離於法向軸之25度處或0度、25度及35度處)之白點,使得照明體之色度座標在指定角度及中間角度處實質上不變。 在圖17C中,曲線圖1707(類似於圖8C之曲線圖811)展示提供增強紅綠色辨別之一實例性濾光器之光譜透射。曲線圖1707展示該濾光器在法向入射處之光譜透射,及曲線圖1706及1705展示該濾光器分別在約20度及30度之偏離法向(off-normal)入射處之(藍移)光譜透射。圖17A亦展示對如透過三個濾光器所觀看之Munsell色彩之經選擇之輪廓之外觀之效應。輪廓1703對應於正常濾光器(0度入射角),輪廓1702對應於第一位移濾光器(約20度入射角),及輪廓1701對應於第二位移濾光器(約30度入射角)。應自此等輪廓明白,該濾光器下之色彩外觀相對於入射角之此等變化而不穩定。再者,吾人觀察到,具有最大紅綠色辨別增強之濾光器趨於定位通帶,其中一或多個視網膜感光色素之以波長為函數之吸收率之變化最大。因此,用於使色彩辨別增強(特定言之,用於使紅綠色辨別增強)之最佳濾光器亦為用於提供穩定色彩外觀之最不佳濾光器。 在圖16B中,曲線圖1603(類似於圖15B之曲線圖1503)展示提供增強紅綠色辨別之一實例性濾光器之光譜透射。曲線圖1604展示提供增強色彩外觀且亦藉由約束白點以使其在法向入射及約30度之偏離法向入射處實質上相同而提供穩定色彩外觀之類似於1603之光譜透射之一實例性濾光器之光譜透射。提供穩定色彩外觀之多頻帶濾光器可例如因具有以下頻帶而獲得穩定性:該等頻帶經定位及/或塑形使得在觀看穩定之參考光時,三種視錐細胞之各者之刺激變化在角範圍內近似呈線性且三種細胞之間之變化本質上描述具有至多一個自由度之一系統,其中該自由度僅沿發光度之方向起作用。例如,在一些實施例中,該等頻帶可較佳地位於視網膜感光色素吸收率之一或多者之峰值敏感度之波長附近,或可具有以所要範圍內之入射角為函數之一雙峰式分佈或其他不規則形狀(其用來使刺激變化不變或幾乎不變)。在進一步實施例中,一通帶(例如長波長通帶)之形狀可經組態使得長波長視錐細胞之刺激變化與以入射角為函數之中波長視錐細胞之刺激變化成反比例,因此確保對自由度之所需限制以維持恆定色度。然而,吾人發現,此等頻帶位置及/或形狀一般為使色彩辨別增強之次最佳者,因此線性程式方法之一效用可基於以下事實:其提供滿足一色彩穩定性約束之一解決方案,該解決方案最大限度地實現色彩辨別增強。具體言之,濾光器頻帶位置之此等改動較佳地發生在最外頻帶上。例如,可藉由將短波長頻帶定位於約450奈米處使短波長視錐細胞之刺激變化率實質上恆定。替代地,在一些情況中,可較佳地在短波長視錐細胞吸收率之峰值附近使短波長通帶分裂(例如曲線圖1605中所展示),藉此通帶可被描述為具有一雙峰式分佈(其具有約435奈米處之一第一模式及約455奈米處之第二模式)。在一進一步實例中,長波長通帶以具有約620奈米處之第一模式及約650奈米處之第二模式之一雙峰式分佈為特徵,或可具有一偏態分佈、一凸肩(通常位於短波長側上)或其他不規則(即,非高斯)分佈。 圖18A至圖18C之圖式中展示具有相對於一入射角範圍之一穩定白點之一濾光器之行為。圖18C在曲線圖1807中展示該濾光器在法向入射處之透射率及在曲線圖1806中展示該濾光器在約20度入射處之透射率。可在此等曲線圖中觀察到,由參考數字1805辨別之短波長區域中之分裂子頻帶結構本質上充當經調諧以在進行波長位移時穩定之一梳狀濾光器。 色彩外觀已被穩定化之照明體為日光之照明體,如圖18B中之曲線圖1804中所展示。在圖18A之色度圖中,照明體之色度座標1803在兩個入射角下相同。圖18A亦展示對Munsell色彩之經選擇之輪廓之外觀之效應。輪廓1801對應於正常濾光器(0度入射角),及輪廓1802對應於經位移之濾光器(約30度入射角)。可自此等輪廓之位置瞭解,濾光器提供此等參考色彩之一適度穩定外觀,其中飽和度之大部分損失主要與最高飽和色彩(例如,如先前連同圖8A所描述之外Munsell輪廓)相關聯。由此濾光器論證之色度穩定性可明顯減小透鏡之中心中之一「熱點」之外觀(由入射角誘發之藍移所致)且一般促成視覺舒適度提高。 例如圖18C中所展示,提供色彩穩定性之濾光器可歸因於所施加約束之效應而提供較弱紅綠色辨別增強。在一些實施例中,可較佳地併入具有一窄頻帶吸收率之一預濾光器,其中(若干)吸收頻帶位於其中預期濾光器設計中之阻帶之位置附近。因此,包括窄頻帶吸收濾光器及一干涉濾光器之一複合濾光器可達成所要色彩穩定性且不使所要色彩增強降級。圖20A及圖20B中展示此等濾光器之兩個實例。在圖20A中,2001處之實線曲線展示包括一玻璃基板中之釹之一吸收濾光器之光譜透射率。釹為一稀土材料,其之特徵為約590奈米處之一強吸收頻帶及約520奈米處之一次級吸收頻帶。在圖20B中,2002處之實線曲線展示一干涉濾光器之透射率,該干涉濾光器在與該釹吸收濾光器組合時提供增強紅綠色辨別及0度至30度入射角內之穩定色彩外觀。再次參考圖20A,2001處之虛線曲線展示包括一聚合物基板中之窄頻帶有機色素Exciton P491及Exciton ABS584之一吸收濾光器之光譜透射率。Exciton P491之特徵為約491奈米處之一強吸收頻帶,及Exciton ABS584之特徵為約584奈米處之一強吸收頻帶。在圖20B中,2002處之虛線曲線展示一干涉濾光器之透射率,該干涉濾光器在與該有機色素濾光器組合時提供增強紅綠色辨別及0度至30度入射角內之穩定色彩外觀。可藉由如先前所描述之線性程式化之方法、藉由併入該吸收濾光器作為預濾光器而設計此等實例。 為給一正常觀察者提供色彩穩定性,一般可期望約束色度座標使得白點位移小於相對於CIELUV (u',v')色度空間之約0.01個單位且約束相對於約0度至約35度之間之角度之CIE 1931 2度觀察者。在一些情況中,角範圍可增大至約0度至約45度。對於具有綠色弱之觀察者,位移容限可增大至約0.02個單位,及對於具有紅色弱之或重度綠色弱之觀察者,容限可進一步增大至約0.04個單位,此係因為此兩個觀察者對色移不敏感且其等之色彩感知未必完全以一標準觀察者模型為特徵。此外,對於此等異常觀察者(其等之色彩匹配函數明顯不同於CIE 1931 2度標準觀察者之色彩匹配函數),可使用一觀察者特定色彩匹配函數來計算實現色彩穩定性之約束準則。在此等情況中,所得濾光器在根據CIE 1931 2度觀察者而分析白點位移穩定性時可具有如下性質:白點位移函數在約20度至約40度入射角之間之一角度處具有一局部最小值;及在該局部最小值處至正常白點之距離小於約0.02個單位。 為以法向入射及偏離法向入射處之濾光器效能在此等濾光器併入至一眼鏡中時之相對重要性為特徵,一透鏡及眼睛之一幾何模型(例如,其中該透鏡併入至眼鏡中且位於眼睛前面)可用於計算以透鏡位置為函數之有效入射角以及以有效入射角為函數之相對重要性。由此,有效入射角被定義為透鏡在一透鏡位置處之法向向量與穿過該透鏡位置以成像至眼睛之視網膜上之一束光之法向向量之間之角度。圖29A(俯視圖)及圖29B(透視圖)中繪示如先前所提及之幾何模型。此處,分別由半球2904及2905表示左眼及右眼之幾何形狀。人眼(通常為一成年人之眼睛)具有約12.5毫米之一曲率半徑及約60毫米之瞳孔間距離。色感主要源自於中心10度之視覺,然而,眼睛亦可在其眼窩中旋轉,因此色彩感知所需之角範圍大於10度。由球形區段2901及2902表示左透鏡及右透鏡之幾何形狀(具有眼鏡之一典型形狀)。虛線箭頭2906繪示穿過透鏡上之一中心位置之一束光,及虛線箭頭2909繪示穿過透鏡上之一遠端位置之一束光。該等光束亦一般成像至視網膜之中心位置及遠端位置上。2907及2908處展示透鏡在其中穿過該等光束之位置處之表面法向向量。眼鏡中之透鏡可具有約50毫米至約150毫米之間之一曲率半徑(在此實例中,該曲率半徑為87毫米)。由於此半徑顯著大於眼睛之半徑,所以在對應透鏡位置處入射光束與表面法向向量之間之角度趨於隨與中心之距離之增加而增加,如圖29A及圖29B中由2908與2909之間之角度增加(相較於2907與2906之間之角度)所繪示。 就任何框架式樣(例如,一透鏡之邊緣輪廓及相對於眼睛之透鏡定位)及任何透鏡曲率而言,可藉由以下操作而自剛描述之幾何模型計算(例如使用一電腦)以透鏡位置為函數之有效入射角:反覆位於透鏡上之點;建構表面法向向量及視網膜影像光束;及接著計算表面位置處之兩個向量之間之角度。圖30A之輪廓圖中展示此一計算之結果,其中邊界3004指示一透鏡之邊緣,及內部輪廓展示如先前所描述之有效入射角,例如,有效入射角在沿輪廓3001時為約10度,在輪廓3002處為約20度,及在輪廓3003處為約30度。 接著,計算以有效入射角為函數之相對重要性係有用的。現參考圖30B,以有效入射角為函數之相關重要性之一函數包括兩個部分之乘積:第一,以一特定角度觀看之透鏡表面面積之比例之一估算;及第二,沿一軸定向眼睛使得其以一特定角度看穿透鏡之可能性之一估算。在本文中,一高斯統計模型用於估算定向分佈,例如由具有約10度之一標準偏差之曲線3007所展示。因而,眼睛最可能沿法向入射角觀看。然而,應注意,在透鏡上僅有一單一點之入射角為法向的(例如圖30A中之點3005),而透鏡之表面面積介於例如10度至15度之間(例如,介於圖30A中之輪廓3001與3006之間)。在一典型透鏡之表面上,入射角為偏離於法線之至多約35度,且在此範圍內,以度數為函數之透鏡表面之面積比例近似線性地增加,如由圖30B中之曲線3009所表示。面積加權曲線與定向分佈曲線之乘積給出一重要性加權函數,例如曲線3008處所展示。因此,重要性加權PGAI可由如下表達式定義:,及, 其中為指數函數,θ為具有0度至30度範圍之有效入射角,為如以入射角θ所觀看或照亮之試驗濾光器f及參考濾光器之PGAI,為通常具有約10度之一值之眼睛定向分佈之標準偏差,及k為一權重歸一化因數。為評估本發明中之濾光器,給出色域面積增加之重要性加權百分比之兩個特定列方程式,其中眼睛定向角之標準偏差被設定為約=10度且參考色彩被指定為D15或自然界樣本。該等列方程式分別由如下表達式給出:,及其中先前已在本發明中規定用於計算之條件。 特定言之,上文由表達式定義之效能度量可用於分類一濾光器f之性質,及若該濾光器之白點呈中性且白點在一適度入射角範圍內亦保持中性,則可在此等濾光器之一族群之間比較絕對效能之百分比增大或減小。在本文中,計算之使用受限於具有相對於此等角度變化而呈中性且穩定之一白點之濾光器。對於約-10%至約10%之間之之值,濾光器可被描述為提供本質上正常之色彩辨別。對於約10%至約40%之間之值,濾光器可被描述為增強紅綠色辨別,其中較大值對應於較佳效能。對於小於約-10%之值,濾光器可被描述為增強藍黃色辨別。前文所提及之值假定:濾光器提供本質上呈中性之一白點,即,對於0度至約30度之間之全部或幾乎全部入射角,照明體D65之(x,y)色度座標為約(0.31, 0.33)。如先前所提及,色域面積之評估可隨白點而變動,因此,無法用一重要性加權PGAI度量來有意義地評估未經白點位移穩定化之濾光器。此外,白點之一些色調(特定言之,綠色)可提供PGAI之較大值,然而,此等增大未必對應於增強色彩辨別。 在進一步實施例中,計算亦可考量由一製程所致之實體厚度之變化。例如,在至彎曲基板上之物理氣相沈積中,塗層厚度趨於隨與濺鍍源之距離及/或噴射顆粒與彎曲基板之表面法線之間之有效入射角而減小。在進一步實施例中,如剛所描述之有效入射角之計算可用作為一製造規格之基礎,使得濾光器被製造於一彎曲基板上,使得濾光器具有一實體厚度輪廓,該實體厚度輪廓例如藉由具有使厚度朝向透鏡之邊緣增加(例如,自中心處之法向實體厚度線性增加至透鏡之邊緣處之約+10%實體厚度)之一分佈而補償有效入射角。一干涉濾光器可經製造以達成相對於透鏡上之全部或幾乎全部位置處之有效入射角而不變或實質上不變之一光學厚度。 在一些實施例中,一濾光器之效能分析可包含使用相關重要性資料來判定一濾光器在併入於眼鏡中時之重要性加權平均效能。可藉由調整該濾光器之光譜透射率規格(特定言之,藉由使規格紅移)而改良重要性加權平均效能。例如,之光譜透射率可朝向更長波長位移,如由如下表達式所計算:,及; 其中為判定位移量之一係數,及經選擇以最大化沿色彩空間之一軸之重要性加權平均相對色域面積增加及/或減少及/或標準偏差。替代地,可經選擇以改良一些其他效能度量以例如減小重要性加權平均太陽藍光透射率。因為所需之典型偏置量通常為約1%至約4%(=1.01至1.04),所以可藉由用表格表示約1.0至約1.1之間之值而有效法向判定最佳偏置係數。例如,具有約530奈米處之一中波長通帶之一紅綠色增強濾光器可較佳紅移至約535奈米(=1.01)以改良重要性加權平均相對色域面積。 與將多頻帶濾光器併入至眼鏡中相關之另一態樣(特定言之,此等濾光器包括一干涉濾光器)為透鏡之一或兩側上之反射率之管理。具有透射率之一理想干涉濾光器之反射率為透射率之補數,由如下表達式定義:。 例如,併入於一太陽鏡中之一濾光器可具有約20%之一光透射率,因此,若該濾光器僅製造有一干涉濾光器,則該濾光器將具有約80%之一光反射率。此高反射率可導致明顯視覺不適,此係因為使用者可在物體後面看見物體之影像或在透鏡中反射之其自身眼睛之影像。對於一般用途,透鏡之內表面上之光反射率應為透鏡之光透射率之至多約五分之一,但在一些情況中,亦可接受高達光透射率之約一半之一光反射率。可藉由改良框架周圍之屏蔽(例如,利用眼鏡腿臂上之側屏蔽)而部分減輕高反射率。一吸收濾光器(例如先前所描述之組件)之併入可明顯改良透鏡之一或兩側上之反射率,例如,就位於透鏡之一側上之而言,該側上之反射率被明顯減小,此係因為反射光必須兩次穿過吸收濾光器,如由用於計算由干涉濾光器及吸收濾光器p組成之一濾光器f之反射率之以下表達式所展示:,及; 其中,在上述表達式中,為濾光器之光譜反射率。相對於用於增強色彩辨別之此等複合濾光器,複合濾光器f之峰值透射率與平均透射率之間之比率較佳地應儘可能高。在進一步實例中,可將分解成兩個組成吸收濾光器,接著,該兩個吸收濾光器位於透鏡之相對側上,例如,,及,及; 其中,在上述表達式中,給出透鏡之一側(例如外表面)上之光譜反射率,及給出透鏡之另一側(例如內表面)上之光譜反射率。 在一些實例中,可為一中性密度濾光器,諸如約40%透射率之一灰色玻璃。例如,此一組合可達成約20%之一光透射率、約40%之一峰值透射率及約8%之透鏡之一側上之一光反射率(即,具有約50%之一光透射率)。在進一步實例中,可為由兩者呈彩色之兩個吸收濾光器(例如,一棕色玻璃及一藍色玻璃,其等之組合產生約40%之一中性透射率)組成之一中性密度濾光器。此等色彩可經選擇以影響透鏡之外表面上之反射光之色彩(例如,為了悅目)。中性密度且彩色之吸收體亦可由有機染料形成且併入至一聚合物基板中,及/或作為一塗層(例如藉由旋塗或浸塗)而施加至透鏡之一或多個表面。 較佳地,可使用與之光譜透射率互補之窄頻帶選擇吸收體來形成,因此實現複合濾光器之峰值透射率與平均透射率之一較高比率(例如,高於利用中性密度吸收時之可能比率)。例如,分別在約491奈米及約584奈米處吸收之窄頻帶有機染料Exciton P491及Exciton ABS584可用於形成適合於與如本文所揭示之紅綠色辨別增強濾光器一起使用之此一互補吸收體。替代地,某些稀土元素(諸如釹、鐠及鈥)在可見光譜中具有窄頻帶吸收率,且可類似地被採用。例如,由Barberini GmbH製造之改良型含釹玻璃透鏡ACE可用作為用於沈積一干涉濾光器之一光學基板。另外,窄頻帶吸收體(及一干涉濾光器)之併入可改良併入對白點之一色彩穩定性約束之濾光器設計之品質,如先前連同圖20A及圖20B所描述,特定言之,窄頻帶吸收體改良由濾光器在偏離於法向軸之大於20度之入射角處提供之色彩辨別。 替代地或另外,可藉由併入一或多個圓形偏振器而吸收反射光。在一些實施例中,一圓形偏振器位於透鏡之內表面上以使否則將使使用者眼睛可見之反射衰減。一圓形偏振器亦可位於透鏡之外表面上以使前側反射衰減。併入一圓形偏振器之一透鏡可達成約40%之一峰值透射率、約20%之一光透射率及透鏡之一或兩側上之約2%之一光反射率。具有6屈光度或更大之一球面曲線之圓形偏振器可例如藉由熱成形而製造且藉由例如層壓而併入至一透鏡中。另外,可使用僅達成部分偏振(例如約70%之偏振效率)之線性偏振器來形成該等圓形偏振器,由此在損害透鏡之一或兩側上之一增加光反射率之情況下實現一更高峰值透射率。 圖24A及圖24B中描繪併入圓形偏振器之一透鏡之一實例性組態,其中該等層(自前至後)為垂直定向之線性偏振器2401、四分之一波長延遲器2402、光學透明基板2403、沈積於基板之表面上之多層干涉塗層2404、四分之一波長延遲器2405及(例如垂直定向之)偏振器2406。 在圖24B中,沿箭頭2413展示入射至複合透鏡之外側之光。該入射光穿過偏振濾光器,接著穿過四分之一波長延遲器(因此變成經圓形偏振),接著由干涉濾光器分成最終由眼睛2409接收且由視網膜2412吸收之一透射分量及朝向光源反向行進但在其可自複合透鏡射出之前被吸收之一反射分量2414。反射分量2414經圓形偏振,然而,干涉濾光器2404處之反射導致其偏手性例如自右至左翻轉,使得在其反向地行進穿過圓形偏振器2402時,其顯現為經水平偏振且由線性偏振器2401吸收。仍參考圖24B,反射-吸收之一類似程序可發生於進入透鏡之後側之雜散光(如沿光束2408所展示)以導致反射光2411在其到達眼睛之前被吸收。 在另一實施例中,可為由使用物理氣相沈積之一金屬衰減塗層製造之一中性密度濾光器。較佳地,可藉由物理氣相沈積而製造此等吸收濾光器及一干涉濾光器(即,在相同程序中),因此衰減層可圍封介電層及/或與介電層之若干者交錯或部分交錯。歸因於金屬層在併入至干涉濾光器中時之性質,此等衰減塗層可提供比等效大容量介質之中性密度吸收體更佳之反射衰減。例如,此等設計可達成約35%之一峰值透射率、約20%之一光透射率及透鏡之一側上之約2%之一光反射率。替代地,此等設計可達成約35%之一峰值透射率、約20%之一光透射率及透鏡之兩側上之約4%之一光反射率。替代地,此等設計可達成約50%之一峰值透射率、約20%之一光透射率及透鏡之一側上之約4%之一光反射率。替代地,此等設計可達成約60%之一峰值透射率、約20%之一光透射率及透鏡之一側上之約8%之一光反射率。此等設計之額外特徵為具有定位於一光學基板之一側上之濾光器之全部功能層(例如干涉塗層及(若干)衰減塗層)。在此等設計中,基板之相對側可經抗反射塗覆以減少光在光學基板內之散射及共振(例如多次內反射)。在此等設計中,抗反射塗層較佳地提供不大於0.5%之一光反射率,此係因為較低品質之抗反射塗層(例如,具有約1%或更大之一光反射率)可在一般用途之室外條件下(特定言之,在觀看由一典型室外景象中之金屬表面反射之異常亮點(諸如太陽光之反光)時)減小但未完全消除內反射假影之可見度。 圖28A及圖28B中描繪併入衰減塗層之一透鏡之一實例性組態,其中該等層(自前至後)為抗反射塗層2801、光學基板(例如玻璃)2802、第一衰減塗層2803、多層干涉塗層2804及第二衰減塗層2805。 在圖28B中,沿箭頭2811展示入射至透鏡之外側之光。該入射光穿過抗反射塗層及光學基板,接著穿過第一衰減塗層,且接著由干涉濾光器分成最終由眼睛2807接收且由視網膜2809吸收之一透鏡分量及朝向光源反向行進但在第二次穿過第一衰減塗層期間實質上被吸收之一反射分量2812。仍參考圖28B,反射-吸收之一類似程序可發生於進入透鏡之後側之雜散光(如沿光束2806所展示)以導致反射光2810在其到達眼睛之前被吸收。在一些實例中,衰減塗層與干涉塗層之介電層交錯或部分交錯。在一些實例中,衰減塗層僅位於背面上,即,不包含第一衰減塗層2815。 接著,連同圖31A至圖42E、圖45A至圖45E、圖48A至圖53E及圖55A至圖57E之詳細描述而揭示包括用於併入至眼鏡中之例示性多頻帶濾光器之若干實施例。此等圖全部符合易於由其等之共同佈局明白之一般格式。首先,使用例如圖31A至圖31E及圖59A至圖59B來大體上描述該格式之細節。接著,參考各特定圖及圖中之元件而在進一步討論中描述與各對應實施例之設計相關之細節。 在圖31A之曲線圖中,曲線展示透射率約束,其包含實線曲線3101處之以波長為函數之最小透射率及虛線曲線3102處之以波長為函數之最大透射率,及一進一步曲線展示相同曲線圖上之虛線曲線3103處之以波長為函數之一成本函數(其為一無單位綱量)。透射率約束以及額外色彩外觀約束(未由曲線圖展示)及成本函數形成至一線性程式解算器之輸入,其中如本發明中先前所描述般地處理該等輸入,其涉及將此等約束及成本函數變換成一標準型線性程式之方法。在圖31B之曲線圖中,曲線展示經設計以依一所要方式影響色覺之一濾光器f之組件之光譜透射率,其中根據如連同圖31A所描述之約束及引導成本函數而設計該濾光器。如上文所解釋,由 指定如由線性程式方法所產生之「理想」濾光器。實線曲線3104定義如由如先前所揭示之線性程式化方法所選擇之基本濾光器q之加權組合,及虛線曲線3106定義一經選擇之預濾光器p之透射率,其在此實例中為一中性密度濾光器。虛線曲線3105展示(視情況)經平滑且(視情況)經偏置之線性程式解q'。圖59B中之第5行至第8行(分別為q'、q、p及f)中列示濾光器組件之光譜透射率。圖59B中所列示之第2行、第3行及第4行給出用於產生濾光器物件(分別為)之一製造規格之以波長為函數之最小透射率、目標透射率及最大透射率。第9行、第10行及第11行(分別為及c)給出用在濾光器設計中之最小光譜透射率、最大光譜透射率及成本函數。對應於表之各列之波長以5奈米為步長列示於第1行中,其提供適當光譜解析度以重現本文所揭示之實施例之任何者。 圖31C之曲線圖包括三個曲線,其中實線曲線3107為製造濾光器設計目標(用視情況經偏置且視情況經平滑之線性程式解取代),虛線曲線3108為一最小透射率界限,及虛線曲線3109為一最大透射率界限。該最小透射率界限及該最大透射率界限將用在目標濾光器之製造容限之規格中。可由以下表達式計算目標透射率、最小透射率及最大透射率:,及; 其中,在上述表達式中,符號表示核心函數k與濾光器之間之頻域迴旋,及為如先前所描述之偏置係數。核心函數k之一般特徵為具有約10奈米至約25奈米之間之一半峰寬度,就本實施例而言,該寬度為約25奈米,但在進一步實施例中該寬度可在給定範圍內變動。此外,在定義時,比例係數(0.97及1.03)提供約+/- 3%之一相對透射率容限,加法係數(0.03)提供約+3%之一額外絕對容限,及表達式提供約+/- 2奈米之一波長位移容限(等效於400奈米之約+/- 0.5%)。憑經驗選擇此等容限以產生用於與一高精度物理氣相沈積程序一起使用之適度結果,然而,容限之特定選擇不意欲限制本發明之範疇。亦可使用適合於此等參數及所得容限之任何值。 在圖31D中,沿實線曲線3110及虛線曲線3111展示以入射角θ為函數之相較於一最佳適配寬頻帶參考濾光器之濾光器之相對色域面積增加之百分比(PGAI),其中實線曲線展示相對於Farnsworth D-15樣本所計算之,及虛線曲線展示相對於自然界樣本(NWS)所計算之。可藉由根據先前連同圖29A至圖30B所描述之眼睛模型計算加權平均PGAI且假定眼睛定向之標準偏差為10度而自此等資料之任一者計算相對色域面積增加之重要性加權百分比(例如)。圖31E給出以入射角為函數之濾光器之白點位移之一實線曲線圖3112,其中白點對應於相對於CIE 1931 2度標準觀察者之如透過濾光器所觀看之照明體D65之CIELUV (u',v')色度座標,及以入射角度數為函數之白點位移被定義為0度入射角(即,法向入射)處之白點色度座標與偏離法向入射角處之白點色度座標之間之距離。執行此計算,假定濾光器組件q'為具有約1.85之有效折射率之一干涉濾光器及組件p為一吸收濾光器。此外,圖59A之表列舉相對於濾光器所評估之各種額外效能準則,其中該等效能準則包含先前在本發明之詳細描述中所定義之準則以及由工業標準ANSI Z80.3-2010定義之經選擇度量。特定言之,對於一些實施例,標記為「」之列可用於評估由濾光器提供之色彩增強之一般品質之一穩健估算。此數量之增加與基於Farnsworth D-15蓋配置測試之改良分數相關聯且一般亦與可被描述為色彩增強之一視覺體驗相關聯。 在下文中,參考圖31A至圖42E、圖45A至圖45E、圖48A至圖53E及圖55A至圖57E以及呈現於圖59A至圖80B中之對應表而描述由本文所描述之線性程式化之方法設計之濾光器之一些額外實施例。在此等圖中,由參考數字xx01至xx12(其中xx為圖編號,例如,圖31A至圖31E中之31)指示之元件之詳細描述對應於上文相對於圖31A至圖31E所給出之元件之詳細描述,且針對各個別情況而適當提供進一步詳述。 在一實施例中,圖31A至圖31E之曲線圖中展示及圖59A及圖59B中列示三通帶紅綠色辨別增強之多頻帶濾光器之設計準則、組件之光譜透射率、組件、製造規格及效能評估。展示於圖31C之曲線圖3107中所展示及圖59B中之行中所列示之濾光器製造目標具有約450奈米處之一第一通帶中心與約40奈米之一半峰頻寬、約530奈米處之一第二通帶中心與約35奈米之一半峰頻寬及約615奈米處之一第三通帶中心與約40奈米之一半峰頻寬。濾光器製造規格可用於產生濾光器。濾光器包括一干涉濾光器(q)及一中性密度吸收濾光器(p),其中該中性密度吸收濾光器具有約40%之一透射率。由如本文所揭示之線性程式化之方法達成濾光器設計,其中基本濾光器為一組之約60個矩形通帶濾光器,其等各具有10奈米之一單通帶寬度且具有以5奈米遞增之中心波長(下文所描述之全部實施例之情況亦如此)。為改良可製造性使得可用一低階堆疊之介電材料(例如,小於約50個材料層)製造干涉濾光器組件,已用具有約20奈米之一半峰寬度之一高斯核心(k)來使濾光器設計(q')變平滑。應進一步注意,所得濾光器(f)符合如圖31A中之3101處所展示之最小透射率界限。用於產生此實施例之濾光器設計準則已經組態使得日光之光透射率為約18%,其適合於使濾光器用在具有一中等色之一太陽鏡中。本文所揭示之進一步實施例可採用相同或幾乎相同之光透射率。然而,本文所揭示之方法適合於製造具有任何適度光透射率(例如,低至約8%(對應於太陽鏡之一深色)或高達40%(對應於太陽鏡之一淺色),或在一些情況中,大於40%)之濾光器。此外,濾光器提供將被視為實質上呈中性之一白點,如圖59A之表中所展示(D65色度座標)。具有白點之一中性組態之濾光器可較佳針對總體視覺舒適度及全部色彩之一平衡亮度,然而,可為白點之其他組態,但亦應避免呈強勁色度之白點,此係因為此等濾光器一般無法提供整個色域之一適當亮度。關於如在一入射角範圍內所觀看之本實施例之白點,如由圖31E中之以入射角度數為函數之白點位移圖3112所論證,白點移動相當多(例如,在35度處移動大於0.03個單位),因此,在此一濾光器併入至眼鏡中時(其中可透過一角範圍而觀看該濾光器),可觀察到朝向透鏡之周邊之明顯色移。另外,如圖31D中之曲線圖3110及3111中所展示,濾光器之色彩增強在約20度處低於零,因此,濾光器僅提供一相對較窄之視場,在該視場內,所要色彩增強函數係有效的,例如,自然界中之綠色(諸如葉子)可在入射角接近或超過20度時趨於呈一棕色外觀。 與先前圖31A至圖31E中所展示之實施例相關之圖32A至圖32E中之一進一步實施例之特徵為圖60A及圖60B中之對應表。此實施例揭示相對於如先前所描述之相同條件而設計之一濾光器,只是圖32A中之3203處所展示之成本函數已經修改以進一步改良色彩辨別。所得濾光器設計之特徵為提供一更佳效能之通帶位置之一替代選擇。當前,此組態被認為僅相對於PGAI度量而給出任何三通帶濾光器之最佳可能效能之通帶位置之選擇(然而,如進一步討論中所展示,此度量未必適合於例如眼鏡中之此等濾光器之實際應用)。圖32C之曲線圖3207中所展示及圖60B中之行中所列示之濾光器製造目標具有:約440奈米處之一第一通帶,其具有約30奈米之一半峰頻寬;約535奈米處之一第二通帶,其具有約35奈米之一半峰頻寬;及約650奈米處之一第三通帶,其具有約80奈米之一半峰頻寬。本實施例之改良色彩增強效應部分起因於該第一頻帶與該第三頻帶之較寬間隔。如先前所提及,色彩辨別受益於具有最寬可能光譜孔徑之一多頻帶濾光器,因此,具有一第一頻帶(其具有短於約450奈米之一波長)之濾光器可為較佳的,以及具有一第三通帶(其具有長於610奈米之一中心波長)之濾光器係較佳的。然而,440奈米及650奈米約為具有此所要效應之濾光器中之頻帶位置之最大外限,此係因為超過該等限制之頻帶位置可趨於將藍色及紅色呈現為不可接受之暗色。此外,本實施例藉由定位長於530奈米之一波長處之中通帶而受益。小於530奈米之一波長處之中通帶之組態可提供導致綠色呈現不可接受之暗色之一濾光器。精確530奈米處之中通帶之組態趨於最大化相對於Farnsworth D-15樣本以及Munsell色彩之PGAI效能度量,然而,此等色彩基於人造色素且此一濾光器可趨於導致自然界之綠色呈現非自然之綠色。葉綠素之自然顯色(如先前所描述)被更準確地視為一黃綠色。約540奈米處之中通帶之組態趨於最大化相對於自然界樣本之PGAI效能。約545奈米或更長波長處之中通帶之組態趨於提供給出藍黃色辨別之一增強及對應地給出紅綠色辨別之減弱增強之一濾光器,且若仍選擇較長波長,則平衡朝向藍黃色傾斜(在一進一步實施例中對其更詳細地加以討論)。因此,具有約535奈米之一中心波長之中通帶之組態可達成人造色彩樣本與自然色彩樣本兩者之間之一最佳效能平衡,且具有約545奈米之一中心波長之一中頻帶之選擇可達成相對於色彩空間之紅綠色軸及藍黃色軸之一最佳效能平衡。下文所揭示之用於使紅綠色辨別增強之濾光器之進一步實施例與約535奈米至約545奈米之間之中心之選擇一致(若無另外規定),然而,所展示之實例不意欲限制本發明之範疇,此係因為中頻帶位置之選擇可在改良色彩辨別之此等濾光器之約530奈米至約545奈米之間有用地變動。 返回至圖32A至圖32E之討論,相對於基於Farnsworth D-15樣本及自然界樣本之PGAI度量之濾光器之效能(分別如圖32D中之3210及3211處所展示)展示相較於先前實施例之一明顯改良。特定言之,對於高達約30度之入射角,PGAI大於零,因此,濾光器可在併入至眼鏡中時提供給出所要色彩增強之一更寬視場。此外,法向入射處之PGAI明顯大於先前實施例。然而,相比而言,本實施例展現相對於多個入射角內之白點之穩定性之明顯更差效能,如圖32E中之3212處所展示,35度處之白點位移為約0.05個單位。歸因於長波長頻帶之寬頻寬,白點趨於朝向一紅色調而迅速位移。使用可用製造方法,可藉由沈積干涉濾光器使得該等層具有在透鏡之區域(其中預期視角係偏離法向的)內有意變動之一實體厚度而部分減輕非所要白點位移,然而,此等方法成本太高。例如,相對於藉由物理氣相沈積之製造方法,達成所需厚度梯度需要會阻礙批量生產之高度精密加工配置。此外,即使一透鏡上具有干涉塗層之適當實體分佈,但對入射角如此敏感之一濾光器亦難以在一眼鏡之框架中可靠地對準使得該眼鏡效能相對於框架式樣、頭型尺寸及類似幾何因數之變動而穩健。 與圖31A至圖31E中先前所展示之實施例及圖32A至圖32E之實施例相關之圖33A至圖33E中之一進一步實施例之特徵為具有圖61A及圖61B中之對應表。此實施例揭示相對於如先前所描述之相同條件而設計之一濾光器。然而,設計準則進一步包含一色彩外觀約束,使得白點在一寬角範圍內呈現為實質上不變,且成本函數經額外調整以最大化該濾光器在儘可能最寬之角範圍內之效能。所得濾光器設計之特徵為通帶位置之一進一步替代選擇,其提供相對於PGAI度量之良好效能,但額外地確保色彩在整個視場內之一致外觀以由此在該濾光器併入至眼鏡中時實現穩健效能及改良視覺舒適度。特定言之,中通帶保持在約535奈米處,但上通帶及下通帶組態有處於圖31A至圖31E之實施例及圖32A至圖32E之實施例兩者之位置中間之位置。圖32C之曲線圖3207處所展示及圖60B之行中所列示之濾光器製造目標具有:約445奈米處之一第一通帶,其具有約25奈米之一半峰頻寬;約535奈米處之一第二通帶,其具有約30奈米之一半峰頻寬;及約630奈米處之一第三通帶,其具有約40奈米之一半峰頻寬。 相對於濾光器之效能,可在圖33D中觀察到,對於高達約25度之入射角,PGAI大於零。因此,濾光器可在併入至眼鏡中時提供給出所要色彩增強之一適度寬視場。相較於先前實施例,濾光器相對於多個入射角內之白點之穩定性之效能被明顯改良。如圖33E中之3312處所展示,0度至35度之間之白點位移小於約0.01個單位。在進一步實施例中,已論證:白點位移可延伸至高達45度之角度,同時保持相同界限。在下文所揭示之全部實施例中,採用呈某一形式(若無另外規定)之一白點穩定化約束,此係因為此等約束一般被視為有益於包括一干涉濾光器組件之任何此濾光器之製造。實際上,併入一白點穩定性約束之此等濾光器已經主觀性觀察以在周邊視覺不明顯色彩失真之情況下提供一舒適視場,無需顧及以下事實:透鏡可併入給出相對於入射角而明顯變動之一光譜透射率之一介電干涉濾光器。一般而言,可使用本文所揭示之方法來發現具有經組態以提供一穩定化白點之三個通帶之紅綠色增強多頻帶濾光器,其中該濾光器具有位於約440奈米至約450奈米之間之一第一通帶、位於約530奈米至約545奈米之間之一第二通帶及位於約610奈米至約635奈米之間之一第三通帶。紅綠色增強濾光器之較佳實施例為以下實施例:其具有最短波長通帶之最小可能中心位置、最長波長通帶之最大可能中心位置、最窄可能頻寬及相鄰通帶與阻帶之平均透射率之間之最大可能對比率。然而,可由適當約束調節全部此等組態以確保濾光器例如在併入至眼鏡中時之效用。本文所揭示之濾光器之實施例(例如包含圖36A至圖36E、圖37A至圖37E、圖38A至圖38E、圖39A至圖39E中所揭示之實施例及其相關實施例)提供與服從意欲應用之實際關注之此等限制之適當最大化相關之引導。 在與圖33A至圖33E之實施例相關之一進一步實施例中,一藍黃色增強濾光器之特徵為圖34A至圖34E及圖62A及圖62B中之對應表。此實施例揭示相對於與相關實施例之準則本質上相同之準則而設計之一濾光器,只是成本函數(如圖34A中之3403處所展示)經組態以最大化藍黃色辨別而非紅綠色辨別。此等濾光器可用於具有第三型色弱之個體,其為難以辨別藍色與黃色之色覺缺陷之一類人群。此等濾光器亦可較佳地用在適合於主要以綠色為背景之某些環境(例如高爾夫綠草地球場)之眼鏡中(其中期望在一定程度上抑制綠色外觀),或較佳地用在用於定位一叢林中之偽裝物體之一光學輔助設備中(其中綠色之間之變動抑制可顯露先前無法看見之特徵)。圖34C之曲線圖3407中所展示及圖62B之行中所列示之濾光器製造目標具有位於約455奈米處之一第一通帶,該第一通帶具有約45奈米之一半峰寬度,第二通帶位於約560奈米處且具有約50奈米之一半峰寬度,及第三通帶位於約675奈米處且具有約60奈米之一半峰寬度。圖34D中展示濾光器相對於PAGI度量之效能分析,其中可觀察到,對於高達約20度之入射角,PGAI主要為負值。此外,白點位移(如圖34E中所展示)展現對於偏離於法向入射之高達45度之入射角具有小於約0.01個單位之一總位移之優異穩定性。另外,如圖62A之表中所提及,該濾光器符合如由ANSI Z80.3-2010定義之交通信號之色度之限制。特定言之,相對於此等藍黃色增強濾光器,沿紅綠色軸之色彩辨別抑制之數量受限於綠色交通信號之色度座標。相對於使藍黃色辨別最大程度增強且保持順應之本發明濾光器,綠色交通信號色度座標本質上位於或幾乎位於順應區域之邊界上,使得綠色交通信號呈現為如由該標準所容許之不飽和(即,白色)。 在亦與圖33A至圖33E及圖34A至圖34E之實施例相關之另一實施例中,一色彩增強濾光器之特徵為圖35A至圖35E及圖63A及圖63B中之對應表,該濾光器經進一步組態以實質上抑制短波長光(例如約380奈米至約450奈米之間之光)之透射。此等濾光器一般可提供沿紅綠色軸及藍黃色軸兩者之色彩辨別之一平衡改良。此外,短波長光之抑制可改良銳聚焦且減少由眼睛接收之光子之總能量,其能量相對於波長反向增加。此實施例難以使用一低階干涉濾光器來製造,此係因為設計較佳地以約450奈米處之反射與透射之間之一迅速開始點為特徵。因此,用具有約10奈米之一半峰寬度之一核心來使干涉濾光器組件(q')變平滑。為達成藍光阻隔功能,成本函數可組態有如圖35A中之3503處所展示之一漸增斜率。該濾光器之白點可朝向一黃色組態,遭受根據ANSI Z80.3-2010之使白點不被視為「呈強勁色彩」之約束。圖35C之曲線圖3507中展示及圖63B之行中列示濾光器製造目標,其假定濾光器併入具有約50%之一透射率之一中性密度吸收濾光器(p)。濾光器製造目標具有:位於約455奈米處之一第一通帶,其具有約15奈米之一半峰寬度;位於約550奈米處之一第二通帶,其具有約45奈米之一半峰寬度;及一第三通帶,其位於約645奈米處且具有約70奈米之一半峰寬度。該濾光器具有約35%之一光透射率(對應於一淺色太陽鏡),但可藉由增加吸收濾光器元件之強度而使色調更深。如圖35D中所展示,該濾光器提供PGAI在高達30度之入射角內之一適中正值。相對於色彩穩定性效能,白點位移受限於小於0度至35度入射角之間之0.01個單位,如圖35E中所論證。另外,如圖63A之表中所指示,太陽藍光透射率(約15%)小於該光透射率之一半,因此,該濾光器可被描述為提供一改良藍光阻隔功能,同時亦維持色彩外觀之一良好品質。 在下文所討論之進一步系列之三個實施例中,揭示紅綠色辨別增強之多頻帶濾光器,其中該等濾光器經組態以供具有綠色弱之觀察者使用,其為難以辨別綠色與紅色之色覺缺陷之一類人群。相較於本文之紅綠色增強濾光器之先前所揭示實施例,此等實施例提供沿紅綠色軸之色彩辨別之實質上更多增強。此等實施例所揭示之製造規格提供待生產為一中性密度濾光器與一干涉濾光器之一組合之濾光器,其中該中性密度濾光器具有約40%至約55%之間之一透射率。此外,干涉濾光器一般被指定為高階塗層堆疊,此係因為相鄰通帶與阻帶之間之陡峭過渡一般較佳用於最大化色彩辨別增強。具有陡峭頻帶過渡之此等濾光器可提供某些窄頻帶光源(諸如發光二極體及一些類型之氣體放電燈(其包含鈉蒸氣燈及一些螢光燈))之不穩定色彩外觀。為減輕此等不穩定性,此等濾光器併入相對於約450奈米至約650奈米之間之波長之一最小透射率約束,其通常被指定為等於該濾光器之光透射率之約五分之一之一下限。據此,此等實施例之阻帶受限於此最小透射率。此等濾光器亦較佳地符合與由該濾光器提供之交通信號之色度座標相關之ANSI Z80.3-2010,及特定言之,使紅綠色辨別增強最小化之此等濾光器之一些實施例可提供黃色交通信號在相對於其順應邊界之一限制位置處之一色度座標,其中該限制位置提供呈紅色或幾乎呈紅色(如所容許)之該光之一外觀。 與此等濾光器之設計相關之一額外難題在於:綠色弱觀察者之色彩匹配函數並非完全以CIE標準觀察者模型為特徵。因此,可相對於一經修改之觀察者模型而較佳地計算與白點穩定性相關之約束。計算之細節被很好地用文件記錄且可供一般技術者使用。然而,本文之白點位移之分析保持使用CIE 2度標準觀察者,因而,此等設計中之以入射角度數為函數之經計算白點位移之特徵為一更寬容限(例如0度至35度之間之約0.02個單位)。此等設計之白點位移函數通常展現約20度至約40之間之一角度處之一局部最小值,其中該局部最小值處所量測之白點位移量通常為至多約0.01個單位。 連同圖36A至圖36E及圖64A及圖64B之對應表而揭示一綠色弱觀察者之一濾光器之一第一實施例。圖36C之曲線圖3607中所展示及圖64B之行中所列示之濾光器製造目標具有:位於約450奈米處之一第一通帶,其具有約25奈米之一半峰寬度;位於約535奈米處之一第二通帶,其具有約35奈米之一半峰寬度;及一第三通帶,其位於約635奈米處且具有約35奈米之一半峰寬度。給出併入約45%透射率之一中性密度吸收體之該濾光器之製造規格。對於高達約27度之入射角,由該濾光器提供之PGAI大於零,如圖36D中所展示。如圖64A之表中所提及,相對於Farnsworth D-15色彩之重要性加權PGAI為至少約30%,其可較佳用於具有輕度綠色弱之一觀察者。本質上呈中性色調之該濾光器之白點相對於一綠色弱觀察者模型而穩定化,且其特徵為約32度處之小於0.01個單位之白點位移曲線中之一局部最小值,如圖36E中之3612處所展示。 連同圖37A至圖37E及圖65A及圖65B之對應表而揭示一綠色弱觀察者之一濾光器之一第二實施例。圖37C之曲線圖3707中所展示及圖65B之行中所列示之濾光器製造目標具有:位於約445奈米處之一第一通帶,其具有約25奈米之一半峰寬度;位於約535奈米處之一第二通帶,其具有約35奈米之一半峰寬度;及一第三通帶,其位於約635奈米處且具有約40奈米之一半峰寬度。給出併入約50%透射率之一中性密度吸收體之該濾光器之製造規格。對於高達約25度之入射角,由該濾光器提供之PGAI大於零,如圖37D中所展示。如圖65A之表中所提及,相對於Farnsworth D-15色彩之重要性加權PGAI為至少約35%,其可較佳用於具有中度綠色弱之一觀察者。本質上呈中性色之該濾光器之白點相對於一綠色弱觀察者模型而穩定化,且其特徵為約40度處之小於0.01個單位之白點位移曲線中之一局部最小值,如圖37E中之3712處所展示。 連同圖38A至圖38E及圖66A及圖66B之對應表而揭示一綠色弱觀察者之一濾光器之一第三實施例。在此實施例中,濾光器設計準則經修改使得最小光譜透射率界限(等於光透射率之五分之一)僅在黃光波長至紅光波長(例如自約580奈米至約650奈米)內具強制性,如圖38A中之3801處所展示。因此,所得濾光器設計可被描述為具有一第三通帶,該第三通帶在該頻帶之短波長側上具有一「凸肩」。圖38C之曲線圖3807中所展示及圖65B之行中所列示之濾光器製造目標具有:位於約445奈米處之一第一通帶,其具有約20奈米之一半峰寬度;位於約535奈米處之一第二通帶,其具有約30奈米之一半峰寬度;及一第三通帶,其位於約635奈米處且具有約30奈米之一半峰寬度。給出併入約55%透射率之一中性密度吸收體之該濾光器之製造規格。對於高達約25度之入射角,由該濾光器提供之PGAI大於零,如圖38D中所展示。如圖66A之表中所提及,相對於Farnsworth D-15色彩之重要性加權PGAI為至少約40%,其可較佳用於具有重度綠色弱之一觀察者。本質上呈中性色之該濾光器之白點相對於一綠色弱觀察者模型而穩定化,且其特徵為約40度處之約0.01個單位之白點位移曲線中之一局部最小值,如圖38E中之3812處所展示。 連同圖39A至圖39E及圖67A及圖67B之對應表而揭示與圖36A至圖38E中所展示之系列相關之一進一步實施例。該實施例給一紅色弱觀察者提供紅綠色辨別增強之一濾光器。相較於紅綠色增強濾光器之先前實例,此等濾光器在經設計以用於紅色弱觀察者時一般偏好第二通帶與第三通帶之一更短波長組態。此係根據第三型色盲混淆線之定向,以及以下事實:紅色弱與長波長視錐細胞中之視網膜感光色素之光譜吸收率之一藍移相關聯。由於第二通帶與第三通帶之該更短波長組態,必須相對地減小此等濾光器之總光譜寬度,使得紅色呈現適度明亮。圖39C之曲線圖3907中所展示及圖67B之行中所列示之濾光器製造目標具有:位於約440奈米處之一第一通帶,其具有約20奈米之一半峰寬度;位於約530奈米處之一第二通帶,其具有約25奈米之一半峰寬度;及一第三通帶,其位於約615奈米處且具有約25奈米之一半峰寬度。給出併入約55%透射率之一中性密度吸收體之該濾光器之製造規格。對於高達約20度之入射角,由該濾光器提供之PGAI大於零,如圖39D中所展示。可在設計中額外考量此等濾光器之白點穩定性,然而,根據一標準觀察者模型之白點穩定性之分析可本質上不適合於此濾光器之意欲用途(例如供一紅色弱觀察者使用)。 在另一實施例中,連同圖40A至圖40E及圖68A及圖68B之對應表而揭示給正常觀察者提供色彩增強且改良一電子視覺顯示器(諸如具有一發光二極體背光之一液晶顯示器之視覺顯示器)之原色光之光對比度之一濾光器。該濾光器意欲與通常使用以下三個原色光之電子顯示器一起使用:一紅原色,其具有約610奈米至約630奈米之間之一峰值波長且具有約20奈米至約50奈米之一半高全寬;一綠原色,其具有約530奈米至約535奈米之一峰值波長且具有約20奈米至約50奈米之一半高全寬;及一藍原色,其具有約450奈米至約460奈米之間之一峰值波長且具有約20奈米之一半高全寬。該濾光器提供對於紅原色、綠原色及藍原色而言大致相等之該等原色光之一光透射率(因此,保留顯示器之白點)。此外,該光透射率比由該濾光器提供之日光之光透射率大至少約15%。因此,該濾光器可提供此等顯示器在例如室外條件下被觀看時之一改良對比率。 圖40C之曲線圖4007中所展示及圖68B之行中所列示之濾光器製造目標之特徵為提供高達45度入射角之一穩定化白點之四個通帶。濾光器達成提供小於約0度至約45度之間之0.01個單位之一白點位移之該白點之色彩穩定性,如由圖40E中之曲線4012所論證。此外,濾光器提供色彩辨別之一中度增強,如表68A中所提及,相對於Farnsworth D-15之色域面積之重要性加權百分比大於約20%。 亦可設計具有三個通帶之以類似方式執行之濾光器,其中穩定角之範圍延伸至約35度。圖21B中之2105及2106處展示三通帶濾光器之一變動及四通帶濾光器之另一變動,其等各達成此光對比度增益。濾光器2105具有三個通帶,其中約455奈米處之一第一通帶具有約15奈米之一半峰寬度,約535奈米處之一第二通帶具有約20奈米之一半峰寬度,及約620奈米處之一第三通帶具有約25奈米之一半峰寬度。圖21B中之濾光器2106具有四個通帶,其中約455奈米處之一第一通帶具有約15奈米之一半峰寬度,約540奈米處之一第二通帶具有約20奈米之一半峰寬度,約610奈米處之一第三通帶具有約20奈米之一半峰寬度,及約650奈米處之一第四通帶具有約20奈米之一半高全寬。相較於簡單三頻帶濾光器2105,濾光器2106提供相對於入射角之變化之改良色彩穩定性。圖21A展示日光之光譜輻射通量2103以及藍原色光之光譜輻射通量2101、綠原色光之光譜輻射通量2102及紅原色光之光譜輻射通量2104,如自一LED背光LCD顯示器所量測。基於有機LED之顯示器(OLED)之光譜通量十分類似,使得此實施例之濾光器亦將提供該等顯示器之光對比度增益。 在另一實施例中,用於正常觀察者之一多頻帶濾光器經設計以提供實質上正常之色彩辨別及約530奈米至約560奈米之間之一阻隔頻帶。該阻隔頻帶保護眼睛免受532奈米處之雷射輻射之侵害,例如由一倍頻Nd:YAG雷射所發射。此等雷射具有諸多應用,其包含用在各種醫療程序中。阻隔例如約532奈米處之可見雷射發射之習知設計濾光器通常在用在眼鏡中時亦導致不佳品質色彩辨別。例如,由吸收材料製成之濾光器無法達成足夠阻隔且亦不吸收一寬光譜頻帶。包括一單一阻帶之干涉濾光器(例如Rugate型濾光器)可給眼睛提供足夠保護,但導致色彩外觀之明顯變化且展現白點在偏離法向入射角處之明顯位移。相比而言,一多頻帶干涉濾光器可提供抵抗一可見雷射之足夠保護,且使用如先前所揭示之濾光器產生方法來設計之一多頻帶干涉濾光器亦可維持一正常色彩外觀,維持多個角度處之色彩穩定性,且保護眼睛免受一寬角度範圍內之可見雷射之侵害。 圖41A至圖41E及圖69A及圖69B之對應表中揭示一532奈米阻隔濾光器之一實施例。圖41C之曲線圖4107中所展示及圖69B之行中所列示之濾光器製造目標之特徵為由三個阻帶分離之四個通帶,其中中間阻帶為防雷射阻隔頻帶。第一通帶位於約440奈米處且具有約30奈米之一半峰寬度,第二通帶位於約510奈米處且具有約30奈米之一半峰寬度,第三通帶位於約570奈米處且具有約20奈米之一半峰寬度,及第四通帶位於約630奈米處且具有約30奈米之一半峰寬度。一般而言,可發現在給定位置之+/- 10奈米內具有頻帶且具有各種頻帶寬度之類似濾光器,但全部此等濾光器以至少四個通帶為特徵。 對於工業或醫療應用,阻隔通帶(介於約530奈米至約560奈米之間)可提供額定OD6或更高之一保護位準(OD6指示6之一光學密度,其導致透射光衰減10-6 倍)。對於幹擾位準保護(例如,抵抗具有一532奈米輸出之綠雷射指示器),保護位準可更小,例如約OD2。此保護可在濾光器產生器設計規格中被指定為如圖22A中所展示之一最大透射率約束2201。另外,如圖41E中所展示,此四個通帶濾光器可提供高達35度入射角之小於0.01個單位之白點之良好穩定性。如圖41D中所展示,此等濾光器亦可提供在一寬角度範圍內本質上正常之一色彩外觀,如由以下事實所證明:對於高達約25度之入射角,PGAI幾乎為零。 此等濾光器可併入至用在工業或醫療中之安全眼鏡中。特定言之,在雷射於醫療程序之一些應用中,可有益地使使用者能夠準確感知手術中之生物組織之顯色及感知某些彩色光之正確色度外觀,使得實施手術者能夠正確解譯電腦顯示及/或設備上之指示燈。應有用注意,此等濾光器無法在具有窄頻帶光譜輸出之照明源(諸如一些螢光燈或RGB發光二極體陣列)下相容使用。 圖42A至圖42E及圖70A及圖70B之對應表中揭示與圖41A至圖41E中所展示之實施例相關之另一實施例。圖42C之曲線圖4207中所展示及圖70B之行中所列示之濾光器製造目標之特徵為由三個阻帶分離之四個通帶,其中長波長阻帶為提供抵抗一589奈米鈉發射線之保護之一阻隔頻帶。免受此波長之眼睛保護可在某些程序(諸如玻璃製造或與在該阻隔頻帶之短波長側處或該阻隔頻帶之短波長側附近具有輸出功率之雷射一起工作)中具有工業應用。濾光器設計規格併入該阻隔頻帶作為一光譜透射率約束,如由圖23A中之最大透射率約束2301所展示。此實施例可提供類似品質之色彩外觀及白點穩定性,如由先前相關實施例所論證。此實施例之變動可僅包括三個通帶,然而此等變動趨於提供相對於PGAI度量之一實質減少且因此在某種程度上不適合於用在其中期望正常色彩辨別之應用中。 圖45A至圖45E及圖71A及圖71B之對應表中揭示與圖35A至圖35E中所展示之實施例相關之另一實施例。此實施例亦提供一藍光阻隔功能及實質上正常之色彩外觀。亦意欲適合於用在暗照明體條件下且尤其是在夜晚,其中預期鈉蒸氣燈之照明(例如路燈中所常見)。濾光器設計準則併入確保589奈米光由濾光器透射之一最小透射率約束,如圖45A中之4501處所展示。接著,可例如製造此一濾光器及一光致變色元件,使得可在照明位準之一範圍下使用併入於眼鏡中之該濾光器。此實施例提供實質上正常之色彩外觀,如圖45D中所展示,其中在高達45度之入射角內,PGAI與零無明顯不同。 此外,如圖43A之曲線圖中所展示,濾光器符合實線曲線4302及虛線曲線4301處分別所展示之光譜最小透射率約束及光譜最大透射率約束。最大光譜透射率約束規定:經設計之濾光器不透射具有低於450奈米之波長之光。最小光譜透射率約束規定:經設計之濾光器使450奈米至650奈米之間之至少15%之透射穿過全部阻帶;此外,經設計之濾光器通過針對具有580奈米至610奈米之間之波長之光之最大可能部分穿過。圖43B之實線曲線4303(其與圖45A至圖45D中所展示之實線曲線相同)處所展示之經設計之濾光器符合圖43A之光譜透射率約束,及虛線曲線4304處所展示之平滑濾光器完全符合意欲應用之約束;具體言之,濾光器提供聚集約589奈米處之能量之基於鈉蒸氣激勵之一高發光度人造燈,諸如常用在路燈中之低壓鈉燈及高壓鈉燈。 短波長藍光(例如,具有約380奈米至約450奈米之間之近紫外線波長)與一般被稱為眩光之一系列視覺現象相關聯,其之促成因數可包含螢光性(特定言之,對UV光及近UV光起部分反應之眼睛中之有機材料之螢光性)、穿過眼介質之光之分散散射(特定言之,此係因為視網膜生理機能因年齡相關效應而降級)及目鏡之色差(特定言之,短波長光無法準確地聚焦至視網膜上)。因此,選擇性抑制短波長藍光之透射之一濾光器可具有用於減少眩光且改良視覺靈敏度之效用。可藉由將短波長吸收體併入至一透鏡中而產生一標準藍光阻隔濾光器(亦稱為一截止濾光器),例如由圖19B中之虛線曲線1904處之透射率曲線所展示。然而,多頻帶藍光阻隔濾光器可提供改良色彩辨別(例如由圖19B中之實線曲線1902(提供約35%之光透射率)、虛線曲線1903(提供約60%之光透射率)處之透射率曲線所展示)以及圖45A及圖43B中所展示之濾光器設計。圖44A至圖44C中進一步詳細地展示由此等濾光器提供之色彩辨別。圖44C之4405處展示一習知藍光阻隔截止濾光器之光譜透射率,及圖44C之4404處展示一藍光阻隔多頻帶濾光器之光譜透射率。圖44A之色度圖中展示由該等濾光器提供之經選擇之Munsell色彩之色彩外觀,其包含虛線輪廓4401處之由該截止濾光器提供之色彩外觀及實線輪廓4402處之由該多頻帶濾光器提供之色彩外觀。由該截止濾光器提供之色彩外觀本質上具沿紅綠色軸之二色性,即,該等輪廓經塌陷使得表觀差異之藍黃色軸具有長度零。相較而言,由該多頻帶濾光器提供之色彩外觀具三色性(未經塌陷)。 圖46A及圖46B中描繪併入一衰減塗層及一吸收光學基板之一透鏡之一實例性組態,其中該等層(自前至後)為抗反射塗層4601、吸收光學基板(例如含釹之玻璃)4602、多層干涉塗層4604及衰減塗層4605。 在圖46B中,沿箭頭4611展示入射至透鏡之外側之光。該入射光穿過抗反射塗層及吸收光學基板,及接著由干涉濾光器分成最終由眼睛4607接收且由視網膜4609吸收之一透射分量及朝向光源反向行進但在第二次穿過第一衰減塗層期間被進一步吸收之一反射分量4612。仍參考圖46B,反射-吸收之一類似程序可發生於進入透鏡之後側之雜散光(如沿光束4606所展示),從而導致反射光4610在其到達眼睛之前被吸收。在一些實例中,衰減塗層與干涉塗層之介電層交錯或部分交錯。 已知含釹之玻璃透鏡提供一輕度增強之色彩辨別。例如,由圖47C中之實線曲線4705展示一1.5毫米厚之ACE改良型透鏡(由Barberini GmbH製造)之光譜透射率。可藉由與由圖47C中之光譜透射率曲線4704給出之一最佳適配參考濾光器Munsell 7.5B 8/4比較而分析濾光器之色彩辨別性質。沿圖47A之色度圖中之實線輪廓4702展示由該ACE改良型透鏡提供之經選擇之Munsell色彩之外觀,及沿虛線輪廓4701展示參考濾光器之經選擇之Munsell色彩之外觀。含釹濾光器產生由該等輪廓圍封之色域面積之一增加。然而,該增加主要聚集於未由綠色樣本之表觀純度之一增加平衡之紅色樣本周圍。更佳地,包括釹之一透鏡可用作為用於沈積一干涉濾光器及/或衰減塗層之光學基板,例如圖46A及圖46B中所描述。接著,所得複合濾光器可藉由組態待操作之干涉濾光器及窄頻帶吸收濾光器而提供通帶及阻帶。可藉由適當組態預濾光器p與待用在建構中之光學基板之光譜透射率而使用如本文所揭示之線性程式化之方法來設計此等複合濾光器。相較於具有僅由干涉過濾提供之通帶之多頻帶濾光器,此等複合濾光器可藉由PGAI或PGAIIW 量測而提供平均之更佳效能且一般對入射角之變化更不敏感。 下文連同圖48A至圖53E之詳細描述及另外在圖57A至圖57E中揭示併入一含釹吸收元件之濾光器設計之若干實施例。此等實施例之全部表示基於先前所揭示實施例之變動,且因此無需大量額外詳細討論。與此等變動相關之一般觀察在於:含釹之多頻帶濾光器可提供於其內提供色彩增強之視場之一略微改良角寬度。例如,對於僅包括中性密度類型之吸收濾光器之一實施例(其中在高達約25度時PGAI大於零),基於額外包括釹之此一濾光器之變動可在高達約30度時提供大於零之一PGAI。然而,此等變動趨於在其他區域中引起折衷,例如,在一些變動中,併入此一濾光器之眼用透鏡可在朝向眼睛之透鏡之側上具有一更大光反射率。 圖48A至圖48E及圖72A及圖72B之對應表中揭示併入一釹吸收元件之一濾光器之一第一實施例,其為基於圖33A至圖33E中所展示之設計之一變動。該濾光器給正常觀察者提供增強之紅綠色辨別。該變動提供使色彩增強於其內有效之更寬達約5度之一視場。然而,色域面積增加之重要性加權百分比在該變動與其相關實施例之間實質上相同。 圖49A至圖49E及圖73A及圖73B之對應表中揭示併入一釹吸收元件之一濾光器之一進一步實施例,其為基於圖34A至圖34E中所展示之設計之一變動。該濾光器給正常觀察者提供增強之藍黃色辨別。該變動提供使色彩增強於其內有效之更寬達約5度之一視場。然而,色域面積增加之重要性加權百分比在該變動與其相關實施例之間實質上相同。 圖50A至圖50E及圖74A及圖74B之對應表中揭示併入一釹吸收元件之一濾光器之一進一步實施例,其為基於圖36A至圖36E中所展示之設計之一變動。該濾光器給具有輕度綠色弱之觀察者提供增強之紅綠色辨別。該變動提供使色彩增強於其內有效之更寬達約5度之一視場。然而,色域面積增加之重要性加權百分比在該變動與其相關實施例之間實質上相同。 圖51A至圖51E及圖75A及圖75B之對應表中揭示併入一釹吸收元件之一濾光器之一進一步實施例,其為基於圖37A至圖37E中所展示之設計之一變動。該濾光器給具有中度綠色弱之觀察者提供增強之紅綠色辨別。該變動提供使色彩增強於其內有效之更寬達約5度之一視場。然而,色域面積增加之重要性加權百分比在該變動與其相關實施例之間實質上相同。 圖52A至圖52E及圖76A及圖76B之對應表中揭示併入一釹吸收元件之一濾光器之一進一步實施例,其為基於圖38A至圖38E中所展示之設計之一變動。該濾光器給具有重度綠色弱之觀察者提供增強之紅綠色辨別。該變動提供使色彩增強於其內有效之更寬達約5度之一視場。然而,色域面積增加之重要性加權百分比在該變動與其相關實施例之間實質上相同。 圖53A至圖53E及圖77A及圖77B之對應表中揭示併入一釹吸收元件之一濾光器之一進一步實施例,其為基於圖39A至圖39E中所展示之設計之一變動。該濾光器給具有紅色弱之觀察者提供增強之紅綠色辨別。該變動提供一實質上改良之色彩辨別功能,其係歸因於相對於位移穩定性約束而提供有利條件之主要吸收頻帶之最佳定位,藉此長波長通帶可有效地紅移達約10奈米,由此加寬光譜孔徑且不損及其他設計準則。 多頻帶濾光器之一進一步應用考量其等在增加由眼睛吸收之藍光及青光中之效用。特定言之,約450奈米至約490奈米之間之光之接收可刺激視網膜神經節細胞。此等細胞不涉及色覺,而是涉及褪黑激素之抑制及晝夜節律與日光相位之同步。此光之接收可例如在治療季節性情感障礙、睡眠障礙及其他健康問題時具有治療效果。圖54A中之5401處展示視網膜神經節細胞之一經估算之光譜吸收,其中藉由將一視網膜感光色素模板位移至約480奈米之一峰值波長而獲得吸收輪廓。為更佳地理解濾光器對神經節細胞之高能刺激之效應,圖54B之曲線圖中所展示之實例具指導性。首先,一中性密度濾光器(如5404處所展示)對神經節細胞吸收本質上無效應——對於一濾光器之此光透射率之一適度範圍(例如介於約20%至約100%之間),瞳孔之放大或縮小確保:到達視網膜之光量(即,每秒之光子數)大致恆定(例如,一放大瞳孔與一縮小瞳孔之間之面積比率為約5:1)。例如5403處所展示,一寬頻帶藍色濾光器具有約460奈米至約490奈米之間之一平均透射率,其大於該濾光器之光透射率。光(即,日光)之發光度影響瞳孔放大,而光敏感度在約555奈米處最大,且視網膜神經節細胞吸收率在約460奈米至約490奈米之間最大,因而斷定,相對於約555奈米處之透射率而實質上更多透射約480奈米處之光之一濾光器可導致瞳孔放大,使得由神經節細胞吸收之光子數增加。然而,寬頻帶濾光器(諸如圖中所展示之藍色實例)不提供一實質增益。此等藍色濾光器可改良神經節細胞刺激達約30%。然而,可藉由一多頻帶濾光器而實質上提高該增加,例如5402處所展示。此一濾光器可改良神經節細胞刺激高達約80%。 圖55A至圖55E及圖78A及圖78B之對應表中揭示用於改良神經節細胞刺激之一第一實施例。該實施例提供約80%之神經節細胞刺激之一增加,即,460奈米至490奈米之間之平均透射率與濾光器之光透射率之比率為約1.8。然而,該實施例不以一穩定白點為特徵。如由圖55E之曲線圖5512所展示,白點之外觀隨入射角之增大而朝向藍色迅速位移。 圖56A至圖56E及圖79A及圖79B之對應表中揭示用於改良神經節細胞刺激之一進一步實施例。該實施例提供約50%之神經節細胞刺激之一增加。該實施例亦以一穩定白點為特徵,如由圖56E之曲線圖5612所展示。對於高達約30度之入射角,白點位移小於約0.01個單位。另外,如圖56D中所展示,對於高達約30度之入射角,PGAI本質上為零,從而論證:濾光器提供本質上正常之色彩外觀。然而,具有四個通帶之濾光器設計相對較複雜且神經節細胞刺激之改良不顯著。 圖57A至圖57E及圖80A及圖80B之對應表中揭示用於改良神經節細胞刺激之一進一步實施例。該實施例提供約65%之神經節細胞刺激之一增加及一穩定白點。由併入一釹吸收元件之濾光器設計促進此等條件下之改良效能。如由圖57E之曲線圖5712所展示,對於高達約30度之入射角,白點位移小於約0.01個單位。另外,如圖57D中所展示,對於高達約30度之入射角,PGAI本質上為零,從而論證:濾光器提供本質上正常之色彩外觀。 在進一步實施例中,一濾光器可經設計以併入至一燈總成中,其中製造為例如一多層介電塗層之該濾光器提供一分束功能,藉由該分束功能,由該燈內之一光源發射之光之透射分量及反射分量經組態以具有相同之一白點。 反射白點與透射白點之匹配可實現兩個光束分量用於照明,因此不會因過濾而浪費能量。此外,光束之透射分量可經組態以提供一色彩增強效應,使得可建構一燈總成,其中例如光束之中心區域提供光之一增強品質(參閱下文相對於圖27B之額外討論)。可在反射光中觀察到對色彩外觀之一相反作用,其中可相較於如由透射照明體所呈現之相對色域面積之增加而在一相反作用中減小如由反射照明體所呈現之相對色域面積,即,經重新組合之光束之平均色域面積係一致的。 含有此一濾光器之一燈總成較佳地包含一寬頻帶照明體。在一實施例中,可較佳地使用發光二極體來照明。若包括LED驅動磷光體之白色LED無法給良好色彩外觀單獨提供足夠寬之頻帶發射,則通常可以例如約4:1之一比率組合白色LED與紅色LED以產生具有與日光近似相同之色溫及光譜寬度之一寬頻帶照明體。圖25A中展示此一複合照明體之光譜輻射通量2501以及一白色LED之光譜輻射通量2502及一紅色LED之光譜輻射通量2503。此等照明體可具有約5000 K至約7000 K之間之一色溫及約80至約90之間之一CRI。在一進一步實例中,包括LED刺激日光之一照明體可包含具有例如約4:1:2之一比率之白色LED、紅色LED及藍色(或青色)LED以產生具有約5000 K至約7000 K之間之一色溫及約90至約100之間之一CRI之一寬頻帶照明體。 具有光譜透射率2504之一濾光器(如圖25B中所展示)可執行所描述之光譜分束。此等濾光器亦被稱為二向色濾光器或二向色反射體。此濾光器之設計準則可例如包含:一成本向量,其經組態以最大化相對色域面積;如上文所描述之一LED混合物,其作為照明體;及一參考濾光器,其為中性濾光器,使得該濾光器下之照明體之白點相同於該中性濾光器下之照明體及反射濾光器之白點。另外,白點約束可較佳地指定高達約20度之偏離法向入射角處之白點。此適應在完美地準直入射光時之潛在困難。可用一小佔據面積之準直透鏡來達成一20度光束寬度。此外,可較佳地指定具有橫跨可見波長之約10%之一最小光譜透射率之濾光器,其可用來調節色域面積增加量以在分裂光束經空間地重新組合時減少色彩外觀在該等分裂光束之混合區域中之不均勻外觀。 圖26C中再次呈現照明體分束濾光器之光譜透射率2605及其反量(反射)之光譜透射率2606。圖26B中再次展示LED照明體之混合物之光譜輻射通量2604。圖26A之色度圖之點2603處展示濾光器及反向濾光器之白點之色度座標。2601為濾光器之經選擇之Munsell色彩之色度座標,及2602為反向濾光器之經選擇之Munsell色彩之色度座標。可在此等輪廓中容易地看見對色域面積之相反效應,藉此透過濾光器而透射之照明體使色域面積增加且透過濾光器而反射之照明體回應地使色域面積減小。 圖27A及圖27B中展示用於形成包含此一分束濾光器之一燈總成之組件之一可能配置。此處,該總成可配置為一堆疊,其包含一導熱基板2701(諸如一金屬電路板)、一發光二極體2702、一光束形成光學光導2703及一多層干涉塗層(其可沈積至一光學透明基板(諸如玻璃)之表面上)。 現特定參考圖27B,在一實例性配置中,由LED 2702發射之一束光藉由光學器件(例如光導)2703而準直至約20度之一光束寬度,及接著入射於干涉濾光器2704上。其後,光之透射分量顯現於輸出光束2708之中心部分中,且反射部分由光導(例如由沿2709所指示之邊界處之內反射)重新導引,及接著沿輸出光束2707之環形部分發射。如圖所展示,該配置使燈總成能夠併入一色彩增強濾光器且不損及發光效率,此係因為未由濾光器透射之光反向輻射至仍可用於一般照明之環境中,而一吸收濾光器將降低燈之效率,干涉濾光器具有一幾乎一致之效率。 可在室內有利地採用此等照明體以給綠色弱觀察者及紅色弱觀察者提供改良色彩辨別。在此等組態中,照明體亦可與併入於眼鏡中之濾光器(如先前所揭示)一起使用。 就本說明書中之上文所揭示之任何濾光器之以波長為函數之光譜透射率而言,用於計算通帶及阻帶之中心位置及寬度之一方法包括:將一高斯平滑核心應用至光譜透射率曲線(例如藉由該核心與透射資料序列之迴旋),其中該核心之寬度足夠寬以本質上消除曲線之任何無用變動(舉例而言,諸如不為所關注濾光器看重之暫態、漣波、雜訊或其他假影);接著歸一化曲線,使得最大透射率等於100%;及接著將各透射率值湊整至0%或100%,使得各鄰接光譜區域(其中湊整值為0%)對應於一阻帶之頻帶邊界,及各鄰接光譜區域(其中該湊整值為100%)對應於一通帶之頻帶邊界。 就根據此方法而計算之頻帶邊界而言,可相對於原曲線而計算各通帶及各阻帶內之平均透射率。一通帶或阻帶之寬度等於下頻帶邊界與上頻帶邊界之間之距離,且一通帶或阻帶之中心等於下頻帶邊界與上頻帶邊界之間之中點。 較佳地,對於通帶邊界及阻帶邊界之任何此計算集合,對於各交錯阻帶,該阻帶之平均透射率至多為一相鄰通帶之平均透射率之一半。若此條件不適用,則通帶及阻帶之間之變動可為本質上無用的,在該情況中,可增加平滑核心之寬度且反覆地實施計算,直至判定一適合平滑寬度。 對於本發明中所關注之大多數濾光器,具有約20奈米之一半峰寬度之一平滑核心適合於此計算之目的。 對於本發明中所描述之大多數濾光器,可給出以湊整至最接近5奈米之波長為單位之與頻帶邊界位置、頻帶中心位置及頻帶寬度有關之規定值。本文之教示足以指定具有較大光譜解析度之濾光器。然而,未必需要一較大光譜解析度來實踐本發明。 本說明書之上述部分揭示用於產生以一所要方式影響色覺之多頻帶光學濾光器之方法,其包含:設計滿足與濾光器之意欲用途相關之約束之一濾光器規格之方法;評估濾光器規格之效能且調整設計以相對於所要效應而進一步改良濾光器規格之效能以達到此一濾光器之一較佳實施例之規格之方法;製造濾光器及/或提供適合於具有由另一方法製造之濾光器之機器規格之方法;及將濾光器併入至一眼用透鏡或一燈總成中以產生提供對色覺之所要效應之一器件之一較佳實施例之方法。 由本發明實現之對色覺之效應之範圍包含:維持正常色彩辨別(其在本發明中亦被稱為提供「良好色彩辨別」);增強色彩辨別(在本發明中有時亦被稱為「增強」或「改良」色彩辨別),可無條件地假定紅色與綠色之間之色彩辨別改良等同於藍色與黃色之間之色彩辨別改良;增強紅綠色辨別,其中所要效應使紅色與綠色之間之辨別改良最大化;及增強藍黃色辨別,其中所要效應使藍色與黃色之間之辨別改良最大化。 一般可期望亦提供額外功能(諸如可見光譜中之一或多個區域內之指定最小及/或最大光譜透射率)之濾光器維持正常色彩辨別,其中藉由習知方法而達成等效光譜透射率限制將導致一濾光器提供品質不佳之色彩辨別。例如,充當一干涉濾光器之一習知陷波濾光器或截止濾光器可導致某些色彩之色度外觀之顯著變化,及/或可在該濾光器併入至眼鏡中時導致一些色彩之外觀以使得觀看者不適之一方式相對於可變視角而改變。在一進一步實例中,影響光譜透射率之吸收平均值可導致濾光器具有一低光透射率及/或一強勁顯色白點,此係因為達成光譜透射率限制所需之吸收材料之聚集可顯著影響可見光譜之一寬區域內之透射率。 本文所揭示之方法實現濾光器之設計、規格及製造,該等濾光器維持一寬視角範圍內之正常色彩辨別及提供相對於光譜透射率之有用限制。本文所揭示之此等濾光器及併入此等濾光器之產品之特定變動包含:阻隔約380奈米至約450奈米之間之藍光之濾光器;阻隔約380奈米至約450奈米之間之藍光且同時確保一寬視角範圍內之約589奈米處之光之高光譜透射率之濾光器;阻隔一寬視角範圍內之約532奈米處之綠光之濾光器;及提供相對於光之光透射率之約460奈米至約490奈米之間之光之一高平均透射率之濾光器。此實施例族群內之濾光器全部包括與兩個阻帶交錯之三個通帶。然而,諸多此等濾光器包括與三個阻帶交錯之四個通帶,其中該等阻帶之一或多者及/或該等通帶之一或多者提供所要光譜透射率限制。 基於本文所揭示方法之進一步變動實現使一寬視角範圍內之色彩辨別增強之濾光器之設計、規格及製造,該等濾光器包含:使紅綠色辨別增強之濾光器;使藍黃色辨別增強之濾光器;或以上兩者。該等濾光器可經組態以針對具有正常色覺之觀察者增強色彩辨別,或可經組態以針對具有色覺缺陷(其包含綠色弱色覺缺陷、紅色弱色覺缺陷及第三型色弱色覺缺陷)之觀察者增強色彩辨別。趨向於供一特定觀察者使用之一濾光器之組態可提供以一所要方式影響色覺之一濾光器之一較佳實施例。然而,此組態未必妨礙其他觀察者體驗所要效應之部分或全部。 使紅綠色辨別增強之濾光器之應用包含用作為綠色弱觀察者及紅色弱觀察者之光學輔助設備。此等色覺缺陷人群之特徵為對紅色與綠色之間之變動之一敏感度,其低於正常觀察者之敏感度。使紅綠色辨別增強之濾光器亦可用在包含以下各者之其他應用中:用於正常觀察者之通用眼鏡(例如太陽鏡);以及諸如在進行包含高爾夫之某些運動時使用之活動專用眼鏡。 使藍黃色辨別增強之濾光器可用於第三型色弱觀察者,且亦具有包含增強光對比度、刺激紅綠色覺缺陷及偵測偽裝物體之其他應用。 提供紅色與綠色之間及藍色與黃色之間之色彩辨別之一平衡增強之濾光器可較佳地供具有正常色覺之觀察者使用,其中此等濾光器在併入至眼鏡中時提供視覺品質之一般改良。 此等實施例族群內之濾光器全部包括與兩個阻帶交錯之三個通帶。然而,一些此等濾光器可包括與三個阻帶交錯之四個通帶。通常,第四通帶具有位於大於約660奈米處之一中心,且經組態使得濾光器維持極端入射角處之一實質上不變白點。 可根據第二通帶之中心位置而分類經組態以使色彩辨別增強之濾光器。對於約520奈米至約540奈米之間之中心位置,濾光器主要著重提供紅色與綠色之間之一辨別改良。對於約545奈米至約550奈米之間之中心位置,濾光器提供紅色與綠色之間及藍色與黃色之間之一大致相同之辨別改良。對於約555奈米至約580奈米之間之中心位置,濾光器著重提供藍色與黃色之間之一辨別改良。 對於經組態以使藍黃色辨別增強之一濾光器,第二通帶之較佳中心位置為約580奈米,其與被大多數觀察者僅視為黃色之單色波長對應。然而,具有580奈米處之一第二通帶中心位置之一濾光器可能不切實際,此係因為其可導致色彩之外觀呈二色性且將對應地損失紅色與綠色之間之全部辨別。因此,例如藉由確保一綠色交通信號之色度座標在給出其可接受限制之一定義邊界內而約束此等濾光器係有用的。因而,可發現具有小於或等於約560奈米之一第二通帶位置之最佳濾光器,其在損害紅色與綠色之間之色彩辨別之情況下最大化藍色與黃色之間之辨別。 對於經組態以使紅色與綠色之間之辨別增強之一濾光器,第二通帶之最佳中心位置根據所關注之色彩組而變動。相對於Munsell色彩樣本及/或Farnsworth D-15色彩,中心位置之最佳選擇為約530奈米。然而,相對於自然界之樣本,更佳位置為約540奈米。因此,535奈米之選擇可給予用在一混合環境中之此一濾光器最佳平均情況選擇。 相對於經組態以使一綠色弱觀察者增強紅綠色辨別之一濾光器,較佳實施例可取決於此類型之觀察者中之子類。對於輕度綠色弱觀察者,通帶平均透射率與阻帶平均透射率之間之一適中對比率可適合為例如約4:1。對於一中度綠色弱觀察者,至少約6:1之一比率可為較佳的。對於一重度綠色弱觀察者,至少8:1之一比率可為較佳的。 對於具有大於約6:1之一通帶與阻帶對比率之濾光器,可較佳地限制濾光器規格以提供約580奈米至約620奈米之間及/或約560奈米至約580奈米之間之光透射率之至少約五分之一之一最小光譜透射率。此可確保:濾光器適合於一般用途,例如同時操作其中需要某些窄頻帶黃燈(其包含發光二極體及低壓鈉燈)之適合可見度之一機動車輛。在此等變動中,可較佳地限制濾光器以約束一黃色交通信號在一特定區域內之色度座標,使得此等燈不會被誤認為例如橙色或紅色。 相對於經組態以使一紅色弱觀察者增強紅綠色辨別之一濾光器,基於上述範圍之一變動適用於第二通帶中心位置。歸因於與異常相關聯之視網膜生理機能,較佳波長全部經藍移達約5奈米,例如,535奈米之選擇被修改至約530奈米。此外,應注意,相對於供紅色弱觀察者使用之濾光器之組態,第三通帶之中心位置較佳地至多介於約610奈米至約625奈米之間,此係因為較長波長之使用可導致此等觀察者之紅色可見度減小。 用於增強色彩辨別之上述實施例族群內之濾光器全部包括與兩個阻帶交錯之三個通帶。 關於用於色覺之濾光器之組態,此等濾光器一般較佳地提供某一適度範圍內之一光透射率(例如至少約8%),且亦較佳地提供未強勁顯色之一白點(即,如透過濾光器所觀看之平均日光之色度座標)。 可較佳地選擇一約束白點區域來提供一本質上呈中性之色調,此係因為具有經適度或強勁著色之一白點之濾光器無法提供一些色彩之適合亮度。此外,可較佳地施加一限制使得該白點保持在一視角範圍內之一相對較小區域內,此係因為此等濾光器在併入至眼鏡中時提供最舒適觀看體驗且在併入至燈總成中時實現未對準及光束散度之容限。 可較佳地將CIELUV(u',v')色度座標用於此等計算,此係因為:根據此標度,對於所關注白點之範圍,定義色彩之間之最小可覺差之橢圓近似呈圓形。可相對於CIE 1931 2度標準觀察者或CIE 1964 10度標準觀察者而計算(u',v')座標,其中前者給出物體在一距離處之表觀色彩之較佳預測,及後者給出對向視場之一較大部分之物體之表觀色彩之較佳預測。 相對於經組態以供具有正常色覺之觀察者使用之濾光器,白點約束區域可在(u',v')色度圖上具有約0.02個單位之一半徑。更佳地,該區域可具有約0.01個單位之一半徑,及亦更佳地,使濾光器白點符合限制之入射角範圍可自0度擴大至至少約25度,及更佳地,自0度擴大至至少約35度。 相對於經組態以供具有色覺缺陷之觀察者使用之濾光器,可較佳地將約束區域定義為一橢圓區域,例如,其中該橢圓之長軸沿對應於該類型之色覺缺陷之混淆線定向。因而,當根據一圓形約束區域而分析此等濾光器之性質時,此等濾光器之性質之特徵為一白點,其離開中間角度之某一範圍內之約束區域且接著以一更陡峭角再次進入約束區域,其中該更陡峭角通常介於約20度至約40度之間。在一些實施例中,此可提供一濾光器,其似乎在該白點由意欲觀察者觀看時提供該白點之一良好穩定性,但具有正常色覺之一觀察者無法感知相同程度之穩定性。相對於輕度綠色弱觀察者及中度綠色弱觀察者,白點約束區域可較佳地受限於約0.01個單位之一半徑。相對於重度綠色弱觀察者,具有約0.02個單位之一半徑之一無約束區域可為較佳的。相對於紅色弱觀察者,可將其內考量約束之角範圍減小至例如約0度至約20度之間。 用於設計使色彩辨別增強之一濾光器之一第一方法包括:根據如上文中所描述之所要效應而選擇第二通帶之所要中心位置;選擇適合於該濾光器之所要光透射率之第二通帶之一最小所需寬度(應注意,此偏好亦隱含:第二通帶之平均透射率係儘可能高的);及接著選擇第一通帶及第三通帶之適當中心位置及寬度。第一通帶之中心較佳地位於最短可能波長處,及第三通帶之中心較佳地位於最長可能波長處,其中由與該濾光器之白點相關之限制約束中心位置及寬度之可能範圍,該限制包含白點在法向入射處之所要色度座標;及其內將含有相對於偏離法向入射角處之一觀看條件範圍之白點之色度座標之區域。接著,三個通帶內之平均透射率被較佳地選擇為最大可能值(若該濾光器被指定併入有例如一吸收濾光器,該值可小於100%),及可較佳地在值之一範圍內選擇交錯阻帶之平均透射率,該範圍對應於約2:1至約10:1或更大之間之通帶與阻帶之間之平均透射率之對比率。更高對比率可產生更強色彩辨別增強。此等高比率亦可與某些燈(諸如窄頻帶燈)之罕見及/或不穩定色彩外觀相關聯。 與通帶位置及通帶與阻帶對比率之較佳選擇以及設計本文所揭示濾光器之方法相關之以上描述提供適當教示以設計濾光器(其為上文所辨別族群之成員)。例如,為藉由一窮舉搜尋程序而達成此一濾光器,可例如根據與如上文所描述之對色覺之效應相關聯之召集範圍而確定第二通帶之中心位置及寬度以及通帶與阻帶對比率,接著列舉第一通帶及第三通帶之中心位置及寬度之全部可能組合,及接著使用一電腦來評估所列舉組內之各濾光器以選擇較佳成員。該較佳成員滿足遭受使相對於色彩辨別之一效能度量最大化之所要設計約束。所列舉之組可包括數千個成員,且所得計算可因考量中之頻帶數目及計算之光譜解析度而需要大量計算時間。 更佳地,可採用藉由解算一線性程式而設計此等濾光器之本文所揭示之方法,藉此將設計約束變換成一良式線性程式,該良式線性程式將可行濾光器設計之限制定義為被最佳描述為一廣義多維凸多面體之一幾何抽象。藉由引導(其使用如本發明之教示中所描述之一成本向量),一線性程式解算器可將濾光器構件迅速定位於可行組之邊界上以最大化沿由該成本向量指示之方向之給定約束。如本文所揭示,線性程式化之方法能夠幾乎瞬時地判定試驗濾光器規格,使得實踐本發明之最佳方法可相互作用地引導成本向量及/或設計約束,使得可由一操作者即時評估一特定試驗濾光器所涉及之效能權衡。該線性程式化方法亦實現例如包括一干涉濾光器及一窄頻帶吸收濾光器(諸如一含釹光學基板)之複合濾光器之設計,其中該線性程式解算器判定該干涉濾光器之透射率規格以與該吸收濾光器一起產生所要效應。由該線性程式解算器考量之可行濾光器組可本質上包括難以或無法藉由列舉頻帶或反覆局部搜尋程序而達成之任意光譜透射率曲線。由於該線性程式解算器未嚴格受限於設計一多頻帶濾光器(其為與阻帶交錯之一序列通帶),所以其可用於設計在與另一特定濾光器一起使用時達成一多頻帶光譜透射率之一濾光器,其包含考量相對於此等複合濾光器在一入射角範圍內之性質之約束準則。 就任何試驗濾光器規格(例如由剛描述之方法所產生)而言,本文所揭示之進一步方法實現試驗濾光器對色彩辨別之效應之預測。 例如,在一實施例中,一方法涉及:判定一最佳適配寬頻帶參考濾光器;接著計算如透過試驗濾光器及參考濾光器所觀看之一組參考色彩之色度座標;及比較由兩個條件下之座標圍封之面積之比率。 在另一實施例中,判定一最佳適配寬頻帶參考濾光器,接著計算如透過試驗濾光器及參考濾光器所觀看之一組參考色彩之色度座標,及接著將該等色度座標投影至色彩空間之一軸上,及比較沿該軸之該等座標組之相對標準偏差。較佳地,軸可包含第三型色盲混淆線、綠色盲混淆線及紅色盲混淆線之一或多者,使得所計算之比率對應於沿對應方向之色彩辨別之增強、減弱或維持,其中第三型色盲混淆線一般與藍色與黃色之間之辨別對應,及綠色盲混淆線及紅色盲混淆線一般與紅色與綠色之間之辨別對應。 更佳地,相對於如約0度至至少約25度之間之偏離法向入射角之一範圍內所觀看之試驗濾光器而實施此等效能分析計算。該等角度內之平均效能可用於估算產品例如在併入至一眼用透鏡中時之總體效力,使得必須在一寬視角範圍內考量濾光器效能。甚至更佳地,此分析可考量透鏡在一眼鏡框內之曲率及定向、及/或眼睛之幾何形狀及/或可在眼窩中旋轉之眼睛之定向之估算分佈。 較佳地,相對於參考色彩之此等效能評估可考量條件之色彩表示,在該等條件下,產品可與例如眼鏡一起使用,該等參考色彩應包含來自自然界以及人造色素之兩個樣本,而對於經組態以併入至室內燈總成中之濾光器,該等參考色彩可僅包括人造色素。 就一較佳試驗濾光器規格而言,濾光器可例如製造為藉由將一堆疊之介電材料物理氣相沈積至一光學基板上而製造之一干涉濾光器。可由最小透射率曲線及最大透射率曲線界限該試驗濾光器規格以例如提供適合於使濾光器能夠由熟習此等生產方法之一操作者製造之一加工容限規格。 本文所揭示之濾光器之一些實施例可製造為例如包括約100層之介電材料且具有約6微米之一總厚度之高階干涉濾光器。 相對於一些實施例(特定言之,其中僅期望通帶與阻帶之平均透射率之間之一適中對比率(例如,具有約2:1至約4:1之間之一比率)之實施例),可明顯減小層數及厚度以例如需要至多約50個層及/或具有約3微米之一總厚度,其中可藉由將一平滑核心應用至濾光器規格而達成此等限制,例如,此一核心較佳地具有一高斯形狀及至少約20奈米之一半峰值。接著,所得簡化設計可受益於更短加工時間、與更低精確度程序之相容性及更低總生產成本。 由本文所揭示之濾光器實施例表示之種類之若干者可受益於作為複合濾光器設計(例如包括一干涉濾光器及一吸收濾光器,其中該吸收濾光器包括釹)之建構。例如,相對於在一角範圍內具有一約束白點之紅綠色增強濾光器,此等複合設計係可行的,其中可在比考量相同約束準則且不具有釹吸收組分時之可行波長更長之一波長處選擇第三通帶之位置。而更長波長中心位置係較佳的,如先前所描述,此可導致複合濾光器設計進一步增強色彩辨別。此外,此等複合設計可提供色彩之改良穩定性,例如當分析一角範圍內之效能時,對於比不包括釹之一等效濾光器設計之角度大5度之一高角度,包括釹之一複合設計可保持大於1:1之一色域面積比。然而,可發現,改良角穩定性通常因由存在於含釹濾光器中之一非所要次級吸收頻帶所致之一略微更低之峰值效能而受損,此所得濾光器之第二通帶稍寬於最佳通帶。然而,包括釹之此等複合設計可較佳為併入至眼鏡中之濾光器(其中需考量總體視覺舒適度)。 替代地或另外,其他窄頻帶吸收體可用作為釹,其包含窄頻帶有機染料及其他稀土元素(諸如鐠或鈥),藉此窄頻帶吸收體之一些此等組合可提供包括一干涉濾光器之一複合濾光器設計以展現改良角穩定性及/或減小光反射率。可例如使用如本文所揭示之線性程式化之方法來設計此等組合。 當所揭示濾光器之任何者被製造為干涉濾光器時,必須考量此等濾光器之高反射率。當併入至眼鏡中時,透鏡之內表面上之光透射率與光反射率之比率較佳為至多約2:1。相對於其中干涉濾光器具有一高透射率(例如超過60%)之濾光器,干涉濾光器之反射率可足夠小以致可被忽略。較佳地,此等濾光器可與兩者呈吸收濾光器形式之一線性偏振器或一光致變色吸收濾光器組合,該等吸收濾光器在與一干涉濾光器一起被安置時不會明顯減小光反射率。相對於其中干涉濾光器具有小於約60%之一光透射率之濾光器,透鏡之內表面上之反射率之管理為一相當大的問題。一第一方法為將一中性密度吸收體施加至透鏡之後側以促使反射光必須穿過該吸收體兩次之事實,此可使對比率恢復至一可接受位準。然而,該中性密度吸收體亦減小透鏡之最大光譜透射率,其繼而隱含通帶與阻帶之間之平均透射對比率之一所需減小,其例如可減少所提供之有效色彩辨別改良。 在一實施例中,一圓形偏振器可施加至內表面,且經組態使得線性偏振元件吸收後側反射。此建構可達成一非常高之對比率。替代地,可將一金屬衰減塗層併入至干涉濾光器中,其中該干涉濾光器例如包括二氧化鈦及二氧化矽(TiO2 及SiO2 )之層,及該金屬層包括純鈦。歸因於此等金屬層在併入至干涉濾光器中時之性質,配置可相對於反射率之衰減而明顯優於一等效中性密度濾光器。此外,歸因於金屬與金屬氧化物之間之良好材料相容性,此一配置可提供生產亦較經濟且提供對色覺之所要效應之一穩健產品。 與干涉濾光器之反射率相關之一進一步關注係關於干涉濾光器在眼用透鏡總成中之放置,其中若此等濾光器安置於內表面上,則可存在由基板內之內反射導致之可見假影;此等較佳地藉由透鏡之相對表面上之一高品質抗反射塗層而減輕。 關於經組態以使色彩辨別增強之濾光器至燈總成中之併入(其中該濾光器亦可被稱為二向色反射體),該濾光器之最佳實施例可考量此等總成之效率以及由照明體之透射分量及反射分量兩者提供之色彩辨別之品質。在一些實施例中,照明體可為一寬頻帶源,例如,其中透射分量使紅色與綠色之間之辨別增強,及反射分量使藍色與黃色之間之辨別增強。更佳地,照明體可為一多頻帶源(諸如一陣列之紅色發光二極體、綠色發光二極體及藍色發光二極體),使得透射分量提供增強之色彩辨別及反射分量維持正常色彩辨別。存在燈總成之較佳配置,其中光之透射分量及反射分量兩者用於照明。 可例如在具有一2.3 GHz Intel Core i7處理器及8 GB之RAM之一電腦上使用購自Wolfram Research公司之市售計算軟體程式Mathematica®(包含其線性程式解算器)來實施本文所揭示之濾光器設計方法。然而,熟習技術者應瞭解,本文所揭示之方法不受限於上述實施方案且與電腦/系統架構無關。據此,該等方法可在其他計算平台上等效地實施,使用其他計算軟體(濾光器設計方法之市售或特定編碼計算軟體),且亦可硬接線至一電路或其他計算組件中。 本發明具繪示性而不具限制性。熟習技術者將鑒於本發明而明白進一步修改。例如,雖然上文所描述之方法及步驟指示依某一順序發生之某些事件,但一般技術者將認識到,某些步驟之順序可被修改且此等修改係根據本文所揭示之發明。另外,若可行,則可在一並行程序中同時執行該等步驟之若干者,以及如上文所描述般地依序執行該等步驟之若干者。本文中被稱為一方法或程序之操作之動作亦可被理解為該方法或程序中之「步驟」。因此,就此而言,存在本文所揭示之本發明之變動,其等係在本發明之精神內或等效於本文所揭示之本發明,本發明及其申請專利範圍亦意欲涵蓋該等變動。本發明中所引用之全部公開案及專利申請案之全文以引用方式併入本文中,宛如各個別公開案或專利申請案在本文中被特別及個別地提出。 Cross-reference to related applications This application is related to Provisional US Patent Application No. 61 / 449,049, filed on March 3, 2011 and named "MULTI-BAND OPTICAL FILTERS FOR GOOD COLOR APPEARANCE", the entirety of which is incorporated herein by reference. [Embodiments] should be read with reference to the drawings, wherein the same reference numerals refer to the same elements throughout the different drawings. The drawings, which are not necessarily drawn to scale, depict selected embodiments and are not intended to limit the scope of the invention. [Embodiment] The principle of the present invention is illustrated by way of example rather than limitation. [Embodiments] Will enable those skilled in the art to clearly make and use the present invention, and describe several embodiments, adaptations, changes, substitutions, and usages of the present invention, including the best mode for implementing the present invention as currently considered. As used in this specification and the scope of the accompanying patent application, unless the context clearly indicates otherwise, the singular forms "a" and "the" include plural referents. The teachings of the present invention may be usefully read in conjunction with a general understanding of optical science, human color vision science, colorimetry science, and related topics. For general references on these topics, see, for example, "Color Science: Concepts and Methods, Quantitative Data and Formulae" by Günter Wyszecki and WS Stiles (Wiley, 1982, ISBN # 0471021067). In order not to lose the generality, the present invention can assume a conventional configuration of the human visual system: specifically (if not otherwise stated), a human visual system with a photosensitive color vision of a normal human observer with a 2 degree field of view . Photosensitive color vision occurs when the level of illumination is high enough that the rod-shaped photoreceptor cells are not activated, such as when the average surface illumination is about 10 lux or more. In the present invention, unless otherwise stated, the color appearance model is calculated using the CIE 1976 L * u'v '(LUV) color space (which uses a CIE 1931 standard observer with a 2 degree field of view). Details of this calculation are given by the CIE standard S014-5 / E: 2009. The chromaticity diagram is shown in the figure using a color difference table color system (UCS) such as CIE 1976, where the chromaticity coordinates are (u ', v') values, as calculated by the standard. For those of ordinary skill, these teachings introduce a pre-receptor eye assembly (which includes ocular media and Macular pigment) and procedures sufficient to make the teachings applicable to alternative conditions (including, for example, the use of CIE 1964 10-degree observer and changes in observer's eyes and retinal physiology) (e.g., consideration of color vision defects, age, and / or eyes pathology). In the present invention, the illuminant D65 (D65) means light having a typical spectral radiant flux of sunlight and a correlated color temperature of one of 6500 Kelvin, and is a joint ISO / CIE standard ISO 10526: 1999 / CIE S005 / E-1998 definition. In the present invention, the reference to "sunlight", "sunlight" or "average daylight" means the illuminant D65. Illuminant E means an ideal lamp defined as having equal power as a function of wavelength. Illuminant A means a lamp that is usually an incandescent light bulb, which is defined as having a spectral radiant flux of an ideal black body radiator according to Planck's law and a correlated color temperature of 2848 K. A series of lamps including illuminants FL1 to FL12 (which represents the spectral radiant flux of a typical type of fluorescent lamp) is defined by CIE Publication No. 15: 2004. Munsell color is a group of color samples formulated with specific pigments to establish a color standard defined in the spectral domain. Munsell colors can be used in print in the Munsell Colors Book (Glossy Edition, ISBN # 9994678620, 1980). Published by Parkkinen JPS, Hallikainen J., and Jaaskelainen T. "Characteristic spectra of Munsell colors" (Journal of the Optical Society of America A, Vol. 6, No. 2, 1989, p. 318-p. 322) A measurement of the spectral reflectance of a color. Farnsworth D-15 is a standardized color discrimination test that includes forming 15 Munsell color samples with a contour of one of chromaticities between 2 and 4 according to the Munsell scale. Farnsworth D-15 is described by the public case "The Farnsworth dichotomous test for color blindness panel D15 manual" (News York: Psych Corporation; 1947, Farnsworth D). The drawings included in the present invention may be a program flow chart that visually depicts generalized objects and the processes of processing and generating those objects. FIG. 58 depicts an example of a program flowchart for promoting visual language understanding. In this illustration, rounded boxes (eg, 5801 and 5803) depict objects that can be understood as physical entities, virtual entities (such as numerical data), or composite objects containing a heterogeneous collection of component objects. A rounded frame (such as shown at 5808 and 5811) with a double wire frame depicts a composite object containing a heterogeneous assembly of objects. A dashed arrow depicts a component object retrieved from a composite object, such as shown by the connected entities 5801 and 5803. The flow of objects in the program is shown by a solid line arrow, such as shown by connecting entities 5801 and 5802. A square box (such as 5802 and 5805) represents an operation. Operations can produce objects, transform objects, or analyze objects. An arrow pointing away from the frame of an operation shows the output of that operation. The output of an operation depends on the input of the operation that can be tracked by following all the arrows in the box leading to the operation. The operation can be formed as a composite operation by encapsulating another procedure diagram, such as shown at 5806. This construction enables the program flow chart to be expanded on multiple pages, thereby allowing a composite operation defined in another schema to be invoked when referring to one schema. Operations can be connected together in series or in parallel. The details of the sequence in which a particular operation is performed are not necessarily defined by the program flowchart syntax, but must be deduced from the accompanying description. A double-line arrow (shown by connecting 5808 and 5809, for example) indicates the iterative process of multiple homogeneous objects. Use a double-line square box to show repeated operations, such as 5809. Once iterative operation changes its input relative to repeated objects, it can maintain a constant input relative to non-repetitive objects, as shown by the flow arrows connecting 5807 and 5809. A program flowchart for use in the present invention is provided to facilitate understanding when interpreted along with the accompanying detailed description. Color perception can generally be understood as the interaction between the spectral radiant flux of light incident on the retina and the spectral absorptivity of retinal photoreceptor cells. The process flow diagram of FIG. 1 depicts the process of photosensitive color vision and the application of an optical filter for influencing color perception. Herein, an illuminating body 101 such as sunlight is radiated into an optical system 102. The light emitted by an illuminating body can generally be regarded as white light. Within the optical system 102, white light is reflected from a surface of a reference color 104 (103). Then, the reflected light can be described as a colored light, assuming that the reference color is not neutral (ie, non-gray tone). Thereafter, the wavelength selective transmission 105 can transform the colored light by passing through an optical filter 106. Since the law of conservation of energy must be adhered to, the part of the light that is not transmitted must be reflected or absorbed by the filter at this junction. The reordering of the optical system 102 with respect to its internal operation is unchanged, that is, the filter may be applied equivalently before or after the reference color is illuminated. Subsequently, an observer can perceive the filtered light through a procedure of visual light transduction 115. In visual light transduction under light-sensitive conditions, three retinal photoreceptor cells including short-wavelength cone 108, medium-wavelength cone 110, and long-wavelength cone 112 absorb light at 107, 109, and 111. The total energy absorbed by each cell is converted into nerve stimulation that is transmitted through the optic nerve into the visual cortex to ultimately cause a sense of color. For color appearance modeling, it is fully assumed that the input-output response of the cones is linearly proportional to the energy absorbed. This linear response can be referred to as a tri-color value, which can be viewed as a vector in a three-dimensional space with a non-negative component. As described, the space of three color values is sometimes referred to as the SML color space or the cone excitation space. The distance between the points in the three-color space does not necessarily correspond to the perceived difference between the color stimulus pairs, so it is advantageous to use a color appearance model 118 (as discussed further below with reference to FIG. 3). The color appearance model 118 will The three-dimensional three-color vector is transformed into a one-dimensional component of luminosity 117 (also referred to as brightness or intensity) and a two-dimensional component of chroma 116 (which represents an apparent color that is independent of luminosity). Chroma can be considered as a vector value in two dimensions, in which case the vector value can be referred to as a chroma coordinate. Chroma can be further divided into hue and saturation (also known as purity, which is essentially the perceived difference between a color stimulus and a white stimulus). It should be noted that the spectral absorptivity of retinal photoreceptor cells 108, 110, and 112 (Figure 1) depends on the viewer and varies from person to person. In addition, the formation of a color appearance model 118 may also depend on the observer 113, however, for the sake of generality, a standard model may be used in the subsequent description. FIG. 2A shows a graph of the spectral absorption rate of photosensitive pigments of retinal cone cells (including short-wavelength cone 201, middle-wavelength cone 202, and long-wavelength cone 203) of a normal human eye. However, as mentioned previously, the spectral absorption rate of retinal photoreceptor cells can vary from person to person. These differences are the root cause of color vision defects. For example, individuals with weak green have a medium-wavelength cone photoreceptor pigment that has a spectral absorptance shifted toward longer wavelengths; and individuals with weak red have a long-wavelength cone photoreceptor pigment that has more orientation One of the short-wavelength shifts in spectral absorption. Individuals with weak greens experience more difficulties in distinguishing between red and green than normal individuals. Individuals with weak red also experience more difficulty in distinguishing between red and green than normal individuals, and also tend to regard red as less bright. A photochrome template can be shifted by a log wave number scale (for example, by using the Spectral sensitivities of the middle- and long-wavelength sensitive cones derived from measurements in observers of known by Stockman, A., and Sharpe, LT "genotype." (template published by Vision Research, No. 40, 2000, pp. 1711 to 1737) approximates the spectral absorption rate of abnormal retinal photopigment. The table in Figure 2B lists the associated wavelengths of known genotypic variants and maximum photosensitivity pigment absorption in the population. The leftmost row of the table contains one of the genotype 204 labels (for details, see Asenjo, AB, Rim, J. and Oprian, DD, "Molecular determinants of human red / green color discrimination", Neuron, 1994, Vol. 12, pp. 1131 to 1138), the next line of instructions can be normal, weak green or weak red Class 205 and where the type of abnormality is further classified according to the severity that can be mild, moderate, or severe, and the remaining lines indicate the wavelength (in nanometers) of the maximum absorption rate of short wavelength cone photoreceptor 206, medium The wavelength (in nanometers) of the maximum absorption rate of wavelength cone photoreceptor pigments 207 and the wavelength of the maximum absorption rate (in nanometers) of long wavelength cone photoreceptor pigment 208. This table contains the most common types of genetic color vision defects: green weak has a global prevalence of about 4% (and about 8% is male and less than 1% is female); red weak has a prevalence of about 0.5% (about 1% are male and less than 0.1% are female). The higher prevalence of color vision defects in men is due to the X recessiveness of genetic abnormality genes. The abnormality of light-sensitive pigments in short-wave cone cells is called type III color weakness. Hereditary type 3 color weakness is rare, however, when cone cells (specifically, short-wavelength cones) are destroyed, for example, by exposure to certain toxins such as mercury, acquired type 3 color weakness . Individuals with Type III color weakness experience more difficulties in distinguishing between blue and yellow than normal people. The standard observer model of color vision can be conceived to best fit a normal population and does not necessarily provide a good model of color perception for any particular individual or subgroup. However, if the physiological characteristics of any individual can be fully obtained, then any individual physiologically relevant observer model can be constructed. As shown in Figure 3, the perceived color appearance of light according to one of the three-color models can be represented graphically, where the axis of the graph corresponds to the neural excitation of short-wave cones 310, the neural excitation of medium-wave cones 306, The neural excitation 301 of the long-wavelength cone cells and the tri-color value correspond to a point 302 of the color appearance of a specific light (for example, reflected by a reference color or emitted by an illuminant). The three-color value is a three-dimensional point, and its dimension corresponds to the portion of light energy absorbed by various cone cells. Light itself can be regarded as a vector of essentially infinite dimensions, and its spectrum can be measured using a spectrophotometer, however, the trichromatic value is only three-dimensional. Therefore, many different lights can be mapped to the same point in the three-color space, and a group of lights mapped to the same point in the three-color space is called a color change pair. The projection from the spectral domain of light to the three color domains of the color appearance is a linear mapping, therefore, the addition and scalar multiplication of light are retained. This property implies a geometric shape with three color values. For example, if a composite light is formed by a non-negative addition mixture of a set of light (that is, a convex linear combination), the three color values of the composite light must be contained in a convex polyhedron, and the corners of the convex body are three Color value. Referring again to FIG. 3, the origin 307 of the axis corresponds to the appearance of black (ie, there is no light and zero nerve excitation). The spectral trajectory is a set of three color values that form a contour 309 corresponding to the color appearance of the set of monochromatic light (ie, ideal light with only a single wavelength of energy). Since any light can be regarded as a convex linear combination of the set of monochromatic lights, the tri-color value is always contained in a generalized cone whose vertex is the origin 307 and its boundary is defined by the spectral locus 309. For subsequent analysis of the optical filter, and as briefly discussed above, the three-color representation can be usefully divided into one-dimensional component of luminosity and two-dimensional component of chromaticity. These transformations are also linear mappings. The luminosity response is a line in a three-color space that is consistent with the three-color values of the origin and the illuminant E. The perceived luminosity of a light can be calculated by projecting the three color values onto the luminosity response line 303 and then measuring the vector norm of the projection 305. The luminosity line (which is also drawn by the spectral trace 309 in this figure) is also orthogonal (vertical) to a plane of the three color values of the equivalent illuminant, and can be calculated by projecting the three color values onto this plane 304 The perceived chromaticity of a light. Subsequently, the chromaticity projection can be further transformed by an affine mapping to generate a chromaticity coordinate (which is a two-dimensional value in a space), where the distance between the chromaticity coordinates and the equivalent light source light The perceived difference is approximately proportional, and it is called a color difference table color system such as one of the color difference table color systems (UCS) such as CIE 1974. In the first-order chromatic aberration color system, it can be observed that the distance from white light (such as illuminant E) to the spectral locus varies with the wavelength. Specifically, yellow monochromatic light (e.g., having a spectral radiant flux at a single wavelength (585 nm nominally)) and cyan monochromatic light (e.g., having one of the characteristic wavelengths of about 490 nanometers) (Monochromatic light) seems to be more subjectively more similar to white light than blue, green, or red monochromatic light and correspondingly closer to white light on the UCS diagram. Therefore, filters that substantially block yellow and / or cyan wavelengths can improve the apparent purity of color, and the general form of these filters includes at least three passbands and at least two stopbands. Spectral transmittance of multi-band filter f as a function of wavelength λ It can be approximated by the following expression: ; Where in the above expression, For passband and To adjust the weighting coefficient of the passband, Is the minimum transmittance of the filter, and n is the number of passbands equal to or greater than 3. The wavelength λ in the above expression can be expressed in a table by uniformly sampling according to a wavelength scale (for example, using a step size of 1 nanometer) or another scale that is substantially equivalent (for example, frequency or log wave number). Specification of the transmittance (f, d) of a function filter. Sampling can also be defined on an arbitrary scale with uneven intervals between sample points. In some variations, the filter passband (d) is essentially rectangular, that is, the change in transmittance as a function of wavelength at the band boundary is instantaneous or almost instantaneous. The width of a rectangular passband is characterized by the distance between the short-wavelength boundary and the long-wavelength boundary. The rectangular bandwidth can be measured equivalently according to a frequency scale. The spectral transmittance of a rectangular passband can be defined by the following expression: ; among them Is the center wavelength, Is the rectangular bandwidth, and H is the Heaviside step function. In some variations, the filter passband is Gaussian in nature, that is, the change in transmittance as a function of wavelength at the band boundary is gradual or essentially smooth. The width of a Gaussian band is characterized by the distance between the half-peak transmittance on the short-wavelength side and the half-peak transmittance on the long-wavelength boundary (also known as full-width at half maximum (FWHM)). The half-peak bandwidth can be equivalently measured according to a frequency scale. The spectral transmittance of a Gaussian band can be defined by the following expression: ; among them Is the center wavelength, and the half-peak bandwidth is: . In some variations, one or more of the passbands may have an irregular shape (ie, non-rectangular and non-Gaussian). For example, the passband may have a bimodal distribution, or may have a shoulder on one or more sides of the passband, or may be described as a skewed distribution in which the passband is a function of wavelength as a function of transmittance. The slope ratio between the two sides is between about 4: 1 and about 1: 4. In the changes regarding non-Gaussian passbands, a passband that is sufficiently wide to essentially eliminate irregular and / or sharp transitions can be used to smooth these passbands. In this case, the passband can be described as ( In essence) has a center of a frequency band and a half-peak width corresponding to a smooth passband. A general method for evaluating the effectiveness of a filter is used to determine which filter configurations are possible for a particular application involving color vision. This grading method can be performed by measuring the relative color gamut area between two filters relative to a set of reference colors. As used herein, a gamut area is the area within a contour defined by the coordinates of a set of reference colors in a chromaticity diagram. The positions of the reference colors in the chromaticity diagram are filter-dependent, so the area of the color gamut is also filter-dependent. A flowchart of a procedure for calculating the relative color gamut area is presented in FIG. 4. In the method depicted in FIG. 4, the relative color gamut area is defined relative to a test filter 401, a reference filter 405, an illuminant 402, an observer 404, and a set of reference colors 403. The test filter and the reference filter preferably have the same white point, that is, the three color values of the filtered illuminant are the same for the two filters. This limitation eliminates the need for a chroma adaptation model (such as the von Kries model) that can bias the results. The method may benefit from a suitable selection of one of the set of reference colors, as described later with reference to FIGS. 6A and 6B of the present invention. In addition, the reference filter is preferably selected to have a wide-band spectral transmittance, so that the reference filter provides minimal or little distortion in color appearance. For any given test filter, the test filter can be compared, for example, by a spectral reflectance set according to the Munsell color and then the Munsell color (e.g., having a relative to Select the most similar white point color of the illuminant) to find a suitable reference filter, where the reflectance of the selected Munsell color is defined as the transmittance of the reference filter. The color gamut area of the test filter is calculated in operation 406, and the color gamut area of the reference filter is calculated in operation 407. For example, a ratio 410 is used to compare the obtained color gamut areas 408 and 409 to obtain a relative color gamut area 411. One of the relative color gamut areas of 1.0 implies that the test filter does not provide distortion of color appearance, and the test filter It is said to provide normal color discrimination. Implicit in a relative color gamut area greater than 1.0: the test filter increases the perceived difference between the reference colors. In general, the increase in these differences is greater between red and green, so the test filter is said to provide enhanced red-green discrimination. Implicit in one of the relative color gamut areas less than 1.0: the test filter reduces the perceived difference between the reference colors. Generally, this effect is associated with an increase in one of the differences between blue and yellow, Therefore, the test filter is said to provide enhanced blue-yellow discrimination. It should be understood that the relative color gamut area measurement based on the analysis of chromaticity coordinates of reference colors is independent of the perceived luminosity of those reference colors, for example, the increase in apparent differences between color stimuli is not based on a color presentation The fact that it is a rare dark color and another color appears as a rare bright color. Instead, these increase or decrease the percentage increase in available color gamut area (PGAI) is expressed by the following expression: ,and ,and ; among them Calculated for the color gamut area relative to the test filter f, reference color S, illuminant I, and observer O (as described below in conjunction with FIG. 5), and Relative to the reference filter And similar color gamut areas. To evaluate the filters in the following of the invention, one or the other of two methods for calculating the percentage increase in color gamut area is used. In one method, the illuminant I is defined as the illuminant D65, and the observer O is defined as a CIE 1931 2-degree standard observer combined with a color difference table color system such as CIELUV (u ', v'), and the reference color S is specified For any color of the Farnsworth D-15 panel, and the percentage increase in color gamut area is given by the following expression: . In another method, the reference color is given by a selected natural sample (as described in conjunction with Figure 6B), and the percentage increase in color gamut area is given by the following expression: . In the above two expressions, the color gamut area is calculated with respect to a given condition. The calculation of the color gamut area in operations 406 and 407 of FIG. 4 may be implemented, for example, as detailed in the program flowchart of FIG. 5. For a specific illuminant 502, a filter 503, and a set of reference colors 501, each reference color undergoes an optical interaction 505. As explained above with respect to operation 102 of FIG. 1, the optical interaction may be, for example: the reference color reflects filtered light from the illuminant; or the filter filters the light from the illuminator that has been reflected by the reference color Light. These optical interactions result in a set of colored and filtered light received by an observer 507 (ie, the observer model) and converted to a set of three color values by visual light transduction 506, as described above, for example, with respect to the figure 1 operation 115 is explained. The set of three color values is further transformed by a color appearance model 508 and is restored to a set of chromaticity coordinates 509. For these coordinates, which are points on a two-dimensional chromaticity diagram, a grid can be formed using, for example, Delaunay triangulation algorithm 510. The obtained mesh can be converted into an area by summing the areas of the triangles in the mesh, and the final result of the calculation is the color gamut area of 512. The calculation of the color gamut area benefits from a suitable specification of the reference color set, which in turn depends at least in part on the intended use of the filter. The reference color should contain at least three elements, and their chromaticity coordinates form a triangle enclosing the white point (ie, the chromaticity coordinates of the illuminant). Preferably, the reference color set includes a sufficient number (e.g., at least 5) and a sufficient variety of spectral reflectances, so that the calculation of the color gamut area is stable with respect to the change in the transmittance of the filter, and its reduction makes one The risk of filter designs being too specialized. In some cases, it may be preferable to smooth the spectral transmittance of the reference color to achieve the desired stability. For example, a set of Munsell colors can be selected for color gamut area calculations such that their chromaticity coordinates approximately form a circle around an equal saturation among white points. The spectral reflectance of these Munsell colors is wideband and varies with respect to hue in a controlled manner. This is obvious in the graph of FIG. 6A, which shows that includes Munsell 5B 5/4 at 601, Munsell 5G 5/4 at 602, Munsell 5Y 5/4 at 603, Munsell 5R 5/4 and 605 at 604 A selection of Munsell colors from Munsell 5P 5/4. In a further variation, a group of Munsell colors with high saturation may be better selected. Alternatively or in addition, part or all of the reference color may be taken from Farnsworth D-15 (which is also referred to herein as D-15). D-15 includes a set of 15 Munsell reference colors, which form an outline that is saturated around the white point. A filter that provides an increase in the color gamut area relative to these D-15 colors will also tend to provide an increase in score based on the D-15 cap configuration test when an observer performs a test and views a sample through the filter. Alternatively or in addition, part or all of the reference color may be directly sampled from the environment in which the filter will be used. In particular, several of the embodiments shown later can be usefully incorporated into sunglasses, and because sunglasses are generally worn outdoors under daylight, the spectral reflection of natural colored objects such as leaves and flowers can be measured Rate and better find the reference color. The graph of FIG. 6B shows the spectral reflectance of these natural objects, including the spectral reflectance 606 of blue flowers, the spectral reflectance 607 of green leaves, the spectral reflectance 608 of yellow flowers, the spectral reflectance 609 of red flowers, and the spectral reflection of purple flowers Rate 610. These natural colors are free from the "Spectral representation of color images" of Parkkinen, J., Jaaskelainen, T. and Kuittinen, M. (IEEE 9th International Conference on Pattern Recognition, Rome, Italy, November 14-17, 1988 , Volume 2, pages 933 to 935), one of the 218 measured samples published. It can be easily observed from the graphs of FIGS. 6A and 6B that the colors in nature have a more diverse distribution than the Munsell colors, and further contain certain significant features: for example, green 607 in nature depends on The spectral reflectance of chlorophyll with a characteristic peak at the meter, and the color described as green relative to the Munsell color (which is an artificial color) usually has a peak reflectance at about 525 nm. As shown in the diagrams of FIGS. 7A to 7C and FIGS. 8A to 8C, the calculation of the relative color gamut area (as described above) and the chromaticity appearance of the color appearance of the multi-band filter can be conveniently visualized. The effect. In FIG. 7C, the spectral transmittance of a reference filter is shown at 711, which is also one of the Munsell colors selected to best match the white point of the experimental filter shown at 712. The illuminating body is designated as the illuminating body D65, and its spectral radiant flux 710 is represented by a graph in FIG. 7B. In FIG. 7A, a chromaticity diagram is used to plot the chromaticity coordinates of the selected Munsell color, as viewed under a given illuminant and different filter conditions. In the chromaticity diagram, the enclosed solid line 709 is a spectral locus corresponding to the chromaticity coordinates of the monochromatic spectral light, and the line segment 708 is referred to as a purple light connecting line. The white points of the filters are substantially the same and are shown at point 706. The chromaticity coordinates of the selected Munsell color are shown along the hollow circles along the dotted outlines 701 and 705 (as viewed through the reference filter 711). The chromaticity coordinates of the selected Munsell colors are shown along the solid circles along the solid outlines 702 and 703 (as viewed through the experimental filter 712). The inner contour corresponds to the selected saturated Munsell color, and the outer contour corresponds to the selected saturated Munsell color. By examining the contours, it should be understood that the chromaticity coordinates of the colors (as viewed through a test filter) cover a larger area of the chromaticity diagram, and in particular, the chromaticity coordinates show along the One of the separations of the chromaticity coordinates of the red-to-green axis has increased significantly (green mainly appears near the "front end" of the upper left corner of the track (approximately at (0, 0.5)) and red essentially appears at the upper right corner of the track (0.5, 0.5)). Therefore, an experimental filter (which has a relative color gamut area greater than 1.0 compared to a reference filter) can be described as enhancing red-green discrimination. In the example of FIG. 7A, the reference color of the inner contour starting at point 704 and traveling clockwise is: Munsell 10B 5/4, Munsell 10BG 5/4, Munsell 10G 5/4, Munsell 10GY 5/4, Munsell 10Y 5/4, Munsell 10YR 5/4, Munsell 10R 5/4, Munsell 10RP 5/4, Munsell 10P 5/4, Munsell 10P 5/4, and Munsell 10PB 5/4. The reference colors for the outer contours starting at point 707 and moving clockwise are: Munsell 7.5B 5/10, Munsell 10BG 5/8, Munsell 2.5BG 6/10, Munsell 2.5G 6/10, Munsell 7.5GP 7/10 , Munsell 7.5GY 7/10, Munsell 2.5GY 8/10, Munsell 5Y 8.5 / 12, Munsell 10YR 7/12, Munsell 5YR 6/12, Munsell 10R 6/12, Munsell 2.5R 4/10, Munsell 7.5RP 4 / 12, Munsell 2.5RP 4/10, Munsell 7.5P 4/10, Munsell 10PB 4/10, and Munsell 5PB 4/10. Continuing the visualization of the color gamut area, the graphs of FIGS. 8A to 8C show the effects of the same experimental filter and reference filter relative to the color of nature. In FIG. 8C, the spectral transmittance of the reference filter is shown at 810, and the spectral transmittance of the test filter is shown at 811. The spectral radiant flux 809 of the illuminant is shown in Figure 8B. In FIG. 8A, the white point of the filter is shown at 804. The dotted outlines 807 and 808 correspond to the chromaticity coordinates of the selected natural color (as viewed through a reference filter), and the solid outlines 802 and 803 correspond to the chromaticity coordinates of the same natural color (such as through a test filter). Watched). The inner contour corresponds to the appearance of five natural colors, and the spectral reflectances of the five natural colors are also presented in counterclockwise order from point 807 at 606, 607, 608, 609, and 610, respectively, in the graph of FIG. 6B. The outer contour corresponds to the appearance of the most saturated instance of natural color available in the previously cited database. While natural colors can be a better choice for analyzing the effectiveness of a filter in an outdoor background (for example, for incorporation into sunglasses), Munsell colors provide a more easily interpreted visualization, so The remaining pictures in the present invention use Munsell colors for this purpose. Heretofore, examples of the multi-band filter for enhancing the color appearance, such as in FIGS. 7C and 8C, have a structure including three rectangular passbands and two stopbands. This filter can be uniquely specified by enumerating the starting and ending wavelengths of each frequency band giving 6 degrees of freedom. Thus, a computer can be used to: completely enumerate the entire set of possible filters; then use the relevant color gamut area metric as described above to rank the performance of each of these filters; and then select the best for a desired effect A good filter (such as for enhancing red-green discrimination, or enhancing blue-yellow discrimination or maintaining normal color discrimination). The increase in the number of degrees of freedom characterized by filters can, for example, extend the search to a larger group by allowing the transmittance to vary within a frequency band or by increasing the number of possible frequency bands. Along these lines, a computer-implemented method for designing an optical filter that affects color perception in a desired manner is listed below. It is assumed that the desired filter includes a pre-filter and a multi-band interference filter in the overall optical composition. First, specify the following: the transmittance of the pre-filter over the entire visible spectrum; the desired white point of one of the optical filters; the minimum total light transmission of one of the optical filters; an illuminant; a plurality Reference colors; and an initial test multi-band interference filter, which includes a plurality of adjacent blocking wavelength bands and pass wavelength bands covering the visible spectrum. Next, one or more new experimental multi-band interference filters are generated by changing the stop wavelength band stop and the pass band, transmittance, or boundary and transmittance of the initial test multi-band interference filter. Device. Next, the white point and total light transmission of the optical filter are determined for each combination of the pre-filter and one of the new experimental multi-band interference filters. Next, the effect of the optical filter on the color perception of each combination of the pre-filter and one of the new experimental multi-band filters is evaluated using the specified illuminant and reference colors. Next, one of the new experimental multi-band interference filters (for this new experimental multi-band interference filter, the optical filter satisfies a specified white point and a specified minimum total light transmission and affects color vision in a desired manner) It is selected as the multi-band interference filter in the optical filter. In this method, the pre-filter may have a transmission of about 100% over the entire visible spectrum. That is, the pre-filter is optional. The initial test interference filter may include, for example, five or more stop bands and pass bands in total. Creating a new experimental interference filter may include, for example, varying the number of passbands, stopbands, or number of passbands and the number of stopbands in the initial experimental interference filter. Additionally or alternatively, generating a new experimental interference filter may include varying the shape of one or more of the stopband or passband. The effect of evaluation on color vision may include any of the evaluation methods disclosed in this specification. The method also includes: specifying a color constraint that constrains the appearance of a reference color, such as viewed or illuminated through an optical filter; evaluating each combination of a pre-filter and one of the new experimental multi-band filters against the reference The effect of color appearance of color; and one of the new experimental multi-band interference filters (for this new experimental multi-band interference filter, the optical filter meets the specified color constraints) is used in the optical filter as Multi-band interference filter. Any of the color constraints disclosed in this specification can be used with this method. As one of the possible disadvantages of the above method, the optimal filter for achieving the desired effect may not be a member of the filter group under study in some cases. In addition, the strategy described above becomes unmanageable due to the multiplication of the number of possible filters to be evaluated and each additional free variable. Another related method is to use a quasi-Newton adaptation method to search through a subset of possible filters and move incrementally toward the desired filter in an evaluated optimal direction. However, in some cases, solutions found by this type of method may be only locally optimal. One of the further difficulties of these methods, including direct enumeration and local search, is that it is difficult or impossible to impose constraints on the filter, such as, for example, the specifications of the filter's white point relative to a selected illuminant. Instead, each test filter must usually be evaluated to determine whether it meets these constraints. To constrain the white point, a filter can be expressed as a linear combination of the color change pairs of the white point, such as a weighted combination within a three-color color change pair group (that is, essentially including three different wavelengths of light) However, this requires one representation with thousands of degrees of freedom, because the number of these color-changing pairs is large, and when the search space has so many dimensions, the quasi-Newton search method is generally excessively slow. In addition, this method cannot easily achieve the specifications of additional constraints beyond the white point of the filter. One method of designing filters that are computationally efficient and implement multiple constraint criteria specifications (described in detail below) is to use a linear programming approach. This method can have many different advantages: a linear program solver uses a sequence of incremental steps to quickly locate the best solution, however, a linear program solution is unique and globally optimal (relative to the input). In addition, the solution can be constrained to meet useful criteria related to chromaticity appearance and luminous appearance of color appearance. Commercially available linear program solvers can quickly determine whether a given set of constraints has no solution (i.e., not feasible), and these solvers can also quickly determine linear programs with thousands of free variables and hundreds of constraints The best solution. Linear programming can be used when a problem that can be expressed as a linear system is subject to linear constraints and a linear cost function. Next, the details related to how to design a filter that affects color vision and how to translate the design rule into a linear program are explained in detail. The filter generation method disclosed below incorporates a linear program solver (abbreviated as LP), which can generally be described as the best method for determining a resource allocation problem that is subject to a linear constraint relative to a linear cost function One solution. When applied to the problem of designing color vision filters, the resources to be allocated can be understood as the transmittance of the filter as a function of wavelength. The linear constraint is derived from the use requirements of the filter and the linear cost function Essentially a mechanism by which a linear program solver can lead to a better solution within the scope of a feasible solution. The method of generating a filter by linear programming can be practiced by using a computer to solve a linear program given by the following expression: Minimize c T x, subject to the constraint of Ax≤b, and subject to the constraint of 1≥x≥0; where, in this method, the linear formula of the vector x is solved, and the transmittance of the filter as a function of wavelength Calculated by the following expression: , And if p, then ,and ; Wherein, in this method, f is a designed optical filter, Is the transmittance of f as a function of wavelength λ. E is a matrix of one of the basic filters such that the matrix e i The behavior is based on the transmittance of light as a function of the wavelength of each elementary filter, and the number of elementary filters is N. definition The expression is a weighted sum of one of the basic filters, where the weighting factor is the corresponding element x i . The weighted sum is equal to the matrix vector product q = Ex between the basic filter matrix E and the linear program solution vector q. In addition, The combination series of two optical filters is represented by the multiplication of the first filter q and the second filter p as a function of wavelength, where Is the transmittance of p as a function of wavelength λ, and p is also generally referred to as a "pre-filter" in the present invention, but these filters can be composed in any order. Linear program constraint 1≥x≥0 is equivalent to constraint 1≥x i ≥0, where i is between 1 and N. In addition, c in the above expression is a cost vector that guides the linear program solver towards a solution that provides a filter f that affects color vision in a desired manner. By c T x calculates the total cost associated with the solution, c T x represents the inner product of the transpose of c and x. A solution x that provides a lower total cost is generally better than the desired function, but other measures of quality can also be used to determine the adequacy of a particular solution. A in the above expression is a matrix, and b in the above expression is a vector. Ax is the matrix product between matrix A and vector x. At least some of the elements of matrix A and at least some of the elements of vector b are related to: the minimum or maximum transmission level of filter f at one or more wavelengths of light; one of the white points of the filter Constraints; or constraints on the color appearance of one or more reference lights, such as viewed or illuminated by a transmissive filter; and / or these transmission constraints of filter f at one or more angles of incidence. The wavelength λ as a function of the above expression can be expressed in a table by uniformly sampling according to a wavelength scale (e.g. using a step size of 1 nm) or another scale that is substantially equivalent (e.g. frequency or log wave number) Transmittance of the filter (e i , p, f) specifications. Sampling can also be defined on an arbitrary scale with uneven intervals between sample points. The basic filter may be, for example, a single-passband filter having a passband width of about 1 nanometer, and each filter has a different center wavelength of the passband. These filters can also be referred to as monochrome filters and are defined as having the following spectral transmittance: ; among them As a Dirac Δ function, and Is the wavelength transmitted by the filter. For the basic filter group of the entire group, the wavelength usually varies between 400 nm and 700 nm. In this case, the basic filter matrix E is essentially a unit matrix of 301 × 301. Alternatively, the basic filters may be single-passband filters each having a width greater than about 1 nm, and each basic filter has a different center wavelength of the passband. In some of these changes, the passband may be rectangular (also known as a square pulse function) and the spectral transmittance of a basic filter is defined as follows: ; among them Is the center wavelength, Is the rectangular bandwidth, and H is the Heaviside step function. One typical choice of rectangular bandwidth is about 10 nanometers. In this case, the number of basic filters can also be reduced, so that there is a 5 nanometer gap between adjacent filters. In some variations, the passband may have Gaussian or one of Gaussian spectral transmittances, as defined by the following expression: ; among them Is the center wavelength, and the half-peak bandwidth is: . In other variations, the basic filter may be a multi-band filter having two or more passbands, and each basic filter has a center wavelength and / or frequency of the two or more passbands. One different combination of widths, in which case the number of basic filters can be larger (e.g. thousands of combinations). A multi-passband basic filter can be configured, for example, by adjusting the bandwidth and / or band transmittance levels to color-changing pairs with respect to the illuminator 904 and the reference filter 912 (FIG. 9). Any suitable set of basic filters can be used in the filter design method. One suitable basic filter must have at least one physically achievable transmittance spectrum (for example, a transmittance value between 0 and 1), And the calculation of a cost associated with the filter must be further realized, which will be described later together with the discussion of FIG. 12A and FIG. 12B. Preferably, the basic filter has a compact support (that is, a transmittance is 0 outside a finite interval), so that a numerical calculation method of sparse linear algebra can be applied, which includes an interior point method for solving a linear equation . It should be observed that f as defined in the above expression includes a weighted summation of one of the basic filters, where the basic filter is typically a single-pass or multi-pass filter (for example, including One or more rectangular or Gaussian pass bands), it can be inferred that the designed filter f can be understood as a multi-band filter, however, the number of pass bands is very large in nature (for example, at least 60) and constitutes The passbands can partially overlap. Therefore, the range of possible filters f that can be designed by the method includes multi-band filters with three or four frequency bands and multi-band filters with more complex transmittance curves. In reality, however, the figure will show that the most useful filter designs usually have three or four characteristics that can be described essentially as frequency bands, but the essential shape of these frequency bands can be irregular in some cases, ie, Non-rectangular and non-Gaussian. For example, one or more passbands may be described as having a bimodal distribution, or may have a shoulder on one or more sides of the passband, or may be described as a skewed distribution in which the wavelength at In the transmittance of the function, the slope ratio between the two sides of the passband is between about 4: 1 and about 1: 4. In changes regarding non-Gaussian passbands, such passbands can be smoothed, for example, by a Gaussian core that is only wide enough to essentially eliminate irregular and / or sharp transitions, in which case the passband can be described It essentially has a center of a frequency band and a half-peak width corresponding to a smooth passband. Figure 9 contains a flow chart describing a procedure for generating a filter (according to a specification of a design criterion). Box 903 presents a computer-implemented filter generator operation described in more detail below. Design criteria input into the operation of the filter generator (also described in more detail below) may include, for example, cost vector 901 (vector c in the linear formula expression provided above), spectral transmittance constraint 902, color appearance constraint 915, filter white point constraint 908, illuminant 904, reference filter 912, observer 918, basic filter 913 (matrix E in the expression provided above), optional pre-filter (top The p in the expression provided in the text can be set as a whole to be effectively skipped) 919, the smoothing core 920 is selected, and the bias coefficient 923 is selected. Still referring to FIG. 9, the basic filter and various other design criteria are input to a three-color constraint calculation operation 910 (described in further detail below with respect to FIG. 11), and the three-color constraint calculation operation 910 generates a constraint projection limit 906 (a linear program expression Vector b) and Constrained Projection Norm 909 (Matrix A in Linear Formula Expressions). Next, a linear equation 907 is represented by a constraint projection bound 906, a constraint projection norm 909, and a cost vector 901 (as described by the linear equation expression provided above). Then, the linear program is solved by a linear program solver 905. The linear program solver 905 provides a solution of the linear program as a one-to-one solution vector 911. The solution vector 911 is the best vector x in the linear programming expression provided above. The elements of the solution vector 911 are coefficients x i , Which gives the corresponding basic filter e i (These are the rows of the matrix E representing the basic filter set 913.) A weighting factor is provided. Next, operation 914 performs a summation of one of the basic filters weighted by corresponding elements of the solution vector 911 to provide a first filter. , The first filter It is then smoothed at 916 (optional), then biased at 922 (optional) and combined with a second filter (pre-filter) 919 combination to produce engineered filter specifications 921. For example, by combining an absorption pre-filter With an interference filter And manufacture composite filters 921, wherein the interference filter assembly is specified by an output of operation 914 and / or operation 916. The pre-filter may be transparent in nature (i.e., Uniform or nearly uniform), or may have a neutral density (i.e., Is constant or nearly constant), or may have a wide band transmittance (i.e., It fluctuates smoothly and slowly depending on the wavelength), or may have a narrow-band or multi-band transmittance. Methodological considerations These properties of p in the specifications make the resulting filter f meet the input design criteria. 24A, FIG. 24B, FIG. 28A, and FIG. 28B to describe a preferred pre-filter in detail Of choice. In particular, the use of a pre-filter with a narrow band absorption rate can be better used for some applications and demonstrated and described in detail in conjunction with Figures 20A and 20B. Contemporaneous methods for designing and manufacturing interference filters (such as using non-quarter-wavelength optical monitoring) can make one filter with almost any spectral transmittance curve. However, the number of dielectric material layers required to implement a particular filter specification varies. Any desired limitation on the total number of dielectric material layers requires, for example, that the spectral transmittance curve has a limited complexity. For example, the slope of transmittance as a function of wavelength must be continuous and bounded. To improve manufacturability, a smoothing operation 916 may be performed on the filter specifications provided by the weighted summing operation 914. For example, a smoothing core 920 can be applied to the best filter provided at operation 914 by frequency domain maneuvers in 916. The smooth core may be, for example, a Gaussian core having a half-peak width (which is 2% of the center wavelength). In a further example, the smooth core may be a Gaussian core with a half-peak width (which is about 10% of the center wavelength) such that the filter may be implemented with a low-order dielectric stack (e.g., less than about 50 material layers). specification. Alternatively or in addition, the basic filter can be smoothed (for example, by the specification as a Gaussian filter instead of a rectangular filter). The smoothed filter type output from the smoothing operation 916 can then be used as a specification for manufacturing an (eg, interference) filter. In general, the amount of smoothing can be adjusted to improve manufacturability subject to the requirement that the desired function of the filter (such as its effect on color perception) is not significantly degraded by smoothing. For example, the width of the smooth core may be selected as the widest core so that the peak transmission in the passband of the filter is not significantly reduced. Although smoothing is selected, all of the filter embodiments described herein (as designed by the linear programming method described above) use a smoothing core with a half-peak width between about 10 nm and about 25 nm. In particular, in order to improve the filter performance, under the condition that the incident angle of the light passing through the filter varies within a certain range, an offset coefficient 923 can be used to bias the filter specifications toward a longer wavelength ( 922). The selection of the bias coefficient is described in further detail together with FIGS. 29A to 29B and 30A to 30B. Now returning to the various inputs of the filter generator operation 903 (FIG. 9), a cost vector 901 (c in the above linear stylized expression) must be specified so that a cost can be associated with each basic filter. For example, if the basic filters are each a single-pass band filter, then a function Specifying the cost as a function of wavelength and the cost of each basic filter is calculated by the following expression: . Alternatively, if the basic filter is a three-pass band filter (where each basic filter has three or more passbands), the cost function 901 may be, for example, one of the relative color gamut areas of the basic filter A function, for example, the cost associated with a basic filter can be defined as follows: ; among them Is the gamut area provided by the basic filter, and Is the gamut area provided by a best-fit reference filter. The cost vector 901 may be specified at the beginning of the filter design process and not changed further during the design of the filter. Alternatively, the cost vector 901 may be varied during a design process in an iterative design process, such as, for example, a process described in more detail below with respect to FIG. 12. The specification of a cost vector provides a way for the filter generation method to direct the linear program solver towards a better filter design, because the linear program solver will avoid basic filtering with a relatively high cost Incorporation of optical devices (ie, positive weighting) (if one or more constraints must not be met). The preferred filter design can be changed according to the target application of the filter, so the specifications of the cost function should also be changed appropriately. For example, FIG. 12A shows two functions of cost as a function of wavelength (e.g., for use with a set of single-passband basic filters as previously described), where the cost functions are selected to maximize filtering The relative color gamut area of the optical device design, which leads to a method design that filters one of the red and green discriminators. To design a filter that enhances the blue-yellow discrimination, these cost functions can be inverted, for example, by multiplying by a negative one. The cost function 1201 is configured to maximize the relative color gamut area relative to the selected Munsell color, as shown at 601, 602, 603, 604, and 605 in FIG. 6A. The cost function 1202 is configured to maximize the relative color gamut area relative to the selected natural color, as shown at 606, 607, 608, 609, and 610 in FIG. 6B. For other identical design criteria, the cost function of Munsell color results in filter 1204 (FIG. 12B) and the cost function of natural color results in filter 1203 (see also FIG. 12B). It should be noted that the passband of the natural filter 1203 is about 10 nm red compared to the filter 1204 of the Munsell color, and a similar preference for a longer wavelength is also found in the short-wavelength passband. These details are not trivial. For example, the natural filter 1203 causes less distortion of the green hue. The spectral reflectance of green is mainly determined by the content of chlorophyll in the plant, and the leaf green has one significantly longer than the artificial green pigment. The reflectance peak wavelength is consistent with the analysis of the reference colors of the two different groups as previously discussed in conjunction with Figures 6A and 6B. Referring again to FIG. 9, the observer 918 is generally a standard observer with normal vision. If the filter design is intended to correct a very extreme defect, a specific defect observer can be selected. The lighting body 904 is selected according to the intended use and environment of the filter, and may be, for example, any suitable lighting body disclosed herein. The reference filter 912 is selected to set the intended white point of the designed filter, where the white point is the chromaticity coordinates of the selected illuminant as viewed through the reference filter, and the designed filter will be based on The same white point is characteristic. The reference filter has also been used in a relative color gamut area calculation (as described above) to compare the designed filter with a reference filter, such as described below with respect to FIG. 13. The remaining design criteria inputs shown in FIG. 9 are spectral transmittance constraint 902, filter white point constraint 908, and color appearance constraint 915. Each color appearance constraint includes: a reference light (defined by its spectral radiant flux); a luminosity constraint such that the resulting filter must specify the luminosity of the reference light as viewed through the filter at a marginal interval And a selection of chromaticity constraints, which makes the resulting filter must specify that the chromaticity coordinates of the reference light as viewed by the transmissive filter are contained within the convex hull of the bounded chromaticity coordinates. The viewing conditions mentioned above are also specified relative to the observer 918 and the pre-filter 919. In addition, the spectral transmittance constraint 902 and the filter white point constraint 908 are special cases of a color appearance constraint 915 as indicated by a dashed flow arrow. A spectral transmittance constraint can be expressed as a color appearance constraint, where the reference light is a monochromatic light with a specific wavelength, and the luminosity of the monochromatic light is limited to a certain luminosity interval (note that a (The chromaticity of monochromatic light cannot be changed by any filter). Some spectral transmittance constraints are necessary, for example, the transmittance must be limited between 0.0% and 100.0% at each visible wavelength to produce a passive optical filter. The white point constraint of the filter includes a reference light (which is a selected illuminant), and further provides a luminescent equation constraint and a chromaticity boundary. In general, the chromaticity boundary may have a size that is essentially infinitely small, so that the white point is accurately set. Alternatively, the chromaticity boundary may have a wider boundary, which includes, for example, an approximately circular area centered on the white point of the reference filter. For color vision needs, the filter white point is generally set or otherwise constrained within a central area of a chromaticity diagram corresponding to a color that is not considered to be a strong color. For the design of the filter to be used in sunglasses, the illuminating body preferably represents daylight (eg, illuminating body D65), and the luminosity based on the limit of the illuminating body is between about 8% and about 40%. As mentioned above, a color appearance constraint is specified as a margin interval based on a boundary of chromaticity coordinates and a luminosity based on the color appearance of a reference light. This data can be geometrically understood as a constrained polyhedron in one of the three-color models, as shown in the diagrams of Figures 10A and 10B. More specifically, a filter that provides a color appearance that satisfies the constraint is configured such that the three color values of the reference light as viewed through the filter are contained in a convex polyhedron that is essentially conical ( 1001, 1002), wherein the chromaticity boundary forms a closed contour of a wall-like surface (eg, 1005), and the luminosity limit interval defines two cover-like surfaces including a lower luminosity limit 1007 and an upper luminosity limit 1006. The cover-like surfaces are parallel to the iso-brightness plane 1004 and each is contained in a plane that is shifted from the origin to the corresponding upper and lower luminosity limits, respectively. Each of these wall-like surfaces is contained in a plane that intersects the origin. The chromaticity boundary is specified by a convex hull of a set of chromaticity coordinates that define the wall of the cone 1005 when converted to three-color values. If and only if the vector norm of the projection on the surface normal vector (not shown in the figure) pointing inward from all three colors to all walls is non-negative, then the example three color value 1003 satisfies the chromaticity boundary. In addition, if and only if the vector norm of the projection on the surface normal vector (not shown in the figure) of the three-color value to the inwardly pointing surface of the upper and lower covers is greater than / less than the lower and upper luminosity limits, The example tricolor value 1003 then meets the luminosity limit. The surface normal vectors are vectors in a three-color space, which are, by definition, perpendicular to a plane containing a surface. If the lower limit of the luminosity is zero, the cone reaches a vertex at the origin. If there is no upper limit for the luminosity, the cone extends indefinitely in the same direction as the luminosity response line. The geometry of this generalized cone allows a color appearance constraint to be transformed into a system's linear constraint, as described in additional detail below. Referring again to FIG. 9, the color appearance constraint 915 is converted into a set of linear constraints through calculation at 910, and the operation at 910 is repeatedly performed with respect to each color appearance constraint 915 and each basic filter 913 to cause the linear constraint projection limit 906 Vector and matrix of constrained projection norm 909. The conversion of a color appearance constraint to a system's linear constraint is further detailed from the program flowchart of FIG. 11, where the three-color constraint calculation 1102 corresponds to operation 910 in FIG. 9. Herein, a color appearance constraint 1101 may be designated as a reference light 1105, a chroma boundary 1106, and a luminosity limit interval 1104. These bounds can be converted into a generalized polyhedral cone in the three-color space of the observer 1103 (operation 1109), as explained in conjunction with the description of FIGS. 10A and 10B. From the obtained geometry, operation 1109 provides: a matrix 1112 comprising a vector orthogonal (perpendicular) to the surface of the polyhedron and pointing inward from the surface of the polyhedron; and an origin offset from each plane containing a surface 1113 A one-shift vector that is zero for a wall-like surface and equal to the upper and lower luminosity limits for a cap-like surface as previously described. Then, the interaction between the bounded geometry of the color constraint and each basic filter 1107 is determined as follows. Calculate the transmittance 1108 of the reference light 1105 through the basic filter 1107, then calculate the transmittance 1111 through the pre-filter 1210, and then calculate the filtered retinal photoreceptor pigment absorption 1115 received by the observer 1114 ( That is, visual light transduction), resulting in a three-color value 1117 corresponding to the reference light as viewed through a basic filter and a pre-filter. Next, a matrix-vector product 1116 is used to project the tri-color value 1117 onto the surface normal vector (in matrix 1112) of the constrained polyhedron, resulting in a set of vector lengths (range Number) 1119 and the corresponding limit 1118 that will ensure restraint against color appearance constraints. These constraint projection norms are the linear properties of the basic filter relative to the constraint. For example, if the three color values projected onto a surface normal vector have a length of zero, the basic filter is effectively orthogonal to the constraint and any number of filters can be incorporated without violating that particular boundary In the solution. If the constraint projection norm is non-zero, the magnitude of the norm gives the ratio that causes the designed filter to move towards or away from the constraint boundary, as a function of the linear weighting of the basic filter. Referring again to FIG. 9, these results are accumulated in a constrained projection norm matrix (A in the above-mentioned linear program expression) 909 and a constrained projection limit vector (b) in the above-mentioned linear program expression, where the results are One suitable format that is compatible when incorporated in the linear program 907. In some embodiments, a color appearance constraint 1101 (FIG. 11) may also include an incident angle of the reference light 1105 with respect to the basic filter 1107. In this case, an appropriate transformation may be applied to correctly calculate 1108 and 1111 The resulting transmission of the light in the medium allows the three-color value of the reference light, as viewed through the basic filter and the pre-filter, to also take into account the incident angle of the reference light. For example, if the filter is to be manufactured as an interference filter, this angle of incidence can be used to shift the basic filter (based on the percentage of wavelength) according to Snell's law. (See, for example, curve 1601 in FIG. 16A). In addition, if the pre-filter is an absorption type, the calculation can consider the path length difference according to Beer-Lambert's law. Next, the composite filter f can be expressed by the total composition of the components q = Ex and p, so that the transmittance of f at an angle of incidence that deviates from θ radians of the surface normal vector can be expressed as And is approximately expressed by the following expression: ; Where e i The effective refractive index is n having a value of about 1.85, and for approx. Θ between about 0 and about 45 degrees, this approximation is sufficient. Incorporating color appearance constraints at non-zero incident angles is particularly useful for providing filter designs with improved color stability under non-ideal viewing conditions. In order to evaluate the filter in the present invention, the white point displacement of a filter f relative to the incident angle θ is defined by the following expression: , Where, in the above expression, (u 0 , v 0 ) And (u 0 , v 0 ) Is the CIELUV (u ', v') chromaticity coordinate (relative to CIE 1931 2 degree standard observer) of the illuminating body D65 as viewed through a filter with normal incidence and θ degree deviation from the incidence. Instead, the white point displacement is calculated relative to a CIE 1964 10 degree standard observer. Referring now to the flow chart of FIG. 13, in some embodiments, a filter design process is repeated. This iterative process may begin with an initial specification of one of the filter design criteria 1301 input into the filter generator 1303 of the design process 1302. The design criteria 1301 may, for example, include some or all of the design inputs shown in FIG. 9. Process-related additional information 1309 can also be entered into the optional manufacturing analysis program 1308 (also described further below) in the design process 1302. This manufacturing information may, for example, include: time constraints on the use of manufacturing equipment; manufacturing costs or budgets; and physical restrictions on the filter structure, such as, for example, thickness, thickness uniformity, composition, or Limitation of the uniformity of the composition of the material layer of the filter. The filter generator 1303 may be, for example, the same or substantially the same as the filter generator 903 described above with reference to FIG. 9. The filter generator 1303 generates a test filter 1305, which may be, for example: an optimal filter type, which is related to transmission as a function of wavelength or frequency (e.g., output by operation 914 in FIG. 9); A smooth optimal filter type that is related to transmission as a function of wavelength or frequency (e.g., output by operation 916 in FIG. 9); or a composite filter design that incorporates an optional pre-filter (E.g., output from operation 917 in FIG. 9). The optical performance of the test filter 1305 (Figure 13) can be analyzed as appropriate at operation 1307. This performance analysis may include, for example, calculating a relative color gamut area 1314 relative to a reference filter 1304, an illuminant 1306, and a set of reference colors 1301 (all of which are optional inputs to the design process 1302). The relative color gamut area can be calculated, for example, using the procedure described above with reference to FIG. 4. If the relative color gamut area is not desirable (ie, too high or too low), the cost function can be adjusted at operation 1315 and the filter design criteria 1301 can be updated accordingly before another iteration through the design process 1302. In the embodiment in which the cost function is adjusted as just described, the first iteration of the design procedure 1302 may utilize, for example, a (for example, two) Gaussian functions (each of which is characterized by a center wavelength, a width, and an amplitude). The sum of the initial cost functions as a function of wavelength. The cost function may further include a monotonic offset incorporated by addition or multiplication with any monotonic function. For example, a monotonic function may be linear. When iterating the design process and calculating the relative color gamut area in each iteration, the cost function may be adjusted using any suitable conventional maximizing method that adjusts the cost function to increase (or alternatively, decrease) the color gamut area. Adjusting the cost function may, for example, include: changing a parameter characterized by Gauss; changing a parameter characterized by any monotonic offset; or changing a parameter characterized by Gauss and changing a parameter characterized by an offset. The cost function or any other suitable form of parameterization of the cost function may also be used, or any other suitable method for adjusting the cost function may be used. As an alternative to using the relative color gamut area to evaluate the effectiveness of an experimental filter with respect to color discrimination, in some embodiments, the distribution of the reference color in the chromaticity space is characterized by one or more standard deviations of the calculated distribution . These standard deviations can be calculated along the red-green axis and the blue-yellow axis in the chromaticity space or along any other suitable choice of projection distribution along the axis. The projection onto the green blind obfuscation line can be better used to evaluate the filter to be used by the weak green observer. The projection onto the red blind confusion line can be better used to evaluate the filter to be used by the weak red observer. The projections on the third type of colorblind obfuscation line can be better used to evaluate filters to be used by the third type of color-blind observers, or they can be used to evaluate filters to ensure that one of the red or green discriminations is vertical or almost vertical The complementary increase of the standard deviation will not negatively affect the blue-yellow discrimination. An experimental filter that adds one or more of these standard deviations compared to a reference filter can be considered to enhance color discrimination along one or more corresponding directions in the chromaticity space. A test filter that reduces one or more of these standard deviations compared to a reference filter can be considered as attenuating color discrimination along one or more corresponding directions in the chromaticity space. Similar to the description above with respect to the relative color gamut area, in some embodiments, the cost function used in the design process 1302 may be repeatedly adjusted to maximize or minimize the chromaticity space as viewed through the experimental filter One or more standard deviations of the reference color distribution. Now return to the performance analysis operation 1307 (Figure 13) in the design procedure 1302. Operation 1307 can also be assessed as conforming to industry or government regulatory standards (for example, such as the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Z80.3-2010 (2010) (Approved on June 7) or ANSI Z87.1-2010 (approved on April 13, 2010), the full text of these two standards are incorporated herein by reference). This analysis can be performed, for example, to ensure that the test filter is intended for safe use by a human observer in intended applications, such as when operating a motor vehicle. Based on the result 1313 of this standard compliance analysis, operation 1316 may contemplate additional or modified color appearance constraints for the filter design criteria 1301 to guide the filter design process 1302 to conform to the standard. In addition to or instead of the performance analysis 1307, the manufacturability of the test function 1305 can be analyzed at operation 1308. This operation may result in, for example, an estimated manufacturing cost 1312 and a manufacturing specification 1311 that provides one of the tolerances and / or processing procedures. The estimated manufacturing cost 1312 may be expressed as, for example, a total manufacturing time, a total financial cost, or both. Based on the estimated manufacturing cost 1312, operation 1317 may optionally adjust color constraints, smoothing (e.g., operation 916 in FIG. 9) or color constraints and smoothing to direct the filter design process 1302 toward one of the lower estimated manufacturing costs. Filter. For example, the width of the smooth core 920 (FIG. 9) can be increased, or the constraints on the spectral transmittance in certain regions can be relaxed or tightened appropriately. A linear program solver (such as 905 in Figure 9) can detect this if the constraints added or modified at operation 1316 or 1317 result in an infeasible design criterion (that is, a design criterion that cannot solve a linear programming problem) . The constraints can then be relaxed or revised until feasibility is restored. The entire filter design and analysis procedure 1302 may be repeated until a satisfactory (eg, optimal) filter design is reached. At this time, the manufacturing specification 1311 may be adopted and used to manufacture the optical filter. A filter as described herein may filter light based on, for example, absorption, reflection, or absorption and reflection of light. The filters may include, for example, any suitable combination of interference filters, absorption filters, and polarization filters (polarization filters typically include a pair of linear polarizers enclosing a wavelength-selective polarization rotator). The interference filter portion of the interference filter and the composite filter (as disclosed herein) can be manufactured, for example, using about 12 to 200 layers and having a total thickness of about 6 microns per 100 layers and having a thickness of about 6 microns. A dielectric coating with a typical effective refractive index between 1.8 and about 1.9. Such multilayer interference coatings can be applied, for example, to glass or optical polymer substrates having a base arc between 0 and about 10 diopters, where diopters are defined as being calibrated to a refractive index of 1.523 by a lens gauge Measured spherical curvature. The interference filter designs disclosed herein and intended for eyewear can also be specified for use in combination with a circular polarizer, details of which are given in Figures 24A and 24B and the accompanying description. The further design of the interference filter disclosed herein and intended for spectacles can also be specified for use in combination with a neutral density absorber or a wideband absorber or a narrowband absorber, the details of which are shown in the figure 28A and FIG. 28B and specific examples given in the accompanying description and the like are disclosed in conjunction with the discussion of FIGS. 20A and 20B. In general, in the following, it is assumed that the process (at least) involves physical vapor deposition of a dielectric material into a coating having a sequence of different thicknesses and refractive indices to form an interference filter. Industrial machines and programs can easily obtain and implement high-throughput and high-precision manufacturing of these filters, which include filters with irregular configurations of areas with partial transmittance and / or passbands. Any other suitable process may be used instead, or any other suitable process may be used in combination with this physical vapor deposition process. If not otherwise constrained, filters designed to enhance red-green discrimination may tend to reduce transmission of yellow light, which may cause a yellow traffic signal to appear darker and more similar to red (eg, orange or reddish). Similarly, filters that enhance blue-yellow discrimination can tend to cause green light to look more like blue or white (eg, unsaturated). To avoid this and similar potential problems, filters incorporated in general purpose glasses, such as sunglasses, may be configured such that the resulting glasses provide one of certain colors (specifically, the color of average daylight and traffic signal light). Adjust appearance. For certain glasses, this needs to meet, for example, industrial or government regulatory standards. The methods described above (eg, by applying suitable constraints to the filter design) can be used to design a compliant configuration. A luminosity constraint ensures that these lights (such as daylight, traffic signal light) appear to be moderately brighter when viewed through filter glasses. A chromaticity constraint, designated as one of the convex boundaries in chromaticity coordinates, ensures that such light falls within the bounds of the boundary and therefore treats the observer as one of the hue with the correct standard color name, ie, ensures that daylight is essentially White; and the traffic signal is correctly identified as, for example, a traffic light green light, a traffic light yellow light, and a traffic light red light. Figure 14A shows an example of this "general purpose" constraint for general purpose glasses. An example chromaticity boundary 1401 specifies that yellow traffic lights are not orange or red. Point 1402 shows the chromaticity of the yellow traffic light as viewed through an unrestricted red-green discrimination enhancement filter, and point 1401 shows the chromaticity of the yellow traffic light under the red-green discrimination enhancement filter. An example chromaticity boundary 1406 provides that the green traffic light is not yellow, blue, or excessively unsaturated. Point 1404 shows the chromaticity of the green traffic light, which is essentially the same under both filters. An example chromaticity boundary 1405 specifies that daylight does not exhibit strong colors. Point 1403 shows the chromaticity of substantially the same daylight under the two filters. FIG. 14B shows a curve 1408 of spectral radiant flux of sunlight, a curve 1407 of spectral radiant flux of green traffic signals, and a curve 1409 of spectral radiant flux of yellow traffic signals. FIG. 14C shows the transmittance 1411 of the unconstrained filter and the transmittance 1410 of the constrained filter. In the filter 1410, the effect of the constraint is obviously that the long passband has been essentially divided into two passbands to form a four-passband filter. As shown in this example, the constraint is on the reddest side of the yellow chroma boundary. However, as shown in the further description in conjunction with FIG. 15A and FIG. 15B, the split pass band may be better forced to have an irregular shape (such as having a shoulder on the short wavelength side to replace one of the split sub-bands) A single pass band, or a core that is wide enough to merge the subbands essentially into a single pass band to smooth the split pass band. One further concern related to the incorporation of multi-band filters into glasses is that the stop band can significantly suppress the luminosity of some narrow-band light, such as from light emitting diodes, lasers, and sodium vapor lamps. In some embodiments, a lower limit of a minimum transmittance of a filter may be preferably set to ensure a minimum brightness of all monochromatic light. For example, in FIG. 15A, a graph 1501 shows a lower limit of the spectral transmittance of about 7% between about 450 nm and about 650 nm. One filter incorporating constraints is shown by its spectral transmittance graph 1504 in FIG. 15B. The filter 1504 is a four-pass band filter in which a fourth pass band has been added to satisfy a yellow traffic light constraint (as described in conjunction with FIGS. 14A to 14C). In some embodiments, this additional passband may be better converted to a frequency band shoulder on the short wavelength side of the long wavelength passband. This change may be better because the resulting filter can provide a more stable appearance with respect to one of the yellow light (specifically, narrow-band yellow light) that varies with the angle of incidence, assuming that the multi-band filter is incorporated into the An interference filter characterized by a blue shift of the spectral transmittance at an angle of incidence other than normal incidence is described further below. Replacing the fourth passband with a shoulder can be accomplished, for example, by increasing a minimum spectral transmittance constraint in the desired region (such as shown by graph 1502 in FIG. 15A). In the graph 1502, the minimum transmittance has been set to about 18% between about 580 nm and about 635 nm. The resulting modified filter transmittance is shown by graph 1503 (FIG. 15B), and graph 1503 shows the described shoulder on the short wavelength side of the long wavelength passband. A passband with a shoulder as just described can also be used at other locations within a three-pass filter. For example, in some embodiments, it may have the effect of adding a minimum transmittance constraint to cause a shoulder on the long wavelength side of the mid-wavelength passband to reduce narrow-band fluorescent lamps under the blue shift induced by the angle of incidence ( (Such as FL10 to FL12). In a further example, some embodiments have a shoulder on the short wavelength side or the long wavelength side of the short wavelength passband, which is described in more detail in conjunction with FIGS. 16A and 16B. In a further example, the passband may have an irregular shape (i.e., non-rectangular and non-Gaussian) having a configuration that is essentially a bimodal distribution, where the two modes at least partially overlap; or the passband may be Has a shoulder on one or more sides of the passband; or the passband can be described as a skewed distribution, where in the transmittance as a function of wavelength, the slope ratio between the two sides of the passband is about 4 : 1 to about 1: 4. One further constraint applicable to these filters is the white point, that is, the chromaticity coordinates of a typical illuminant, such as daylight. If the white point is within a moderate radius of the neutral point (ie, the chromaticity coordinate corresponding to unfiltered daylight), the filter can be considered non-strongly colored. Therefore, the visual mechanism of chromaticity adjustment will enable the observer to adjust to the new color balance after wearing glasses for several minutes. In some embodiments, this adjustment may preferably be minimized, for example, by configuring the white point to be neutral (i.e., so that the chromaticity coordinates of daylight are at or near the center of region 1405 (Figure 14)). waiting time. In these cases where the white point can be expected to be neutral, a restricted area can be given for the appearance of daylight, for example, the (x, y) chromaticity coordinate of the illuminant D65 is about (0.31, 0.33), and The best filter provides a white point within about 0.05 units of this point. In some cases, in particular, for example, when the cost function is configured to maximize or minimize the transmission of blue light, it may be better to allow the white point to be in a larger area (e.g., area 1405 (FIG. 14)). Anywhere). In further cases, specific shades of white point may be specified for other reasons that include good looking. As mentioned above, the transmission spectrum of a multi-band interference filter is sensitive to the deviation of the incident angle of incident light. Specifically, as the effective optical thickness of an interference filter (i.e., the wavelength at which the destructive interference occurs at the refractive index boundary within the filter) decreases as the angle of incident light deviating from normal incidence increases At hours, the spectral transmission suffers a shift (one blue shift) towards one of the shorter wavelengths. The normal incidence is defined by a vector perpendicular to the surface on which the interference filter is deposited. In this context, a normal incidence may be referred to as a zero-degree angle of incidence, that is, an angle means an angle of deviation from the normal vector. In addition, a multi-band filter incorporating an absorption filter can change transmittance according to Beer-Lambert's law, where absorption tends to be attributed to transmission when the angle of incident light deviating from normal incidence increases. The larger effective path length of the absorbing medium increases. In any of the above changes, the multi-band filter f may include an absorption filter p and an interference filter q, where the change in the transmittance of p as a function of angle is based on Beer-Lambert's law, and The change in the transmittance of q as a function of angle is based on Snell's law, so that the transmittance of f at an angle of incidence that deviates from θ radians of the surface normal vector can be expressed as And is approximately expressed by the following expression: , Where, in the above expression, the effective refractive index of q is n with a typical value of about 1.85, and the spectral transmittance of p at the normal incidence , The spectral transmittance of f at the normal incidence , The spectral transmittance of q at the normal incidence , And for θ between about 0 and about 45 degrees, this approximation is sufficient. The incident angle sensitivity of a filter has implications associated with the incorporation of the filter into devices such as eyeglasses, where the effective incident angle of light has a significant change in position on the surface of the lens as a function of position (along with Figure 29A To FIG. 29B and FIG. 30A to FIG. 30B and describe them in detail), and also has the implication related to incorporating such filters into a device such as a lamp assembly, in which a perfect beam of an illuminating body cannot be achieved Collimation. A change in the spectral transmittance of a filter that is a function of the angle of incidence is a physical property of the filter. However, the main concern is the perceptual implication of these changes, which can be quantified by measuring the change in chromaticity and luminosity of a reference light as a function of the angle of incidence as viewed through the filter. In particular, it is useful to consider these changes with respect to the chromaticity coordinates of the illuminant (i.e., the white point of the filter) because the change in the white point as a function of the angle of incidence is generally the same as that under the illuminant. These changes in the entire set of reference colors viewed are related. In addition, two or more angles of incidence (e.g., 0 degrees and 25 degrees off the normal axis or 0) can be constrained by employing additional color appearance constraints in the filter generation method as previously described. Degrees, 25 degrees, and 35 degrees), the chromaticity coordinates of the illuminating body are substantially unchanged at the specified angle and the intermediate angle. In FIG. 17C, graph 1707 (similar to graph 811 of FIG. 8C) shows the spectral transmission of one example filter that provides enhanced red-green discrimination. Graph 1707 shows the spectral transmission of the filter at normal incidence, and graphs 1706 and 1705 show the filter's (blue) off-normal incidence at about 20 and 30 degrees, respectively. Shift) spectral transmission. FIG. 17A also shows the effect on the appearance of a selected contour of Munsell colors as viewed through three filters. Contour 1703 corresponds to a normal filter (0 degree incident angle), contour 1702 corresponds to a first displacement filter (approximately 20 degrees of incidence), and outline 1701 corresponds to a second displacement filter (approximately 30 degrees of incidence) ). It should be understood from these contours that the appearance of the color under the filter is not stable with respect to these changes in the angle of incidence. Furthermore, we have observed that the filter with the greatest red-green discrimination enhancement tends to locate the passband, with one or more of the retinal photopigment pigments having the largest change in absorption as a function of wavelength. Therefore, the best filter for enhancing color discrimination (specifically, for red-green discrimination) is also the worst filter for providing a stable color appearance. In FIG. 16B, graph 1603 (similar to graph 1503 of FIG. 15B) shows the spectral transmission of one example filter that provides enhanced red-green discrimination. Graph 1604 shows an example of a spectral transmission similar to 1603 that provides enhanced color appearance and also provides stable color appearance by constraining the white point so that it is substantially the same at normal incidence and about 30 degrees off normal incidence. Transmission of the optical filter. Multi-band filters that provide a stable color appearance can be stabilized, for example, by having frequency bands that are positioned and / or shaped such that when viewing stable reference light, the stimulus changes of each of the three cone cells It is approximately linear in the angular range and the change between the three cells essentially describes a system with at most one degree of freedom, where the degree of freedom acts only in the direction of luminosity. For example, in some embodiments, these frequency bands may preferably be located near the wavelength of the peak sensitivity of one or more of the retinal photopigment absorption rates, or may have a doublet as a function of the angle of incidence within the desired range Or other irregular shapes (which are used to make the stimulus change constant or almost constant). In a further embodiment, the shape of a passband (such as a long wavelength passband) can be configured such that the stimulus change of the long wavelength cones is inversely proportional to the stimulus change of the wavelength cones as a function of the angle of incidence, thus ensuring The required limit on the degree of freedom to maintain a constant chromaticity. However, I have found that these frequency band locations and / or shapes are generally the next best for enhancing color discrimination, so one utility of the linear programming method can be based on the fact that it provides a solution that satisfies a color stability constraint, This solution maximizes color discrimination enhancement. Specifically, such changes in the position of the filter band preferably occur on the outermost band. For example, the stimulus change rate of short-wavelength cones can be made substantially constant by positioning the short-wavelength band at about 450 nm. Alternatively, in some cases, it may be preferable to split the short wavelength pass band near the peak of the absorptance of the short wavelength cone cells (e.g., shown in graph 1605), whereby the pass band can be described as having a double Peak distribution (it has a first mode at about 435 nanometers and a second mode at about 455 nanometers). In a further example, the long wavelength passband is characterized by a bimodal distribution having one of the first mode at about 620 nm and the second mode at about 650 nm, or may have a skewed distribution, a convex Shoulder (usually on the short wavelength side) or other irregular (ie, non-Gaussian) distribution. The graphs of FIGS. 18A to 18C show the behavior of a filter having a stable white point relative to a range of incident angles. FIG. 18C shows the transmittance of the filter at normal incidence in graph 1807 and the transmittance of the filter at about 20 degrees of incidence in graph 1806. It can be observed in these graphs that the splitting sub-band structure in the short wavelength region identified by reference number 1805 essentially functions as a comb filter that is tuned to stabilize when performing wavelength shifts. The illuminating body whose color appearance has been stabilized is the illuminating body of daylight, as shown in the graph 1804 in FIG. 18B. In the chromaticity diagram of FIG. 18A, the chromaticity coordinates 1803 of the illuminant are the same at two incident angles. Figure 18A also shows the effect on the appearance of the selected contour of the Munsell color. The profile 1801 corresponds to a normal filter (0 degree incident angle), and the profile 1802 corresponds to a shifted filter (about 30 degree incident angle). As can be understood from the position of these contours, the filter provides a moderately stable appearance of one of these reference colors, with most of the loss of saturation mainly associated with the highest saturated color (e.g., Munsell contours as previously described in conjunction with Figure 8A) Associated. The chromaticity stability demonstrated by the filter can significantly reduce the appearance of a "hot spot" in the center of the lens (caused by the blue shift induced by the angle of incidence) and generally contribute to improved visual comfort. As shown in FIG. 18C, a filter that provides color stability can provide weaker red-green discrimination enhancement due to the effect of the imposed constraints. In some embodiments, it may be better to incorporate a pre-filter with a narrow band absorption rate, where the absorption band (s) are located near the location where the stop band in the filter design is expected. Therefore, a composite filter including a narrow-band absorption filter and an interference filter can achieve the desired color stability without degrading the desired color enhancement. Two examples of these filters are shown in FIGS. 20A and 20B. In FIG. 20A, the solid line curve at 2001 shows the spectral transmittance of an absorption filter including neodymium in a glass substrate. Neodymium is a rare earth material, which is characterized by a strong absorption band at about 590 nm and a secondary absorption band at about 520 nm. In FIG. 20B, the solid line curve at 2002 shows the transmittance of an interference filter that, when combined with the neodymium absorption filter, provides enhanced red-green discrimination and an angle of incidence of 0 to 30 degrees The stable color appearance. Referring again to FIG. 20A, the dashed curve at 2001 shows the spectral transmittance of an absorption filter including one of the narrow-band organic pigments Exciton P491 and Exciton ABS584 in a polymer substrate. Exciton P491 is characterized by a strong absorption band at about 491 nanometers, and Exciton ABS584 is characterized by a strong absorption band at about 584 nanometers. In FIG. 20B, the dashed curve at 2002 shows the transmittance of an interference filter that, when combined with the organic pigment filter, provides enhanced red-green discrimination and an angle of incidence between 0 and 30 degrees. Stable color appearance. These examples can be designed by a linearly stylized method as previously described, by incorporating the absorption filter as a pre-filter. To provide color stability to a normal observer, it is generally desirable to constrain the chromaticity coordinates such that the white point shift is less than about 0.01 units relative to the CIELUV (u ', v') chromaticity space and the constraint is relative to about 0 degrees to about CIE 1931 2 degree observer at an angle between 35 degrees. In some cases, the angular range can be increased to about 0 degrees to about 45 degrees. For observers with green weakness, the displacement tolerance can be increased to about 0.02 units, and for observers with weak red or severe green weakness, the tolerance can be further increased to about 0.04 units because of this. Two observers are not sensitive to color shift and their equal color perception may not be fully characterized by a standard observer model. In addition, for these anomalous observers (their color matching functions are significantly different from the CIE 1931 2-degree standard observer's color matching functions), an observer-specific color matching function can be used to calculate the constraint criteria for achieving color stability. In these cases, the obtained filter may have the following properties when analyzing the white point displacement stability according to a CIE 1931 2-degree observer: the white point displacement function is at an angle between about 20 degrees and about 40 degrees of incidence Has a local minimum at; and the distance from the local minimum to the normal white point is less than about 0.02 units. To characterize the relative importance of the performance of filters at normal incidence and deviation from normal incidence when these filters are incorporated into a pair of glasses, a lens and one geometric model of the eye (for example, where the lens (Incorporated into the glasses and located in front of the eye) can be used to calculate the effective angle of incidence as a function of lens position and the relative importance of the effective angle of incidence as a function. Thus, the effective incident angle is defined as the angle between the normal vector of a lens at a lens position and the normal vector of a beam of light that passes through the lens position to be imaged on the retina of the eye. Figures 29A (top view) and Figure 29B (perspective view) show the geometric model as previously mentioned. Here, the geometric shapes of the left eye and the right eye are represented by hemispheres 2904 and 2905, respectively. The human eye (typically an adult's eye) has a radius of curvature of about 12.5 millimeters and an interpupillary distance of about 60 millimeters. The sense of color is mainly derived from the vision of 10 degrees in the center. However, the eyes can also rotate in their eye sockets, so the angular range required for color perception is greater than 10 degrees. The geometric shapes of the left and right lenses (having a typical shape of glasses) are represented by spherical segments 2901 and 2902. A dotted arrow 2906 illustrates a light beam passing through a center position on the lens, and a dotted arrow 2909 illustrates a light beam passing through a distal position on the lens. These beams are also generally imaged at the central and distal positions of the retina. 2907 and 2908 show the surface normal vectors of the lens at the locations where the beams pass through. The lens in the glasses may have a radius of curvature between about 50 millimeters and about 150 millimeters (in this example, the radius of curvature is 87 millimeters). Since this radius is significantly larger than the radius of the eye, the angle between the incident beam and the surface normal vector at the corresponding lens position tends to increase with increasing distance from the center, as shown in Figures 29A and 29B by 2908 and 2909. The increase in the angle between them (compared to the angle between 2907 and 2906) is shown. For any frame pattern (for example, the edge contour of a lens and the positioning of the lens relative to the eye) and any lens curvature, it can be calculated from the geometric model just described (for example, using a computer) with the lens position as The effective angle of incidence of the function: repeatedly points on the lens; constructing the surface normal vector and the retinal image beam; and then calculating the angle between the two vectors at the surface position. The result of this calculation is shown in the contour diagram of FIG. 30A, where the boundary 3004 indicates the edge of a lens, and the internal contour shows the effective incidence angle as previously described, for example, the effective incidence angle is about 10 degrees along the contour 3001, It is about 20 degrees at the outline 3002 and about 30 degrees at the outline 3003. Next, it is useful to calculate the relative importance as a function of the effective angle of incidence. Referring now to FIG. 30B, one of the relevant importance functions as a function of the effective angle of incidence includes the product of two parts: first, an estimate of the ratio of the surface area of the lens viewed at a specific angle; and second, oriented along an axis One of the possibilities that the eye makes it see through the lens at a particular angle is estimated. In this paper, a Gaussian statistical model is used to estimate the directional distribution, as shown, for example, by a curve 3007 having a standard deviation of about 10 degrees. Therefore, the eye is most likely to be viewed at a normal incident angle. However, it should be noted that only a single point of incidence on the lens is normal (e.g., point 3005 in FIG. 30A), and the surface area of the lens is, for example, between 10 and 15 degrees (e.g., between the figures 30A between 3001 and 3006). On the surface of a typical lens, the incident angle is at most about 35 degrees from the normal, and within this range, the area ratio of the lens surface as a function of degree increases approximately linearly, as shown by curve 3009 in FIG. 30B Indicated. The product of the area weighted curve and the directional distribution curve gives an importance weighting function, such as shown at curve 3008. Therefore, the importance weighted PGAI can be defined by the following expression: ,and , among them Is an exponential function, θ is an effective angle of incidence having a range of 0 degrees to 30 degrees, Test filter f and reference filter as viewed or illuminated at the angle of incidence θ PGAI, Is the standard deviation of the eye orientation distribution, which usually has a value of about 10 degrees, and k is a weighted normalization factor. In order to evaluate the filter in the present invention, two specific column equations are given which are weighted percentages of the importance of the increased color gamut area, in which the standard deviation of the eye orientation angle is set to about = 10 degrees and the reference color is designated as D15 or nature sample. The column equations are given by the following expressions: , ,and Which has previously been specified in the invention for calculation and Condition. In particular, the expression above The defined performance metric can be used to classify the properties of a filter f, and if the white point of the filter is neutral and the white point remains neutral within a moderate range of incidence, then these filters can be The percentage of comparative absolute power between one group increases or decreases. in the text, The use of calculations is limited to filters with a white point that is neutral and stable with respect to these angle changes. For between about -10% to about 10% Filters can be described as providing color discrimination that is inherently normal. For values between about 10% and about 40%, the filter can be described as enhancing red-green discrimination, with larger values corresponding to better performance. For values less than about -10%, the filter can be described as enhancing blue-yellow discrimination. The values mentioned above assume that the filter provides a white point that is essentially neutral, that is, (x, y) of the illuminant D65 for all or almost all angles of incidence between 0 and about 30 degrees. The chromaticity coordinates are about (0.31, 0.33). As mentioned previously, the evaluation of the color gamut area can vary with the white point, so it is not possible to use a weighted PGAI metric to meaningfully evaluate filters that are not stabilized by the white point displacement. In addition, some hue (specifically, green) of the white point may provide a larger value of PGAI, however, such increase does not necessarily correspond to enhanced color discrimination. In a further embodiment, the calculation may also take into account changes in the thickness of the entity due to a process. For example, in physical vapor deposition onto a curved substrate, the thickness of the coating tends to decrease with distance from the sputtering source and / or the effective incident angle between the spray particles and the surface normal of the curved substrate. In a further embodiment, the calculation of the effective incident angle as just described can be used as the basis of a manufacturing specification, so that the filter is manufactured on a curved substrate, so that the filter has a solid thickness profile, such as The effective incidence angle is compensated by having a distribution that increases the thickness toward the edge of the lens (eg, linearly increases the thickness of the normal solid from the center to approximately + 10% of the solid thickness at the edge of the lens). An interference filter can be manufactured to achieve a constant or substantially constant optical thickness relative to the effective incidence angle at all or nearly all positions on the lens. In some embodiments, the performance analysis of a filter may include using relevant importance data to determine the importance-weighted average performance of a filter when incorporated in the glasses. The importance-weighted average performance can be improved by adjusting the spectral transmittance specifications of the filter (specifically, by red-shifting the specifications). E.g, The spectral transmittance can be shifted towards longer wavelengths, as calculated by the following expression: ,and ; among them Is a factor that determines the amount of displacement, and A weighted average relative color gamut area selected to maximize importance along one axis of the color space is increased and / or decreased and / or standard deviation. Instead, It may be selected to improve some other performance measures to, for example, reduce the importance weighted average solar blue light transmittance. Because the typical offset required is usually about 1% to about 4% ( = 1.01 to 1.04), so you can effectively determine the optimal bias coefficient by expressing a value between about 1.0 and about 1.1 in a table. . For example, a red-green enhancement filter with a mid-wavelength passband at about 530 nanometers can preferably be red-shifted to about 535 nanometers ( = 1.01) weighted average relative color gamut area with improved importance. Another aspect related to the incorporation of multi-band filters into spectacles (specifically, these filters include an interference filter) is the management of the reflectivity on one or both sides of the lens. With transmittance The reflectivity of an ideal interference filter is transmittance Complement Is defined by the following expression: . For example, a filter incorporated in a sunglasses may have a light transmittance of about 20%. Therefore, if the filter is manufactured with only one interference filter, the filter will have about 80% A light reflectance. This high reflectivity can cause significant visual discomfort because the user can see the image of the object behind the object or the image of his own eye reflected in the lens. For general use, the light reflectivity on the inner surface of the lens should be at most about one fifth of the light transmittance of the lens, but in some cases, light reflectances up to about one half of the light transmittance are also acceptable. The high reflectivity can be partially reduced by improving the shielding around the frame (for example, using a side shield on the temple arm). An absorption filter (e.g. a component as previously described The incorporation of) can significantly improve the reflectivity on one or both sides of the lens, for example, on one side of the lens In terms of this, the reflectivity on this side is significantly reduced, because the reflected light must pass through the absorption filter twice, as used in the calculation by the interference filter The reflectivity of the filter f, which is one of the filters f and the absorption filter p, is shown in the following expression: ,and ; Where in the above expression, Is the spectral reflectance of the filter. The ratio between the peak transmittance and the average transmittance of the composite filter f should preferably be as high as possible relative to these composite filters for enhancing color discrimination. In a further example, the Broken down into two constituent absorption filters, which are then on opposite sides of the lens, for example, ,and ,and ; Where in the above expression, Give the spectral reflectance on one side of the lens (such as the outer surface), and Give the spectral reflectance on the other side of the lens, such as the inner surface. In some instances, It may be a neutral density filter, such as a gray glass with a transmittance of about 40%. For example, this combination can achieve a light transmittance of about 20%, a peak transmittance of about 40%, and a light reflectance on one side of the lens of about 8% (i.e., (Approximately 50% light transmittance). In a further example, It may be a neutral density filter consisting of two absorption filters (for example, a brown glass and a blue glass, the combination of which produces a neutral transmission of about 40%) in which the two are colored. . These colors may be selected to affect the color of the reflected light on the outer surface of the lens (eg, for good looking). Neutral density and colored absorbers can also be formed from organic dyes and incorporated into a polymer substrate, and / or applied as a coating (for example by spin coating or dip coating) to one or more surfaces of the lens . Preferably, it can be used with Select the absorber to form a narrow band with complementary spectral transmission Therefore, a higher ratio of the peak transmittance to the average transmittance of the composite filter (for example, higher than the possible ratio when using neutral density absorption) is achieved. For example, narrow-band organic dyes Exciton P491 and Exciton ABS584, which absorb at about 491 nm and about 584 nm, respectively, can be used to form this complementary absorption suitable for use with red-green discrimination enhancement filters as disclosed herein body. Alternatively, certain rare-earth elements such as neodymium, praseodymium, and 'have narrow-band absorption in the visible spectrum, and can be similarly employed. For example, a modified neodymium-containing glass lens ACE manufactured by Barberini GmbH can be used as an optical substrate for depositing an interference filter. In addition, the incorporation of a narrow band absorber (and an interference filter) can improve the quality of the filter design incorporating a color stability constraint on the white point, as previously described in conjunction with Figures 20A and 20B. In other words, the narrow band absorber is improved by the color discrimination provided by the filter at an incident angle of more than 20 degrees off the normal axis. Alternatively or in addition, Reflected light can be absorbed by incorporating one or more circular polarizers. In some embodiments, a circular polarizer is located on the inner surface of the lens to attenuate reflections that would otherwise be visible to the user's eyes. A circular polarizer can also be located on the outer surface of the lens to attenuate the front side reflection. A lens incorporated into a circular polarizer can achieve a peak transmittance of about 40%, a light transmittance of about 20%, and a light reflectance of about 2% on one or both sides of the lens. A circular polarizer having a spherical curve of 6 diopters or more can be manufactured, for example, by thermoforming and incorporated into a lens by, for example, lamination. In addition, these circular polarizers can be formed using linear polarizers that achieve only a partial polarization (e.g., a polarization efficiency of about 70%), thereby increasing light reflectivity while damaging one or both of the lenses Achieve a higher peak transmittance. An example configuration of a lens incorporating a circular polarizer is depicted in FIGS. 24A and 24B, where the layers (front to back) are vertically oriented linear polarizers 2401, quarter-wave retarders 2402, An optically transparent substrate 2403, a multilayer interference coating 2404 deposited on the surface of the substrate, a quarter-wave retarder 2405, and (for example, a vertically oriented) polarizer 2406. In FIG. 24B, light incident to the outside of the compound lens is shown along an arrow 2413. The incident light passes through a polarization filter, then through a quarter-wave retarder (hence becoming circularly polarized), and is then divided by an interference filter into a transmission component that is finally received by the eye 2409 and absorbed by the retina 2412. And a reflection component 2414 that travels in the opposite direction to the light source but is absorbed before it can be emitted from the compound lens. The reflected component 2414 is circularly polarized, however, the reflection at the interference filter 2404 causes its handedness to flip from right to left, for example, as it travels in reverse through the circular polarizer 2402, it appears to be circular Horizontally polarized and absorbed by linear polarizer 2401. Still referring to FIG. 24B, a similar procedure for reflection-absorption can occur with stray light entering the rear side of the lens (as shown along beam 2408) to cause reflected light 2411 to be absorbed before it reaches the eye. In another embodiment, It may be a neutral density filter made from a metal attenuating coating using physical vapor deposition. Preferably, such absorption filters and an interference filter can be manufactured by physical vapor deposition (i.e., in the same procedure), so the attenuation layer can surround the dielectric layer and / or the dielectric layer Several of them are staggered or partially staggered. Due to the nature of the metal layer when incorporated into an interference filter, these attenuating coatings can provide better reflection attenuation than the equivalent bulk dielectric neutral density absorber. For example, these designs can achieve a peak transmittance of about 35%, a light transmittance of about 20%, and a light reflectance of about 2% on one side of the lens. Alternatively, these designs can achieve a peak transmittance of about 35%, a light transmittance of about 20%, and a light reflectance of about 4% on both sides of the lens. Alternatively, these designs can achieve a peak transmittance of about 50%, a light transmittance of about 20%, and a light reflectance of about 4% on one side of the lens. Alternatively, these designs can achieve a peak transmittance of about 60%, a light transmittance of about 20%, and a light reflectance of about 8% on one side of the lens. An additional feature of these designs is that they have all functional layers (such as interference coatings and (several) attenuation coatings) of a filter positioned on one side of an optical substrate. In such designs, the opposite side of the substrate may be anti-reflective coated to reduce scattering and resonance of light within the optical substrate (eg, multiple internal reflections). In these designs, the anti-reflective coating preferably provides a light reflectance of no more than 0.5%, because the lower-quality anti-reflective coating (for example, has a light reflectance of about 1% or more) ) Visibility can be reduced under general outdoor conditions (specifically, when viewing unusually bright spots (such as sunlight reflections) reflected from a metal surface in a typical outdoor scene) but does not completely eliminate internal reflection artifacts . An example configuration of a lens incorporating an attenuation coating is depicted in FIGS. 28A and 28B, where the layers (front to back) are anti-reflective coating 2801, optical substrate (e.g., glass) 2802, first attenuation coating The layer 2803, the multilayer interference coating 2804, and the second attenuation coating 2805. In FIG. 28B, light incident to the outside of the lens is shown along an arrow 2811. The incident light passes through the anti-reflection coating and the optical substrate, then passes through the first attenuation coating, and is then divided by an interference filter into a lens component that is finally received by the eye 2807 and absorbed by the retina 2809 and travels in the opposite direction toward the light source However, one of the reflected components 2812 is substantially absorbed during the second pass through the first attenuation coating. Still referring to FIG. 28B, a similar procedure for reflection-absorption can occur with stray light entering the lens' rear side (as shown along beam 2806) to cause reflected light 2810 to be absorbed before it reaches the eye. In some examples, the dielectric layers of the attenuating coating and the interference coating are staggered or partially staggered. In some examples, the attenuating coating is only on the backside, ie, does not include the first attenuating coating 2815. Next, along with detailed descriptions of FIGS. 31A-42E, 45A-45E, 48A-53E, and 55A-57E, several implementations including an exemplary multi-band filter for incorporation into glasses are disclosed. example. These figures all conform to a general format that is easily understood by their common layout. First, details of the format are generally described using, for example, FIGS. 31A to 31E and 59A to 59B. Next, details related to the design of the respective embodiments will be described in further discussion with reference to specific figures and elements in the figures. In the graph of FIG. 31A, the curve shows the transmittance constraint, which includes the minimum transmittance as a function of wavelength at the solid curve 3101 and the maximum transmittance as a function of wavelength at the dashed curve 3102, and a further curve display The cost function (which is a dimensionless quantity) is a function of wavelength at the dashed curve 3103 on the same graph. Transmittance constraints and additional color appearance constraints (not shown by the graph) and cost functions form inputs to a linear equation solver, where the inputs are processed as previously described in the present invention, which involves such constraints And the cost function is transformed into a standard linear program. In the graph of FIG. 31B, the curve shows the spectral transmittance of a component of one filter f designed to affect color vision in a desired manner, where the design is based on the constraint and guidance cost functions as described in conjunction with FIG. 31A Filter. As explained above, by Specify the "ideal" filter as produced by the linear programming method. The solid curve 3104 defines the weighted combination of the basic filter q as selected by the linear stylization method as previously disclosed, and the dashed curve 3106 defines the transmittance of a selected pre-filter p, which in this example Is a neutral density filter. The dashed curve 3105 shows (optionally) a smoothed (optionally) biased linear program solution q '. The spectral transmittances of the filter elements are listed in lines 5 to 8 (respectively q ', q, p, and f) in FIG. 59B. The second, third, and fourth lines shown in FIG. 59B are used to generate filter objects (respectively , , ) One of the manufacturing specifications of minimum transmittance, target transmittance, and maximum transmittance as a function of wavelength. Lines 9, 10, and 11 (respectively , And c) give the minimum spectral transmittance, maximum spectral transmittance, and cost functions used in filter design. The wavelengths corresponding to the columns of the table are listed in line 1 in steps of 5 nanometers, which provide the appropriate spectral resolution to reproduce any of the embodiments disclosed herein. The graph of FIG. 31C includes three curves, of which the solid line curve 3107 is the design target for manufacturing the filter. (Solved with a linear program that is biased and smoothed as appropriate Replace ), The dashed curve 3108 is a minimum transmittance limit, and the dashed curve 3109 is a maximum transmittance limit. The minimum transmittance limit and the maximum transmittance limit will be used in the specification of the manufacturing tolerance of the target filter. The target transmittance, minimum transmittance, and maximum transmittance can be calculated by the following expressions: , ,and ; Where in the above expression, the symbol Represents the kernel function k and the filter Frequency domain maneuver between, and Is the bias coefficient as previously described. The core function k is generally characterized by having a half-peak width between about 10 nanometers and about 25 nanometers. For this embodiment, the width is about 25 nanometers, but in further embodiments, the width can be Within a certain range. Also, in the definition and , The proportionality coefficients (0.97 and 1.03) provide a relative transmittance tolerance of approximately +/- 3%, and the addition coefficient (0.03) provides an additional absolute tolerance of approximately + 3%, and the expression and Provides a wavelength shift tolerance of about +/- 2 nm (equivalent to about +/- 0.5% of 400 nm). These tolerances are selected empirically to produce modest results for use with a high precision physical vapor deposition process, however, the specific choice of tolerances is not intended to limit the scope of the invention. Any value suitable for these parameters and the resulting tolerances can also be used. In FIG. 31D, the solid line curve 3110 and the dashed line curve 3111 show the function of the incident angle θ as compared to a best-adaptive wideband reference filter. The percentage increase in the relative color gamut area of the filter (PGAI), where the solid curve shows the calculated relative to the Farnsworth D-15 sample , And the dashed curve shows the calculated relative to the natural sample (NWS) . The weighted weighted percentage of increase in relative color gamut area can be calculated from any of these data by calculating a weighted average PGAI based on the eye models previously described in conjunction with Figures 29A to 30B and assuming a standard deviation of eye orientation of 10 degrees (E.g ). FIG. 31E shows a solid line curve diagram of the white point displacement of the filter as a function of the angle of incidence 3112, where the white point corresponds to the illuminant viewed by a transparent filter relative to a CIE 1931 2-degree standard observer The CIELUV (u ', v') chromaticity coordinates of D65, and the white point displacement as a function of the number of incident angles are defined as the white point chromaticity coordinates at 0-degree incident angle (that is, normal incidence) and deviation from normal The distance between the chromaticity coordinates of the white point at the angle of incidence. This calculation is performed assuming that the filter element q ′ is an interference filter having an effective refractive index of about 1.85 and the element p is an absorption filter. In addition, the table in FIG. 59A lists Various additional performance criteria evaluated, where the performance criteria include criteria previously defined in the detailed description of the present invention and selected metrics defined by the industry standard ANSI Z80.3-2010. In particular, for some embodiments, it is labeled " The "" column can be used to evaluate one of the robust estimates of the general quality of color enhancement provided by filters. This increase in quantity is associated with an improved score based on the Farnsworth D-15 lid configuration test and is also generally associated with one of the visual experiences that can be described as color enhancement. Hereinafter, the linearly stylized descriptions described herein are described with reference to FIGS. 31A to 42E, 45A to 45E, 48A to 53E and 55A to 57E, and the corresponding tables presented in FIGS. 59A to 80B. Some additional embodiments of method-designed filters. In these figures, the detailed description of the elements indicated by reference numerals xx01 to xx12 (where xx is a drawing number, for example, 31 in FIGS. 31A to 31E) corresponds to those given above with respect to FIGS. 31A to 31E A detailed description of the components, and further details are provided as appropriate for each individual case. In an embodiment, the graphs shown in FIGS. 31A to 31E and the design criteria of the multi-band filter with enhanced red-green discrimination and green band, the spectral transmittance of the component, the component, Manufacturing specifications and performance evaluation. Lines shown in graph 3107 in FIG. 31C and lines in FIG. 59B The filter manufacturing targets listed in the table have a first passband center at about 450 nm and a half-peak bandwidth of about 40 nm, a second passband center at about 530 nm and about 35 nm. It has a half-peak bandwidth of one meter and a third passband center at about 615 nanometers and a half-peak bandwidth of about 40 nanometers. Filter manufacturing specifications can be used to produce filters. The filter includes an interference filter (q) and a neutral density absorption filter (p), wherein the neutral density absorption filter has a transmittance of about 40%. The filter design is achieved by a linearly stylized method as disclosed herein, where the basic filter is a group of approximately 60 rectangular passband filters, each of which has a single passband width of 10 nanometers and Has a center wavelength in 5 nanometer increments (the same is true for all embodiments described below). To improve manufacturability so that a low-order stacked dielectric material (eg, less than about 50 material layers) can be used to fabricate interference filter components, a Gaussian core (k) having a half-peak width of about 20 nm has been used. To smooth the filter design (q '). It should be further noted that the resulting filter (f) meets the minimum transmittance limit as shown at 3101 in FIG. 31A. The filter design criteria used to produce this embodiment have been configured such that the light transmittance of daylight is about 18%, which is suitable for use of the filter in sunglasses with a medium color. Further embodiments disclosed herein may use the same or nearly the same light transmittance. However, the methods disclosed herein are suitable for manufacturing with any moderate light transmission (e.g., as low as about 8% (corresponding to a dark color of sunglasses) or as high as 40% (corresponding to a light color of sunglasses), or in some In this case, the filter is greater than 40%). In addition, the filter provides a white point that will be considered to be substantially neutral, as shown in the table of Figure 59A (D65 chromaticity coordinates). A filter with a neutral configuration of white point can better balance the overall visual comfort and one of all colors. However, other configurations of white point can be used, but white with strong chromaticity should also be avoided This is because these filters generally do not provide adequate brightness in one of the entire color gamuts. Regarding the white point of this embodiment as viewed within a range of incident angles, as demonstrated by the white point displacement figure 3112 as a function of the number of incident angles in FIG. 31E, the white point moves considerably (for example, at 35 degrees The movement is greater than 0.03 units), so when this filter is incorporated into the glasses (where the filter can be viewed through a range of corners), a clear color shift towards the periphery of the lens can be observed. In addition, as shown in the graphs 3110 and 3111 in FIG. 31D, the color enhancement of the filter is lower than zero at about 20 degrees. Therefore, the filter only provides a relatively narrow field of view in which However, the desired color enhancement function is effective, for example, green (such as leaves) in nature may tend to have a brown appearance when the incident angle approaches or exceeds 20 degrees. A further embodiment of FIGS. 32A to 32E related to the previous embodiment shown in FIGS. 31A to 31E is characterized by a correspondence table in FIGS. 60A and 60B. This embodiment discloses that a filter designed with respect to the same conditions as previously described, except that the cost function shown at 3203 in FIG. 32A has been modified to further improve the color discrimination. The resulting filter design is characterized as an alternative to a passband location that provides a better performance. Currently, this configuration is considered to give the choice of the passband position only for the best possible performance of any three-pass band filter relative to the PGAI metric (however, as shown in further discussion, this metric may not be suitable for e.g. glasses Of practical applications of these filters). The line shown in the graph 3207 in FIG. 32C and the line in FIG. 60B The filter manufacturing targets listed in the table have: a first passband at about 440 nm, which has a half-peak bandwidth of about 30 nm; a second passband at about 535 nm, which has A half-peak bandwidth of about 35 nanometers; and a third passband at about 650 nanometers, which has a half-peak bandwidth of about 80 nanometers. The improved color enhancement effect of this embodiment is partly due to a wider gap between the first frequency band and the third frequency band. As mentioned previously, color discrimination benefits from a multi-band filter with one of the widest possible spectral apertures, so a filter with a first frequency band (which has a wavelength shorter than about 450 nm) can be A filter with a third passband (which has a center wavelength longer than 610 nm) is preferred. However, 440 nm and 650 nm are approximately the maximum outer limits of the frequency band positions in filters with this desired effect, because frequency band positions that exceed these limits can tend to render blue and red as unacceptable Dark color. In addition, this embodiment benefits by locating the midpass band at a wavelength longer than 530 nanometers. The configuration of the middle passband at a wavelength less than 530 nm can provide a filter that causes green to appear unacceptably dark. The configuration of the passband at the precise 530 nm tends to maximize the PGAI performance measure relative to the Farnsworth D-15 sample and Munsell colors. However, these colors are based on artificial colors and this filter can tend to lead to nature. The green is unnatural green. The natural coloration of chlorophyll (as described previously) is more accurately regarded as a yellow-green color. The configuration of the midpass band at about 540 nanometers tends to maximize the PGAI performance relative to natural samples. The configuration of the middle passband at about 545 nm or longer tends to provide a filter that gives one enhancement of blue-yellow discrimination and a corresponding one of weakened enhancement of red-green discrimination, and if still chooses a longer The wavelength is then tilted towards blue-yellow (discussed in more detail in a further embodiment). Therefore, a configuration with a passband in the center wavelength of about 535 nanometers can achieve one of the best performance balances between artificial color samples and natural color samples, and has one of the center wavelengths of about 545 nanometers. The selection of the mid-band can achieve the best performance balance with respect to one of the red-green axis and the blue-yellow axis of the color space. Further embodiments of the filter for enhancing red-green discrimination disclosed below are consistent with the choice of center between about 535 nm and about 545 nm (if not otherwise specified), however, the examples shown are not It is intended to limit the scope of the present invention because the choice of mid-band position can be usefully varied between about 530 nm and about 545 nm of these filters for improved color discrimination. Returning to the discussion of FIGS. 32A to 32E, the performance of the filter (shown at 3210 and 3211 in Figure 32D, respectively) relative to the filter based on the PGAI measurement of the Farnsworth D-15 sample and the natural sample is shown compared to the previous embodiment One is significantly improved. In particular, for incident angles up to about 30 degrees, the PGAI is greater than zero, so the filter, when incorporated into the glasses, provides a wider field of view that gives one of the desired color enhancements. In addition, the PGAI at the normal incidence is significantly larger than in the previous embodiment. However, in comparison, this embodiment exhibits significantly worse performance with respect to the stability of white points within multiple incident angles. As shown at 3212 in FIG. 32E, the white point displacement at 35 degrees is about 0.05 unit. Due to the wide bandwidth of the long wavelength band, the white point tends to shift rapidly toward a red tone. Using available manufacturing methods, these layers can be partially relieved of unwanted white point displacement by depositing interference filters with a solid thickness that intentionally varies within the area of the lens (where the expected viewing angle is off-normal), however, These methods are too costly. For example, as opposed to a manufacturing method by physical vapor deposition, achieving a desired thickness gradient requires a highly precise processing configuration that would prevent mass production. In addition, even if a lens has a proper physical distribution of an interference coating, one of the filters that is so sensitive to the angle of incidence is difficult to reliably align in the frame of an eyeglass, making the eyeglasses' performance relative to the frame style and head size And similar geometric factors. A further embodiment of FIGS. 33A to 33E related to the embodiment previously shown in FIGS. 31A to 31E and the embodiment of FIGS. 32A to 32E has a correspondence table in FIGS. 61A and 61B. This embodiment discloses an optical filter designed with respect to the same conditions as previously described. However, the design criteria further include a color appearance constraint such that the white point appears to be substantially unchanged over a wide angle range, and the cost function is additionally adjusted to maximize the filter in the widest possible angle range. efficacy. The resulting filter design is characterized by a further alternative to the passband position, which provides good performance relative to the PGAI metric, but additionally ensures a consistent appearance of the color throughout the field of view to thereby incorporate in the filter Achieve robust performance and improved visual comfort when in glasses. In particular, the middle pass band remains at about 535 nanometers, but the upper and lower pass bands are configured between the positions of the embodiment of FIGS. 31A to 31E and the embodiment of FIGS. 32A to 32E. position. Figure 32C is shown at 3207 and Figure 60B. The filter manufacturing targets listed in the table have: a first pass band at about 445 nm, which has a half-peak bandwidth of about 25 nm; a second pass band at about 535 nm, which has A half-peak bandwidth of about 30 nanometers; and a third passband at about 630 nanometers, which has a half-peak bandwidth of about 40 nanometers. Relative to the efficiency of the filter, it can be observed in FIG. 33D that for incident angles up to about 25 degrees, the PGAI is greater than zero. Therefore, the filter, when incorporated into the glasses, provides a reasonably wide field of view that gives the desired color enhancement. Compared to the previous embodiment, the performance of the filter with respect to the stability of white points within multiple incident angles is significantly improved. As shown at 3312 in FIG. 33E, the white point displacement between 0 degrees and 35 degrees is less than about 0.01 units. In a further embodiment, it has been demonstrated that the white point displacement can be extended to an angle of up to 45 degrees while maintaining the same margin. In all of the embodiments disclosed below, a white point stabilization constraint in some form (if not otherwise specified) is used because these constraints are generally considered to be beneficial to any including an interference filter assembly Manufacturing of this filter. In fact, these filters, which incorporate a white point stability constraint, have been subjectively observed to provide a comfortable field of view in the absence of noticeable color distortion in peripheral vision, regardless of the fact that the lens can be incorporated to give relative One of the spectral transmittances, a dielectric interference filter, which varies significantly at the angle of incidence. In general, the methods disclosed herein can be used to discover red-green enhanced multi-band filters with three passbands configured to provide a stabilized white point, where the filters have a position at about 440 nm A first passband between about 450nm and about 450nm, a second passband between about 530nm and about 545nm and a third pass between about 610nm and about 635nm band. The preferred embodiment of the red-green enhancement filter is the following embodiment: it has the smallest possible center position of the shortest wavelength passband, the largest possible center position of the longest wavelength passband, the narrowest possible bandwidth, and the adjacent passband and resistance The maximum possible contrast ratio between the average transmission of the bands. However, all of these configurations can be adjusted by appropriate constraints to ensure the effectiveness of the filter, for example, when incorporated in glasses. The embodiments of the optical filters disclosed herein (for example, the embodiments disclosed in FIGS. 36A to 36E, 37A to 37E, 38A to 38E, 39A to 39E, and related embodiments) are provided with Proper maximization of the relevant guidance to obey these restrictions of the actual concerns intended to be applied. In a further embodiment related to the embodiment of FIGS. 33A to 33E, a blue-yellow enhancement filter is characterized by corresponding tables in FIGS. 34A to 34E and FIGS. 62A and 62B. This embodiment reveals that an optical filter designed with respect to essentially the same criteria as those of the related embodiments, except that the cost function (shown at 3403 in Figure 34A) is configured to maximize blue-yellow discrimination rather than red Green discrimination. These filters can be used for individuals with a third type of color weakness, which is one of the types of color vision defects where it is difficult to distinguish between blue and yellow. These filters can also be preferably used in spectacles suitable for certain environments (e.g. golf green grass courts) where the green is the main background (where green appearance is expected to be suppressed to some extent), or better In an optical aid for positioning a camouflaged object in a jungle (where suppression of changes between greens can reveal previously unseen features). The line shown in graph 3407 of FIG. 34C and the line of FIG. 62B The filter manufacturing target listed in the above has a first passband at about 455 nm, the first passband has a half-peak width of about 45 nm, and the second passband is at about 560 nm and It has a half-peak width of about 50 nanometers, and the third pass band is located at about 675 nm and has a half-peak width of about 60 nanometers. The efficiency analysis of the filter relative to the PAGI metric is shown in FIG. 34D. It can be observed that for incident angles up to about 20 degrees, PGAI is mainly negative. In addition, the white point displacement (as shown in FIG. 34E) exhibits excellent stability with a total displacement of less than about 0.01 units of incidence for angles of incidence up to 45 degrees from normal incidence. In addition, as mentioned in the table of FIG. 62A, the filter complies with the chromaticity limit of a traffic signal as defined by ANSI Z80.3-2010. In particular, compared to these blue-yellow enhancement filters, the amount of color discrimination suppression along the red-green axis is limited by the chromaticity coordinates of the green traffic signal. Compared to the filter of the present invention, which maximizes the blue-yellow discrimination and maintains compliance, the chromaticity coordinates of the green traffic signal are essentially located on or near the boundary of the compliance area, so that the green traffic signal appears as permitted by the standard Unsaturated (ie, white). In another embodiment also related to the embodiments of FIGS. 33A to 33E and FIGS. 34A to 34E, a color enhancement filter is characterized by the correspondence tables in FIGS. 35A to 35E and FIGS. 63A and 63B. The filter is further configured to substantially suppress transmission of short-wavelength light, such as light between about 380 nanometers and about 450 nanometers. These filters generally provide a balance improvement of color discrimination along both the red-green axis and the blue-yellow axis. In addition, the suppression of short-wavelength light can improve sharp focus and reduce the total energy of photons received by the eye, whose energy increases inversely with respect to wavelength. This embodiment is difficult to manufacture using a low-order interference filter because the design is preferably characterized by a rapid start point between reflection and transmission at about 450 nanometers. Therefore, a core having a half-peak width of about 10 nanometers is used to smooth the interference filter assembly (q '). To achieve the blue light blocking function, the cost function can be configured with an increasing slope as shown at 3503 in FIG. 35A. The white point of the filter can be oriented toward a yellow configuration, subject to the restriction that the white point is not considered to be "strongly colored" according to ANSI Z80.3-2010. The curve shown in FIG. 35C and the line shown in FIG. 63B The filter manufacturing targets are listed in the assumption that the filter incorporates a neutral density absorption filter (p) having a transmittance of about 50%. The filter manufacturing target has: a first pass band located at about 455 nm, which has a half-peak width of about 15 nm; a second pass band located at about 550 nm, which has about 45 nm One half-peak width; and a third passband located at about 645 nm and having a half-peak width of about 70 nm. The filter has a light transmittance of about 35% (corresponding to a light-colored sunglasses), but the hue can be made deeper by increasing the intensity of the absorption filter element. As shown in Figure 35D, this filter provides a moderately positive value for PGAI within an incident angle of up to 30 degrees. Relative to the color stability performance, the white point displacement is limited to 0.01 units between 0 and 35 degrees of incidence, as demonstrated in Figure 35E. In addition, as indicated in the table of FIG. 63A, the solar blue light transmittance (about 15%) is less than one and a half of the light transmittance. Therefore, the filter can be described as providing an improved blue light blocking function while maintaining the color appearance One of good quality. In a further series of three embodiments discussed below, red-green discrimination enhanced multi-band filters are disclosed, where the filters are configured for use by observers with weak green, which is difficult to distinguish green Crowd with red color vision deficiency. Compared to the previously disclosed embodiments of the red-green enhancement filter herein, these embodiments provide substantially more enhancement of color discrimination along the red-green axis. The manufacturing specifications disclosed in these embodiments provide a filter to be produced as a combination of a neutral density filter and an interference filter, wherein the neutral density filter has about 40% to about 55% One of the transmittance. In addition, interference filters are generally designated as high-order coating stacks because steep transitions between adjacent passbands and stopbands are generally better for maximizing color discrimination enhancement. These filters with steep frequency band transitions can provide an unstable color appearance for certain narrow-band light sources such as light emitting diodes and some types of gas discharge lamps, which include sodium vapor lamps and some fluorescent lamps. To alleviate these instabilities, these filters incorporate a minimum transmittance constraint with respect to a wavelength between about 450 nanometers and about 650 nanometers, which is usually specified to be equal to the light transmission of the filter The lower limit of about one fifth of the rate. Accordingly, the stop band of these embodiments is limited by this minimum transmittance. These filters also preferably conform to ANSI Z80.3-2010 related to the chromaticity coordinates of the traffic signals provided by the filters, and in particular, these filters minimize red and green discrimination enhancement Some embodiments of the device may provide a chromaticity coordinate of a yellow traffic signal at a restricted position relative to its compliant boundary, where the restricted position provides an appearance of the light that is red or almost red (if allowed). An additional difficulty associated with the design of these filters is that the color matching function of the weak green observer is not entirely characterized by the CIE standard observer model. Therefore, constraints related to white point stability can be better calculated relative to a modified observer model. The details of the calculations are well documented and available to the average technician. However, the white point displacement analysis in this article uses the CIE 2 degree standard observer. Therefore, the calculated white point displacement characteristic of the number of incident angles in these designs is a wider tolerance (for example, 0 degrees to 35 degrees). Between about 0.02 units). The white point displacement functions of these designs usually exhibit a local minimum at an angle between about 20 degrees and about 40, where the white point displacement measured at the local minimum is usually at most about 0.01 units. A first embodiment of a filter for a weak green observer is disclosed together with the correspondence tables of FIGS. 36A to 36E and 64A and 64B. The line shown in FIG. 36C and the line shown in FIG. 64B The filter manufacturing targets listed in the table have: a first passband located at about 450 nm, which has a half-peak width of about 25 nm; a second passband located at about 535 nm, which Has a half-peak width of about 35 nanometers; and a third passband, which is located at about 635 nanometers and has a half-peak width of about 35 nanometers. The manufacturing specifications of the filter incorporating a neutral density absorber of about 45% transmittance are given. For incident angles up to about 27 degrees, the PGAI provided by the filter is greater than zero, as shown in Figure 36D. As mentioned in the table of FIG. 64A, the importance weighted PGAI relative to the Farnsworth D-15 color is at least about 30%, which can be better used for an observer with mild green weakness. The white point of the filter, which is essentially neutral in color, is stabilized relative to a weak green observer model, and is characterized by a local minimum in a white point displacement curve of less than 0.01 units at about 32 degrees As shown at 3612 in FIG. 36E. A second embodiment of a filter for a weak green observer is disclosed together with the correspondence tables of FIGS. 37A to 37E and FIGS. 65A and 65B. Figure 37C is shown in graph 3707 and line 65B The filter manufacturing targets listed in the table have: a first passband at about 445 nm, which has a half-peak width of about 25 nm; a second passband at about 535 nm, which Has a half-peak width of about 35 nanometers; and a third passband, which is located at about 635 nanometers and has a half-peak width of about 40 nanometers. The manufacturing specifications of the filter incorporating a neutral density absorber of about 50% transmittance are given. For incident angles up to about 25 degrees, the PGAI provided by the filter is greater than zero, as shown in Figure 37D. As mentioned in the table of FIG. 65A, the importance weighted PGAI relative to the Farnsworth D-15 color is at least about 35%, which can be preferably used for an observer with moderate green weakness. The white point of the filter, which is essentially neutral in color, is stabilized relative to a weak green observer model, and is characterized by a local minimum in a white point displacement curve of less than 0.01 units at about 40 degrees As shown at 3712 in Figure 37E. A third embodiment of a filter for a weak green observer is disclosed together with the correspondence tables of FIGS. 38A to 38E and FIGS. 66A and 66B. In this embodiment, the filter design criteria are modified so that the minimum spectral transmittance limit (equal to one-fifth of the light transmittance) is only at the yellow light wavelength to the red light wavelength (e.g., from about 580 nm to about 650 nm M) is mandatory, as shown at 3801 in Figure 38A. Therefore, the resulting filter design can be described as having a third passband with a "shoulder" on the short wavelength side of the frequency band. The curve shown in Figure 38C and the row shown in Figure 65B The filter manufacturing targets listed in the table have: a first passband located at about 445 nm, which has a half-peak width of about 20 nm; a second passband located at about 535 nm, which It has a half-peak width of about 30 nm; and a third passband, which is located at about 635 nm and has a half-peak width of about 30 nm. The manufacturing specifications of the filter incorporating a neutral density absorber of about 55% transmittance are given. For incident angles up to about 25 degrees, the PGAI provided by the filter is greater than zero, as shown in Figure 38D. As mentioned in the table of FIG. 66A, the weighted PGAI relative to the importance of the Farnsworth D-15 color is at least about 40%, which can be better used for an observer with severe green weakness. The white point of the filter, which is essentially neutral in color, is stabilized relative to a weak green observer model, and is characterized by a local minimum in a white point displacement curve of about 0.01 units at about 40 degrees As shown at 3812 in Figure 38E. A further embodiment related to the series shown in FIGS. 36A to 38E is disclosed in conjunction with the correspondence tables of FIGS. 39A to 39E and FIGS. 67A and 67B. This embodiment provides a filter for red-green discrimination enhancement to a weak red observer. Compared to previous examples of red-green enhancement filters, these filters, when designed for weak red viewers, generally prefer a shorter wavelength configuration of one of the second pass band and the third pass band. This is based on the orientation of the third type of color blindness obfuscation line, and the fact that the weak red color is associated with one of the blue shifts of the spectral absorption of the retinal photopigment in long-wavelength cones. Due to the shorter wavelength configuration of the second and third pass bands, the total spectral width of these filters must be relatively reduced so that the red color appears moderately bright. Figure 39C is shown in graph 3907 and line 67B The filter manufacturing targets listed in the table have: a first passband at about 440 nm, which has a half-peak width of about 20 nm; a second passband at about 530 nm, which Has a half-peak width of about 25 nanometers; and a third passband, which is located at about 615 nanometers and has a half-peak width of about 25 nanometers. The manufacturing specifications of the filter incorporating a neutral density absorber of about 55% transmittance are given. For incident angles up to about 20 degrees, the PGAI provided by the filter is greater than zero, as shown in Figure 39D. The white point stability of these filters may be additionally considered in the design, however, analysis of the white point stability according to a standard observer model may be inherently unsuitable for the intended use of the filter (e.g. for a weak red Observer use). In another embodiment, together with the corresponding tables of FIGS. 40A to 40E and 68A and 68B, it is disclosed that a normal observer is provided with color enhancement and an improved electronic visual display (such as a liquid crystal display with a light-emitting diode backlight). It is a filter for the light contrast of the primary color light. This filter is intended for use with electronic displays that typically use the following three primary colors: a red primary color having a peak wavelength between about 610 nm and about 630 nm and having about 20 nm to about 50 nm A half-height full width of one meter; a green primary color having a peak wavelength of about 530 nanometers to about 535 nanometers and a half-height full width of about 20 nanometers to about 50 nanometers; and a blue primary color having about 450 nanometers A peak wavelength between about 460 nm and a full width at half maximum of about 20 nm. The filter provides a light transmittance of one of the primary colors of light that is approximately equal to the primary colors of red, green, and blue (hence the white point of the display). In addition, the light transmittance is at least about 15% greater than the light transmittance of daylight provided by the filter. Therefore, the filter can provide an improved contrast ratio for such displays when viewed under outdoor conditions, for example. The line shown in graph 4007 of FIG. 40C and the line of FIG. 68B The filter manufacturing targets listed in this table are characterized by four passbands that provide a stabilized white point at an incident angle of up to 45 degrees. The filter achieves color stability of the white point that provides a white point displacement of 0.01 units less than about 0 degrees to about 45 degrees, as demonstrated by curve 4012 in FIG. 40E. In addition, the filter provides one modest enhancement in color discrimination, as mentioned in Table 68A, with a weighted percentage of importance relative to the color gamut area of Farnsworth D-15 greater than about 20%. It is also possible to design a filter that performs in a similar manner with three pass bands, where the range of the stabilization angle extends to about 35 degrees. A change in one of the three-pass band filter and another change in the four-pass band filter are shown at 2105 and 2106 in FIG. 21B, each of which achieves this optical contrast gain. The filter 2105 has three passbands, of which one of the first passbands has a half-peak width of about 15nm and one of the second passbands has about one-half of 20nm at about 535nm. The peak width, and one of the third pass bands at about 620 nm has a half-peak width of about 25 nm. The filter 2106 in FIG. 21B has four pass bands, of which one of the first pass bands at about 455 nm has a half-peak width of about 15 nm and one of the second pass bands at about 540 nm has about 20 A half-peak width of one nanometer, a third passband at about 610 nanometers has a half-peak width of about 20 nanometers, and a fourth passband at about 650 nanometers has a full-width half-height of about 20 nanometers. Compared to the simple three-band filter 2105, the filter 2106 provides improved color stability with respect to changes in the angle of incidence. Figure 21A shows the spectral radiant flux 2103 of daylight and the spectral radiant flux 2101 of blue primary color light, the spectral radiant flux 2102 of green primary color light, and the spectral radiant flux 2104 of red primary color light, as measured from an LED-backlit LCD display. . The spectral flux of organic LED-based displays (OLEDs) is very similar, so that the filter of this embodiment will also provide the light contrast gain of these displays. In another embodiment, a multi-band filter for a normal observer is designed to provide substantially normal color discrimination and a blocking band between about 530 nm and about 560 nm. This blocking band protects the eyes from laser radiation at 532 nanometers, such as emitted by a doubled Nd: YAG laser. These lasers have many applications, including their use in various medical procedures. Conventionally designed filters that block visible laser emission, for example at about 532 nanometers, often also result in poor quality color discrimination when used in glasses. For example, filters made of absorbing materials cannot achieve sufficient blocking and do not absorb a wide spectral band. Interference filters (such as Rugate filters) that include a single stopband can provide sufficient protection for the eye, but cause a significant change in color appearance and exhibit a significant shift of the white point from the normal incident angle. In contrast, a multi-band interference filter can provide sufficient protection against a visible laser, and a multi-band interference filter designed using the method of filter generation as previously disclosed can also maintain a normal Color appearance, maintaining color stability at multiple angles, and protecting eyes from visible lasers in a wide angle range. An example of a 532 nm blocking filter is disclosed in the correspondence tables of FIGS. 41A to 41E and FIGS. 69A and 69B. The line shown in graph 4107 of FIG. 41C and the line of FIG. 69B The filter manufacturing targets listed in the table are characterized by four passbands separated by three stopbands, of which the middle stopband is the laser blocking band. The first passband is located at about 440nm and has a half-peak width of about 30nm, the second passband is at about 510nm and has a half-peak width of about 30nm, and the third passband is at about 570nm Meters and has a half-peak width of about 20 nanometers, and the fourth pass band is located at about 630 nanometers and has a half-peak width of about 30 nanometers. In general, similar filters with frequency bands and various frequency band widths can be found within +/- 10 nanometers of a given location, but all of these filters are characterized by at least four passbands. For industrial or medical applications, the barrier passband (between about 530 nm and about 560 nm) can provide a protection level rated at OD6 or higher (OD6 indicates an optical density of 6, which causes attenuation of transmitted light 10 -6 Times). For interference level protection (e.g., against a green laser indicator with a 532 nm output), the protection level can be smaller, such as about OD2. This protection may be specified in the filter generator design specification as one of the maximum transmittance constraints 2201 as shown in Figure 22A. In addition, as shown in FIG. 41E, these four passband filters can provide good stability of white points of less than 0.01 units with an incident angle of up to 35 degrees. As shown in Figure 41D, these filters can also provide a color appearance that is inherently normal over a wide range of angles, as evidenced by the fact that for incident angles up to about 25 degrees, PGAI is almost zero. These filters can be incorporated into safety glasses used in industrial or medical applications. In particular, in some applications of lasers in medical procedures, it can be beneficial for users to accurately perceive the color of biological tissue during surgery and the correct chromaticity appearance of certain colored light, so that the operator can correctly Interpret the lights on your computer display and / or device. It should be useful to note that these filters are not compatible with illumination sources with narrow-band spectral output, such as some fluorescent lamps or RGB light-emitting diode arrays. Corresponding tables of FIGS. 42A to 42E and FIGS. 70A and 70B disclose another embodiment related to the embodiment shown in FIGS. 41A to 41E. The line shown in graph 4207 of FIG. 42C and the line of FIG. 70B The filter manufacturing targets listed in the table are characterized by four passbands separated by three stopbands, of which the long-wavelength stopband is one of the blocking bands that provides protection against a 589nm sodium emission line. Eye protection from this wavelength may have industrial applications in certain procedures, such as glass manufacturing or working with lasers with output power at or near the short wavelength side of the blocking band. The filter design specifications incorporate this blocking band as a spectral transmittance constraint, as shown by the maximum transmittance constraint 2301 in FIG. 23A. This embodiment can provide similar quality color appearance and white point stability, as demonstrated by the previous related embodiments. The variations of this embodiment may include only three passbands, however, these variations tend to provide a substantial reduction relative to one of the PGAI metrics and are therefore somewhat unsuitable for use in applications where normal color discrimination is desired. The correspondence tables of FIGS. 45A to 45E and FIGS. 71A and 71B disclose another embodiment related to the embodiment shown in FIGS. 35A to 35E. This embodiment also provides a blue light blocking function and a substantially normal color appearance. It is also intended to be suitable for use in dark luminaire conditions, and especially at night, where sodium vapor lamp lighting is expected (such as is common in street lamps). Filter design guidelines are incorporated to ensure that 589 nm light is constrained by one of the minimum transmittances transmitted by the filter, as shown at 4501 in Figure 45A. Then, for example, the filter and a photochromic element can be manufactured, so that the filter incorporated in the glasses can be used in a range of an illumination level. This embodiment provides a substantially normal color appearance, as shown in FIG. 45D, where PGAI is not significantly different from zero within an incident angle of up to 45 degrees. In addition, as shown in the graph of FIG. 43A, the filter meets the spectral minimum transmittance constraint and the spectral maximum transmittance constraint shown at the solid curve 4302 and the dotted curve 4301, respectively. The maximum spectral transmittance constraint stipulates that the designed filter does not transmit light with a wavelength below 450 nm. The minimum spectral transmittance constraint stipulates that: the designed filter passes at least 15% of the transmission between 450 nm and 650 nm through all the stop bands; in addition, the designed filter passes The largest possible portion of light with a wavelength between 610 nm passes through. The designed filter shown at the solid line curve 4303 of FIG. 43B (which is the same as the solid line curve shown in FIGS. 45A to 45D) complies with the spectral transmittance constraint of FIG. 43A, and the smoothness shown at the dotted curve 4304. The filter fully meets the constraints of the intended application; specifically, the filter provides a high-luminance artificial light based on sodium vapor excitation that gathers energy at about 589 nanometers, such as low-pressure sodium lamps and high-pressure sodium lamps commonly used in street lamps. . Short-wavelength blue light (for example, having a near-ultraviolet wavelength between about 380 nanometers and about 450 nanometers) is associated with a series of visual phenomena commonly referred to as glare, and its contributing factor may include fluorescence (specifically, , The fluorescence of organic materials in the eye that partially responds to UV light and near-UV light), scattered scattering of light passing through the eye medium (specifically, this is because the retinal physiology is degraded due to age-related effects) and Eyepiece chromatic aberration (specifically, short-wavelength light cannot be accurately focused on the retina). Therefore, one of the filters that selectively suppress the transmission of the short-wavelength blue light may have the effect of reducing glare and improving visual sensitivity. A standard blue light blocking filter (also known as a cut-off filter) can be generated by incorporating a short-wavelength absorber into a lens, as shown by the transmittance curve at the dashed curve 1904 in FIG. 19B . However, the multi-band blue light blocking filter can provide improved color discrimination (e.g., by the solid line curve 1902 (providing about 35% light transmittance), the dotted line curve 1903 (providing about 60% light transmittance) in FIG. 19B) (Transmittance curve shown) and the filter design shown in Figures 45A and 43B. The color discrimination provided by such filters is shown in further detail in FIGS. 44A to 44C. The spectral transmittance of a conventional blue light blocking filter is shown at 4405 in FIG. 44C, and the spectral transmittance of a blue light blocking multi-band filter is shown at 4404 in FIG. 44C. The chromaticity diagram of FIG. 44A shows the color appearance of selected Munsell colors provided by the filters, including the color appearance provided by the cut-off filter at 4401 and the solid appearance provided by the cut-off filter at 4402. The color appearance provided by this multi-band filter. The color appearance provided by the cut-off filter is essentially dichroic along the red-green axis, that is, the contours are collapsed so that the apparently different blue-yellow axis has a length of zero. In contrast, the color appearance provided by the multi-band filter is trichromatic (without collapse). An exemplary configuration of a lens incorporating an attenuation coating and an absorbing optical substrate is depicted in FIGS. 46A and 46B, where the layers (from front to back) are antireflection coatings 4601, absorbing optical substrates (e.g. Neodymium glass) 4602, multilayer interference coating 4604 and attenuation coating 4605. In FIG. 46B, light incident to the outside of the lens is shown along arrow 4611. The incident light passes through the anti-reflection coating and the absorbing optical substrate, and is then divided by an interference filter into a transmission component that is finally received by the eye 4607 and absorbed by the retina 4609 and travels in the opposite direction toward the light source but passes through the first A reflection component 4612 is further absorbed during an attenuation coating. Still referring to FIG. 46B, a similar procedure for reflection-absorption can occur with stray light entering the rear side of the lens (as shown along beam 4606), causing reflected light 4610 to be absorbed before it reaches the eye. In some examples, the dielectric layers of the attenuating coating and the interference coating are staggered or partially staggered. It is known that neodymium-containing glass lenses provide a slightly enhanced color discrimination. For example, the solid line curve 4705 in FIG. 47C shows the spectral transmittance of a 1.5 mm thick ACE modified lens (manufactured by Barberini GmbH). The color discrimination properties of the filter can be analyzed by comparison with Munsell 7.5B 8/4, a best-fit reference filter given by the spectral transmittance curve 4704 in FIG. 47C. 47A shows the appearance of the selected Munsell color provided by the ACE modified lens along the solid line outline 4702 in the chromaticity diagram, and shows the appearance of the selected Munsell color of the reference filter along the dotted outline 4701. The neodymium-containing filter produces an increase in one of the color gamut areas enclosed by these contours. However, the increase was mainly clustered around red samples that were not balanced by one of the apparent purity of the green samples. More preferably, a lens including neodymium can be used as an optical substrate for depositing an interference filter and / or an attenuation coating, such as described in FIGS. 46A and 46B. Then, the obtained composite filter can provide a passband and a stopband by configuring an interference filter and a narrow band absorption filter to be operated. These composite filters can be designed using a linearly stylized method as disclosed herein by appropriately configuring the spectral transmittance of the pre-filter p and the optical substrate to be used in the construction. Compared to multi-band filters with passbands provided only by interference filtering, these composite filters can be used by PGAI or PGAI IW Measurements provide better average performance and are generally less sensitive to changes in incident angle. Several embodiments of a filter design incorporating a neodymium-containing absorption element are disclosed below in conjunction with a detailed description of FIGS. 48A-53E and additionally in FIGS. 57A-57E. All of these embodiments represent variations based on the previously disclosed embodiments, and therefore do not require extensive additional detailed discussion. A general observation related to these changes is that a multiband filter containing neodymium can provide a slightly improved angular width in one of the fields of view in which color enhancement is provided. For example, for one embodiment that includes only absorption filters of the neutral density type (where PGAI is greater than zero at up to about 25 degrees), the variation based on such a filter additionally including neodymium can be up to about 30 degrees Provides a PGAI greater than zero. However, these changes tend to cause compromises in other areas, for example, in some changes, the ophthalmic lens incorporating this filter may have a greater light reflectivity on the side of the lens facing the eye. The corresponding tables of FIGS. 48A to 48E and 72A and 72B disclose a first embodiment of a filter incorporating a neodymium absorbing element, which is a change based on the design shown in FIGS. 33A to 33E. . This filter provides enhanced observers with red-green discrimination. This variation provides a wider field of view up to about 5 degrees to which color enhancement is effective. However, the importance weighted percentage of the increase in color gamut area is substantially the same between this change and its related embodiments. A further embodiment of a filter incorporating a neodymium absorbing element is disclosed in the correspondence tables of FIGS. 49A to 49E and FIGS. 73A and 73B, which is a modification based on the design shown in FIGS. 34A to 34E. This filter provides enhanced blue-yellow discrimination to normal observers. This variation provides a wider field of view up to about 5 degrees to which color enhancement is effective. However, the importance weighted percentage of the increase in color gamut area is substantially the same between this change and its related embodiments. A further embodiment of a filter incorporating a neodymium absorbing element is disclosed in the correspondence tables of FIGS. 50A to 50E and FIGS. 74A and 74B, which is a modification based on the design shown in FIGS. 36A to 36E. This filter provides enhanced red-green discrimination for observers with mild green weakness. This variation provides a wider field of view up to about 5 degrees to which color enhancement is effective. However, the importance weighted percentage of the increase in color gamut area is substantially the same between this change and its related embodiments. A further embodiment of a filter incorporating a neodymium absorbing element is disclosed in the correspondence tables of FIGS. 51A to 51E and FIGS. 75A and 75B, which is a modification based on the design shown in FIGS. 37A to 37E. This filter provides enhanced red-green discrimination for observers with moderate green weakness. This variation provides a wider field of view up to about 5 degrees to which color enhancement is effective. However, the importance weighted percentage of the increase in color gamut area is substantially the same between this change and its related embodiments. A further embodiment of a filter incorporating a neodymium absorbing element is disclosed in the correspondence tables of FIGS. 52A to 52E and FIGS. 76A and 76B, which is a modification based on the design shown in FIGS. 38A to 38E. This filter provides enhanced red-green discrimination for observers with severe green weakness. This variation provides a wider field of view up to about 5 degrees to which color enhancement is effective. However, the importance weighted percentage of the increase in color gamut area is substantially the same between this change and its related embodiments. A further embodiment of a filter incorporating a neodymium absorbing element is disclosed in the correspondence tables of FIGS. 53A to 53E and FIGS. 77A and 77B, which is a change based on the design shown in FIGS. 39A to 39E. This filter provides enhanced red-green discrimination for viewers with weak red. This change provides a substantially improved color discrimination function, which is attributed to the optimal positioning of the main absorption band that provides favorable conditions relative to displacement stability constraints, whereby the long wavelength passband can effectively redshift up to about 10 Nanometers thus widen the spectral aperture without compromising other design criteria. One of the further applications of multi-band filters is to consider their effectiveness in increasing the blue and cyan light absorbed by the eyes. In particular, the reception of light between about 450 nanometers and about 490 nanometers can stimulate retinal ganglion cells. These cells do not involve color vision, but rather the suppression of melatonin and the synchronization of circadian rhythm and daylight phase. This light reception may have therapeutic effects, for example, in the treatment of seasonal affective disorders, sleep disorders, and other health problems. The estimated spectral absorption of one of the retinal ganglion cells is shown at 5401 in Figure 54A, where the absorption profile is obtained by shifting a retinal photochrome template to a peak wavelength of about 480 nm. To better understand the effect of filters on high-energy stimulation of ganglion cells, the example shown in the graph of Figure 54B is instructive. First, a neutral density filter (as shown at 5404) has essentially no effect on ganglion cell absorption--a modest range of light transmission for a filter (e.g., between about 20% to about 100) %), The enlargement or reduction of the pupil ensures that the amount of light reaching the retina (ie, the number of photons per second) is approximately constant (for example, the area ratio between an enlarged pupil and a reduced pupil is about 5: 1). For example, as shown at 5403, a broadband blue filter has an average transmittance between about 460 nm and about 490 nm, which is greater than the light transmittance of the filter. The luminosity of light (ie, daylight) affects pupil dilation, and the light sensitivity is greatest at about 555 nanometers, and the retinal ganglion cell absorption rate is greatest between about 460 nanometers and about 490 nanometers. A filter with a transmittance at about 555 nanometers and substantially more light transmitting at about 480 nanometers can cause pupil dilation and increase the number of photons absorbed by ganglion cells. However, wideband filters, such as the blue example shown in the figure, do not provide a substantial gain. These blue filters can improve ganglion cell stimulation by about 30%. However, this increase can be substantially enhanced by a multi-band filter, such as shown at 5402. This filter can improve ganglion cell stimulation by up to about 80%. A first embodiment for improving ganglion cell stimulation is shown in the correspondence tables of FIGS. 55A to 55E and FIGS. 78A and 78B. This embodiment provides an increase of about 80% of ganglion cell stimulation, that is, the ratio of the average transmittance between 460 nm to 490 nm and the light transmittance of the filter is about 1. 8. However, this embodiment is not characterized by a stable white point. As shown by the graph 5512 of FIG. 55E, the appearance of the white point quickly shifts toward blue as the incident angle increases. A further embodiment for improving ganglion cell stimulation is disclosed in the correspondence tables of FIGS. 56A to 56E and FIGS. 79A and 79B. This example provides about a 50% increase in ganglion cell stimulation. This embodiment is also characterized by a stable white point, as shown by the graph 5612 of FIG. 56E. For incident angles up to about 30 degrees, the white point displacement is less than about 0. 01 units. In addition, as shown in FIG. 56D, for incident angles up to about 30 degrees, PGAI is essentially zero, thereby demonstrating that the filter provides a substantially normal color appearance. However, the filter design with four passbands is relatively complicated and the improvement of ganglion cell stimulation is not significant. A further embodiment for improving ganglion cell stimulation is disclosed in the correspondence tables of FIGS. 57A to 57E and FIGS. 80A and 80B. This embodiment provides an increase in ganglion cell stimulation of about 65% and a stable white spot. The design of the filter incorporating a neodymium absorbing element promotes improved performance under these conditions. As shown by the graph 5712 of FIG. 57E, for incident angles up to about 30 degrees, the white point displacement is less than about 0. 01 units. In addition, as shown in FIG. 57D, for incident angles up to about 30 degrees, PGAI is essentially zero, thereby demonstrating that the filter provides a substantially normal color appearance. In a further embodiment, a filter may be designed to be incorporated into a lamp assembly, wherein the filter manufactured as, for example, a multilayer dielectric coating provides a beam splitting function by which Function, the transmission component and reflection component of the light emitted by a light source in the lamp are configured to have the same white point. Matching the reflective white point with the transmitted white point allows two beam components to be used for illumination, so no energy is wasted by filtering. In addition, the transmitted component of the light beam can be configured to provide a color enhancement effect such that a lamp assembly can be constructed in which, for example, the central region of the light beam provides one of the enhanced qualities of light (see additional discussion below with respect to FIG. 27B). An opposite effect on the appearance of the color can be observed in reflected light, where it can be reduced in an opposite effect as compared to an increase in the relative color gamut area as presented by the transillumination body as presented by the reflected illumination body The relative color gamut area, that is, the average color gamut area of the recombined beam is consistent. A lamp assembly containing such a filter preferably includes a wide-band illuminator. In one embodiment, a light emitting diode may be used for illumination. If a white LED including an LED-driven phosphor cannot provide sufficient wideband emission alone for good color appearance, it is usually possible to combine a white LED with a red LED, for example, at a ratio of about 4: 1 to produce a color temperature and spectrum that is approximately the same as sunlight A wide band lighting body. The spectral radiant flux 2501 of this composite illuminator, the spectral radiant flux 2502 of a white LED, and the spectral radiant flux 2503 of a red LED are shown in FIG. 25A. These luminaires may have a color temperature between about 5000 K and about 7000 K and a CRI between about 80 and about 90. In a further example, an illuminator including an LED to stimulate daylight may include a white LED, a red LED, and a blue (or cyan) LED having a ratio of, for example, about 4: 1: 2 to produce a light having a temperature of about 5000 K to about 7000. A wide band illuminator with a color temperature between K and a CRI between about 90 and about 100. One of the filters with a spectral transmittance of 2504 (as shown in Figure 25B) can perform the spectral splitting described. These filters are also called dichroic filters or dichroic reflectors. The design criteria of this filter may, for example, include: a cost vector configured to maximize the relative color gamut area; an LED mixture as described above as an illuminant; and a reference filter, which is The neutral filter makes the white point of the illuminating body under the filter the same as the white point of the illuminating body and the reflection filter under the neutral filter. In addition, the white point constraint may better specify a white point at a deviation from the normal incident angle up to about 20 degrees. This adaptation is potentially difficult when perfectly collimating incident light. A 20-degree beam width can be achieved with a small footprint collimating lens. In addition, a filter with a minimum spectral transmittance of about 10% across the visible wavelength may preferably be specified, which may be used to adjust the increase in color gamut area to reduce the color appearance when the split beams are spatially recombined. The uneven appearance in the mixed regions of these split beams. The spectral transmittance 2605 of the illuminant beam splitter filter and the spectral transmittance 2606 of its inverse (reflection) are shown again in FIG. 26C. The spectral radiant flux 2604 of the mixture of LED luminaires is again shown in FIG. 26B. The chromaticity coordinates of the white points of the filter and the inverse filter are shown at point 2603 of the chromaticity diagram of FIG. 26A. 2601 is the chromaticity coordinate of the selected Munsell color of the filter, and 2602 is the chromaticity coordinate of the selected Munsell color of the inverse filter. The opposite effect on the color gamut area can be easily seen in these contours, whereby the illuminator transmitted through the filter increases the color gamut area and the illuminator reflected through the filter responds to decrease the gamut area. small. One possible arrangement of components for forming a lamp assembly including such a beam splitter is shown in FIGS. 27A and 27B. Here, the assembly can be configured as a stack, which includes a thermally conductive substrate 2701 (such as a metal circuit board), a light emitting diode 2702, a beam forming optical light guide 2703, and a multilayer interference coating (which can be deposited Onto the surface of an optically transparent substrate, such as glass). Referring now specifically to FIG. 27B, in an exemplary configuration, a beam of light emitted by LED 2702 is collimated up to a beam width of about 20 degrees by optics (such as a light guide) 2703, and then incident on an interference filter 2704 on. Thereafter, the transmitted component of light appears in the central portion of the output beam 2708, and the reflective portion is redirected by the light guide (e.g., by internal reflection along the boundary indicated by 2709), and then emitted along the annular portion of the output beam 2707 . As shown in the figure, this configuration enables the lamp assembly to incorporate a color enhancement filter without compromising luminous efficiency, because the light that is not transmitted by the filter is radiated back to an environment that can still be used for general lighting. While an absorption filter will reduce the efficiency of the lamp, the interference filter has an almost uniform efficiency. These illuminants can be advantageously employed indoors to provide improved color discrimination for weak green observers and weak red observers. In these configurations, the illuminator can also be used with a filter (as previously disclosed) incorporated into the glasses. For the spectral transmittance of any filter disclosed above in this specification as a function of wavelength, one method for calculating the center position and width of the passband and stopband includes: applying a Gaussian smooth core application To the spectral transmittance curve (e.g., by the convolution of the core and the transmission data sequence), where the width of the core is wide enough to essentially eliminate any useless changes to the curve (for example, such as not being valued by the filter of interest Transient, ripple, noise, or other artifacts); then normalize the curve so that the maximum transmission is equal to 100%; and then round each transmission value to 0% or 100% so that each adjacent spectral region ( The rounded value of 0% corresponds to the band boundary of a stopband, and each adjacent spectral region (where the rounded value is 100%) corresponds to the band boundary of a passband. As for the band boundary calculated according to this method, the average transmittance in each pass band and each stop band can be calculated relative to the original curve. The width of a passband or stopband is equal to the distance between the lower band boundary and the upper band boundary, and the center of a passband or stopband is equal to the midpoint between the lower band boundary and the upper band boundary. Preferably, for any such calculated set of passband boundaries and stopband boundaries, for each interleaved stopband, the average transmittance of the stopband is at most half of the average transmittance of an adjacent passband. If this condition is not applicable, the change between the passband and the stopband may be essentially useless. In this case, the width of the smoothing core may be increased and calculations may be repeatedly performed until a suitable smoothing width is determined. For most filters of interest in the present invention, a smooth core with a half-peak width of about 20 nanometers is suitable for the purpose of this calculation. For most of the filters described in the present invention, the specified values related to the band boundary position, band center position, and band width can be given in units of wavelengths rounded to the nearest 5 nm. The teachings herein are sufficient to specify filters with greater spectral resolution. However, a larger spectral resolution is not necessarily required to practice the invention. The above section of this specification discloses a method for generating a multi-band optical filter that affects color perception in a desired manner, including: a method of designing a filter specification that meets one of the constraints associated with the intended use of the filter; Method for evaluating the performance of filter specifications and adjusting the design to further improve the performance of the filter specifications relative to the desired effect to achieve the specifications of one of the preferred embodiments of such a filter; fabricating filters and / or providing A method suitable for a machine specification having a filter manufactured by another method; and incorporating the filter into an ophthalmic lens or a lamp assembly to produce one of a device that provides a desired effect on color perception Method of the preferred embodiment. The scope of the effect on color perception achieved by the present invention includes: maintaining normal color discrimination (which is also referred to as providing "good color discrimination" in the present invention); enhanced color discrimination (also sometimes referred to as """Enhanced" or "improved" color discrimination), can unconditionally assume that the improvement of color discrimination between red and green is equivalent to the improvement of color discrimination between blue and yellow; enhanced red and green discrimination, where the desired effect brings red and green between Maximize discrimination improvement; and enhance blue-yellow discrimination, where the desired effect maximizes discrimination improvement between blue and yellow. It is generally expected that filters that also provide additional functions, such as specified minimum and / or maximum spectral transmittance in one or more regions of the visible spectrum, maintain normal color discrimination, where equivalent spectra are achieved by conventional methods Transmittance limitations will cause a filter to provide poor quality color discrimination. For example, conventional notch filters or cut-off filters that act as one of the interference filters can cause significant changes in the chromaticity appearance of certain colors, and / or can be incorporated into the glasses when the filter is incorporated One way to cause the appearance of some colors to change relative to a variable viewing angle is to make the viewer uncomfortable. In a further example, the average absorption that affects the spectral transmittance can cause the filter to have a low light transmittance and / or a strong color rendering white point, because the aggregation of the absorbing material required to achieve the spectral transmittance limitation can be Significantly affects transmittance in a wide area of the visible spectrum. The methods disclosed herein enable the design, specification, and manufacture of filters that maintain normal color discrimination over a wide range of viewing angles and provide useful limits with respect to spectral transmittance. Specific variations of these filters and products incorporating these filters disclosed herein include: filters that block blue light between about 380 nanometers and about 450 nanometers; blocks about 380 nanometers to about Filters for blue light between 450 nm and at the same time ensuring high spectral transmittance of light at a wide viewing angle range of about 589 nm; filters that block green light at a wide viewing angle range of about 532 nm An optical filter; and a filter that provides a high average transmittance of light between about 460 nm and about 490 nm with respect to the light transmittance of the light. The filters in the group of this embodiment all include three pass bands interleaved with two stop bands. However, many of these filters include four passbands interleaved with three stopbands, where one or more of the stopbands and / or one or more of the passbands provide the desired spectral transmittance limit. Based on further changes in the methods disclosed herein, the design, specifications, and manufacture of filters that enhance color discrimination over a wide range of viewing angles are realized. These filters include: filters that enhance red-green discrimination; blue-yellow Identify enhanced filters; or both. These filters can be configured to enhance color discrimination for observers with normal color vision, or can be configured to target color vision defects (which include green weak color vision defects, red weak color vision defects, and third Observation of color weakness and color vision defects) enhances the color discrimination of the observer. The configuration of a filter that is intended for use by a particular observer may provide a preferred embodiment of a filter that affects color perception in a desired manner. However, this configuration does not necessarily prevent other observers from experiencing some or all of the desired effects. Applications of filters that enhance red-green discrimination include optical aids for weak green observers and weak red observers. These color vision-deficient people are characterized by a sensitivity to changes between red and green, which is lower than that of normal observers. Filters that enhance red-green discrimination can also be used in other applications that include: general-purpose glasses (such as sunglasses) for normal observers; and activity-specific glasses such as those used in certain sports including golf . Filters that enhance blue-yellow discrimination can be used for Type III color-weak observers, and also have other applications that include enhancing light contrast, stimulating red-green perception defects, and detecting camouflaged objects. A balanced-enhancement filter that provides one of the color discrimination between red and green and between blue and yellow can be better used by observers with normal color vision, where these filters are incorporated into glasses Provides general improvements in visual quality. The filters in these embodiment groups all include three pass bands interleaved with two stop bands. However, some of these filters may include four passbands interleaved with three stopbands. Generally, the fourth passband has a center at a location greater than about 660 nanometers and is configured such that the filter maintains a substantially constant white point at an extreme angle of incidence. Filters configured to enhance color discrimination can be classified according to the center position of the second passband. For a center position between about 520 nanometers and about 540 nanometers, the filter mainly focuses on providing a discrimination improvement between red and green. For a center position between about 545 nanometers and about 550 nanometers, the filter provides a discrimination improvement that is approximately the same between red and green and between blue and yellow. For a center position between about 555 nanometers and about 580 nanometers, the filter focuses on providing an improvement in discrimination between one of blue and yellow. For one of the filters configured to enhance the blue-yellow discrimination, the preferred center position of the second passband is about 580 nanometers, which corresponds to a monochromatic wavelength that is considered only yellow by most observers. However, it may be impractical to have a filter at the center of a second passband at 580 nanometers because it can cause the appearance of color to be dichroic and correspondingly lose all between red and green. Identify. Therefore, it is useful to constrain these filters, for example, by ensuring that the chromaticity coordinates of a green traffic signal are within a defined boundary giving one of its acceptable limits. Thus, an optimal filter with a second passband position less than or equal to about 560 nanometers can be found, which maximizes the discrimination between blue and yellow without compromising the color discrimination between red and green. . For one of the filters configured to enhance the discrimination between red and green, the optimal center position of the second passband varies according to the color group of interest. Compared to Munsell color samples and / or Farnsworth D-15 colors, the best choice for the center position is about 530 nm. However, the better location is about 540 nm compared to the natural sample. Therefore, the choice of 535 nanometers can give the best average selection of such a filter for use in a mixed environment. In contrast to one of the filters configured to enhance a green weak observer to red-green discrimination, the preferred embodiment may depend on a sub-category of this type of observer. For a mildly green weak observer, one modest contrast ratio between the passband average transmission and the stopband average transmission may be suitable, for example, about 4: 1. For a moderately weak green observer, a ratio of at least about 6: 1 may be preferred. For a severely green weak observer, a ratio of at least one of 8: 1 may be better. For filters with a pass-band to stop-band contrast ratio greater than about 6: 1, the filter specifications may be better limited to provide between about 580 nm to about 620 nm and / or about 560 nm to Minimum spectral transmittance of at least about one fifth of the light transmittance between about 580 nanometers. This can ensure that the filter is suitable for general use, such as operating one of the suitable visibility motors in which certain narrow-band yellow lights (including light-emitting diodes and low-pressure sodium lamps) are required. In these changes, the filters may be better restricted to constrain the chromaticity coordinates of a yellow traffic signal in a specific area, so that these lights cannot be mistaken for orange or red, for example. Compared to a filter configured to make a red weak observer enhance red-green discrimination, a change based on one of the above ranges is applicable to the center position of the second passband. Due to the retinal physiology associated with the abnormality, the preferred wavelengths are all blue-shifted to about 5 nanometers, for example, the choice of 535 nanometers is modified to about 530 nanometers. In addition, it should be noted that the center position of the third passband is preferably at most between about 610 nanometers and about 625 nanometers relative to the configuration of the filter for the weak red viewer. The use of long wavelengths can result in reduced red visibility for these observers. The filters in the family of embodiments described above for enhanced color discrimination all include three passbands interleaved with two stopbands. With regard to the configuration of filters for color vision, these filters generally provide a light transmittance (e.g., at least about 8%) within a moderate range, and also preferably provide a non-powerful display. A white point (ie, the chromaticity coordinate of the average daylight as viewed through a filter). A constrained white point area can be better selected to provide a neutral tone in nature, because a filter with a white point that is moderately or strongly colored cannot provide suitable brightness for some colors. In addition, a restriction may preferably be imposed such that the white point remains within a relatively small area within a range of viewing angles because these filters provide the most comfortable viewing experience when incorporated into glasses and are Tolerance for misalignment and beam divergence when entering into the lamp assembly. The CIELUV (u ', v') chromaticity coordinates can be preferably used for these calculations because, based on this scale, for the range of white points of interest, the ellipse that defines the smallest perceptible difference between colors Approximately round. (U ', v') coordinates can be calculated relative to CIE 1931 2 degree standard observer or CIE 1964 10 degree standard observer, where the former gives a better prediction of the apparent color of an object at a distance, and the latter gives A better prediction of the apparent color of an object in a larger part of the field of view. Relative to a filter configured for use by observers with normal color vision, the white point constrained region may have about 0 on the (u ', v') chromaticity diagram. One radius of 02 units. More preferably, the region may have about 0. A radius of one unit of 01, and also better, the range of incident angles that make the white point of the filter conform to the limit can be expanded from 0 degrees to at least about 25 degrees, and more preferably, from 0 degrees to at least about 35 degrees . Compared to filters that are configured for use by observers with color vision defects, the constrained region may be better defined as an elliptical region, for example, where the major axis of the ellipse corresponds to the type of color vision defect Confusion lines are oriented. Therefore, when analyzing the properties of these filters based on a circular constrained area, the properties of these filters are characterized by a white point that leaves the constrained area within a certain range of the intermediate angle and then starts with a The steeper angle enters the constrained area again, where the steeper angle is usually between about 20 degrees and about 40 degrees. In some embodiments, this may provide a filter that appears to provide one of the white dots with good stability when the white dot is viewed by the intended observer, but an observer with normal color vision cannot perceive the same degree of stability. Relative to mild green weak observers and moderate green weak observers, the white point constrained area may be better limited to about 0. One radius of 01 units. Relative to severe green weak observers, has about 0. An unconstrained area with a radius of one of 02 units may be preferred. Relative to the red weak observer, the angular range within which the constraint is considered can be reduced to, for example, between about 0 degrees and about 20 degrees. One of the first methods for designing a filter that enhances color discrimination includes: selecting a desired center position of the second passband according to a desired effect as described above; selecting a desired light transmittance suitable for the filter The minimum required width of one of the second passbands (note that this preference also implies that the average transmittance of the second passband is as high as possible); and then the appropriate selection of the first and third passbands is appropriate Center position and width. The center of the first passband is preferably located at the shortest possible wavelength, and the center of the third passband is preferably located at the longest possible wavelength, where the center position and width are restricted by restrictions related to the white point of the filter. Where possible, the limitation includes the desired chromaticity coordinates of the white point at normal incidence; and the area within which it will contain the chromaticity coordinates of the white point relative to a range of viewing conditions away from one of the normal incidence angles. Next, the average transmittance in the three pass bands is preferably selected as the maximum possible value (if the filter is designated to incorporate, for example, an absorption filter, the value may be less than 100%), and may be better Ground selects the average transmittance of the staggered stopbands within a range of values, which corresponds to the ratio of the average transmittance between the passband and the stopband between about 2: 1 to about 10: 1 or greater. Higher contrast ratios produce stronger color discrimination enhancements. These high ratios can also be associated with the rare and / or unstable color appearance of certain lamps, such as narrow-band lamps. The above descriptions related to better choices of passband locations and passband to stopband contrast ratios and methods of designing the filters disclosed herein provide appropriate teachings for designing filters (which are members of the identified groups above). For example, to achieve this filter through an exhaustive search process, the center position and width of the second passband, and the passband can be determined, for example, based on the calling range associated with the effect on color vision as described above. Contrast of band and stopband, then enumerate all possible combinations of the center position and width of the first and third pass bands, and then use a computer to evaluate each filter in the enumerated group to select the better member. The preferred member satisfies the desired design constraints to maximize one of the performance measures relative to color discrimination. The enumerated group may include thousands of members, and the resulting calculations may require significant calculation time due to the number of frequency bands in consideration and the calculated spectral resolution. More preferably, the method disclosed in this paper can be used to design these filters by solving a linear program, thereby transforming the design constraints into a well-formed linear program, which will allow feasible filter design. The limitation is defined as a geometric abstraction best described as a generalized multidimensional convex polyhedron. By directing (which uses a cost vector as described in the teachings of the present invention), a linear equation solver can quickly locate the filter component on the boundary of the feasible set to maximize along the cost indicated by the cost vector. Given constraints of direction. As disclosed herein, a linearly stylized method can determine the test filter specifications almost instantaneously, so that the best method for practicing the present invention can interactively guide cost vectors and / or design constraints so that an operator can immediately evaluate a Performance trade-offs associated with specific test filters. The linear programming method also realizes the design of a composite filter including, for example, an interference filter and a narrow-band absorption filter (such as an optical substrate containing neodymium), wherein the linear programming solver determines the interference filter The transmittance specifications of the filter are used together with the absorption filter to produce the desired effect. A feasible filter set considered by the linear program solver may essentially include any spectral transmittance curve that is difficult or impossible to achieve by enumerating frequency bands or iterative local search procedures. Since the linear program solver is not strictly limited to designing a multi-band filter (which is a sequence passband that is interleaved with the stopband), it can be used to design when it is used with another specific filter A filter with a multi-band spectral transmittance that includes a constraint criterion that takes into account the properties of these composite filters within an incident angle range. For any test filter specification (such as produced by the method just described), the further method disclosed herein enables prediction of the effect of the test filter on color discrimination. For example, in one embodiment, a method involves: determining a best-fitting wideband reference filter; and then calculating the chromaticity coordinates of a set of reference colors as viewed through the test filter and the reference filter; And compare the ratio of the area enclosed by the coordinates under the two conditions. In another embodiment, determine a best-adaptive wideband reference filter, then calculate the chromaticity coordinates of a set of reference colors as viewed through the test filter and the reference filter, and then The chromaticity coordinates are projected onto one axis of the color space, and the relative standard deviations of the coordinate groups along the axis are compared. Preferably, the axis may include one or more of a third type of color blind obfuscation line, a green blind obfuscation line, and a red blind obfuscation line, so that the calculated ratio corresponds to the enhancement, reduction or maintenance of color discrimination along the corresponding direction, where The third type of color-blind confused line generally corresponds to the discrimination between blue and yellow, and the green-blind confused line and red-blind confused line generally correspond to the discrimination between red and green. More preferably, these performance analysis calculations are performed with respect to a test filter viewed within a range of deviation from a normal incident angle, such as between about 0 degrees and at least about 25 degrees. The average performance in these angles can be used to estimate the overall performance of a product, such as when incorporated into an ophthalmic lens, making it necessary to consider filter performance over a wide range of viewing angles. Even better, this analysis can take into account the estimated distribution of the curvature and orientation of the lens within a spectacle frame, and / or the geometry of the eye, and / or the orientation of the eye that can be rotated in the eye socket. Preferably, these performance evaluations relative to the reference color can be considered in terms of color expression conditions under which the product can be used with, for example, eyeglasses. The reference color should include two samples from nature and artificial colors, For filters configured to be incorporated into an interior light assembly, the reference colors may include only artificial colors. In terms of a preferred test filter specification, the filter can be manufactured, for example, as an interference filter by physical vapor deposition of a stacked dielectric material onto an optical substrate. The test filter specification can be limited by the minimum transmittance curve and the maximum transmittance curve to, for example, provide a processing tolerance specification suitable for enabling the filter to be manufactured by an operator familiar with such production methods. Some embodiments of the filters disclosed herein can be manufactured, for example, as high-order interference filters that include about 100 layers of dielectric material and have a total thickness of about 6 microns. Implementation with respect to some embodiments (specifically, where only a moderate contrast ratio between the average transmission of the passband and the stopband is desired (e.g., having a ratio between about 2: 1 to about 4: 1) Example), the number of layers and thickness can be significantly reduced to, for example, require up to about 50 layers and / or have a total thickness of about 3 micrometers, where these limitations can be achieved by applying a smooth core to the filter specifications For example, this core preferably has a Gaussian shape and a half-peak of at least about 20 nanometers. The resulting simplified design can then benefit from shorter processing times, compatibility with lower accuracy programs, and lower overall production costs. Several of the types represented by the filter embodiments disclosed herein may benefit from being designed as a composite filter (e.g., including an interference filter and an absorption filter, where the absorption filter includes neodymium) Construct. For example, these composite designs are feasible relative to a red-green enhancement filter with a constrained white point in a corner range, which can be longer than the feasible wavelength when considering the same confinement criteria and no neodymium absorption component The position of the third passband is selected at one wavelength. A longer wavelength center position is preferred, as previously described, which can lead to a composite filter design that further enhances color discrimination. In addition, these composite designs can provide improved stability of color, such as when analyzing performance in a corner range, for angles that are 5 degrees greater than the angle of an equivalent filter design that does not include neodymium, including neodymium A composite design can maintain a color gamut area ratio greater than 1: 1. However, it can be found that the improved angular stability is usually impaired by a slightly lower peak performance caused by one of the undesired secondary absorption bands present in the neodymium-containing filter, the second pass of the resulting filter The band is slightly wider than the best pass band. However, such composite designs, including neodymium, may be preferred as filters that are incorporated into the glasses (where overall visual comfort is a consideration). Alternatively or in addition, other narrow-band absorbers may be used as neodymium, which contains narrow-band organic dyes and other rare-earth elements, such as erbium or ', whereby some of these combinations of narrow-band absorbers can provide including an interference filter One of the composite filters is designed to exhibit improved angular stability and / or reduce light reflectivity. Such combinations can be designed, for example, using a linearly stylized approach as disclosed herein. When any of the disclosed filters are manufactured as interference filters, the high reflectivity of these filters must be considered. When incorporated into spectacles, the ratio of light transmittance to light reflectance on the inner surface of the lens is preferably at most about 2: 1. Compared to a filter in which the interference filter has a high transmittance (for example, more than 60%), the reflectance of the interference filter can be small enough to be ignored. Preferably, these filters can be combined with either a linear polarizer in the form of an absorption filter or a photochromic absorption filter. The absorption filters are combined with an interference filter. The light reflectivity will not be significantly reduced during installation. The management of the reflectance on the inner surface of the lens is a considerable problem compared to a filter in which the interference filter has a light transmittance of less than about 60%. A first method is to apply a neutral density absorber to the rear side of the lens to promote the fact that reflected light must pass through the absorber twice, which can restore the contrast ratio to an acceptable level. However, the neutral density absorber also reduces the maximum spectral transmittance of the lens, which in turn implies that one of the average transmission contrast ratios between the passband and the stopband is required to be reduced, which may, for example, reduce the effective color provided Identify improvements. In one embodiment, a circular polarizer may be applied to the inner surface and configured such that the linear polarizing element absorbs backside reflections. This construction can achieve a very high contrast ratio. Alternatively, a metal attenuating coating may be incorporated into the interference filter, wherein the interference filter includes, for example, titanium dioxide and silicon dioxide (TiO 2 And SiO 2 ), And the metal layer includes pure titanium. Due to the nature of these metal layers when incorporated into interference filters, the configuration can be significantly better than an equivalent neutral density filter with respect to the attenuation of the reflectance. In addition, due to the good material compatibility between metals and metal oxides, this configuration can provide a robust product that is also more economical to produce and provides the desired effect on color vision. A further concern related to the reflectivity of interference filters is the placement of the interference filters in the ophthalmic lens assembly, where if these filters are placed on the inner surface, they may exist within the substrate Visible artifacts caused by reflections; these are preferably mitigated by a high-quality anti-reflection coating on the opposite surface of the lens. Regarding the incorporation of a filter configured to enhance color discrimination into a lamp assembly (where the filter may also be referred to as a dichroic reflector), the preferred embodiment of the filter may be considered The efficiency of these assemblies and the quality of color discrimination provided by both the transmitted and reflected components of the illuminant. In some embodiments, the illuminator may be a broadband source, for example, where the transmission component enhances the discrimination between red and green, and the reflection component enhances the discrimination between blue and yellow. More preferably, the illuminator can be a multi-band source (such as an array of red light emitting diodes, green light emitting diodes, and blue light emitting diodes), so that the transmitted component provides enhanced color discrimination and the reflected component remains normal. Color discrimination. There is a preferred configuration of the lamp assembly in which both the transmitted component and the reflected component of light are used for illumination. For example, a computer with a 2.3 GHz Intel Core i7 processor and 8 GB of RAM can be used to implement the disclosed software software Mathematica® (including its linear program solver) from Wolfram Research. Filter design method. However, those skilled in the art should understand that the methods disclosed herein are not limited to the above embodiments and have nothing to do with the computer / system architecture. Accordingly, these methods can be implemented equivalently on other computing platforms, using other computing software (commercially available software for filter design methods or specific coded computing software), and can also be hardwired into a circuit or other computing component . The invention is illustrative and not restrictive. Those skilled in the art will appreciate further modifications in light of the present invention. For example, although the methods and steps described above indicate certain events occurring in a certain order, one of ordinary skill will recognize that the order of certain steps may be modified and that such modifications are in accordance with the invention disclosed herein. In addition, if feasible, several of the steps may be performed simultaneously in a parallel program, and several of the steps may be performed sequentially as described above. An action referred to herein as a method or procedure can also be understood as a "step" in the method or procedure. Therefore, in this regard, there are changes to the invention disclosed herein, which are within the spirit of the invention or equivalent to the invention disclosed herein, and the scope of the invention and its patent application is also intended to cover such changes. The entire disclosure of all publications and patent applications cited in the present invention are incorporated herein by reference as if each individual publication or patent application was specifically and individually filed herein.

101‧‧‧照明體101‧‧‧lighting body

102‧‧‧光學系統102‧‧‧optical system

103‧‧‧光反射103‧‧‧light reflection

104‧‧‧參考色彩104‧‧‧Reference color

105‧‧‧光透射105‧‧‧light transmission

106‧‧‧光學濾光器106‧‧‧ Optical Filter

107‧‧‧光吸收107‧‧‧ light absorption

108‧‧‧短波長視錐細胞108‧‧‧ short-wavelength cone cells

109‧‧‧光吸收109‧‧‧light absorption

110‧‧‧中波長視錐細胞110‧‧‧medium wavelength cone cells

111‧‧‧光吸收111‧‧‧light absorption

112‧‧‧長波長視錐細胞112‧‧‧long wavelength cone cells

113‧‧‧觀察者113‧‧‧ Observer

115‧‧‧視覺光轉導操作115‧‧‧Visual Light Transduction Operation

116‧‧‧色度116‧‧‧Chroma

117‧‧‧發光度117‧‧‧ Luminosity

118‧‧‧色彩外觀模型118‧‧‧Color appearance model

201‧‧‧短波長視錐細胞感光色素之光譜吸收率之曲線圖Graph of spectral absorption rate of photosensitive pigments in short-wavelength cones 201 · ‧‧

202‧‧‧中波長視錐細胞感光色素之光譜吸收率之曲線圖Graph of spectral absorption of photosensitive pigments in 202‧‧‧medium wavelength cone cells

203‧‧‧長波長視錐細胞感光色素之光譜吸收率之曲線圖203‧‧‧The graph of the spectral absorptivity of photosensitive pigments in long wavelength cone cells

204‧‧‧基因型204‧‧‧ Genotype

205‧‧‧分類205‧‧‧Classification

206‧‧‧短波長視錐細胞感光色素之最大吸收率之波長206‧‧‧The wavelength of the maximum absorption rate of light-sensitive pigments in short-wave cone cells

207‧‧‧中波長視錐細胞感光色素之最大吸收率之波長207‧‧‧ the wavelength of the maximum absorption rate of light-sensitive pigments in cone cells

208‧‧‧長波長視錐細胞感光色素之最大吸收率之波長208‧‧‧The wavelength of maximum absorption rate of photosensitive pigment in long-wave cone cells

301‧‧‧長波長視錐細胞之神經激勵Neural stimulation of 301‧‧‧long-wave cone cells

302‧‧‧點302‧‧‧points

303‧‧‧發光度回應線303‧‧‧Luminance Response Line

304‧‧‧平面304‧‧‧plane

305‧‧‧投影305‧‧‧ projection

306‧‧‧中波長視錐細胞之神經激勵Neural stimulation of 306‧‧‧medium wavelength cone cells

307‧‧‧軸/原點307‧‧‧axis / origin

309‧‧‧輪廓/光譜軌跡309‧‧‧ contour / spectral trajectory

310‧‧‧短波長視錐細胞之神經激勵310‧‧‧ Neural Excitation of Short Wavelength Cones

401‧‧‧試驗濾光器401‧‧‧test filter

402‧‧‧照明體402‧‧‧lighting body

403‧‧‧參考色彩403‧‧‧Reference color

404‧‧‧觀察者404‧‧‧ Observer

405‧‧‧參考濾光器405‧‧‧Reference filter

406‧‧‧操作406‧‧‧Operation

407‧‧‧操作407‧‧‧ Operation

408‧‧‧色域面積408‧‧‧Color gamut area

409‧‧‧色域面積409‧‧‧ color gamut area

410‧‧‧比率410‧‧‧ ratio

411‧‧‧相對色域面積411‧‧‧ Relative color gamut area

501‧‧‧參考色彩501‧‧‧reference color

502‧‧‧照明體502‧‧‧lighting body

503‧‧‧濾光器503‧‧‧ Filter

505‧‧‧光學相互作用505‧‧‧ Optical Interaction

506‧‧‧視覺光轉導506‧‧‧Visual Light Transduction

507‧‧‧觀察者507‧‧‧ Observer

508‧‧‧色彩外觀模型508‧‧‧Color appearance model

509‧‧‧色度座標509‧‧‧ chromaticity coordinates

510‧‧‧Delaunay三角量測演算法510‧‧‧Delaunay triangulation measurement algorithm

512‧‧‧色域面積512‧‧‧ color gamut area

601‧‧‧Munsell 5B 5/4之光譜反射率Spectral reflectance of 601‧‧‧Munsell 5B 5/4

602‧‧‧Munsell 5G 5/4之光譜反射率602‧‧‧Spectral reflectance of Munsell 5G 5/4

603‧‧‧Munsell 5Y 5/4之光譜反射率Spectral reflectance of 603‧‧‧Munsell 5Y 5/4

604‧‧‧Munsell 5R 5/4之光譜反射率Spectral reflectance of 604‧‧‧Munsell 5R 5/4

605‧‧‧Munsell 5P 5/4之光譜反射率Spectral reflectance of 605‧‧‧Munsell 5P 5/4

606‧‧‧藍花之光譜反射率606‧‧‧Spectral reflectance of blue flower

607‧‧‧綠葉之光譜反射率607‧‧‧Spectral reflectance of green leaf

608‧‧‧黃花之光譜反射率608‧‧‧Spectral reflectance of Huanghua

609‧‧‧紅花之光譜反射率609‧‧‧Spectral reflectance of safflower

610‧‧‧紫花之光譜反射率610‧‧‧Spectral reflectance of purple flower

701‧‧‧虛線輪廓701‧‧‧ dotted outline

702‧‧‧實線輪廓702‧‧‧ solid line outline

703‧‧‧實線輪廓703‧‧‧solid outline

704‧‧‧點704‧‧‧ points

705‧‧‧虛線輪廓705‧‧‧ dotted outline

706‧‧‧點706‧‧‧ points

708‧‧‧線段708‧‧‧line segment

709‧‧‧圍封實線709‧‧‧ Enclosed solid line

710‧‧‧照明體D65之光譜輻射通量710‧‧‧Spectral Radiation Flux of Illuminant D65

711‧‧‧參考濾光器之光譜透射率711‧‧‧Spectral transmittance of reference filter

712‧‧‧試驗濾光器之白點712‧‧‧White point of test filter

802‧‧‧實線輪廓802‧‧‧ solid line outline

803‧‧‧實線輪廓803‧‧‧solid outline

804‧‧‧白點804‧‧‧White dot

807‧‧‧點/虛線輪廓807‧‧‧dot / dotted outline

808‧‧‧虛線輪808‧‧‧ dotted line

809‧‧‧光譜輻射通量809‧‧‧Spectral Radiation Flux

810‧‧‧參考濾光器之光譜透射率810‧‧‧Spectral transmittance of reference filter

811‧‧‧試驗濾光器之光譜透射率Spectral transmittance of 811‧‧‧test filter

901‧‧‧成本向量901‧‧‧ cost vector

902‧‧‧光譜透射率約束902‧‧‧Spectrum transmittance constraint

903‧‧‧濾光器產生器903‧‧‧ Filter Generator

904‧‧‧照明體904‧‧‧lighting body

905‧‧‧線性程式解算器905‧‧‧ Linear Program Solver

906‧‧‧約束投影界限/約束投影界限向量906‧‧‧ Constrained Projection Boundary / Constrained Projection Boundary Vector

907‧‧‧線性程式907‧‧‧linear program

908‧‧‧濾光器白點約束908‧‧‧ Filter White Point Constraint

909‧‧‧約束投影範數/約束投影範數矩陣909‧‧‧ Constrained Projection Norm / Constrained Projection Norm Matrix

910‧‧‧三色約束計算操作910‧‧‧Three-color constraint calculation operation

911‧‧‧解向量911‧‧‧solution vector

912‧‧‧參考濾光器912‧‧‧Reference filter

913‧‧‧基本濾光器913‧‧‧Basic Filter

914‧‧‧加權求和操作914‧‧‧weighted sum operation

915‧‧‧色彩外觀約束915‧‧‧Color appearance constraints

916‧‧‧平滑操作916‧‧‧Smooth operation

917‧‧‧濾光器總組成操作917‧‧‧ Filter Assembly Operation

918‧‧‧觀察者918‧‧‧ Observer

919‧‧‧預濾光器919‧‧‧Pre-filter

920‧‧‧平滑核心920‧‧‧ smooth core

921‧‧‧濾光器規格/複合設計濾光器921‧‧‧ Filter Specifications / Composite Design Filter

922‧‧‧偏置922‧‧‧offset

923‧‧‧偏置係數923‧‧‧offset coefficient

1001‧‧‧凸多面體1001‧‧‧ convex polyhedron

1002‧‧‧凸多面體1002‧‧‧ convex polyhedron

1003‧‧‧三色值1003‧‧‧Three-color value

1004‧‧‧等亮平面1004‧‧‧ and other bright planes

1005‧‧‧壁狀表面/錐體1005‧‧‧wall surface / cone

1006‧‧‧上發光度界限1006‧‧‧ Upper Luminance Limit

1007‧‧‧下發光度界限1007‧‧‧ lower luminosity limit

1101‧‧‧色彩外觀約束1101‧‧‧Color appearance constraints

1102‧‧‧三色約束計算1102‧‧‧Three-color constraint calculation

1103‧‧‧觀察者1103‧‧‧ Observer

1104‧‧‧發光度界限間隔1104‧‧‧ Luminance Limit Interval

1105‧‧‧參考光1105‧‧‧Reference light

1106‧‧‧色度邊界1106‧‧‧Chroma Boundary

1107‧‧‧基本濾光器1107‧‧‧ Basic Filter

1108‧‧‧光透射1108‧‧‧light transmission

1109‧‧‧操作1109‧‧‧Operation

1111‧‧‧光透射1111‧‧‧light transmission

1112‧‧‧矩陣1112‧‧‧ Matrix

1113‧‧‧表面1113‧‧‧ surface

1114‧‧‧觀察者1114‧‧‧ Observer

1115‧‧‧視網膜感光色素吸收率/視覺光轉導1115‧‧‧ Retinal photopigment absorption / visual light transduction

1116‧‧‧矩陣-向量積1116‧‧‧ Matrix-Vector Product

1117‧‧‧三色值1117‧‧‧Three-color value

1118‧‧‧界限1118‧‧‧ boundary

1119‧‧‧向量長度/範數1119‧‧‧ vector length / norm

1201‧‧‧成本函數1201‧‧‧ cost function

1202‧‧‧成本函數1202‧‧‧ cost function

1203‧‧‧自然界濾光器1203‧‧‧Nature Filter

1204‧‧‧Munsell色彩濾光器1204‧‧‧Munsell Color Filter

1301‧‧‧濾光器設計準則/參考色彩1301‧‧‧ Filter Design Guidelines / Reference Colors

1302‧‧‧濾光器設計程序/濾光器設計及分析程序1302‧‧‧ Filter Design Program / Filter Design and Analysis Program

1303‧‧‧濾光器產生器1303‧‧‧ Filter Generator

1304‧‧‧參考濾光器1304‧‧‧Reference Filter

1305‧‧‧試驗濾光器/試驗功能1305‧‧‧test filter / test function

1306‧‧‧照明體1306‧‧‧lighting body

1307‧‧‧效能分析操作1307‧‧‧Performance Analysis Operation

1308‧‧‧製造分析程序/操作1308‧‧‧Manufacturing analysis procedures / operations

1309‧‧‧額外資訊1309‧‧‧ Additional Information

1311‧‧‧製造規格1311‧‧‧Manufacturing Specifications

1312‧‧‧製造成本1312‧‧‧Manufacturing cost

1313‧‧‧標準順應分析之結果1313‧‧‧Result of standard compliance analysis

1314‧‧‧相對色域面積1314‧‧‧ Relative color gamut area

1315‧‧‧操作1315‧‧‧ Operation

1316‧‧‧操作1316‧‧‧ Operation

1317‧‧‧操作1317‧‧‧ Operation

1401‧‧‧色度邊界/點1401‧‧‧ Chroma Boundary / Point

1402‧‧‧點1402‧‧‧ points

1403‧‧‧點1403‧‧‧ points

1404‧‧‧點1404‧‧‧points

1405‧‧‧色度邊界/區域1405‧‧‧Chroma Boundary / Area

1406‧‧‧色度邊界1406‧‧‧Chroma Boundary

1407‧‧‧綠色交通信號之光譜輻射通量之曲線圖Graph of spectral radiant flux of 1407‧‧‧green traffic signal

1408‧‧‧日光之光譜輻射通量之曲線圖Graph of 1408‧‧‧Daylight's spectral radiant flux

1409‧‧‧黃色交通信號之光譜輻射通量之曲線圖Curve of spectral radiant flux of 1409‧‧‧yellow traffic signal

1410‧‧‧濾光器/受約束濾光器之透射率1410‧‧‧ Filter / Constrained Filter Transmittance

1411‧‧‧不受約束濾光器之透射率1411‧‧‧Transmittance of Unconstrained Filter

1501‧‧‧曲線圖1501‧‧‧ Graph

1502‧‧‧曲線圖1502‧‧‧ Graph

1503‧‧‧曲線圖1503‧‧‧ Graph

1504‧‧‧濾光器/光譜透射率曲線圖1504‧‧‧ Filter / Spectral Transmission Graph

1601‧‧‧曲線1601‧‧‧ curve

1603‧‧‧曲線圖1603‧‧‧curve

1604‧‧‧曲線圖1604‧‧‧curve

1605‧‧‧曲線圖1605‧‧‧curve

1701‧‧‧輪廓1701‧‧‧ contour

1702‧‧‧輪廓1702‧‧‧ contour

1703‧‧‧輪廓1703‧‧‧ contour

1705‧‧‧曲線圖1705‧‧‧curve

1706‧‧‧曲線圖1706‧‧‧Curve

1707‧‧‧曲線圖1707‧‧‧curve

1801‧‧‧輪廓1801‧‧‧ contour

1802‧‧‧輪廓1802‧‧‧ contour

1803‧‧‧色度座標1803‧‧‧ chromaticity coordinates

1804‧‧‧曲線圖1804‧‧‧curve

1805‧‧‧參考數字1805‧‧‧Reference Number

1806‧‧‧曲線圖1806‧‧‧curve

1807‧‧‧曲線圖1807‧‧‧curve

1902‧‧‧實線曲線1902‧‧‧solid curve

1903‧‧‧虛線曲線1903‧‧‧dotted curve

1904‧‧‧虛線曲線1904‧‧‧dotted curve

2001‧‧‧實線曲線/虛線曲線2001‧‧‧solid curve / dotted curve

2002‧‧‧實線曲線/虛線曲線2002‧‧‧Solid curve / Dotted curve

2101‧‧‧藍原色光之光譜輻射通量2101‧‧‧Spectral radiant flux of blue primary light

2102‧‧‧綠原色光之光譜輻射通量2102‧‧‧Spectral radiant flux of green primary light

2103‧‧‧日光之光譜輻射通量2103‧‧‧Spectral radiant flux of daylight

2104‧‧‧紅原色光之光譜輻射通量2104‧‧‧Spectral Radiant Flux of Red Primary Light

2105‧‧‧三頻帶濾光器2105‧‧‧Tri-band filter

2106‧‧‧濾光器2106‧‧‧ Filter

2201‧‧‧最大透射率約束2201‧‧‧Maximum transmittance constraint

2301‧‧‧最大透射率約束2301‧‧‧Maximum transmittance constraint

2401‧‧‧線性偏振器2401‧‧‧ Linear Polarizer

2402‧‧‧四分之一波長延遲器/圓形偏振器2402‧‧‧ quarter-wave retarder / circular polarizer

2403‧‧‧光學透明基板2403‧‧‧Optical transparent substrate

2404‧‧‧多層干涉塗層/干涉濾光器2404‧‧‧Multi-layer interference coating / interference filter

2405‧‧‧四分之一波長延遲器2405‧‧‧ quarter-wave retarder

2406‧‧‧偏振器2406‧‧‧Polarizer

2408‧‧‧光束2408‧‧‧Beam

2409‧‧‧眼睛2409‧‧‧Eye

2411‧‧‧反射光2411‧‧‧Reflected light

2412‧‧‧視網膜2412‧‧‧ Retina

2413‧‧‧箭頭2413‧‧‧Arrow

2414‧‧‧反射分量2414‧‧‧Reflected component

2501‧‧‧複合照明體之光譜輻射通量2501‧‧‧Spectral Radiation Flux

2502‧‧‧白色LED之光譜輻射通量2502‧‧‧Spectral Radiation Flux of White LED

2503‧‧‧紅色LED之光譜輻射通量2503‧‧‧Spectral Radiation Flux of Red LED

2504‧‧‧光譜透射率2504‧‧‧Spectral transmittance

2601‧‧‧色度座標2601‧‧‧ chromaticity coordinates

2602‧‧‧色度座標2602‧‧‧ Chromaticity Coordinates

2603‧‧‧點2603‧‧‧points

2604‧‧‧LED照明體之混合物之光譜輻射通量2604‧‧‧Spectral Radiation Flux of a Mixture of LED Illuminations

2605‧‧‧光譜透射率2605‧‧‧Spectral Transmission

2606‧‧‧光譜透射率2606‧‧‧Spectral Transmission

2701‧‧‧導熱基板2701‧‧‧Conductive substrate

2702‧‧‧發光二極體2702‧‧‧light-emitting diode

2703‧‧‧光束形成光學光導/光學器件2703‧‧‧Beam Forming Optical Light Guides / Optics

2707‧‧‧輸出光束2707‧‧‧output beam

2801‧‧‧抗反射塗層2801‧‧‧Anti-reflective coating

2802‧‧‧光學基板2802‧‧‧Optical substrate

2803‧‧‧第一衰減塗層2803‧‧‧First attenuation coating

2804‧‧‧多層干涉塗層2804‧‧‧Multi-layer interference coating

2805‧‧‧第二衰減塗層2805‧‧‧Second attenuation coating

2806‧‧‧光束2806‧‧‧Beam

2807‧‧‧眼睛2807‧‧‧Eye

2809‧‧‧視網膜2809‧‧‧ Retina

2810‧‧‧反射光2810‧‧‧Reflected light

2811‧‧‧箭頭2811‧‧‧arrow

2812‧‧‧反射分量2812‧‧‧Reflected component

2815‧‧‧第一衰減塗層2815‧‧‧First attenuation coating

2901‧‧‧球形區段2901‧‧‧ spherical section

2902‧‧‧球形區段2902‧‧‧ spherical segment

2904‧‧‧半球2904 ‧ ‧ ‧ hemisphere

2905‧‧‧半球2905‧‧‧ Hemisphere

2906‧‧‧虛線箭頭2906‧‧‧ dotted arrow

2909‧‧‧虛線箭頭2909‧‧‧ dotted arrow

3001‧‧‧輪廓3001‧‧‧ contour

3002‧‧‧輪廓3002‧‧‧ contour

3003‧‧‧輪廓3003‧‧‧ contour

3004‧‧‧邊界/干涉濾光器3004‧‧‧Edge / Interference Filter

3005‧‧‧點3005‧‧‧ points

3006‧‧‧輪廓3006‧‧‧ contour

3007‧‧‧曲線3007‧‧‧ Curve

3008‧‧‧輸出光束/曲線3008‧‧‧Output Beam / Curve

3009‧‧‧曲線3009‧‧‧ curve

3101‧‧‧實線曲線3101‧‧‧solid curve

3102‧‧‧虛線曲線3102‧‧‧ dotted curve

3103‧‧‧虛線曲線3103‧‧‧dotted curve

3104‧‧‧實線曲線3104‧‧‧solid curve

3105‧‧‧虛線曲線3105‧‧‧ dotted curve

3106‧‧‧虛線曲線3106‧‧‧dotted curve

3107‧‧‧實線曲線3107‧‧‧solid curve

3108‧‧‧虛線曲線3108‧‧‧ dotted curve

3109‧‧‧虛線曲線3109‧‧‧dotted curve

3110‧‧‧實線曲線3110‧‧‧solid curve

3111‧‧‧虛線曲線3111‧‧‧ dotted curve

3112‧‧‧白點位移圖3112‧‧‧White point displacement map

4301‧‧‧虛線曲線4301‧‧‧dashed curve

4302‧‧‧實線曲線4302‧‧‧solid curve

4303‧‧‧實線曲線4303‧‧‧solid curve

4304‧‧‧虛線曲線4304‧‧‧ dotted curve

4401‧‧‧虛線輪廓4401‧‧‧ dotted outline

4402‧‧‧實線輪廓4402‧‧‧Solid outline

4404‧‧‧藍光阻隔多頻帶濾光器之光譜透射率4404‧‧‧Spectral transmittance of blue light blocking multi-band filter

4405‧‧‧藍光阻隔截止濾光器之光譜透射率4405‧‧‧Spectral transmittance of blue light blocking filter

4601‧‧‧抗反射塗層4601‧‧‧Anti-reflective coating

4602‧‧‧吸收光學基板4602‧‧‧ Absorbing Optical Substrate

4604‧‧‧多層干涉塗層4604‧‧‧Multi-layer interference coating

4606‧‧‧光束4606‧‧‧beam

4607‧‧‧眼睛4607‧‧‧ eyes

4609‧‧‧視網膜4609‧‧‧ Retina

4610‧‧‧反射光4610‧‧‧Reflected light

4611‧‧‧箭頭4611‧‧‧Arrow

4612‧‧‧反射分量4612‧‧‧Reflected component

4701‧‧‧虛線輪廓4701‧‧‧ dotted outline

4702‧‧‧實線輪廓4702‧‧‧solid outline

4704‧‧‧光譜透射率曲線4704‧‧‧Spectral transmittance curve

4705‧‧‧實線曲線4705‧‧‧solid curve

5801‧‧‧圓角框/實體5801‧‧‧Round corner frame / entity

5802‧‧‧實體/方形框5802‧‧‧Solid / square frame

5803‧‧‧圓角框/實體5803‧‧‧Round corner frame / entity

5805‧‧‧方形框5805‧‧‧square frame

5806‧‧‧複合操作5806‧‧‧Combined operation

5808‧‧‧複合物體5808‧‧‧composite

5811‧‧‧複合物體5811‧‧‧Composite objects

圖1:描繪人眼之感光觀察及色彩感知之程序流程圖。 圖2A、圖2B:一正常人之視網膜感光色素之光譜吸收率之曲線圖(圖2A);及對應於人群中之已知基因型之視網膜感光色素光譜吸收率峰值變量之一表(圖2B)。 圖3:展示對應於一色彩外觀之三色值及其至發光分量及色度分量中之投影之三色圖。 圖4:用於比較對兩個濾光器之色彩辨別之效應之相對色域面積計算之程序流程圖。 圖5:相對於一特定組之參考色彩、一照明體、一濾光器及一觀察者之色域面積計算之程序流程圖。 圖6A、圖6B:經選擇之Munsell色彩之光譜反射率之曲線圖(圖6A);及來自自然物體之經選擇色彩之光譜反射率之曲線圖(圖6B)。 圖7A至圖7C:日光照射下之經選擇之Munsell色彩之色彩外觀之色度圖(如透過一第一濾光器及一第二濾光器所觀看)(圖7A);日光之光譜輻射通量之一曲線圖(圖7B);及該等濾光器之光譜透射率之一曲線圖(圖7C)。 圖8A至圖8C:日光照射下之經選擇之自然色彩之色彩外觀之色度圖(如透過一第一濾光器及一第二濾光器所觀看)(圖8A);日光之光譜輻射通量之一曲線圖(圖8B);及該等濾光器之光譜透射率之一曲線圖(圖8C)。 圖9:藉由線性程式化方法之濾光器產生之程序流程圖。 圖10A、圖10B:展示對應於一色彩外觀之三色值及一約束凸多面體之邊界之三色圖(圖10A);該三色值及該約束凸多面體之邊界之展開圖(圖10B)。 圖11:相對於一特定參考光、一凸色度邊界、一發光度界限、一第一觀察者、一基本濾光器、一預濾光器及一第二觀察者之約束投影範數及約束投影界限之計算之程序流程圖。 圖12A、圖12B:經設計以增強Munsell色彩之紅綠色辨別之一成本函數之曲線圖及經設計以增強自然色彩之紅綠色辨別之一成本函數之曲線圖(圖12A);及設計有對應成本函數之兩個濾光器之光譜透射率之曲線圖(圖12B)。 圖13:考量設計準則、使用準則及製造準則之反覆濾光器設計程序之程序流程圖。 圖14A至圖14C:綠色及黃色交通信號及透過一第一濾光器及一第二濾光器所觀看之日光之色彩外觀之色度圖(圖14A);綠色及黃色交通信號及日光之光譜輻射通量之曲線圖(圖14B);及濾光器之光譜透射率之曲線圖(圖14C)。 圖15A至圖15B:一最小光譜透射率約束之兩個變量之曲線圖(圖15A);及滿足該約束之對應色彩增強濾光器之光譜透射率之曲線圖(圖15B)。 圖16A、圖16B:根據Snell定律之具有1.85之一折射率之一干涉濾光器之以入射角為函數之波長百分比之位移之曲線圖(圖16A);及提供增強紅綠色辨別之一濾光器之光譜透射率之一曲線圖及給一波長位移範圍額外提供穩定色彩外觀之一濾光器之一光譜透射率之一曲線圖(圖16B)。 圖17A至圖17C:日光照射下之經選擇之Munsell色彩之色彩外觀之色度圖(如透過一濾光器所觀看及如由波長位移達-2.5%及-5%之相同濾光器所觀看)(圖17A);日光之光譜輻射通量之一曲線圖(圖17B);及該濾光器及波長位移達-2.5%及-5%之該濾光器之光譜透射率之一曲線圖(圖17C)。 圖18A至圖18C:日光照射下之經選擇之Munsell色彩之色彩外觀之色度圖(如透過一濾光器所觀看及如由波長位移達-2.5%之相同濾光器所觀看)(圖18A);日光之光譜輻射通量之一曲線圖(圖18B);及該濾光器及波長位移達-2.5%之該濾光器之光譜透射率之一曲線圖(圖18C)。 圖19A、圖19B:以波長為函數之藍光危險函數之曲線圖(圖19A);及提供藍光阻隔之兩個多頻帶濾光器及提供藍光阻隔之一習知截止濾光器之光譜透射率之曲線圖(圖19B)。 圖20A、圖20B:兩個窄頻帶選擇吸收濾光器之光譜透射率之曲線圖(圖20A);及提供紅綠色辨別增強之兩個多頻帶干涉濾光器以及吸收濾光器之光譜透射率之曲線圖(圖20B)。 圖21A、圖21B:日光及具有一發光二極體背光之一液晶顯示器之原色光之一光譜輻射通量之曲線圖(圖21A);及相對於日光之發光度而提供顯示原色之一增強發光度之一濾光器之光譜透射率之一曲線圖(圖21B)。 圖22A、圖22B:保護眼睛免受具有0度至約30度之間之入射角之由一倍頻Nd:YAG雷射發射之532奈米輻射之一濾光器之光譜透射率約束之曲線圖(圖22A);及此一濾光器之光譜透射率之一曲線圖(圖22B)。 圖23A、圖23B:保護眼睛免受具有0度至約30度之間之入射角之由一鈉照明炬發射之589奈米輻射之一濾光器之光譜透射率約束之曲線圖(圖23A);及此一濾光器之光譜透射率之一曲線圖(圖23B)。 圖24A、圖24B:含有一干涉濾光器及吸收由該干涉濾光器反射之光之一圓形偏振器之一複合透鏡之示意圖(圖24A);及展示該複合濾光器之操作之一圖式(圖24B)。 圖25A、圖25B:藉由組合基於磷光體之白色發光二極體及紅色發光二極體而形成之一白光之光譜輻射通量之曲線圖(圖25A);及經設計以增強由透過一濾光器透射之光照明之物體之色彩外觀且提供由該濾光器反射之光照明之物體之良好色彩外觀之該濾光器之光譜透射率(圖25B)。 圖26A至圖26C:白色LED及紅色LED之一組合之照明下之經選擇之Munsell色彩之色彩外觀之色度圖(如照明體透過一濾光器而透射時所觀看及如照明體由該濾光器反射時所觀看)(圖26A);照明體之光譜輻射通量(圖26B);及該等濾光器之光譜透射率之曲線圖(圖26C)。 圖27A、圖27B:含有一發光二極體、一干涉濾光器及提供一複合光束(其中該光束之中心區域包括透過該濾光器透射之光且該光束之環形區域包括由該濾光器反射之光)之一光束形成元件之一燈總成之示意圖(圖27A);及展示併入該濾光器之該燈總成之操作之一圖式(圖27B)。 圖28A、圖28B:含有一干涉濾光器及吸收濾光器(其中該等吸收濾光器使由該干涉濾光器反射之光衰減)之一複合濾光器之示意圖(圖28A);及展示併入至眼鏡中之該複合濾光器之操作之一圖式(圖28B)。 圖29A、圖29B:展示相對於眼睛之眼鏡中之一透鏡之幾何形狀及在不同位置處穿過該透鏡且成像至眼睛之視網膜上之兩束光之圖式;俯視圖(圖29A)及成角度視圖(圖29B)。 圖30A、圖30B:穿過一透鏡之表面上之位置之光之有效入射角之等值線圖,其中有效入射角對應於該透鏡在一位置處之表面法線與穿過該位置處之該透鏡以成像至視網膜上之一束光之間之角度(圖30A);及以有效入射角為函數之相對重要性及相對重要性函數之分量之曲線圖(圖30B)。 圖31A至圖31E:用於設計使一正常觀察者之色彩辨別增強之一濾光器之透射率約束及成本函數之曲線圖(圖31A);該濾光器之組件之光譜透射率之曲線圖(圖31B);該濾光器之一製造規格之曲線圖(圖31C);以入射角度數為函數之相對於Farnsworth D-15參考色彩及相對於由該濾光器提供之經選擇之自然界參考色彩之色域面積增加之百分比之曲線圖(圖31D);以入射角度數為函數之由該濾光器提供之日光之白點位移之曲線圖(圖31E)。 圖32A至圖32E:用於設計使一正常觀察者之紅綠色辨別增強之一濾光器之透射率約束及成本函數之曲線圖(圖32A);該濾光器之組件之光譜透射率之曲線圖(圖32B);該濾光器之一製造規格之曲線圖(圖32C);以入射角度數為函數之相對於Farnsworth D-15參考色彩及相對於由該濾光器提供之經選擇之自然界參考色彩之色域面積增加之百分比之曲線圖(圖32D);以入射角度數為函數之由該濾光器提供之日光之白點位移之曲線圖(圖32E)。 圖33A至圖33E:用於設計使一正常觀察者之紅綠色辨別增強且提供一入射角範圍內之穩定色彩外觀之一濾光器之透射率約束及成本函數之曲線圖(圖33A);該濾光器之組件之光譜透射率之曲線圖(圖33B);該濾光器之一製造規格之曲線圖(圖33C);以入射角度數為函數之相對於Farnsworth D-15參考色彩及相對於由該濾光器提供之經選擇之自然界參考色彩之色域面積增加之百分比之曲線圖(圖33D);以入射角度數為函數之由該濾光器提供之日光之白點位移之曲線圖(圖33E)。 圖34A至圖34E:用於設計使一正常觀察者之藍黃色辨別增強且提供一入射角範圍內之穩定色彩外觀之一濾光器之透射率約束及成本函數之曲線圖(圖34A);該濾光器之組件之光譜透射率之曲線圖(圖34B);該濾光器之一製造規格之曲線圖(圖34C);以入射角度數為函數之相對於Farnsworth D-15參考色彩及相對於由該濾光器提供之經選擇之自然界參考色彩之色域面積增加之百分比之曲線圖(圖34D);以入射角度數為函數之由該濾光器提供之日光之白點位移之曲線圖(圖34E)。 圖35A至圖35E:用於設計使一正常觀察者之紅綠色辨別增強且提供短波長藍光之抑制及一入射角範圍內之穩定色彩外觀之一濾光器之透射率約束及成本函數之曲線圖(圖35A);該濾光器之組件之光譜透射率之曲線圖(圖35B);該濾光器之一製造規格之曲線圖(圖35C);以入射角度數為函數之相對於Farnsworth D-15參考色彩及相對於由該濾光器提供之經選擇之自然界參考色彩之色域面積增加之百分比之曲線圖(圖35D);以入射角度數為函數之由該濾光器提供之日光之白點位移之曲線圖(圖35E)。 圖36A至圖36E:用於設計針對具有輕度綠色弱之一觀察者之紅綠色辨別增強且提供一入射角範圍內之穩定色彩外觀之一濾光器之透射率約束及成本函數之曲線圖(圖36A);該濾光器之組件之光譜透射率之曲線圖(圖36B);該濾光器之一製造規格之曲線圖(圖36C);以入射角度數為函數之相對於Farnsworth D-15參考色彩及相對於由該濾光器提供之經選擇之自然界參考色彩之色域面積增加之百分比之曲線圖(圖36D);以入射角度數為函數之由該濾光器提供之日光之白點位移之曲線圖(圖36E)。 圖37A至圖37E:用於設計針對具有中度綠色弱之一觀察者之紅綠色辨別增強且提供一入射角範圍內之穩定色彩外觀之一濾光器之透射率約束及成本函數之曲線圖(圖37A);該濾光器之組件之光譜透射率之曲線圖(圖37B);該濾光器之一製造規格之曲線圖(圖37C);以入射角度數為函數之相對於Farnsworth D-15參考色彩及相對於由該濾光器提供之經選擇之自然界參考色彩之色域面積增加之百分比之曲線圖(圖37D);以入射角度數為函數之由該濾光器提供之日光之白點位移之曲線圖(圖37E)。 圖38A至圖38E:用於設計針對具有重度綠色弱之一觀察者之紅綠色辨別增強且提供一入射角範圍內之穩定色彩外觀之一濾光器之透射率約束及成本函數之曲線圖(圖38A);該濾光器之組件之光譜透射率之曲線圖(圖38B);該濾光器之一製造規格之曲線圖(圖38C);以入射角度數為函數之相對於Farnsworth D-15參考色彩及相對於由該濾光器提供之經選擇之自然界參考色彩之色域面積增加之百分比之曲線圖(圖38D);以入射角度數為函數之由該濾光器提供之日光之白點位移之曲線圖(圖38E)。 圖39A至圖39E:用於設計針對具有紅色弱之一觀察者之紅綠色辨別增強且提供一入射角範圍內之穩定色彩外觀之一濾光器之透射率約束及成本函數之曲線圖(圖39A);該濾光器之組件之光譜透射率之曲線圖(圖39B);該濾光器之一製造規格之曲線圖(圖39C);以入射角度數為函數之相對於Farnsworth D-15參考色彩及相對於由該濾光器提供之經選擇之自然界參考色彩之色域面積增加之百分比之曲線圖(圖39D);以入射角度數為函數之由該濾光器提供之日光之白點位移之曲線圖(圖39E)。 圖40A至圖40E:用於設計使由一電子視覺顯示器對一正常觀察者發射之原色光之發光度增強且提供一入射角範圍內之穩定色彩外觀之一濾光器之透射率約束及成本函數之曲線圖(圖40A);該濾光器之組件之光譜透射率之曲線圖(圖40B);該濾光器之一製造規格之曲線圖(圖40C);以入射角度數為函數之相對於Farnsworth D-15參考色彩及相對於由該濾光器提供之經選擇之自然界參考色彩之色域面積增加之百分比之曲線圖(圖40D);以入射角度數為函數之由該濾光器提供之日光之白點位移之曲線圖(圖40E)。 圖41A至圖41E:用於設計使眼睛免受一532奈米之倍頻Nd:YAG雷射之侵害且提供一入射角範圍內之穩定色彩外觀之一濾光器之透射率約束及成本函數之曲線圖(圖41A);該濾光器之組件之光譜透射率之曲線圖(圖41B);該濾光器之一製造規格之曲線圖(圖41C);以入射角度數為函數之相對於Farnsworth D-15參考色彩及相對於由該濾光器提供之經選擇之自然界參考色彩之色域面積增加之百分比之曲線圖(圖41D);以入射角度數為函數之由該濾光器提供之日光之白點位移之曲線圖(圖41E)。 圖42A至圖42E:用於設計使眼睛免受一589奈米之鈉照明炬之侵害且提供一入射角範圍內之穩定色彩外觀之一濾光器之透射率約束及成本函數之曲線圖(圖42A);該濾光器之組件之光譜透射率之曲線圖(圖42B);該濾光器之一製造規格之曲線圖(圖42C);以入射角度數為函數之相對於Farnsworth D-15參考色彩及相對於由該濾光器提供之經選擇之自然界參考色彩之色域面積增加之百分比之曲線圖(圖42D);以入射角度數為函數之由該濾光器提供之日光之白點位移之曲線圖(圖42E)。 圖43A、圖43B:阻隔短波長光且使589奈米之窄頻帶光穿過之一濾光器之光譜透射率約束之曲線圖(圖43A);服從該等約束之一濾光器及經一平滑核心平滑之該濾光器之曲線圖(圖43B)。 圖44A至圖44C:日光照射下之經選擇之Munsell色彩之色彩外觀之色度圖,如透過一藍光阻隔多頻帶濾光器及藍光阻隔截止濾光器所觀看(圖44A);日光之光譜輻射通量(圖44B);及該等濾光器之光譜透射率之曲線圖(圖44C)。 圖45A至圖45E:用於設計提供短波長藍光之抑制及高光透射率之一濾光器之透射率約束及成本函數之曲線圖(圖45A);該濾光器之組件之光譜透射率之曲線圖(圖45B);該濾光器之一製造規格之曲線圖(圖45C);以入射角度數為函數之相對於Farnsworth D-15參考色彩及相對於由該濾光器提供之經選擇之自然界參考色彩之色域面積增加之百分比之曲線圖(圖45D);以入射角度數為函數之由該濾光器提供之日光之白點位移之曲線圖(圖45E)。 圖46A、圖46B:含有一干涉濾光器及吸收濾光器(其中該等吸收濾光器使由該干涉濾光器反射之光衰減)之一複合濾光器之示意圖(圖46A);及展示併入至眼鏡中之該複合濾光器之操作之一圖式(圖46B)。 圖47A至圖47C:日光照射下之經選擇之Munsell色彩之色彩外觀之色度圖,如透過一參考濾光器及一釹玻璃濾光器所觀看(圖47A);日光之光譜輻射通量(圖47B);及該等濾光器之光譜透射率之曲線圖(圖47C)。 圖48A至圖48E:用於設計使一正常觀察者之紅綠色辨別增強且提供一入射角範圍內之穩定色彩外觀之一含釹濾光器之透射率約束及成本函數之曲線圖(圖48A);該濾光器之組件之光譜透射率之曲線圖(圖48B);該濾光器之一製造規格之曲線圖(圖48C);以入射角度數為函數之相對於Farnsworth D-15參考色彩及相對於由該濾光器提供之經選擇之自然界參考色彩之色域面積增加之百分比之曲線圖(圖48D);以入射角度數為函數之由該濾光器提供之日光之白點位移之曲線圖(圖48E)。 圖49A至圖49E:用於設計使一正常觀察者之藍黃色辨別增強且提供一入射角範圍內之穩定色彩外觀之一含釹濾光器之透射率約束及成本函數之曲線圖(圖49A);該濾光器之組件之光譜透射率之曲線圖(圖49B);該濾光器之一製造規格之曲線圖(圖49C);以入射角度數為函數之相對於Farnsworth D-15參考色彩及相對於由該濾光器提供之經選擇之自然界參考色彩之色域面積增加之百分比之曲線圖(圖49D);以入射角度數為函數之由該濾光器提供之日光之白點位移之曲線圖(圖49E)。 圖50A至圖50E:用於設計針對具有輕度綠色弱之一觀察者之紅綠色辨別增強且提供一入射角範圍內之穩定色彩外觀之一含釹濾光器之透射率約束及成本函數之曲線圖(圖50A);該濾光器之組件之光譜透射率之曲線圖(圖50B);該濾光器之一製造規格之曲線圖(圖50C);以入射角度數為函數之相對於Farnsworth D-15參考色彩及相對於由該濾光器提供之經選擇之自然界參考色彩之色域面積增加之百分比之曲線圖(圖50D);以入射角度數為函數之由該濾光器提供之日光之白點位移之曲線圖(圖50E)。 圖51A至圖51E:用於設計針對具有中度綠色弱之一觀察者之紅綠色辨別增強且提供一入射角範圍內之穩定色彩外觀之一含釹濾光器之透射率約束及成本函數之曲線圖(圖51A);該濾光器之組件之光譜透射率之曲線圖(圖51B);該濾光器之一製造規格之曲線圖(圖51C);以入射角度數為函數之相對於Farnsworth D-15參考色彩及相對於由該濾光器提供之經選擇之自然界參考色彩之色域面積增加之百分比之曲線圖(圖51D);以入射角度數為函數之由該濾光器提供之日光之白點位移之曲線圖(圖51E)。 圖52A至圖52E:用於設計針對具有重度綠色弱之一觀察者之紅綠色辨別增強且提供一入射角範圍內之穩定色彩外觀之一含釹濾光器之透射率約束及成本函數之曲線圖(圖52A);該濾光器之組件之光譜透射率之曲線圖(圖52B);該濾光器之一製造規格之曲線圖(圖52C);以入射角度數為函數之相對於Farnsworth D-15參考色彩及相對於由該濾光器提供之經選擇之自然界參考色彩之色域面積增加之百分比之曲線圖(圖52D);以入射角度數為函數之由該濾光器提供之日光之白點位移之曲線圖(圖52E)。 圖53A至圖53E:用於設計針對具有紅色弱之一觀察者之紅綠色辨別增強且提供一入射角範圍內之穩定色彩外觀之一含釹濾光器之透射率約束及成本函數之曲線圖(圖53A);該濾光器之組件之光譜透射率之曲線圖(圖53B);該濾光器之一製造規格之曲線圖(圖53C);以入射角度數為函數之相對於Farnsworth D-15參考色彩及相對於由該濾光器提供之經選擇之自然界參考色彩之色域面積增加之百分比之曲線圖(圖53D);以入射角度數為函數之由該濾光器提供之日光之白點位移之曲線圖(圖53E)。 圖54A、圖54B:視網膜神經節細胞之近似光譜吸收率之曲線圖(圖54A);一藍色寬頻帶參考濾光器及使由視網膜神經節細胞吸收之光子能最大化之一多頻帶濾光器之曲線圖(圖54B)。 圖55A至圖55E:用於設計使由視網膜神經節細胞接收之光功率增強之一濾光器之透射率約束及成本函數之曲線圖(圖55A);該濾光器之組件之光譜透射率之曲線圖(圖55B);該濾光器之一製造規格之曲線圖(圖55C);以入射角度數為函數之相對於Farnsworth D-15參考色彩及相對於由該濾光器提供之經選擇之自然界參考色彩之色域面積增加之百分比之曲線圖(圖55D);以入射角度數為函數之由該濾光器提供之日光之白點位移之曲線圖(圖55E)。 圖56A至圖56E:用於設計使由視網膜神經節細胞吸收之光功率增強且提供一入射角範圍內之穩定色彩外觀之一濾光器之透射率約束及成本函數之曲線圖(圖56A);該濾光器之組件之光譜透射率之曲線圖(圖56B);該濾光器之一製造規格之曲線圖(圖56C);以入射角度數為函數之相對於Farnsworth D-15參考色彩及相對於由該濾光器提供之經選擇之自然界參考色彩之色域面積增加之百分比之曲線圖(圖56D);以入射角度數為函數之由該濾光器提供之日光之白點位移之曲線圖(圖56E)。 圖57A至圖57E:用於設計使由視網膜神經節細胞接收之光功率增強且提供一入射角範圍內之穩定色彩外觀之一含釹濾光器之透射率約束及成本函數之曲線圖(圖57A);該濾光器之組件之光譜透射率之曲線圖(圖57B);該濾光器之一製造規格之曲線圖(圖57C);以入射角度數為函數之相對於Farnsworth D-15參考色彩及相對於由該濾光器提供之經選擇之自然界參考色彩之色域面積增加之百分比之曲線圖(圖57D);以入射角度數為函數之由該濾光器提供之日光之白點位移之曲線圖(圖57E)。 圖58:用於描述及論證程序流程圖之語法及結構(如其等在其他圖中所呈現)之實例性程序流程圖。 圖59A、圖59B:用於使一正常觀察者之色彩辨別增強之圖31A至圖31E之濾光器之經評估之效能準則之表(圖59A);濾光器組件之透射率、成本函數、透射率約束及濾光器之製造規格之表(圖59B)。 圖60A、圖60B:用於使一正常觀察者之紅綠色辨別增強之圖32A至圖32E之濾光器之經評估之效能準則之表(圖60A);濾光器組件之透射率、成本函數、透射率約束及濾光器之製造規格之表(圖60B)。 圖61A、圖61B:用於使一正常觀察者之紅綠色辨別增強且提供一入射角範圍內之穩定色彩外觀之圖33A至圖33E之濾光器之經評估之效能準則之表(圖61A);濾光器組件之透射率、成本函數、透射率約束及濾光器之製造規格之表(圖61B)。 圖62A、圖62B:用於使一正常觀察者之藍黃色辨別增強且提供一入射角範圍內之穩定色彩外觀之圖34A至圖34E之濾光器之經評估之效能準則之表(圖62A);濾光器組件之透射率、成本函數、透射率約束及濾光器之製造規格之表(圖62B)。 圖63A、圖63B:用於使一正常觀察者之紅綠色辨別增強且提供短波長藍光之抑制及一入射角範圍內之穩定色彩外觀之圖35A至圖35E之濾光器之經評估之效能準則之表(圖63A);濾光器組件之透射率、成本函數、透射率約束及濾光器之製造規格之表(圖63B)。 圖64A、圖64B:用於針對具有輕度綠色弱之一觀察者之紅綠色辨別增強且提供一入射角範圍內之穩定色彩外觀之圖36A至圖36E之濾光器之經評估之效能準則之表(圖64A);濾光器組件之透射率、成本函數、透射率約束及濾光器之製造規格之表(圖64B)。 圖65A、圖65B:用於針對具有中度綠色弱之一觀察者之紅綠色辨別增強且提供一入射角範圍內之穩定色彩外觀之圖37A至圖37E之濾光器之經評估之效能準則之表(圖65A);濾光器組件之透射率、成本函數、透射率約束及濾光器之製造規格之表(圖65B)。 圖66A、圖66B:用於針對具有重度綠色弱之一觀察者之紅綠色辨別增強且提供一入射角範圍內之穩定色彩外觀之圖38A至圖38E之濾光器之經評估之效能準則之表(圖66A);濾光器組件之透射率、成本函數、透射率約束及濾光器之製造規格之表(圖66B)。 圖67A、圖67B:用於針對具有紅色弱之一觀察者之紅綠色辨別增強且提供一入射角範圍內之穩定色彩外觀之圖39A至圖39E之濾光器之經評估之效能準則之表(圖67A);濾光器組件之透射率、成本函數、透射率約束及濾光器之製造規格之表(圖67B)。 圖68A、圖68B:用於使由一電子視覺顯示器對一正常觀察者發射之原色光之發光度增強且提供一入射角範圍內之穩定色彩外觀之圖40A至圖40E之濾光器之經評估之效能準則之表(圖68A);濾光器組件之透射率、成本函數、透射率約束及濾光器之製造規格之表(圖68B)。 圖69A、圖69B:用於使眼睛免受一532奈米之倍頻Nd:YAG雷射之侵害且提供一入射角範圍內之穩定色彩外觀之圖41A至圖41E之濾光器之經評估之效能準則之表(圖69A);濾光器組件之透射率、成本函數、透射率約束及濾光器之製造規格之表(圖69B)。 圖70A、圖70B:用於使眼睛免受一589奈米之鈉照明炬之侵害且提供一入射角範圍內之穩定色彩外觀之圖42A至圖42E之濾光器之經評估之效能準則之表(圖70A);濾光器組件之透射率、成本函數、透射率約束及濾光器之製造規格之表(圖70B)。 圖71A、圖71B:用於提供短波長藍光之抑制及高光透射率之圖45A至圖45E之濾光器之經評估之效能準則之表(圖71A);濾光器組件之透射率、成本函數、透射率約束及濾光器之製造規格之表(圖71B)。 圖72A、圖72B:用於使一正常觀察者之紅綠色辨別增強且提供一入射角範圍內之穩定色彩外觀之圖48A至圖48E之含釹濾光器之經評估之效能準則之表(圖72A);濾光器組件之透射率、成本函數、透射率約束及濾光器之製造規格之表(圖72B)。 圖73A、圖73B:用於使一正常觀察者之藍黃色辨別增強且提供一入射角範圍內之穩定色彩外觀之圖49A至圖49E之含釹濾光器之經評估之效能準則之表(圖73A);濾光器組件之透射率、成本函數、透射率約束及濾光器之製造規格之表(圖73B)。 圖74A、圖74B:用於針對具有輕度綠色弱之一觀察者之紅綠色辨別增強且提供一入射角範圍內之穩定色彩外觀之圖50A至圖50E之含釹濾光器之經評估之效能準則之表(圖74A);濾光器組件之透射率、成本函數、透射率約束及濾光器之製造規格之表(圖74B)。 圖75A、圖75B:用於針對具有中度綠色弱之一觀察者之紅綠色辨別增強且提供一入射角範圍內之穩定色彩外觀之圖51A至圖51E之含釹濾光器之經評估之效能準則之表(圖75A);濾光器組件之透射率、成本函數、透射率約束及濾光器之製造規格之表(圖75B)。 圖76A、圖76B:用於針對具有重度綠色弱之一觀察者之紅綠色辨別增強且提供一入射角範圍內之穩定色彩外觀之圖52A至圖52E之含釹濾光器之經評估之效能準則之表(圖76A);濾光器組件之透射率、成本函數、透射率約束及濾光器之製造規格之表(圖76B)。 圖77A、圖77B:用於針對具有紅色弱之一觀察者之紅綠色辨別增強且提供一入射角範圍內之穩定色彩外觀之圖53A至圖53E之含釹濾光器之經評估之效能準則之表(圖77A);濾光器組件之透射率、成本函數、透射率約束及濾光器之製造規格之表(圖77B)。 圖78A、圖78B:用於使由視網膜神經節細胞接收之光功率增強之圖55A至圖55E之三通帶濾光器之經評估之效能準則之表(圖78A);濾光器組件之透射率、成本函數、透射率約束及濾光器之製造規格之表(圖78B)。 圖79A、圖79B:用於使由視網膜神經節細胞接收之光功率增強且提供一入射角範圍內之穩定色彩外觀之圖56A至圖56E之四通帶濾光器之經評估之效能準則之表(圖79A);濾光器組件之透射率、成本函數、透射率約束及濾光器之製造規格之表(圖79B)。 圖80A、圖80B:用於使由視網膜神經節細胞接收之光功率增強且提供一入射角範圍內之穩定色彩外觀之圖57A至圖57E之含釹三通帶濾光器之經評估之效能準則之表(圖80A);濾光器組件之透射率、成本函數、透射率約束及濾光器之製造規格之表(圖80B)。Figure 1: Flowchart depicting the human eye's photosensitive observation and color perception. Figures 2A and 2B: a graph of the spectral absorption rate of retinal photosensitive pigments in a normal person (Figure 2A); and one of the peak variables of the spectral absorption rate of retinal photosensitive pigments corresponding to known genotypes in the population (Figure 2B) ). Figure 3: A three-color diagram showing the three-color values corresponding to a color appearance and their projections into the luminous component and the chromaticity component. Fig. 4: A flow chart of a procedure for calculating the relative color gamut area for comparing the effects of color discrimination between two filters. Figure 5: Flow chart of the calculation of the color gamut area of a reference group, a illuminant, a filter, and an observer relative to a specific group. Figures 6A and 6B: a graph of the spectral reflectance of a selected Munsell color (Figure 6A); and a graph of the spectral reflectance of a selected color from a natural object (Figure 6B). Figures 7A to 7C: Chromaticity diagrams of the color appearance of selected Munsell colors under sunlight (as viewed through a first filter and a second filter) (Figure 7A); spectral radiation of sunlight A graph of flux (Figure 7B); and a graph of spectral transmittance of these filters (Figure 7C). Figures 8A to 8C: Chromaticity diagrams of the color appearance of selected natural colors under sunlight (as viewed through a first filter and a second filter) (Figure 8A); spectral radiation of sunlight A graph of flux (Figure 8B); and a graph of spectral transmittance of these filters (Figure 8C). Figure 9: Flow chart of a program generated by a linearly-programmed filter. Figures 10A and 10B: Three-color diagrams showing the three-color values corresponding to a color appearance and the boundary of a constrained convex polyhedron (Figure 10A); the exploded views of the three-color values and the boundary of the constrained convex polyhedron (Figure 10B) . Figure 11: Constrained projection norms of a specific reference light, a convex chromaticity boundary, a luminosity boundary, a first viewer, a basic filter, a pre-filter and a second viewer, and Process flow chart for calculation of constraint projection limits. Figure 12A, Figure 12B: a graph of a cost function designed to enhance the red-green discrimination of Munsell colors and a graph of a cost function designed to enhance the red-green discrimination of natural colors (Figure 12A); and the corresponding design A graph of the spectral transmittance of the two filters as a function of cost (Figure 12B). Figure 13: Flow chart of the iterative filter design process considering design criteria, usage criteria, and manufacturing criteria. 14A to 14C: Chromaticity diagrams of green and yellow traffic signals and the color appearance of daylight viewed through a first filter and a second filter (Figure 14A); green and yellow traffic signals and daylight Graph of spectral radiant flux (Figure 14B); and graph of spectral transmittance of the filter (Figure 14C). 15A to 15B: a graph of two variables of a minimum spectral transmittance constraint (FIG. 15A); and a graph of spectral transmittance of a corresponding color enhancement filter that satisfies the constraint (FIG. 15B). Figures 16A and 16B: Curves of displacement of a percentage of wavelength of an interference filter with a refractive index of 1.85 as a function of the incident angle according to Snell's law (Figure 16A); and a filter providing enhanced red-green discrimination A graph of the spectral transmittance of an optical device and a graph of the spectral transmittance of a filter that additionally provides a stable color appearance to a wavelength shift range (Figure 16B). Figures 17A to 17C: Chromaticity diagrams of the color appearance of selected Munsell colors under sunlight (as viewed through a filter and as viewed by the same filters with wavelength shifts of -2.5% and -5%) (View) (Figure 17A); a graph of the spectral radiant flux of sunlight (Figure 17B); and a curve of the spectral transmittance of the filter and the filter with a wavelength shift of -2.5% and -5% Figure (Figure 17C). Figures 18A to 18C: Chromaticity diagrams of the color appearance of selected Munsell colors under sunlight (as viewed through a filter and as viewed by the same filter with a wavelength shift of -2.5%) (Figures 18A); a graph of the spectral radiant flux of sunlight (Figure 18B); and a graph of the spectral transmittance of the filter and the filter with a wavelength shift of -2.5% (Figure 18C). Figures 19A and 19B: Graphs of the blue light hazard function as a function of wavelength (Figure 19A); and the spectral transmittance of two multi-band filters that provide blue light blocking and one of the conventional cut-off filters that provide blue light blocking Graph (Figure 19B). Figures 20A and 20B: Graphs of the spectral transmission of two narrow-band selective absorption filters (Figure 20A); and the spectral transmission of two multi-band interference filters and absorption filters that provide red-green discrimination enhancement Graph of rate (Figure 20B). FIG. 21A and FIG. 21B: a graph of the spectral radiant flux of daylight and one of the primary colors of a liquid crystal display with a light-emitting diode backlight (FIG. 21A); and an enhancement of one of the display primary colors relative to the luminosity of sunlight A graph of the spectral transmittance of a luminosity filter (Figure 21B). Figure 22A, Figure 22B: Curves that protect the eyes from the spectral transmittance of one of the 532 nm radiation filters that are emitted by a frequency doubling Nd: YAG laser with an incident angle between 0 degrees and about 30 degrees Figure (Figure 22A); and a graph of the spectral transmittance of this filter (Figure 22B). Figures 23A and 23B: Graphs showing the spectral transmittance constraints of a filter that protects the eye from an 589 nm radiation emitted by a sodium illumination torch with an incident angle between 0 degrees and about 30 degrees (Figure 23A ); And a graph of the spectral transmittance of this filter (Figure 23B). Figures 24A and 24B: Schematic diagrams of a composite lens containing an interference filter and a circular polarizer that absorbs light reflected by the interference filter (Figure 24A); and the operation of the composite filter is shown A pattern (Figure 24B). Figures 25A and 25B: Curves of the spectral radiant flux of a white light formed by combining a phosphor-based white light emitting diode and a red light emitting diode (Figure 25A); and designed to enhance The spectral transmittance of the filter that provides the color appearance of the object illuminated by the light transmitted by the filter and provides the good color appearance of the object illuminated by the light reflected by the filter (Figure 25B). Figures 26A to 26C: Chromaticity diagrams of the color appearance of selected Munsell colors under the illumination of one of a combination of white LEDs and red LEDs (e.g., when the illuminant is viewed through a filter and transmitted by the illuminant) (Viewed when the filter reflects) (Figure 26A); the spectral radiant flux of the illuminant (Figure 26B); and a graph of the spectral transmittance of these filters (Figure 26C). 27A, 27B: containing a light-emitting diode, an interference filter and providing a composite beam (where the central region of the beam includes light transmitted through the filter and the annular region of the beam includes the filter (A light reflected by the filter) is a schematic diagram of a lamp assembly (FIG. 27A); and a diagram showing the operation of the lamp assembly incorporated in the filter (FIG. 27B). 28A and 28B: a schematic diagram of a composite filter containing an interference filter and an absorption filter (where the absorption filter attenuates light reflected by the interference filter) (FIG. 28A); And a diagram showing the operation of the composite filter incorporated into the glasses (FIG. 28B). Figure 29A, Figure 29B: shows the geometry of a lens in glasses relative to the eye, and two beams of light that pass through the lens at different positions and are imaged on the retina of the eye; a top view (Figure 29A) and Angle view (Figure 29B). Figures 30A and 30B: Contour maps of the effective incidence angle of light passing through a position on the surface of a lens, where the effective incidence angle corresponds to the surface normal of the lens at a position and the position passing through the position The lens is an angle between a beam of light imaged onto the retina (FIG. 30A); and a graph of the relative importance and the component of the relative importance function as a function of the effective angle of incidence (FIG. 30B). Figures 31A to 31E: Curves for designing the transmittance constraint and cost function of a filter that enhances the color discrimination of a normal observer (Figure 31A); curves for the spectral transmittance of the filter components Figure (Figure 31B); a graph of one of the filter's manufacturing specifications (Figure 31C); relative to the Farnsworth D-15 reference color as a function of the number of incident angles and relative to a selected one provided by the filter A graph of the percentage increase in the color gamut area of the natural reference color (Figure 31D); a graph of the white point displacement of the daylight provided by the filter as a function of the number of incident angles (Figure 31E). Figures 32A to 32E: Curves for designing the transmittance constraint and cost function of a filter that enhances the red-green discrimination of a normal observer (Figure 32A); the spectral transmittance of components of the filter Graph (Figure 32B); one of the manufacturing specifications of the filter (Figure 32C); the reference color relative to Farnsworth D-15 as a function of the number of incident angles and the selected color provided by the filter A graph of the percentage increase in the color gamut area of the natural reference color (Figure 32D); a graph of the white point displacement of the daylight provided by the filter as a function of the number of incident angles (Figure 32E). 33A to 33E: graphs showing the transmittance constraint and cost function of a filter designed to enhance the red-green discrimination of a normal observer and provide a stable color appearance within a range of incident angles (FIG. 33A); A graph of the spectral transmittance of the components of the filter (Fig. 33B); a graph of one of the filter's manufacturing specifications (Fig. 33C); relative to the Farnsworth D-15 reference color and Graph showing the percentage increase in the color gamut area of the selected natural reference color provided by the filter (Figure 33D); the white point displacement of the daylight provided by the filter as a function of the number of incident angles Graph (Figure 33E). 34A to 34E: graphs of the transmittance constraint and cost function of a filter used to design a filter that enhances the blue-yellow discrimination of a normal observer and provides a stable color appearance within a range of incidence angles (Figure 34A); A graph of the spectral transmittance of the components of the filter (Fig. 34B); a graph of one of the filter's manufacturing specifications (Fig. 34C); relative to the Farnsworth D-15 reference color and Graph showing the percentage increase in the color gamut area of the selected natural reference color provided by the filter (Figure 34D); the white point displacement of the daylight provided by the filter as a function of the number of incident angles Graph (Figure 34E). Figures 35A to 35E: Curves for the transmittance constraint and cost function of a filter used to design a filter that enhances the red-green discrimination of a normal observer and provides suppression of short-wavelength blue light and a stable color appearance over a range of angles of incidence Figure (Figure 35A); a graph of the spectral transmittance of the components of the filter (Figure 35B); a graph of one of the filter's manufacturing specifications (Figure 35C); relative to Farnsworth as a function of the number of incident angles Graph of D-15 reference color and the percentage increase in color gamut area relative to the selected natural reference color provided by the filter (Figure 35D); the function provided by the filter as a function of the number of incident angles Graph of white point displacement of sunlight (Figure 35E). Figure 36A to Figure 36E: Curves for designing the transmittance constraint and cost function of a filter designed to enhance the red-green discrimination for an observer with mild green weakness and provide a stable color appearance within a range of incidence angles (Figure 36A); a graph of the spectral transmittance of the components of the filter (Figure 36B); a graph of one of the filter's manufacturing specifications (Figure 36C); relative to Farnsworth D as a function of the number of incident angles -15 Reference color and graph of percentage increase in color gamut area relative to the selected natural reference color provided by the filter (Figure 36D); daylight provided by the filter as a function of the number of incident angles Graph of white point displacement (Figure 36E). Figures 37A to 37E: Curves for designing the transmittance constraint and cost function of a filter designed to enhance the red-green discrimination of an observer with a moderately weak green and provide a stable color appearance within a range of incidence angles (Figure 37A); a graph of the spectral transmittance of the components of the filter (Figure 37B); a graph of one of the filter's manufacturing specifications (Figure 37C); relative to Farnsworth D as a function of the number of incident angles -15 Reference color and a graph of the percentage increase in the color gamut area relative to the selected natural reference color provided by the filter (Figure 37D); daylight provided by the filter as a function of the number of incident angles Graph of white point displacement (Figure 37E). Figures 38A to 38E: Curves for designing the transmittance constraint and cost function of a filter designed to enhance the red-green discrimination for an observer with severe green weakness and provide a stable color appearance within a range of incidence angles ( Fig. 38A); a graph of the spectral transmittance of the components of the filter (Fig. 38B); a graph of one of the filter's manufacturing specifications (Fig. 38C); relative to Farnsworth D- 15 A graph of the reference color and the percentage increase in the color gamut area relative to the selected natural reference color provided by the filter (Figure 38D); the amount of daylight provided by the filter as a function of the number of incident angles Graph of white point displacement (Figure 38E). 39A to 39E: graphs for designing the transmittance constraint and cost function of a filter for red-green discrimination enhancement for an observer with a weak red and providing a stable color appearance within a range of incidence angles (Figures 39A); a graph of the spectral transmittance of the components of the filter (Figure 39B); a graph of one of the filter's manufacturing specifications (Figure 39C); relative to Farnsworth D-15 as a function of the number of incident angles A graph of the reference color and the percentage increase in the color gamut area relative to the selected natural reference color provided by the filter (Figure 39D); the whiteness of daylight provided by the filter as a function of the number of incident angles Graph of point displacement (Figure 39E). Figures 40A to 40E: Transmittance constraints and cost of a filter used to design a filter that enhances the luminosity of primary color light emitted by an electronic visual display to a normal observer and provides a stable color appearance within an angle of incidence range A graph of the function (Figure 40A); a graph of the spectral transmittance of the components of the filter (Figure 40B); a graph of one of the filter's manufacturing specifications (Figure 40C); a function of the number of incident angles A graph of the percentage increase in the color gamut area relative to the Farnsworth D-15 reference color and the selected natural reference color provided by the filter (Figure 40D); the filter is a function of the number of incident angles as a function Curve of white point displacement of daylight provided by the device (Figure 40E). Figure 41A to Figure 41E: Transmittance constraint and cost function of a filter used to design an optical filter that protects the eye from a 532 nm octave Nd: YAG laser and provides a stable color appearance over a range of angles of incidence Graph (Fig. 41A); Graph of spectral transmittance of components of the filter (Fig. 41B); Graph of one of the filter's manufacturing specifications (Fig. 41C); Relative Graph of the reference color at Farnsworth D-15 and the percentage increase in the color gamut area relative to the selected natural reference color provided by the filter (Figure 41D); from the filter as a function of the number of incident angles A plot of the white point displacement of daylight is provided (Figure 41E). 42A to 42E: Plots of the transmittance constraint and cost function of a filter designed to protect the eyes from a 589 nanometer sodium illumination torch and provide a stable color appearance within a range of incidence angles ( Fig. 42A); a graph of the spectral transmittance of the components of the filter (Fig. 42B); a graph of one of the filter's manufacturing specifications (Fig. 42C); relative to Farnsworth D- 15 Reference color and a graph of the percentage increase in the color gamut area relative to the selected natural reference color provided by the filter (Figure 42D); the amount of daylight provided by the filter as a function of the number of incident angles Graph of white point displacement (Figure 42E). Figure 43A and Figure 43B: Curves of the spectral transmittance constraint of a filter that blocks short-wavelength light and passes narrow-band light of 589 nanometers through one filter (Figure 43A); A graph of the filter smoothed by a smooth core (Figure 43B). Figures 44A to 44C: Chromaticity diagrams of the color appearance of selected Munsell colors under sunlight, as viewed through a blue-blocking multi-band filter and a blue-blocking cut-off filter (Figure 44A); spectrum of sunlight Radiation flux (Figure 44B); and a graph of the spectral transmittance of these filters (Figure 44C). Figure 45A to Figure 45E: Curves for designing the transmittance constraint and cost function of a filter that provides suppression of short-wavelength blue light and high light transmittance (Figure 45A); the spectral transmittance of components of the filter Graph (Figure 45B); one of the manufacturing specifications of the filter (Figure 45C); the reference color relative to the Farnsworth D-15 as a function of the number of incident angles and the selected color provided by the filter A graph of the percentage increase in the color gamut area of the natural reference color (Figure 45D); a graph of the white point displacement of the daylight provided by the filter as a function of the number of incident angles (Figure 45E). 46A and 46B: a schematic diagram of a composite filter containing an interference filter and an absorption filter (where the absorption filter attenuates light reflected by the interference filter) (FIG. 46A); And a diagram showing the operation of the composite filter incorporated into the glasses (FIG. 46B). Figure 47A to Figure 47C: Chromaticity diagrams of the color appearance of selected Munsell colors under sunlight, as viewed through a reference filter and a neodymium glass filter (Figure 47A); the spectral radiant flux of sunlight (Figure 47B); and a graph of the spectral transmittance of these filters (Figure 47C). Figures 48A to 48E: Curves for the transmittance constraint and cost function of a neodymium-containing filter designed to enhance the red-green discrimination of a normal observer and provide a stable color appearance within a range of incidence angles (Figure 48A ); A graph of the spectral transmittance of the components of the filter (Figure 48B); a graph of one of the filter's manufacturing specifications (Figure 48C); a reference to Farnsworth D-15 as a function of the number of incident angles Graph of color and percentage increase in color gamut area relative to the selected natural reference color provided by the filter (Figure 48D); white point of daylight provided by the filter as a function of the number of incident angles Graph of displacement (Figure 48E). 49A to 49E: Curves of the transmittance constraint and cost function of a neodymium-containing filter used to design to enhance the blue-yellow discrimination of a normal observer and provide a stable color appearance within a range of incidence angles (Figure 49A ); A graph of the spectral transmittance of the components of the filter (Figure 49B); a graph of one of the filter's manufacturing specifications (Figure 49C); a reference to Farnsworth D-15 as a function of the number of incident angles Graph of color and percentage increase in color gamut area relative to the selected natural reference color provided by the filter (Figure 49D); white point of daylight provided by the filter as a function of the number of incident angles Graph of displacement (Figure 49E). Figures 50A to 50E: Designed for designing a red-green discrimination enhancement for an observer with a mild green weakness and providing a stable color appearance over a range of incidence angles, one of the transmittance constraints and cost function of a neodymium-containing filter Graph (Fig. 50A); graph of the spectral transmittance of the filter components (Fig. 50B); graph of one of the filter's manufacturing specifications (Fig. 50C); relative to the number of incident angles as a function of Graph of Farnsworth D-15 reference color and percentage increase in color gamut area relative to the selected natural reference color provided by the filter (Figure 50D); provided by the filter as a function of the number of incident angles Graph of white point displacement of daylight (Figure 50E). Figure 51A to Figure 51E: Design of a transmittance constraint and cost function for a neodymium-containing filter for designing red-green discrimination enhancement for an observer with a moderate green weakness and providing a stable color appearance within a range of incidence angles Graph (Fig. 51A); graph of spectral transmittance of the filter components (Fig. 51B); graph of one of the filter's manufacturing specifications (Fig. 51C); relative to the number of incident angles as a function of Graph of Farnsworth D-15 reference color and percentage increase in color gamut area relative to the selected natural reference color provided by the filter (Figure 51D); provided by the filter as a function of the number of incident angles Graph of white point displacement of daylight (Figure 51E). 52A to 52E: Curves for designing the transmittance constraint and cost function of a neodymium-containing filter for designing red-green discrimination enhancement for an observer with severe green weakness and providing a stable color appearance within a range of incidence angles Figure (Figure 52A); a graph of the spectral transmittance of the filter's components (Figure 52B); a graph of one of the filter's manufacturing specifications (Figure 52C); relative to Farnsworth as a function of the number of incident angles Graph of D-15 reference color and percentage increase in color gamut area relative to the selected natural reference color provided by the filter (Figure 52D); the function provided by the filter as a function of the number of incident angles Graph of white point displacement of sunlight (Fig. 52E). Figures 53A to 53E: Graphs of the transmittance constraint and cost function of a neodymium-containing filter used to design a red-green discrimination enhancement for an observer with a weak red color and to provide a stable color appearance within a range of incidence angles (Figure 53A); a graph of the spectral transmittance of the components of the filter (Figure 53B); a graph of one of the filter's manufacturing specifications (Figure 53C); relative to Farnsworth D as a function of the number of incident angles -15 graph of reference color and percentage increase in color gamut area relative to the selected natural reference color provided by the filter (Figure 53D); daylight provided by the filter as a function of the number of incident angles Graph of white point displacement (Figure 53E). Figure 54A and Figure 54B: Curves of approximate spectral absorption of retinal ganglion cells (Figure 54A); a blue wideband reference filter and a multi-band filter that maximizes the photons absorbed by retinal ganglion cells Optical device graph (Figure 54B). Figures 55A to 55E: graphs of the transmittance constraint and cost function of a filter designed to enhance the optical power received by retinal ganglion cells (Figure 55A); the spectral transmittance of the filter components Graph (Figure 55B); one of the manufacturing specifications of the filter (Figure 55C); the reference color relative to the Farnsworth D-15 and the warp provided by the filter as a function of the number of incident angles A graph of the percentage increase in the color gamut area of the selected natural reference color (Figure 55D); a graph of the white point displacement of the daylight provided by the filter as a function of the number of incident angles (Figure 55E). 56A to 56E: graphs showing the transmittance constraint and cost function of a filter designed to enhance the optical power absorbed by retinal ganglion cells and provide a stable color appearance within a range of angles of incidence (Figure 56A) ; The graph of the spectral transmittance of the components of the filter (Figure 56B); the graph of one of the filter's manufacturing specifications (Figure 56C); the reference color relative to Farnsworth D-15 as a function of the number of incident angles And a graph of the percentage increase in the color gamut area of the selected natural reference color provided by the filter (Figure 56D); white point displacement of daylight provided by the filter as a function of the number of incident angles Graph (Figure 56E). 57A to 57E: graphs of the transmittance constraint and cost function of a neodymium-containing filter used to design an enhancement of the optical power received by retinal ganglion cells and provide a stable color appearance within a range of incidence angles 57A); a graph of the spectral transmittance of the components of the filter (Figure 57B); a graph of one of the filter's manufacturing specifications (Figure 57C); relative to Farnsworth D-15 as a function of the number of incident angles Graph of reference color and percentage increase in color gamut area relative to the selected natural reference color provided by the filter (Figure 57D); white of daylight provided by the filter as a function of the number of incident angles Graph of point displacement (Figure 57E). FIG. 58: An exemplary program flow diagram for describing and demonstrating the syntax and structure of the program flow diagram (as they are presented in other figures). Figure 59A, Figure 59B: Tables of the evaluated performance criteria of the filters of Figures 31A to 31E for enhancing the color discrimination of a normal observer (Figure 59A); transmittance and cost functions of filter components Table of transmittance constraints and filter manufacturing specifications (Figure 59B). Figures 60A and 60B: Tables of the evaluated performance criteria of the filters of Figures 32A to 32E for enhancing the red-green discrimination of a normal observer (Figure 60A); transmittance and cost of filter components Table of functions, transmittance constraints, and filter manufacturing specifications (Figure 60B). Figure 61A, Figure 61B: Tables of the evaluated performance criteria of the filters of Figures 33A to 33E for enhancing the red-green discrimination of a normal observer and providing a stable color appearance over a range of incident angles (Figure 61A ); A table of the transmittance, cost function, transmittance constraints, and manufacturing specifications of the filter assembly (Figure 61B). Figures 62A, 62B: Tables of the evaluated performance criteria of the filters of Figures 34A to 34E for enhancing the blue-yellow discrimination of a normal observer and providing a stable color appearance within a range of incident angles (Figure 62A ); A table of the transmittance, cost function, transmittance constraints, and manufacturing specifications of the filter assembly (Figure 62B). Figures 63A and 63B: The evaluated effectiveness of the filters of Figures 35A to 35E for enhancing the red-green discrimination of a normal observer and providing suppression of short-wavelength blue light and stable color appearance over a range of angles of incidence Table of criteria (Fig. 63A); table of transmittance, cost function, transmittance constraints, and manufacturing specifications of the filter assembly (Fig. 63B). Figures 64A, 64B: Evaluated performance criteria for the filters of Figures 36A to 36E for red-green discrimination enhancement for an observer with mild green and weak and providing a stable color appearance over a range of incident angles Table (Fig. 64A); a table of the transmittance, cost function, transmittance constraints, and manufacturing specifications of the filter assembly (Fig. 64B). Figures 65A and 65B: Evaluated performance criteria for the filters of Figures 37A to 37E for red-green discrimination enhancement for an observer with moderate green weakness and providing a stable color appearance over a range of incident angles Table (Fig. 65A); a table of the transmittance, cost function, transmittance constraints, and manufacturing specifications of the filter assembly (Fig. 65B). Figure 66A, Figure 66B: Evaluated performance criteria for the filters of Figures 38A to 38E for red-green discrimination enhancement for an observer with severe green weakness and providing a stable color appearance over a range of incident angles Table (Figure 66A); a table of the transmittance, cost function, transmittance constraints, and manufacturing specifications of the filter assembly (Figure 66B). Fig. 67A, Fig. 67B: Tables for the evaluated performance criteria of the filters of Figs. 39A to 39E for enhancing the red-green discrimination of an observer with a weak red and providing a stable color appearance within a range of incidence angles (Fig. 67A); Table of transmittance, cost function, transmittance constraint, and manufacturing specifications of the filter assembly (Fig. 67B). Figures 68A and 68B: Processes of the filters of Figures 40A to 40E for enhancing the luminosity of primary color light emitted by an electronic visual display to a normal observer and providing a stable color appearance within a range of incident angles Table of evaluated performance criteria (Figure 68A); table of transmittance, cost function, transmittance constraints, and manufacturing specifications of the filter assembly (Figure 68B). Figures 69A and 69B: Evaluation of the filters of Figures 41A to 41E used to protect the eyes from a 532 nm multiplier Nd: YAG laser and provide a stable color appearance over a range of incident angles Table of performance criteria (Figure 69A); table of the transmittance, cost function, transmittance constraints, and manufacturing specifications of the filter assembly (Figure 69B). Figures 70A and 70B: Evaluation of the performance criteria of the filters of Figures 42A to 42E for protecting the eyes from a 589 nanometer sodium illumination torch and providing a stable color appearance over a range of incident angles Table (Fig. 70A); a table of the transmittance, cost function, transmittance constraints, and manufacturing specifications of the filter assembly (Fig. 70B). Figure 71A, Figure 71B: Tables of the evaluated performance criteria of the filters of Figures 45A to 45E for providing the suppression of short-wavelength blue light and high light transmittance (Figure 71A); transmittance and cost of filter components Table of functions, transmittance constraints, and filter manufacturing specifications (Figure 71B). Figures 72A and 72B: Tables of the evaluated performance criteria for neodymium-containing filters of Figs. 48A to 48E for enhancing the red-green discrimination of a normal observer and providing a stable color appearance within a range of incidence angles ( Fig. 72A); Table of transmittance, cost function, transmittance constraint, and manufacturing specifications of the filter assembly (Fig. 72B). Figures 73A and 73B: Tables of the evaluated performance criteria for neodymium-containing filters of Figures 49A to 49E for enhancing the blue-yellow discrimination of a normal observer and providing a stable color appearance within a range of incident angles ( Fig. 73A); Table of transmittance, cost function, transmittance constraint, and manufacturing specifications of the filter assembly (Fig. 73B). Figures 74A, 74B: Evaluation of red-green discrimination for an observer with a mild green weakness and providing a stable color appearance over a range of incidence angles. Table of performance criteria (Figure 74A); table of transmittance, cost function, transmittance constraints, and manufacturing specifications of the filter assembly (Figure 74B). Figures 75A and 75B: Evaluations of neodymium-containing filters of Figures 51A to 51E, which are used to enhance the red-green discrimination of an observer with a moderate green weakness and provide a stable color appearance over a range of incident angles Table of performance criteria (Figure 75A); table of transmittance, cost function, transmittance constraints, and filter manufacturing specifications for filter components (Figure 75B). Figure 76A, Figure 76B: Red-green discrimination enhancement for an observer with severe green weakness and providing a stable color appearance within a range of incident angles Figure 52A to Figure 52E The evaluated effectiveness of neodymium-containing filters A table of criteria (Figure 76A); a table of the transmittance, cost function, transmittance constraints, and manufacturing specifications of the filter assembly (Figure 76B). Figure 77A, Figure 77B: Evaluated performance criteria for neodymium-containing filters of Figures 53A to 53E for enhanced red-green discrimination for an observer with a weak red color and providing a stable color appearance over a range of incident angles Table (Fig. 77A); table for the transmittance, cost function, transmittance constraints, and manufacturing specifications of the filter assembly (Fig. 77B). Figure 78A, Figure 78B: Tables of the evaluated performance criteria for the three-pass filter of Figures 55A to 55E for enhancing the optical power received by retinal ganglion cells (Figure 78A); Table of transmittance, cost function, transmittance constraints, and filter manufacturing specifications (Figure 78B). Figure 79A, Figure 79B: Evaluated performance criteria for the four-pass filter of Figures 56A to 56E for enhancing the light power received by retinal ganglion cells and providing a stable color appearance over a range of angles of incidence Table (Figure 79A); a table of the transmittance, cost function, transmittance constraints, and manufacturing specifications of the filter assembly (Figure 79B). Figure 80A, Figure 80B: Evaluated efficacy of neodymium-containing three-pass band filters for enhancing the power of light received by retinal ganglion cells and providing a stable color appearance over a range of angles of incidence Figures 57A to 57E Table of criteria (Figure 80A); table of transmittance, cost function, transmittance constraints, and manufacturing specifications of the filter assembly (Figure 80B).

Claims (10)

一種多頻帶光學濾光器,其經組態以阻隔約380奈米至約450奈米之間之藍光之透射並且維持正常色彩辨別,該濾光器包括:劃分可見光譜之複數個通帶及阻帶,其等包含與兩個或兩個以上阻帶交錯之至少第一、第二、及第三通帶;其中各通帶具有一中心、一寬度、等於該中心減去該寬度之一半之一下頻帶邊界、等於該中心加上該寬度之一半之一上頻帶邊界及一平均透射率;各阻帶具有一中心、一寬度、等於該中心減去該寬度之一半之一下頻帶邊界、等於該中心加上該寬度之一半之一上頻帶邊界及一平均透射率;各交錯阻帶之該下頻帶邊界與一相鄰通帶之該上頻帶邊界相同;各交錯阻帶之該上頻帶邊界與一相鄰通帶之該下頻帶邊界相同;各通帶中心位於約450奈米至約700奈米之間,及各通帶寬度介於約10奈米至約110奈米之間;各阻帶中心位於約410奈米至約690奈米之間,及各阻帶寬度介於約10奈米至約80奈米之間;該等交錯阻帶之各者具有小於一相鄰通帶之平均透射率之一半之一平均透射率;該第一通帶具有位於約450奈米至約470奈米之間之一中心及約10奈米至約40奈米之間之一寬度;該第二通帶具有位於約545奈米至約575奈米之間之一中心及約30奈米至約60奈米之間之一寬度;該第三通帶具有位於約630奈米至約670奈米之間之一中心及約40奈米至約90奈米之間之一寬度;該等交錯阻帶之各者具有至少約20奈米之一寬度及小於一相鄰通帶之平均透射率之約四分之一之一平均透射率;及該濾光器在約380奈米至約440奈米之間之光譜透射率小於約10%。A multi-band optical filter configured to block the transmission of blue light between about 380 nanometers and about 450 nanometers and maintain normal color discrimination. The filter includes: a plurality of passbands that divide the visible spectrum and Stopbands, which include at least first, second, and third passbands interleaved with two or more stopbands; wherein each passband has a center, a width equal to the center minus one-half of the width One lower-band boundary, equal to the center plus one-half the upper-band boundary, and an average transmittance; each stopband has a center, one width, equal to the center minus one-half of the width, and a lower-band boundary equal to The center plus one half of the width of the upper frequency band boundary and an average transmittance; the lower frequency band boundary of each interleaved stopband is the same as the upper frequency band boundary of an adjacent passband; the upper frequency band boundary of each interleaved stopband The lower frequency band boundary is the same as that of an adjacent passband; the center of each passband is between about 450 nanometers and about 700 nanometers, and the width of each passband is between about 10 nanometers and about 110 nanometers; each The stopband center is located at about 410 nm to Between 690 nanometers, and each stopband width is between about 10 nanometers and about 80 nanometers; each of these interleaved stopbands has an average transmission less than one-half of the average transmission of an adjacent passband Rate; the first passband has a center between about 450 nanometers and about 470 nanometers and a width between about 10 nanometers and about 40 nanometers; the second passband has a width of about 545 nanometers To a center between about 575 nanometers and a width between about 30 nanometers to about 60 nanometers; the third passband has a center between about 630 nanometers to about 670 nanometers and about 40 A width between nanometers and about 90 nanometers; each of the staggered stopbands has a width of at least about 20 nanometers and an average of less than about a quarter of the average transmittance of an adjacent passband Transmittance; and the spectral transmittance of the filter between about 380 nanometers and about 440 nanometers is less than about 10%. 如請求項1之多頻帶光學濾光器,其中該第一通帶有位於約455奈米至約465奈米之間之一中心。The multi-band optical filter of claim 1, wherein the first passband is located at a center between about 455 nm and about 465 nm. 如請求項1之多頻帶光學濾光器,其中該濾光器在約380奈米至約450奈米之間之光譜透射率小於約10%。The multi-band optical filter of claim 1, wherein the spectral transmittance of the filter between about 380 nm and about 450 nm is less than about 10%. 如請求項1之多頻帶光學濾光器,其中該濾光器在約380奈米至約460奈米之間之光譜透射率小於約10%。The multi-band optical filter of claim 1, wherein the spectral transmission of the filter between about 380 nm and about 460 nm is less than about 10%. 如請求項1之多頻帶光學濾光器,其中該濾光器在約380奈米至約440奈米之間之光譜透射率小於約1%。The multi-band optical filter of claim 1, wherein the spectral transmission of the filter between about 380 nm and about 440 nm is less than about 1%. 如請求項1之多頻帶光學濾光器,其中該濾光器在約380奈米至約450奈米之間之光譜透射率小於約1%。The multi-band optical filter of claim 1, wherein the spectral transmission of the filter between about 380 nm and about 450 nm is less than about 1%. 如請求項1之多頻帶光學濾光器,其中該濾光器在約380奈米至約460奈米之間之光譜透射率小於約1%。The multi-band optical filter of claim 1, wherein the spectral transmission of the filter between about 380 nm and about 460 nm is less than about 1%. 如請求項1至7中之任一項之多頻帶光學濾光器,其中該等交錯阻帶之各者具有大於一相鄰通帶之平均透射率之約六分之一之一平均透射率。The multi-band optical filter of any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein each of the interleaved stop bands has an average transmittance greater than about one sixth of the average transmittance of an adjacent passband. . 如請求項1之多頻帶光學濾光器,其中該第一通帶具有位於約465奈米處之一中心及約15奈米之一寬度;該第二通帶具有位於約565奈米處之一中心及約45奈米之一寬度;該第三通帶具有位於約660奈米處之一中心及約70奈米之一寬度;該等交錯阻帶之各者具有一相鄰通帶之平均透射率之約四分之一之一平均透射率;及該濾光器在約380奈米至約450奈米之間之光譜透射率小於約1%。The multi-band optical filter of claim 1, wherein the first passband has a center located at about 465 nanometers and a width of about 15 nm; the second passband has a wavelength of about 565 nanometers. A center and a width of about 45 nanometers; the third passband has a center at about 660 nanometers and a width of about 70 nanometers; each of the interleaved stopbands has an adjacent passband The average transmittance is about a quarter of the average transmittance; and the spectral transmittance of the filter between about 380 nanometers and about 450 nanometers is less than about 1%. 如請求項9之多頻帶光學濾光器,其中該濾光器包括一干涉濾光器及一吸收濾光器且該吸收濾光器包括一金屬衰減塗層。The multi-band optical filter of claim 9, wherein the filter includes an interference filter and an absorption filter and the absorption filter includes a metal attenuation coating.
TW106123541A 2012-03-05 2013-03-04 Multi-band color vision filters and method by lp-optimization TWI664454B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US201261606920P 2012-03-05 2012-03-05
US61/606,920 2012-03-05

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW201734512A TW201734512A (en) 2017-10-01
TWI664454B true TWI664454B (en) 2019-07-01

Family

ID=49771410

Family Applications (3)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW108118053A TWI813693B (en) 2012-03-05 2013-03-04 Multi-band color vision filters and method by lp-optimization
TW106123541A TWI664454B (en) 2012-03-05 2013-03-04 Multi-band color vision filters and method by lp-optimization
TW102107538A TWI598639B (en) 2012-03-05 2013-03-04 Multi-band color vision filters and method by lp-optimization

Family Applications Before (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW108118053A TWI813693B (en) 2012-03-05 2013-03-04 Multi-band color vision filters and method by lp-optimization

Family Applications After (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW102107538A TWI598639B (en) 2012-03-05 2013-03-04 Multi-band color vision filters and method by lp-optimization

Country Status (1)

Country Link
TW (3) TWI813693B (en)

Families Citing this family (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP3491433A4 (en) * 2016-07-28 2020-03-25 Ronald S. Ace Spectrally sculpted multiple narrowband filtration for improved human vision
US10582589B2 (en) 2018-06-22 2020-03-03 Lumileds Llc Lighting system with integrated sensor
WO2019246431A1 (en) * 2018-06-22 2019-12-26 Lumileds Llc Lighting system with integrated sensor
TWI673618B (en) * 2018-06-27 2019-10-01 英業達股份有限公司 Light guide assisted design method
TWI696961B (en) * 2018-12-12 2020-06-21 財團法人工業技術研究院 Deep neural networks (dnn) hardware accelerator and operation method thereof
CN111880319A (en) * 2020-08-18 2020-11-03 董述萍 Thomson scattering diagnostic system with atomic notch filter

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5774202A (en) * 1993-08-18 1998-06-30 Coloryte Hungary Optikai Kutato, Fejleszto Es Gyarto Reszvenytarsasag Method and optical means for improving or modifying color vision and method for making said optical means
US6149270A (en) * 1999-10-18 2000-11-21 Hayashi; Masashi Optical lenses for correcting color vision
EP1986024A1 (en) * 2006-02-17 2008-10-29 National University Corporation Toyohashi University of Technology Method for forming functional spectrum filter

Family Cites Families (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US7583863B2 (en) * 2004-05-10 2009-09-01 Avago Technologies General Ip (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. Method and system for wavelength-dependent imaging and detection using a hybrid filter

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5774202A (en) * 1993-08-18 1998-06-30 Coloryte Hungary Optikai Kutato, Fejleszto Es Gyarto Reszvenytarsasag Method and optical means for improving or modifying color vision and method for making said optical means
US6149270A (en) * 1999-10-18 2000-11-21 Hayashi; Masashi Optical lenses for correcting color vision
EP1986024A1 (en) * 2006-02-17 2008-10-29 National University Corporation Toyohashi University of Technology Method for forming functional spectrum filter

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
TWI813693B (en) 2023-09-01
TW201734512A (en) 2017-10-01
TWI598639B (en) 2017-09-11
TW201932884A (en) 2019-08-16
TW201341860A (en) 2013-10-16

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
AU2022202763B2 (en) Multi-band color vision filters and method by LP-optimization
JP7041712B2 (en) An optical filter that affects color vision in the desired manner, and how to design it by nonlinear optimization.
TWI664454B (en) Multi-band color vision filters and method by lp-optimization
CN108132545B (en) High-transmittance blue-light-proof lens, glasses, equipment and manufacturing method thereof